20 Pajero Sport (Eng)

Foreword Throughout this owner’s manual the words WARNING and
E09200108175 CAUTION appear. These serve as reminders to be especially care-

Thank you for selecting a MITSUBISHI MOTORS product as your ful. Failure to follow instructions could result in personal injury or
new vehicle. damage to your vehicle.
This owner’s manual will add to your understanding and full enjoy-
ment of the many fine features of this vehicle.
Indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if
It contains information prepared to acquaint you with the proper way instructions are not followed.
to operate and maintain your vehicle for the utmost in driving pleasure.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS CORPORATION reserves the right to make

changes in design and specifications and/or to make additions to or Means hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor per-
improvements in this product without obligation to install them on sonal injury or damage to your vehicle.
products previously manufactured. You will see another important symbol:
It is an absolute requirement for the driver to strictly observe all laws
and regulations concerning vehicles.
Gives helpful information.
This owner’s manual has been written in compliance with such laws
and regulations, but some of the contents may become contradictory *: Indicates optional equipment.
with later amendment of the laws and regulations. It may differ according to the sales classification; refer to
If your vehicle is equipped with any locally produced part, the operat- the sales catalogue.
ing procedure, specifications, maintenance intervals and other contents Abbreviations used in this owner’s manual:
found in this owner’s manual may not sometimes apply to it. M/T: Manual Transmission
A/T: Automatic Transmission
Please leave this owner’s manual in this vehicle at time of resale. The
The symbol used on the vehicles:
next owner will appreciate having access to the information contained
in this owner’s manual. : See owner’s manual
©2019 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation

Table of contents
Overview/Quick guide 1
General information 2
Locking and unlocking 3
Seat and seat belts 4
Instruments and controls 5
Starting and driving 6
For pleasant driving 7
For emergencies 8
Vehicle care 9
Maintenance 10
Specifications 11
Instruments and Controls (Driver’s area)
1 Instruments and Controls (Driver’s area)

E08500102964
Combination headlamps and dipper switch P.5-79

Turn-signal lever P.5-81
Active Cornering Lights (ACL) P.5-82
Front fog lamp switch P.5-83
Instruments - Type A* P.5-2 Headlamp washer switch* P.5-87
Instruments - Type B* P.5-17
Engine switch P.6-14
Shift paddles P.6-23
Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view
mirrors P.6-12
Wiper and washer switch P.5-84
Rear wiper and washer switch P.5-86 Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM)
and Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation
System (UMS) ON/OFF switch* P.6-88
Central door lock switch P.3-15
Key slot P.6-19

Lock switch P.3-33
Electric window control

switch P.3-32
Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch P.6-61

Fuel tank filler door release lever P.2-2
Sonar switch* P.6-103, 6-107
Bonnet release lever P.10-3
1-1 Overview/Quick guide

Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls 1

E08500102977
Front passenger’s airbag indicator P.4-31 8 inch colour LCD meter switches* P.5-21
Smartphone-link Display Audio (SDA)*, Multi Around Monitor operation switch* P.6-113
Steering wheel height and reach
Smartphone-link Display Audio (SDA) navigation system* Audio remote control switches
adjustment lever P.6-10
Refer to the separate owner’s manual Refer to the separate owner’s manual
Inside electric tailgate switch* P.3-21 Cruise control switch* P.6-63, 6-73
Hazard warning flasher switch P. 5-83 Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)*
Centre ventilators P.7-3 P.6-69
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - Multi Around Monitor operation switch*
airbag (for front passenger’s seat) P.6-113
P.4-28, 4-32 Supplemental restraint system (SRS) -
Air conditioning P.7-2
airbag (for driver’s seat) P.4-28, 4-32
Horn switch P.5-89
Side ventilators P.7-3
Multi information display
Fuses P.10-16 switch* P.5-4
Glove box P.7-22 Adaptive Cruise control
System (ACC)* P.6-69
Rear fan switch P.7-11 Rear window demister switch P.5-88
HDMI terminal* P.7-15
Selector lever P.6-21
USB input terminal* P.7-14
Rear differential lock switch* P.6-36
Accessory socket P.7-16 Floor console box P.7-22
Off Road mode selector* P.6-34 220 V AC power outlet P.7-17

Hill Descent USB port (for charging) P.7-18
Electric parking brake
Control switch*
switch P.6-4
P.6-55
Brake auto hold switch
P.6-50
Super Select 4WD II*
P.6-27 Cup holder P.7-24
Overview/Quick guide 1-2

Interior
1 Interior
E08500202398
Front room & map lamps P.7-19, 7-20, 10-22 Seat belts P.4-14
Sunglasses holder P.7-22, 7-23 Adjustable seat belt anchor P.4-16
Hands-free microphone* [for Smartphone-Link Display Audio (SDA), Rear entertainment system*
Refer to the separate owner’s manual] Refer to the separate owner’s manual
Inside rear-view mirror P.6-11
Sun visors P.7-15 Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-
Card holder P.7-15 curtain airbag* P.4-28, 4-35
Vanity mirror P.7-16 Rear personal lamps P.7-19, 7-21, 10-22
Rear cooler P.7-10
Supplemental restraint system
(SRS) -driver’s knee airbag* Tether anchorage locations
P.4-28, 4-33 P.4-26
Luggage compartment lamp
Head restraints P.4-7 P.7-19, 7-21, 10-22
Accessory socket P.7-16
Front seats P.4-4
Cup holder P.7-25
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
-side airbag (for front seat)* P.4-28,
4-35
Convenient hook P.7-25 Door courtesy lamps P.7-19,
7-21
Seatback pocket P.7-22, 7-23
Armrest P.4-5
Second seats P.4-5
Cup holder P.7-24
Child restraint system with ISOFIX
mountings P.4-26 Third seats P.4-6
Lower anchorage location P.4-26

Luggage area
Luggage area 1
E08500301611
Tools P.8-6 Jack P.8-6
Luggage hooks P.7-26
Tyre repair kit P.8-7

Luggage floor boxes P.7-22, 7-23

Exterior - front
1 Exterior - front
E08500403456
Wiper and washers P.5-84, 10-14
Bonnet P.10-3
Engine compartment P.10-2, 11-6 Fuel tank filler door P.2-2
Outside rear-view mirrors P.6-12
Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) Side-view camera* P.6-113
sensor* P.6-69
Forward Collision Mitigation System Side turn-signal lamps P.5-81, 10-21
(FCM) sensor* P.6-83
Headlamp washer* P.5-87
Locking and unlocking P.3-14, 3-15
Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation Keyless entry system P.3-3
System sensor* P.6-94 Keyless operation system P.3-6
Sensor system sensor* P.6-105 Security alarm system P.3-29
Front-view camera* P.6-113
Headlamps, high/low beam

P. 5-79, 10-21 Front turn-signal lamps
P.5-81, 10-21, 10-22
Position lamps Active Cornering Lights

P.5-79, 10-21 (ACL) P.5-82, 10-21
Daytime running lamps
P.5-80, 10-21
Front fog lamps
P.5-83, 10-21

Exterior - rear
Exterior - rear 1
E08500403469
High-mounted stop lamp P.10-21

Rear turn-signal lamps P.5-81, 10-21, 10-23
Glass antenna* P.7-13 Tail lamps P.5-79, 10-21
Blind Spot Warning lamp*

P.6-95
Rear wiper and washer P.5-86
Tailgate P.3-17
Rear-view camera*
P.6-110, 6-113 Stop lamps P.10-21
Multi Around Monitor*
P.6-113 Reversing lamps P.10-21
Licence plate lamp
P.5-79, 10-21, 10-24 Tyre inflation pressures P.10-11
Tyre repair kit P.8-7
Changing tyres P.8-14
Tyre rotation P.10-12
Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System sensor* P.6-94 Snow tyres P.10-13
Reversing sensor system sensor* P.6-102 Tyre chains P.10-13
Sensor system sensor* P.6-105 Blind Spot Warning Sensor* P.6-95

Quick guide
Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page lock/unlock switch, and approximately
1 Quick guide 3-3. 150 cm from the tailgate handle.
E08500500010
The outside rear-view mirrors can be

Driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock
Lock and unlock the doors retracted and extended automatically if you
switches
E08500602116 press the LOCK switch (1) or UNLOCK
switch (2).
Keyless entry system Refer to “Operation of the outside rear-
view mirrors” on page 3-4.
Press the key switch, and all doors and the
tailgate will be locked or unlocked as desired. On vehicle with the electric tailgate, the tail-
It is also possible to operate the outside rear- gate can be opened automatically if you press
view mirrors. the electric tailgate switch (3) after unlocking
The key switch will operate within approxi- the tailgate.
mately 4 m from the vehicle. Tailgate switches (Vehicles without electric tailgate)
Refer to “Operating the electric tailgate
using the keyless operation key” on page
Type 1 Type 2 3-20
Keyless operation system
When you are carrying the keyless operation

key and within the operating range, if you
press the driver’s or front passenger’s door
switch (A), the tailgate LOCK switch (B)
(when locking) or pull the tailgate handle
1- LOCK switch lever (C), tailgate open switch (D) (when
2- UNLOCK switch unlocking), the doors and the tailgate are
3- Electric tailgate switch locked/unlocked.
4- Indicator lamp The operating range is approximately 70 cm
from the driver’s or front passenger’s door

Quick guide
Tailgate switches (Vehicles with electric tailgate) Around the driver’s seat 1-Wiper and washer switch 1
E08500802222
Refer to “keyless operation system” on

page 3-6.
MIST- Misting function
The wipers will operate once.
OFF- Off
AUTO- Auto-wiper control
Rain sensor
The wipers will automatically
operate depending on the degree
of wetness on the windscreen.
LO- Slow
HI- Fast
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the

windscreen by pulling the lever towards you.
Refer to “Wiper and washer switch” on

page 5-84.

Quick guide
1 2-Steering wheel height and reach 3-Combination headlamps 3-Turn-signal lever

adjustment
Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps. The turn-signal lamps flash when the lever is
1. Release the lever while holding the steer- operated.
ing wheel up.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
3. Securely lock the steering wheel by pull-
ing the lever fully upward.
OFF All lamps off 1- Turn-signals

With the operation mode is in ON, 2- Lane-change signals
head-lamps, position, tail, licence
plate and instrument panel lamps Refer to “Turn-signal lever” on page 5-81.
turn on and off automatically in
A- Locked AUTO
accordance with outside light
B- Release level. All lamps turn off automati-
cally when the operation mode is
Refer to “Steering wheel height and reach put in OFF.
adjustment” on page 6-10. Position, tail, licence plate and
instrument panel lamps on
Headlamps and other lamps go on
Refer to “Combination headlamps and

dipper switch” on page 5-79.

Quick guide
4-Engine switch 5-Electric remote-controlled out- 6-Fuel tank filler door release 1
side rear-view mirrors lever
If you are carrying the keyless operation key,
you can start the engine. If you press the To adjust the mirror position Open the fuel tank filler door.
engine switch without depressing the brake The fuel tank filler is located on the rear left
pedal, you can change the operation mode in side of your vehicle.
the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF.
L- Left outside mirror adjustment

R- Right outside mirror adjustment
1- Up
2- Down Refer to “Filling the fuel tank” on page
OFF- The indicator lamp (A) on the
3- Right 2-2.
engine switch turns off.
4- Left
ACC- The indicator lamp on the engine
5- Mirror retractor switch
switch illuminates orange.
ON- The indicator lamp on the engine
switch illuminates green. Refer to “Outside rear-view mirrors” on
page 6-12.
Refer to “Engine switch” on page 6-14.

Quick guide
1 7-Electric window control 8-Speed automatic transmission WARNING

with sports mode  If the lock button is always pushed to
Press the switch down for opening the win- E08501001514
operate the selector lever, the lever may be
dow, and pull the switch for closing. accidentally shifted into the “P” (PARK)
or “R” (REVERSE) position. Be sure not
Selector lever operation to push the lock button when performing
the operations indicated by in the illus-
The transmission selects an optimum gear tration.
automatically, depending on the speed of the
vehicle and the position of the accelerator
pedal. Selector lever positions
“P” PARK
This position locks the transmission to pre-

vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can
1- Driver’s door window
be started in this position.
2- Front passenger’s door window
3- Rear left door window
4- Rear right door window “R” REVERSE
5- Lock switch
This position is to back up.
AHA108832
Lock switch “N” NEUTRAL

The lock button must be pushed while
If you push the switch (5), the passenger’s the brake pedal is depressed to move At this position the transmission is disen-
switches cannot be operated. To cancel, push the selector lever. gaged.
it once again. The lock button must be pushed to
move the selector lever. “D” DRIVE
Refer to “Electric window control” on
page 3-32. The lock button need not be pushed to This position is for normal driving.
move the selector lever.

Quick guide
Refer to “8-speed automatic transmission
with sports mode” on page 6-20. 1
4-wheel drive operation*

E08502000110
Road conditions
Driving mode Dry paved road Packed snow Deep snow or
Gravel road Sandy road Rocky road
and highway road muddy road
Super Select 4WD II
2H or 4H 4H 4HLc or 4LLc 4HLc or 4LLc 4HLc or 4LLc 4HLc or 4LLc
( P.6-27)
Off Road mode-selector
− − GRAVEL MUD/SNOW SAND ROCK
( P.6-34)
Rear differential lock
− − − Active* Active* Active*
( P.6-36)
*:The Off Road mode and the rear differential lock cannot be used at the same time. When the rear differential lock is set to ON, the Off Road
mode turns off. In addition, when the rear differential lock is ON, the Off Road mode will be deactivated even if the Off Road mode-selector
is operated.
CAUTION
 When driving on the off-road, confirm the conditions of the road surface and the landscape, and drive after confirming that the components of the suspen-
sion and the bottom of the front and rear bumper do not contact with the road surface. (Refer to “Vehicle dimensions” on page 11-3)

Quick guide
4- Forward Collision Mitigation System
1 Multi information display (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration
(Type A) 8 inch colour LCD Mitigation System (UMS) OFF indica-
meter (Type B) tor display*  P.6-83, 6-90
E08501201587 5- Cruise control indicator display*
Always stop the vehicle in a safe place before  P.6-63
operating. 6- Adaptive Cruise Control System
The following information is included on the (ACC) display*  P.6-69
multi information display: odometer, tripme- 7- “ ” or “ ” mark indicator  P.5-6
ter, average fuel consumption etc. 8- Information screen  P.5-5
9- Selector lever position display (vehi-
Type A
cles with A/T)  P.6-22
10- Engine coolant temperature display
 P.5-7
11- Odometer  P.5-8
12- Fuel remaining display  P.5-7
13- Outside temperature display
 P.5-8
Refer to “Multi information display” on

page 5-3.
1- Off Road mode indicator display*

 P.6-35
2- Drive mode indicator display*
 P.6-27
3- mark display  P.5-6

Quick guide
Type B 1
Type 1
Standard mode
1-Digital clock display (vehicles equipped 6-Sub unit speedometer  P.5-39 12-Brake auto hold standby indicator lamp
with the Smartphone-link Display Audio 7- mark display  P.5-43 (white)  P.6-51
(SDA) or Smartphone-link Display 8-Hill Descent Control indicator lamp* Brake auto hold indicator lamp (green)
Audio (SDA) navigation system. Refer  P.6-55  P.6-52
to the separate owner’s manual) 9-Rear differential lock indicator lamp* 13-Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator
2-High-beam indicator lamp  P.5-74  P.6-36 lamp*  P.6-98
3-Forward Collision Mitigation System 10-Drive mode indicator display* 14-Small information screen  P.5-34
(FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration  P.6-27 Interrupt display screen  P.5-42
Mitigation System (UMS) OFF indicator 11-Off Road mode indicator display*
display*  P.6-83, 6-90  P.6-35
4-Analog gauge speedometer
5-Digital speedometer

Quick guide
15-Driving support display
1 - Cruise control indicator display*
 P.6-63
- Adaptive Cruise Control System
(ACC) display*  P.6-69
- Blind Spot Warning display*  P.6-95
16-Selector lever position display
 P.6-22
17-Odometer  P.5-44
18-Outside temperature display  P.5-43
19-Analog gauge tachometer
The tachometer indicates the engine
speed (r/min). The tachometer can help
you obtain more economical driving and
also warns you of excessive engine
speeds (Red zone).

Quick guide
Multi-mode
1
1-Digital clock display (vehicles equipped 7-Hill Descent Control indicator lamp* 14-Multi information screen  P.5-35
with the Smartphone-link Display Audio  P.6-55 Interrupt display screen  P.5-42
(SDA) or Smartphone-link Display 8-Rear differential lock indicator lamp* 15-Selector lever position display
to the separate owner’s manual) 9-Drive mode indicator display* 16-Odometer  P.5-44
2-High-beam indicator lamp  P.5-74  P.6-27 17-Driving support display
3-Forward Collision Mitigation System 10-Off Road mode indicator display* - Cruise control indicator display*
(FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration  P.6-35  P.6-63
Mitigation System (UMS) OFF indicator 11-Sub unit speedometer  P.5-39 - Adaptive Cruise Control System
display*  P.6-83, 6-90 12-Brake auto hold standby indicator lamp (ACC) display*  P.6-69
4-Analog gauge speedometer (white)  P.6-51 - Blind Spot Warning display*
5-Digital speedometer Brake auto hold indicator lamp (green)  P.6-95
6- mark display  P.5-43  P.6-52 18-Outside temperature display  P.5-43
13-Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator
lamp*  P.6-98

Quick guide
1 Type 2
Standard mode
1-Digital clock display (vehicles equipped 4-Analog gauge tachometer 10-Drive mode indicator display*
with the Smartphone-link Display Audio The tachometer indicates the engine  P.6-27
(SDA) or Smartphone-link Display speed (r/min). The tachometer can help 11-Off Road mode indicator display*
Audio (SDA) navigation system. Refer you obtain more economical driving and  P.6-35
to the separate owner’s manual) also warns you of excessive engine 12-Brake auto hold standby indicator lamp
2-High-beam indicator lamp  P.5-74 speeds (Red zone). (white)  P.6-51
3-Forward Collision Mitigation System 5-Digital speedometer Brake auto hold indicator lamp (green)
(FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration 6-Sub unit speedometer  P.5-39  P.6-52
Mitigation System (UMS) OFF indicator 7- mark display  P.5-43 13-Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator
display*  P.6-83, 6-90 8-Hill Descent Control indicator lamp* lamp*  P.6-98
 P.6-55 14-Small information screen  P.5-34
9-Rear differential lock indicator lamp* Interrupt display screen  P.5-42
 P.6-36
Quick guide
- Cruise control indicator display*
1
 P.6-63
- Blind Spot Warning display*
 P.6-95
 P.6-22
19-Instant fuel consumption indicator

Quick guide
1 Multi-mode
1-Digital clock display (vehicles equipped 4-Analog gauge tachometer 10-Off Road mode indicator display*
(SDA) or Smartphone-link Display speed (r/min). The tachometer can help 11-Sub unit speedometer  P.5-39
Audio (SDA) navigation system. Refer you obtain more economical driving and 12-Brake auto hold standby indicator lamp
to the separate owner’s manual) also warns you of excessive engine (white)  P.6-51
2-High-beam indicator lamp  P.5-74 speeds (Red zone). Brake auto hold indicator lamp (green)
3-Forward Collision Mitigation System 5-Digital speedometer  P.6-52
(FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration 6- mark display  P.5-43 13-Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator
Mitigation System (UMS) OFF indicator 7-Hill Descent Control indicator lamp* lamp*  P.6-98
display*  P.6-83, 6-90  P.6-55 14-Multi information screen  P.5-35
 P.6-36 15-Selector lever position display
9-Drive mode indicator display*  P.6-22
 P.6-27

Quick guide
1
 P.6-63
 P.6-95

Quick guide
1 Type 3
Standard mode
1-Digital clock display (vehicles equipped 6-Sub unit speedometer  P.5-39 12-Analog gauge tachometer
with the Smartphone-link Display Audio 7- mark display  P.5-43 The tachometer indicates the engine
(SDA) or Smartphone-link Display 8-Hill Descent Control indicator lamp* speed (r/min). The tachometer can help
Audio (SDA) navigation system. Refer  P.6-55 you obtain more economical driving and
to the separate owner’s manual) 9-Rear differential lock indicator lamp* also warns you of excessive engine
2-High-beam indicator lamp  P.5-74  P.6-36 speeds (Red zone).
3-Forward Collision Mitigation System 10-Drive mode indicator display* 13-Brake auto hold standby indicator lamp
(FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration  P.6-27 (white)  P.6-51
Mitigation System (UMS) OFF indicator 11-Off Road mode indicator display* Brake auto hold indicator lamp (green)
display*  P.6-83, 6-90  P.6-35  P.6-52
4-Small information screen  P.5-34 14-Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator
Interrupt display screen  P.5-42 lamp*  P.6-98

Quick guide
1
 P.6-63
 P.6-95
 P.6-22

Quick guide
1 Multi-mode
1-Digital clock display (vehicles equipped 8-Rear differential lock indicator lamp* 12-Brake auto hold standby indicator lamp
with the Smartphone-link Display Audio  P.6-36 (white)  P.6-51
(SDA) or Smartphone-link Display 9-Drive mode indicator display* Brake auto hold indicator lamp (green)
to the separate owner’s manual) 10-Off Road mode indicator display* 13-Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator
3-Forward Collision Mitigation System 11-Analog gauge tachometer 14-Multi information screen  P.5-35
(FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration The tachometer indicates the engine Interrupt display screen  P.5-42
Mitigation System (UMS) OFF indicator speed (r/min). The tachometer can help 15-Selector lever position display
display*  P.6-83, 6-90 you obtain more economical driving and  P.6-22
4-Digital speedometer also warns you of excessive engine
5-Sub unit speedometer  P.5-39 speeds (Red zone).
7-Hill Descent Control indicator lamp*
 P.6-55
Quick guide
1
 P.6-63
 P.6-95
Refer to “8 inch colour LCD meter” on

page 5-19

General information
2
Fuel selection ...................................................................................2-2

Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................2-2
Installation of accessories ................................................................2-4
Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems ................2-4
Genuine parts ...................................................................................2-5
Safety and disposal information for used engine oil .......................2-5
Event Data Recording ......................................................................2-5
MITSUBISHI Remote Control*.......................................................2-6
Fuel selection
Fuel selection NOTE WARNING

 Poor-quality diesel fuel can cause deposits  Before removing the fuel cap, be sure to
2
E00200105227
form in the injector, resulting in black smoke get rid of your body’s static electricity by
Recom- and rough idling. touching a metal part of the vehicle or fuel
Cetane number (EN590)
mended If these problems occur, you are advised to pump. Any static electricity on your body
51 or higher
fuel add a cleaning additive to the diesel fuel could create a spark that ignites fuel
when you refuel the vehicle. The additive vapor.
will break up and remove the deposits,  Perform the whole refueling process
CAUTION thereby returning the engine to a normal con- (opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-
 Your vehicle is designed to use only diesel dition. Be sure to use a MITSUBISHI ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself. Do not
fuel that meets the EN 590 standard. MOTORS GENUINE DIESEL FUEL SYS- let any other person come near the fuel
Use of any other type of diesel fuel would TEM CLEANER. Using an unsuitable addi- tank filler. If you allowed a person to help
adversely affect the engine’s performance tive could make the engine malfunction. For you and that person was carrying static
and durability. detailed, please contact the nearest author- electricity, fuel vapor could be ignited.
 If you continuously use fuel that contains ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.  Do not move away from the fuel tank filler
more than 7 % bio-diesel, the impurities in until refueling is finished. If you moved
the bio-diesel could precipitate. away and did something else (for example,
If this occurs, the properties of the fuel in the Filling the fuel tank sitting on a seat) part-way through the
refueling process, you could pick up a
fuel tank will change, which could adversely
E00200204540
affect the engine, fuel filter, and other com- fresh charge of static electricity.
ponents, leading to engine problems.  Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel
If the engine is not operating properly,
WARNING contains toxic substances.
 When handling fuel, comply with the
switch to fuel that contains 7 % or less bio-  Keep the doors and windows closed while
safety regulations displayed by garages
diesel as soon as possible and have the vehi- refueling the vehicle. If they were open,
and filling stations.
cle checked at an authorised MITSUBISHI fuel vapor could get into the cabin.
MOTORS dealer.  Fuel is highly flammable and explosive.
 If the fuel cap must be replaced, use only a
You could be burned or seriously injured
MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine part.
when handling it. When refueling your
vehicle, always turn the engine off and
keep away from flames, sparks, and smok- Fuel tank capacity
ing materials. Always handle fuel in well-
ventilated outdoor areas.
68 litres
2-2 General information

Filling the fuel tank
Refueling NOTE
 While filling with fuel, hang the fuel cap on
1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine. the hook (A) located on the inside of the fuel 2
2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear tank filler door.
left side of your vehicle.
Open the fuel tank filler door with the
release lever located below the instrument
panel.
1- Remove
2- Close
4. Insert the gun in the tank port as far as it

CAUTION goes.
 Since the fuel system may be under pressure,
remove the fuel cap slowly. This relieves any
pressure or vacuum that might have built up
CAUTION
 Do not tilt the gun.
in the fuel tank. If you hear a hissing sound,
wait until it stops before removing the fuel
3. Open the fuel tank filler tube by slowly
turning the fuel cap anticlockwise.
cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, injuring 5. When the gun stops automatically, do not
you or others. fill with fuel any more.
6. To close, turn the fuel cap slowly clock-
wise until you hear clicking sounds, then
gently push the fuel tank filler door
closed.
General information 2-3

Installation of accessories
 Improper installation of electrical parts Even when such parts are officially author-
Installation of accessories could cause fire, please refer to the Modi- ised, for example by a “general operators per-
2 fication/alteration to the electrical or fuel mit” (an appraisal for the part) or through the
E00200302752
Before fitting any accessories, please consult systems section within this owner’s man- execution of the part in an officially approved
your authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS ual. manner of construction, or when a single
dealer.  Using a cellular phone or radio set inside operation permit following the attachment or
the vehicle without an external antenna installation of such parts, it cannot be
CAUTION may cause electrical system interference, deduced from that alone, that the driving
 Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosis which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera- safety of your vehicles has not been affected.
connector for checking and servicing the tion.
 Tyres and wheels which do not meet spec- Consider also that there basically exists no
electronic control system.
Do not connect a device other than a diagno- ifications must not be used. liability on the part of the appraiser or the
sis tool for inspections and service to this Refer to the “Specifications” section for official. Maximum safety can only be ensured
connector. Otherwise, the battery could be information regarding wheel and tyre with parts recommended, sold and fitted or
discharged, the electronic devices of the sizes. installed by an authorised MITSUBISHI
vehicle could malfunction, or other unex-  Do not fail to read the accessories manu- MOTORS dealer (MITSUBISHI MOTORS
pected problems could result. GENUINE replacement parts and
als prior to the installation of accessories,
In addition, malfunctions caused by connect- MITSUBISHI MOTORS accessories). The
parts or other modifications to the vehi-
ing a device other than a diagnosis tool may same also pertains to modifications of vehi-
not be covered under warranty.
cle!
cles with respect to the production specifica-
tions. For safety reasons, do not attempt any
 The installation of accessories, optional Important points! modifications other than those that follow the
parts, etc., should only be carried out recommendations of an authorised
within the limits prescribed by law in your Due to a large number of accessories and MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
country, and in accordance with the guide- replacement parts of different manufactures
lines and warnings contained within the available in the market, it is not possible, not
documents accompanying this vehicle. only for MITSUBISHI MOTORS but also an Modification/alterations to
Only MITSUBISHI MOTORS approved authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer, the electrical or fuel systems
accessories should be fitted to your vehi- to check whether the attachment or installa- E00200401495
cle. tion of such parts affects the overall safety of MITSUBISHI MOTORS has always manu-
your vehicle. factured safe, high quality vehicles. In order
to maintain this safety and quality, it is impor-

Genuine parts
tant that any accessory that is to be fitted, or Failure to use Genuine Parts may invalidate
any modifications carried out which involve any future warranty claim. MITSUBISHI
WARNING
 Keep used engine oils out of reach of chil-
the electrical or fuel systems,
ried out in accordance with
should be car-
MITSUBISHI
MOTORS will not be liable for any malfunc-
tion of your vehicle that may have been
dren. 2
MOTORS guidelines. caused by the use of substitute parts in place
of MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Event Data Recording
CAUTION PARTS. E00205900195
 Please consult an authorised MITSUBISHI

At the MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer you This vehicle is equipped with an event data
MOTORS dealer concerning any such fit- can also get appropriate advice and the recorder (EDR).
ment or modification. assembling of Genuine Parts will be handled The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or professionally. certain crash or near crash-like situations,
improper installation methods are used (pro- MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE PARTS such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic are identified by this mark, and are available road obstacle, data that will assist in under-
devices may be adversely affected, resulting at all authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
in a fire or other accident.
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
dealers. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
Genuine parts less.
E00200501861
Don’t play around with substitutes. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
MITSUBISHI MOTORS has gone to great such data as:
lengths to bring you a superbly crafted vehi- Safety and disposal informa-  How various systems in your vehicle were
cle offering the highest quality and dependa-
bility. Don’t reduce that quality and tion for used engine oil operating;
 How far (if at all) the driver was depress-
dependability by using substitute parts. E00200601468
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
Always use MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENU-
INE PARTS designed and manufactured to WARNING and,
 Prolonged and repeated contact may  How fast the vehicle was travelling.
maintain your vehicle at top performance.
cause serious skin disorders, including
The operation of vehicle components can be
dermatitis and cancer. These data can help provide a better under-
less efficient in case of using Non-Genuine
 Avoid contact with the skin as far as possi- standing of the circumstances in which
Parts.
ble and wash thoroughly after any con- crashes and injuries occur.
tact.

MITSUBISHI Remote Control*
NOTE MITSUBISHI Remote Con-

2
 EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
trol*
E00206300037
are recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
ing conditions and no personal data (e.g., The MITSUBISHI Remote Control allows
name, gender, age, and crash location) are you to operate the vehicle within the commu-
recorded. However, other parties, such as nication range of the Bluetooth® device
law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying (which conforms to Bluetooth® 4.2 or later
data routinely acquired during a crash inves- and supports iOS, Android™ or watchOS®).
tigation. The following operations are available.
1- Bluetooth® device
To read data recorded by an EDR, special ・Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
equipment is required, and access to the vehi- BLUETOOTH SIG, INC. You can mainly operate the following func-
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ・Android is a trademark of Google LLC. tions by using the MITSUBISHI Remote
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as ・IOS is a trademark or registered trade- Control.
law enforcement, that have the special equip- mark of Cisco in the U.S. and other coun-
ment, can read the information if they have tries and is used under license.  Electric tailgate operation
access to the vehicle or the EDR. ・watchOS is a trademark of Apple Inc., The electric tailgate can be operated by
registered in the U. S. and other countries. “OPEN/CLOSE RESERVATION” or
“OPEN/CLOSE OPERATION” on the
Bluetooth® device.
NOTE  Vehicle reminder
 The communication distance differs depend- If you have forgotten some operations
ing on the Bluetooth® device, due to this the when leaving the vehicle, it is notified to
communication may go down. the Bluetooth® device.
 Operation assist
If the buzzer sounds or the vehicle does
not react while you operate some from the
outside of vehicle, the Bluetooth® device
notifies solutions.

 Car finder
The head lamps can be turned on by oper- For the operation method of the WARNING
MITSUBISHI Remote Control, please visit  People with implantable cardiac pacemak-
ating the Bluetooth® device.
Mitsubishi Motors’ Web site (in English ers or implantable cardiovascular-defi- 2
 Display of fuel consumption history brillators should keep away from the
only):
The fuel consumption information is dis- devices.
played on the Bluetooth® device. The operation of electro-medical appara-
tus may be affected.
When you do not use the MITSUBISHI
Devices that support Bluetooth® are required
Remote Control, set the keyless operation
to communicate with the vehicle using the system to be disabled.
MITSUBISHI Remote Control. Also, regis-  Refer to “Keyless operation system” on
tration (pairing) is required to connect Blue- page 3-6.
https://www.mitsubishi-motors.com/
tooth® devices to the vehicle.  Never leave children, persons in need of
en/products/pajero_sport/app/remote/ care or pets in the vehicle when you use
 If you need further information, please the MITSUBISHI Remote Control.
contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer.
CAUTION
 Be careful not to infect the Bluetooth®
WARNING device with computer virus and malware.
 This product conforms to the Radio Law. Otherwise, it could lead to a vehicle mal-
Use it only in your country. function.
 MITSUBISHI MOTORS is not responsible
to the operator for any disadvantage due to
unauthorised access from others.
 Use the MITSUBISHI Remote Control
according to the operating procedure of the
Bluetooth® device and MITSUBISHI
Remote Control application software.

CAUTION NOTE NOTE

 The MITSUBISHI Remote Control is • Due to the characteristics of radio waves, • The Bluetooth® device is in contact with or
2 designed to supplement the keyless operation communication speed tends to decrease as covered by a metal object.
key. the communication distance increases. Use
• The battery of the Bluetooth® device or the
When leaving the vehicle, be sure to visually your Bluetooth® device at a short distance keyless operation key has run down.
confirm that the doors and tailgate are from the vehicle for better response.
locked, the windows are closed and the  The MITSUBISHI Remote Control cannot
• When a microwave oven or ISM (indus- be used under the following conditions:
lamps are off with your own eyes. trial, scientific and medical) equipment is
 Prevent the passkey on the multi information being used, the communication speed and • The Bluetooth® device is turned off.
screen or Bluetooth® device from being seen • The MITSUBISHI Remote Control appli-
range of Bluetooth® devices may decrease.
by others during the device registration. cation software is not installed.
Use your Bluetooth® device away from
• The MITSUBISHI Remote Control appli-
 Manage the passkey and Bluetooth® device these appliances and equipment.
cation software is not running.
properly to prevent unauthorised access from
• If a Bluetooth® device and a wireless LAN
others. • The Bluetooth® device is not registered on
device are used simultaneously, the com- the vehicle or it is not connected to the
 Do not use a car cover, when using the munication speed and range of each device
MITSUBISHI Remote Control. vehicle.
may decrease. Use your Bluetooth® device
 When opening and closing the electric tail- • The Bluetooth® device is out of the com-
away from wireless LAN devices.
gate, make sure of the surrounding safety munication range.
and keep enough space for back and upper of  Bluetooth® devices may not communicate
• The Bluetooth® device or the keyless oper-
the vehicle and be careful not to hit your with the vehicle, or may not operate nor-
ation key has failed, or its battery has run
head or pinch your hands, neck, etc. mally or stably in the following environment
out.
or situations. Check that the device can com-
municate with your vehicle before use. • When you are not carrying the keyless
operation key.
NOTE • There is an obstruction such as a concrete
• When the keyless operation system is set to
or metal wall.
 Keep the following points in mind when be disabled.
• The vehicle is surrounded by tall vehicles
using a Bluetooth® device: Refer to “Keyless operation system” on
in a parking lot.
• Communication speed and range vary page 3-6.
• There are facilities nearby that emit strong
depending on the Bluetooth® devices and radio waves, such as a TV tower, trans-
the surrounding conditions (radio environ- former substation, broadcasting station or
ment, obstacles, parking area environment, airport.
etc.). • There is a communication device such as a
mobile phone or radio, or an electric device
such as a personal computer.

When the registration is completed, “Suc- 2. Operate the 8 inch colour LCD meter
Changing the remote device set- cess” is displayed in the “Status” field on switches to select “ ”
ting
E00206400038
the multi information screen for 5 sec-
onds, and then “-” is displayed.
(REMOTE). 2
Then press the Enter switch.
To change the remote device setting, follow If “Fail” is displayed in the “Status” field 3. Select the “Device Initialization”, and
the procedure below. on the multi information screen, put the press and hold the Enter switch for 2 sec-
operation mode in OFF, and immediately onds or more.
put in ON again, and then return to step 1,
To register the Bluetooth® devices 4. When the initialization is completed,
and try again. “Success” is displayed in the “Status”
1. Set the Bluetooth® to ON, and start the field on the multi information screen for
MITSUBISHI Remote Control applica- NOTE 5 seconds, and then “ － ” is displayed.
tion software. If “Fail” is displayed in the “Status” field
 You can register 2 different Bluetooth®
2. Operate the 8 inch colour LCD meter devices for use. However you can operate on the multi information screen, put the
switches to switch the multi information only selected devices on the meter or the operation mode in OFF, and immediately
screen to the function setting display. application software. put in ON again, and then return to step 1,
Refer to “8 inch colour LCD meter  When a second device is registered, turn off and try again.
switches” on page 5-19. the Bluetooth® of the first device.
Refer to “Function setting display” on NOTE
page 5-38.
 Initialize the registration, when ownership of
3. Operate the 8 inch colour LCD meter the vehicle is transferred to or from others.
switches to select “ ”
To initialize registration of the
(REMOTE).
Then press the Enter switch. Bluetooth® devices To change the registered Blue-
4. Select the “Device Registration”, and
1. Operate the 8 inch colour LCD meter tooth® device
press and hold the Enter switch for 2 sec-
switches to switch the multi information
onds or more to display the passkey on the 1. Operate the 8 inch colour LCD meter
screen to the function setting display.
multi information screen. switches to switch the multi information
Refer to “8 inch colour LCD meter
5. Enter the passkey on the multi informa- screen to the function setting display.
switches” on page 5-19.
tion screen to your Bluetooth® device. Refer to “Function setting display” on Refer to “8 inch colour LCD meter
page 5-38. switches” on page 5-19.
Refer to “Function setting display” on
page 5-38.
2. Operate the 8 inch colour LCD meter
2 (REMOTE).
Then press the Enter switch.
switches to select the “Select”, and press
the Enter switch.
switches to select the “Device 1” or
“Device 2”, and press the Enter switch to
confirm the setting.

Locking and unlocking
3
Keys .................................................................................................3-2
Key number tag ................................................................................3-2
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................3-3
Keyless entry system .......................................................................3-3
Keyless operation system ................................................................3-6
Doors ..............................................................................................3-14
Central door locks ..........................................................................3-15
“Child-protection” rear doors ........................................................3-16
Tailgate ..........................................................................................3-17
Security alarm system ....................................................................3-29
Electric window control .................................................................3-32
Keys
Keys NOTE NOTE

E00300104700  The key (except for the emergency key) is a  [For vehicles equipped with the security
precision electronic part with a built-in sig- alarm system]
nal transmitter. Please observe the following Pay attention to the following if the security
3 in order to prevent a malfunction. alarm is set to “Active”.
• Do not leave anywhere that is exposed to Refer to “Security alarm system” on page
direct sunlight, for example on the dash- 3-29.
board. • If the security alarm is in the system armed
• Do not disassemble or modify. mode, the alarm will sound if the doors are
• Do not excessively bend the key or subject opened after being unlocked with the key,
it to a strong impact. the inside lock knob or the central door lock
• Do not expose to water. switch.
• Keep away from magnetic key rings. • Even if the security alarm is set to
“Active”, the system preparation mode is
1- Keyless operation key • Keep away from audio systems, personal
not entered if the keyless entry system or
2- Keyless operation key (with electric computers, TVs, and any other equipment
the keyless operation function was not used
tailgate switch) that generates a magnetic field.
to lock the vehicle.
3- Emergency key • Keep away from devices that emit strong
 If you lose one of them, contact an author-
electromagnetic waves, such as cellular
ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as soon
phones, wireless devices and high fre-
as possible to prevent theft.
quency equipment (including medical
WARNING devices).
 When carrying a key on flights, do not
press any switches on the key while on the
• Do not wash with ultrasonic cleaners or Key number tag
similar equipment.
plane. If a switch is pressed on the plane, E00312701050
• Do not leave the key where it may be
the key emits electromagnetic waves, The key number is stamped on the tag as indi-
exposed to high temperature or high humid-
which could adversely affect the plane’s cated in the illustration.
ity.
flight operation. Make a record of the key number and store
 The engine is designed so that it will not start
When carrying a key in a bag, be careful
if the ID code registered in the immobilizer the key and key number tag in separate
that no switches on the key can be easily
computer and the key’s ID code do not places, so that you can order a key from your
pressed by mistake.
match. Refer to the section entitled “Elec- authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer in
tronic immobilizer” for details and key the event the original keys are lost.
usage.
3-2 Locking and unlocking

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)
It is also possible to operate the outside rear-
NOTE view mirrors.
 If you lose one of them, contact an author-
ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as soon
as possible. To obtain a replacement or extra Type 1 Type 2
spare key, take your vehicle and all remain- 3
ing keys to an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer. All the keys have to be re-
registered in the immobiliser computer unit.
The immobilizer can register up to 4 differ-
ent keys for use.
 When the electronic immobilizer is abnor-
mal, the warning display will appear.
Put the operation mode in OFF and then start
Electronic immobilizer the engine again. If the warning is not can-
1- LOCK switch
celled, contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
(Anti-theft starting system) MOTORS dealer. 2- UNLOCK switch
E00300203892 3- Electric tailgate switch
The electronic immobilizer is designed to 4- Indicator lamp
reduce significantly the possibility of vehicle
theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is To lock
attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
achieved, using a key “registered” to the Press the LOCK switch (1). All the doors and
immobilizer system. CAUTION the tailgate will be locked. The turn-signal
 Don’t make any alterations or additions to
lamps will blink once. When they are locked
the immobilizer system; alterations or addi-
NOTE tions could cause failure of the immobilizer. with the room lamp switch in the “” or the
 If the engine does not start, contact an “DOOR” position, the room lamp also blink
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. once.
Keyless entry system
E00300305145
Press the key switch, and all doors and the

tailgate will be locked or unlocked as desired.
Locking and unlocking 3-3

To unlock NOTE NOTE

• The confirmation function (this indicates  If your key is lost or damaged, please contact
Press the UNLOCK switch (2). All the doors locking or unlocking of the doors and the an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
tailgate with the blink of the turn-signal dealer for a replacement key.
3 and the tailgate will be unlocked. If the room
lamps) can be deactivated.  If you wish to add key, please contact an
lamp switch is in the “” or the “DOOR”
• The number of times the turn-signal lamps authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
position at this time, the room lamp will come
are blinked by the confirmation function A maximum of 4 keys are available for your
on for approximately 15 seconds and the can be changed. vehicle.
turn-signal lamps will blink twice. • The buzzer sound can be activated when a
keyless operation is done.
Operation of the outside rear-
NOTE  The keyless entry system does not operate in
 For the operation of the electric tailgate the following conditions: view mirrors
switch (3), refer to “Operating the electric • The operation mode is not in OFF. E00310802038
tailgate using the keyless operation key” on • The door or tailgate is open. (Not possible
page 3-20. only locking) To retract
 The outside rear-view mirrors automatically  The key switch will operate within approxi-
retract or extend when all the doors and the mately 4 m from the vehicle. However, the
Locking the doors and tailgate using the
tailgate are locked or unlocked using the key operating range of the key switch may
switches of the keyless entry system. Refer change if the vehicle is located near a power LOCK switch (1), the outside rear-view mir-
to “Starting and driving: Outside rear-view station, or radio/TV broadcasting station. rors are retracted automatically.
mirrors” on page 6-12.  If either of the following problems occurs,
 If the UNLOCK switch (2) is pressed and no the battery may be exhausted. To extend
door or tailgate is opened within approxi- • The key switch is operated at the correct
mately 30 seconds, relocking will automati- distance from the vehicle, but the doors and
cally occur. the tailgate are not locked/unlocked in
Unlocking the doors and tailgate using the
 It is possible to modify functions as follows: response. UNLOCK switch (2), the outside rear-view
For further information, please contact an • The indicator lamp (4) is dim or does not mirrors are extended automatically.
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. come on.
• The time for automatic relocking can be NOTE
changed. For further information, please contact an
 Functions can be modified as stated below.
• Activating the operation confirmation func- authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Please consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
tion (blinking of the turn-signal lamps) only If you replace the battery yourself, refer to
MOTORS dealer.
during locking, or only during unlocking. “Procedure for replacing the key battery”
on page 3-5.

NOTE Procedure for replacing the key WARNING

• Automatically extend when the driver’s battery • Do not dispose of a battery into fire or
door is closed, and put the operation mode E00309502136
incinerator, or mechanically crushing or
in ON. cutting of a battery.
• Automatically retract when the operation Before replacing the battery, remove static • Do not use, store in or bring into a bat- 3
mode is put in OFF or ACC, and the electricity from your body by touching a tery where it may be exposed to
driver’s door is then opened. metal grounded object. extremely high temperature or extremely
• Automatically extend when the vehicle low air pressure.
speed reaches approximately 30 km/h. WARNING
• Deactivate the automatic extension func-  Do not swallow a coin type battery.
tion.
• This product contains coin type battery.
CAUTION
If a coin type battery is swallowed, it can  When the key case is opened, be careful to
The outside rear-view mirrors can be keep water, dust, etc. out. Also, do not touch
cause severe internal burns and can lead
retracted or extended by the following the internal components.
to death.
operations, even if changing to the any of
There have been cases where a swallowed  Dispose of used battery according to the reg-
above.
battery has caused severe internal burns ulations for the disposal of battery.
After pressing the “LOCK” switch to lock
in just 2 hours.
the doors and tailgate, if the “LOCK”
switch is pressed again twice in a row • Keep new and used batteries away from
within approximately 30 seconds, the out- children. NOTE
side rear-view mirrors will retract. • If the remote control switch case does not  You may purchase a replacement battery at
After pressing the “UNLOCK” switch to close securely, stop using the product and an electric appliance store.
unlock the doors and tailgate, if the keep it away from children.  An authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
“UNLOCK” switch is pressed again twice • If you think batteries might have been dealer can replace the battery for you if you
in a row within approximately 30 seconds, swallowed or placed inside any part of a prefer.
the outside rear-view mirrors will extend person’s body, seek immediate medical
again. attention.
1. Remove the emergency key from the key.
 To prevent that can result in an explosion
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 3-10.
or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas.
2. With the MITSUBISHI mark facing you,
• Do not replace an incorrectly battery.
Replace only with the same or equivalent insert the cloth-covered tip of a straight
type. blade (or minus) screwdriver into the
notch in the key case and use it to open
the case.

5. Close the key case firmly.
6. Install the emergency key removed in step
WARNING
 People with implantable cardiac pacemak-
1.
ers or implantable cardiovascular-defi-
7. Check the keyless entry system to see that
brillators should not go near the exterior
3 it works. transmitters (A) or the interior transmit-
ters (B). The radio waves used by the key-
Keyless operation system less operation system could adversely
affect implantable cardiac pacemakers or
E00305602650
implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators.
The keyless operation system allows you to
lock and unlock the doors and the tailgate,
start the engine and change the operation
NOTE mode simply by carrying the keyless opera-
 Be sure to perform the procedure with the tion key with you.
MITSUBISHI mark facing you. If the The switches on the keyless operation key
MITSUBISHI mark is not facing you when can also be used as the key switch of keyless
you open the key case, the switches may entry system.
come out.
Refer to “Starting and stopping the engine”
on page 6-18.
3. Remove the used battery. Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page 3-3.
4. Install a new battery with the + side (A)
up. The driver should always carry the keyless
operation key. This key is necessary for lock-
+ side
ing and unlocking the doors and the tailgate,
starting the engine and otherwise operating
the vehicle, so before locking and leaving the
- side vehicle, be sure to check that you have the
keyless operation key.
Coin type
battery
CR2032

WARNING NOTE NOTE

 When using electro-medical devices other • The keyless operation system is carried  Because the keyless operation key continu-
than implantable cardiac pacemakers or together with a communications device ally receives signals, strong radio wave
implantable cardiovascular-defibrilla- such as a cellular phone or radio set, or with reception could affect battery wear. Do not
tors, contact the electro-medical device an electronic device such as a personal leave the key near a TV, personal computer, 3
manufacturer ahead of time to determine computer. or other electronic device.
the adverse effects of radio waves on the • The keyless operation key is touching or
devices. Electro-medical device operations covered by a metal object.
could be affected by radio waves. • A keyless entry system is being used
Operating range of the keyless
nearby. operation system
You can limit the possible operations of • When the keyless operation key battery is E00305701696
the keyless operation system in the fol- worn out. If you are carrying the keyless operation key,
lowing ways. (The keyless operation sys- • When the keyless operation key is set down enter the operating range of the keyless oper-
tem can be used as a keyless entry in an area with strong radio waves or noise. ation system, and press the driver’s or front
system.) Please consult an authorised In such cases, use the emergency key. passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, the tail-
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. Refer to “To lock/unlock without using the gate LOCK switch (when locking) or pull the
• You can limit operations to locking and keyless operation function” on page 3-10. tailgate handle lever (when unlocking), the
unlocking the doors and tailgate.  Because the keyless operation key receives ID code for your key is verified.
• You can limit operations to starting the signals in order to communicate with the You can lock and unlock the doors and the
engine. transmitters in the vehicle, the battery con- tailgate, start the engine and change the oper-
• The keyless operation system can be dis- tinually wears down regardless of keyless ation mode only if the ID codes of your key-
abled. operation key use. The battery life is 1 to less operation key and the vehicle match.
2 years, depending on usage conditions.
When the battery wears out, replace the bat-
NOTE tery according to the description in this man- NOTE
 The keyless operation key uses an ultra-weak ual or have it replaced an authorised  If the keyless operation key battery is wear-
electromagnetic wave. In the following MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. ing out or there are strong electromagnetic
cases, the keyless operation system may not Refer to “Procedure for replacing the key waves or noise present, the operating range
operate properly or may be unstable. battery” on page 3-5. may become smaller and operation may
• When there is equipment nearby that emits become unstable.
strong radio waves, such as: a power sta-
tion, a radio/TV broadcasting station or an
airport.

Operating range for locking and NOTE NOTE

unlocking the doors and tailgate  Even if the keyless operation key is within  Even if it is within the operating range, if the
E00306202060 the operating range, if the key is near to the keyless operation key is in a small item
The operating range is approximately 70 cm ground or high up, the system may not oper- holder such as the glove box, on top of the
3 from the driver’s or front passenger’s door ate. instrument panel, door pocket or in the lug-
lock/unlock switch, and approximately  If the keyless operation key is within the gage compartment, it may be impossible to
operating range, even someone not carrying start the engine and change the operation
150 cm from the tailgate handle.
the key can lock and unlock the doors and mode.
tailgate by using the keyless operation func-  If a keyless operation key is too close to the
tion. door or door window, it may be possible to
start the engine or change the operation
mode even when the key is outside the vehi-
Operating range for starting the cle.
engine and changing the opera-
tion mode
E00306301716 To operate using the keyless
The operating range is the interior of the operation function
vehicle. E00305803170
Driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock

*: Forward direction
switches
: Operating range
NOTE
 Locking and unlocking operate only when
you press a door or tailgate switch that
detects the keyless operation key.
 Operation may not be possible if you are too
close to the front door, door window or tail-
gate.
*: Forward direction
: Operating range

The turn-signal lamps will blink once and the
Tailgate switches (except for vehicles equipped
outer buzzer will sound once.
NOTE
with the electric tailgate)  The outside rear-view mirrors automatically
Also refer to “Locking and unlocking: Doors,
retract/extend when all the doors and the tail-
Central door locks, Tailgate” on pages 3-14,
gate are locked/unlocked using the keyless
3-15 and 3-17. operation function. Refer to “Starting and 3
driving: Outside rear-view mirrors” on page
Unlocking the doors and tailgate 6-12.
 The keyless operation function does not
operate under the following conditions:
When you are carrying the keyless operation
• The keyless operation key is inside the
key, if you press the driver’s or front passen- vehicle.
ger’s door lock/unlock switch (A), pull the • A door or the tailgate is open or ajar.
Tailgate switches (vehicles equipped with the tailgate handle lever (C), or press the tailgate • The operation mode is not in OFF.
electric tailgate) open switch (D) within the operating range,  The time between unlocking and automatic
all the doors and the tailgate are unlocked. locking can be adjusted. Please consult an
If the room lamp switch is in the “” or the authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
“DOOR” position at this time, the room lamp  The tailgate handle lever (C) or the tailgate
will turn on for 15 seconds. The turn-signal open switch (D) can be used to check that the
lamps will blink twice and the outer buzzer vehicle is locked properly. Pull the tailgate
will sound twice. handle lever or press the tailgate open switch
If the driver’s or front passenger’s door within approximately 3 seconds of locking
lock/unlock switch is pressed and any of the the vehicle. If you wait longer than 3 seconds
doors or tailgate is not opened within approx- and pull the tailgate handle lever or press the
tailgate open switch, the doors and tailgate
imately 30 seconds, relocking will automati-
will be unlocked.
Locking the doors and tailgate cally occur.
 The time allowed for checking that the vehi-
Refer to “Locking and unlocking: Doors, cle is locked can be adjusted. For further
When you are carrying the keyless operation Central door locks, Tailgate” on pages 3-14, information, please contact your authorised
3-15 and 3-17. MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
key, if you press the driver’s or front passen-
ger’s door lock/unlock switch (A), or the tail-
gate LOCK switch (B) within the operating
range, the doors and the tailgate are locked.

Operation confirmation when locking To lock/unlock without using Locking and unlocking the door
and unlocking the keyless operation function Turning the emergency key in the forward
E00306000165
Operation can be confirmed as shown below. direction locks the door, and turning it in the
3 However, the room lamp will illuminate only rear direction unlocks the door. Also refer to
if the room lamp switch is in the “” or the Emergency key “Locking and unlocking: Doors” on page
“DOOR” position. E00307201637 3-14.
The emergency key (A) can only be used to
When locking: The turn-signal lamps blink lock and unlock the door. To use the emer-
once and the outer buzzer gency key, unlock the lock knob (B) and
sounds once. remove it from the keyless operation key (C).
When unlock- The room lamp illuminates
ing: for approximately 15 sec-
onds, the turn-signal lamps
blink twice, and the outer
buzzer sounds twice.
NOTE 1- Lock
 Functions can be modified as stated below. 2- Unlock
For further information, please contact an
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
• Activating the operation confirmation func-
tion (blinking of the turn-signal lamps) only
during locking, or only during unlocking. NOTE
• Disabling the operation confirmation func-  Only use the emergency key for emergen-
tion (blinking of the turn-signal lamps) and cies. If the keyless operation key battery
outer buzzer. wears out, replace it as quickly as possible so
• Changing the number of blinks for the that you can use the keyless operation key.
operation confirmation function (blinking  The emergency key is built in the keyless
of the turn-signal lamps). operation key.
 After using the emergency key, always return
it into the original position.

Warning activation
E00305902608
In order to prevent vehicle theft or the accidental operation of the keyless operation system, the buzzer and the display on the information screen
in the instrument cluster are used to alert the driver. 3
If a warning is activated, always check the vehicle and the keyless operation key. The warning is also displayed if there is a fault in the keyless
operation system.
Item Display Buzzer Note (Solution)

Detection of Inner buzzer There is a fault in the keyless operation system.
failure sounds once
Fall of battery Inner buzzer The battery starts to run out, the warning is activated. （The warning is not activated if the
voltage sounds once battery is completely dead.）
Key not Inner buzzer When the engine switch is turned to the ACC or ON from OFF or when the engine is started,
detected sounds once the warning is activated, if any of the following conditions is occurred.
• Carrying another keyless operation key with a different code, or the keyless operation key
could be outside the operating range.
• The battery of the keyless operation key is dead.
• Communication is blocked by electric wave environment.
Keyless opera- Inner buzzer If the operation mode is in OFF and the driver’s door is opened with the keyless operation key
tion key sounds in the key slot, a warning is issued and the outer buzzer sounds for approximately 3 seconds
reminder approxi- and the inner buzzer sounds for approximately 1 minute to remind you to remove the key. If
mately the key removed from key slot, the buzzer is stopped.
1 minute
Outer buzzer
sounds
approxi-
mately
3 seconds
intermittently

Keyless opera- Inner buzzer • When the vehicle is parked with the operation mode in any mode other than OFF, if you
tion key take- sounds once close the door after opening any of the doors and taking the keyless operation key out of
out monitoring Outer buzzer the vehicle, a warning is issued until the key is detected in the vehicle.
3 system sounds inter- • If you take the keyless operation key out of the vehicle through a window without opening
mittently a door, the keyless operation key take-out monitoring system does not operate.
• It is possible to change the setting to make the keyless operation key take-out monitoring
system operate if you take the keyless operation key out from the vehicle through a win-
dow without opening a door. For further information, please contact an authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
• Even if you have the keyless operation key within the engine start operating range, if the
keyless operation key and vehicle ID codes cannot be matched, for example due to the
ambient environment or electromagnetic conditions, the warning may be activated.
Key lock-in Inner buzzer • When the operation mode is in OFF, if you close all the doors and the tailgate with the key-
prevention sounds once less operation key left in the vehicle and you try to lock the doors and tailgate by pressing
system Outer buzzer the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, the tailgate LOCK switch, or
sounds using the close and lock function, a warning is issued and you cannot lock the doors and
approxi- tailgate.
mately • Make sure you have the keyless operation key with you before locking the doors. Even if
3 seconds you leave the keyless operation key inside the vehicle, it is possible that the doors will lock
intermittently depending on the surrounding environment and wireless signal conditions.
Door ajar pre- Inner buzzer When the operation mode in OFF, if you try to lock the doors and tailgate by pressing the
vention sys- sounds once driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, or the tailgate LOCK switch with one of
tem Outer buzzer the doors or the tailgate not completely closed, a warning is issued and you cannot lock the
sounds doors and tailgate.
approxi-
mately
3 seconds
intermittently

Operation Inner buzzer When the operation mode is in any mode other than OFF, if you try to lock the doors and tail-
mode OFF sounds once gate by pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, or the tailgate
reminder sys- Outer buzzer LOCK switch, a warning is issued and you cannot lock the doors and tailgate.
tem sounds
3
approxi-
mately
3 seconds
intermittently

Doors
2- Unlock
Doors NOTE
 The driver’s door can be opened without
NOTE
E00300403706
using the lock knob by pulling on the inside
CAUTION  When locking or unlocking with the key, all door handle.
3  Make sure the doors are closed: driving with doors and the tailgate will be locked or
doors not completely closed is dangerous. unlocked.
Refer to “Central door locks” on page 3-15.
 Never leave children in the vehicle unat-
 As the vehicle is equipped with the keyless
To lock without using the key
tended.
operation system, the driver’s door can be
 Be careful not to lock the doors while the
locked or unlocked with the emergency key.
key is inside the vehicle.
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 3-10.
NOTE
 To prevent the key from being locked inside
To lock or unlock from inside
the vehicle, neither the lock knob on the the vehicle
driver’s door nor the key can be used to lock
the driver’s door when it is open.
To lock or unlock with the key Set the inside lock knob (1) to the locked
position, and close the door (2).
NOTE
 The driver’s door cannot be locked using the
inside lock knob while the driver’s door is
opened.
1- Lock
2- Unlock
1- Lock

Central door locks
Central door locks

E00300803683
NOTE
 Repeated continuous operation between lock
3
and unlock could activate the central door
locking systems built-in protection circuit
and prevent the system from operating. If
this occurs, wait approximately 1 minute
before operating the central door lock sys-
tem.
1- Lock 1- Lock
 When the driver’s door is open, the central
door lock switch cannot be used to lock it.
2- Unlock 2- Unlock
All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked NOTE Vehicle-speed sensitive auto-
and unlocked as described hereafter.  As the vehicle is equipped with the keyless
operation system, the driver’s door can be
matic door lock (with impact-
locked or unlocked with the emergency key. sensitive unlock mechanism)
Driver’s door with key Refer to “Emergency key” on page 3-10.
All of the doors and the tailgate lock automat-
Using the key on the driver’s door locks or ically when the vehicle speed exceeds
unlocks. The central door lock switch approximately 15 km/h. In addition, all of the
doors and the tailgate unlock when a strong
Using the central door lock switch on the impact that could be very dangerous to the
driver’s door locks or unlocks all doors and occupants is sustained by the collision of the
the tailgate. vehicle. This is prepared for rescue activities
when an unexpected accident occurs.

“Child-protection” rear doors
WARNING NOTE “Child-protection” rear

 When the vehicle-speed sensitive auto-
matic door lock/Impact-sensitive unlock
 These functions are activated when the vehi-
cle is shipped from the factory. If you wish to
doors
E00300902153
mechanism may not operate in the follow- activate or deactivate the vehicle-speed sen-
3 ing conditions, have the vehicle inspected sitive automatic door lock, please contact an
at an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
dealer immediately.
• The door does not lock automatically
even when the vehicle speed exceeds
Unlock using the engine switch
approximately 15 km/h. or the selector lever
• The door unlocks automatically while
driving. It is possible to unlock all of the doors and the
• Even when the operation mode is in ON, tailgate whenever the selector lever placed
the SRS warning lamp does not come on
the “P” (PARK) position while the operation
or it remains on.
mode is in ON. 1- Lock
• The SRS warning lamp and/or the warn-
ing display comes on while driving.
Or the operation mode is put in OFF. 2- Unlock
• The central door lock system is broken
down. NOTE Child protection helps prevent the rear doors
 Unlock using the selector lever is activated from being opened accidentally from the
when the vehicle is shipped from the factory.
inside.
NOTE If you wish to activate or deactivate these
If the lever is set to the locked position, the
 Even if the vehicle suffers significant defor- functions, please contact an authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. rear door cannot be opened using the inside
mation from a collision etc., depending on
handle, but only with the outside handle.
the location and angle of the collision, as
well as on the shape and condition of the If the lever is set to the “Unlock” position, the
other object in the collision, the doors and child protection mechanism does not func-
the tailgate may not unlock. The extent of tion.
deformation or damage to the vehicle does
not necessarily correlate with unlock of the
doors and the tailgate.

Tailgate
CAUTION WARNING NOTE

 When driving with a child in the rear seat,  When there is a build up of snow or ice, it  Gas struts (A) are installed to support the
please use the child protection to prevent should be removed before opening the tail- tailgate.
accidental door opening which may cause an gate. If you open the tailgate without
accident. removing it, there is a possibility that the 3
tailgate may close suddenly due to the
weight of that snow or ice.
 When you open the tailgate make sure
Tailgate that the tailgate is opened fully and
E00301402979
remains fully open. If you only open the
tailgate halfway, there is a risk that the
WARNING tailgate may drop and slam shut. If you
 Before driving, make sure the tailgate is open the tailgate while your vehicle is
securely closed. parked on an incline, it is more difficult to To prevent damage or faulty operation.
It is dangerous to drive with the tailgate do so than on the flat and also it may sud- • Do not hold the gas struts when closing the
open, since carbon monoxide (CO) gas can denly open or drop and slam shut. When tailgate.
enter the cabin. You cannot see or smell using the height memory of the electric • Also, do not push or pull the gas struts.
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and tailgate, the tailgate will open only to the • Do not attach any plastic material, tape,
even death. set position. etc., to the gas struts.
And also, if the tailgate opens while driv-
• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts.
ing, luggage may fall off. This could result
in a serious accident. • Do not hang any object on the gas struts.
CAUTION
 The luggage compartment is not designed
 Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when
to let people ride. Do not let people ride or
loading and unloading luggage.
children play there. This could result in a
The heat from the exhaust could cause burns.
Locking and unlocking the tail-
serious accident.
 To avoid damage to the tailgate, make sure gate
 When opening and closing the tailgate,
the area above and behind the tailgate is E00314500039
make sure of the surrounding safety and
clear before opening it. The tailgate can be locked or unlocked by
keep enough space for back and upper of
the vehicle and be careful not to hit your using the central door lock switch (driver
head or pinch your hands, neck, etc. side), the keyless entry system or the keyless
operation system.
Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page 3-3.

Tailgate
Refer to “Keyless operation system” on page It is designed to provide a way to open the
3-6.
CAUTION tailgate in the case of a discharged battery.
 When operating the tailgate handle lever (A),
Refer to “Central door locks” on page 3-15.
put your fingers to the position shown in the 1. Insert the cloth-covered tip of a straight
illustration and be careful not to pinch your
3 Operating the tailgate (Except fingers in the lever.
blade (or minus) screwdriver into the
notch of the lid (A) inside of the tailgate
for the electric tailgate) Section and pry gently to open the lid.
E00314600030
To open from outside the vehicle
After unlocking the tailgate, pull the tailgate

handle lever (A) and pull up the tailgate. *
*: Front of the vehicle
NOTE
2. Move the lever (B) to open the tailgate.
 The tailgate cannot be pulled up when you
do not open it as soon as the tailgate handle
lever is pulled. In this case, pull the tailgate
handle lever once again and pull up the tail-
gate.
 The tailgate cannot be opened when the bat-
tery is flat or disconnected.
To open from inside the vehicle
The tailgate can also be opened from inside

the vehicle. 3. Push out on the tailgate to open it.

Tailgate
WARNING Operating the tailgate (the elec- CAUTION

 Always keep the release lever lid on tail- tric tailgate)  Do not install accessories other than MIT-
gate closed when driving so that your lug- E00314700031
SUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE parts on the
gage cannot accidentally bump the lever electric tailgate. Some accessories could be
and open the tailgate. too heavy, causing the drop prevention 3
To open or close the electric tail- mechanism to operate.
gate Refer to “Drop prevention mechanism” on
To close page 3-26.
WARNING Automatic operation

To close the tailgate, pull the tailgate grip (A)  For safety’s sake, the electric tailgate
downward and release it before the tailgate is should be operated by adults and not chil-
E00314800032
completely closed, then gently push shut the dren. The following 6 methods are available for
tailgate from the outside.  Make sure the electric tailgate is com- automatic operation of the electric tailgate.
pletely open before loading and unloading Refer to “Operating the electric tailgate using
luggage. the keyless operation key” on page 3-20.
Refer to “Operating the electric tailgate using
the inside electric tailgate switch” on page
CAUTION 3-21.
 When closing the electric tailgate, make sure Refer to “Operating the electric tailgate using
there is no foreign matter around the striker the tailgate inner switch” on page 3-21.
(A). Refer to “Opening the electric tailgate using
If foreign matter gets into the striker it could the open switch” on page 3-22.
prevent the electric tailgate from closing nor- Refer to “Operating the electric tailgate using
mally.
the hands-free access” on page 3-22.
For vehicles equipped with Instruments -
Type B, the electric tailgate can be operated
CAUTION by “OPEN/CLOSE RESERVATION” or
 When closing the tailgate, do not close it
“OPEN/CLOSE OPERATION” on the Blue-
directly putting the hands on the tailgate
grip. If the hands or arms got caught, a seri- tooth® device connected to the vehicle.
ous injury could result. Refer to “MITSUBISHI Remote Control” on
page 2-6.

Tailgate
CAUTION NOTE NOTE

 Do not apply excessive force on the electric  If the electric tailgate operation switch is  If the battery or fuse is replaced while the
tailgate when opening or closing it. Doing so pressed or the hands-free access is used electric tailgate is open, it cannot be closed
could cause a breakdown. while the electric tailgate is operating, the automatically.
3  Do not start the engine while the tailgate is electric tailgate stops moving. In this case close the electric tailgate manu-
operating. The sudden operation prevention If the switch is pressed or the hands-free ally.
mechanism could operate, making the elec- access is used again, the electric tailgate
tric tailgate stop intermittently while it moves in the opposite direction to the one in
 Operating the electric tailgate using
moves. which it was moving before.
 When the electric tailgate is fully opened
the keyless operation key
E00314900033
automatically, or when the selector lever is
The electric tailgate can be opened or closed
NOTE shifted to any position other than the “P”
(PARK) position while the electric tailgate is automatically by pressing the electric tailgate
 Automatic operation can be switched
operating, the warning buzzer sounds for switch (A), when all of the following condi-
ON/OFF.
approximately 10 seconds to notify the tions are met.
Refer to “Switching automatic operation of
driver that the electric tailgate is open.
the electric tailgate ON/OFF” on page 3-26.
 When closing the electric tailgate, make sure
 The electric tailgate does not operate nor-
people, luggage, etc., are not touching the
mally under the following conditions:
sensors (A). In such a case, the warning
• When parked on a steep incline
buzzer sounds, and the electric tailgate can-
• In strong winds not be closed.
• When the electric tailgate is covered with
snow
 When a load is applied to the electric tail-
gate, or when it is operated with a load in a
direction opposite to the operating direction,
the protection circuit is activated to switch
automatic operation to manual operation.
<Opening conditions>
 The operation mode is in OFF.

 The electric tailgate is completely closed.
 The electric tailgate is unlocked.

Tailgate
<Closing conditions>  Operating the electric tailgate using lamps flash, and the electric tailgate operates
as follows:
 The operation mode is in OFF. the inside electric tailgate switch
E00315000031
 The electric tailgate is completely open. ・While closed: The tailgate completely
The electric tailgate can be operated automat-
 People, luggage, etc., are not touching the
ically by pressing the inside electric tailgate
opens. 3
sensors. ・While open: The tailgate completely
switch (A), when the electric tailgate is closes.
If the electric tailgate switch is pressed twice unlocked.
quickly, the warning buzzer sounds, the haz- If the inside electric tailgate switch is pressed
ard warning lamps flash, and the electric tail- once while the electric tailgate is operating,
gate operates as follows: the electric tailgate stops moving after the
warning buzzer sounds.
・While closed: The tailgate completely If the inside electric switch is pressed for
opens. more than approximately 1 second again, the
・While open: The tailgate completely electric tailgate moves in the opposite direc-
closes. tion to the direction in which it was moving
before.
If the electric tailgate switch is pressed once
while the electric tailgate is operating, the
electric tailgate stops moving after the warn-
 Operating the electric tailgate using
ing buzzer sounds. the tailgate inner switch
NOTE E00315100032
If the electric tailgate switch is pressed twice
 When the operation mode is ON, the electric The electric tailgate can be operated automat-
quickly again, the electric tailgate moves in tailgate cannot be opened by pressing the
the opposite direction to the one in which it ically by pressing the tailgate inner switch
inside electric tailgate switch, unless the
was moving before. (A), when the electric tailgate is unlocked.
selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position.
 If people, luggage, etc., touch the sensors,
NOTE the electric tailgate cannot be closed.
 If the electric tailgate switch is pressed 3 or
more times quickly, the tailgate may not If the inside electric tailgate switch is pressed
operate normally. for more than approximately 1 second, the
If this occurs, wait a short time before again warning buzzer sounds, the hazard warning
pressing the electric tailgate switch twice
quickly.

Tailgate
 Opening the electric tailgate using If the open switch is pressed, the warning
buzzer sounds, the hazard warning lamps
the open switch
E00315200033
flash, and the electric tailgate opens.
The electric tailgate can be opened automati-
3 cally, even if it is locked, by pressing the open NOTE
switch (A) when the keyless operation key is  If the open switch is pressed once while the
within the operation range of the keyless electric tailgate is opening, the electric tail-
operation system. gate stops moving after the warning buzzer
When the electric tailgate is unlocked, the sounds. If the open switch is pressed again,
the electric tailgate closes.
electric tailgate is opened automatically by
pressing the open switch.
NOTE  Operating the electric tailgate using
 When the operation mode is ON, the electric the hands-free access
tailgate cannot be opened by pressing the E00315300034
inside electric tailgate switch, unless the
The electric tailgate can be operated automat-
selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position.
ically by making the kick motion sensor (A)
 If people, luggage, etc., touch the sensors,
the electric tailgate cannot be closed. on the lower right and left of the rear bumper
sense the foot motion.
If the tailgate inner switch is pressed, the
warning buzzer sounds, the hazard warning
lamps flash, and the electric tailgate closes.
If the tailgate inner switch is pressed once
while the electric tailgate is closing, the elec- NOTE
tric tailgate stops moving after the warning  When the operation mode is ON, the electric
buzzer sounds. tailgate cannot be opened by pressing the
If the tailgate inner switch is pressed again, open switch, unless the selector lever is in
the electric tailgate opens. the “P” (PARK) position.

Tailgate
・While closed: The tailgate completely CAUTION
opens.
 Turn the automatic operation OFF before
・While open: The tailgate completely
you wash or wax the surrounding area of the
closes. kick motion sensor or install/remove a car
cover, etc. If the hands-free access remains 3
on, you may be injured due to a sudden oper-
NOTE ating of the electric tailgate resulting from a
 If people, luggage, etc., touch the sensors, possible reaction of the kick motion sensor.
the electric tailgate cannot be closed. Refer to “Switching automatic operation of
the electric tailgate ON/OFF” on page 3-26.
 Do not make a kicking motion near the
If you make a kicking motion to move your exhaust pipe. Otherwise, you may get burned
foot underneath the right or left side of the by hot exhaust gas.
rear bumper (where the sensor is fitted) and  Prevent your foot from touching the rear
then withdraw it while the electric tailgate is bumper during a kicking motion.
operating, the electric tailgate stops moving. Otherwise, the rear bumper and the kick
If you slip your foot underneath the right or motion sensor may be damaged.
left side of the rear bumper (where the sensor
is fitted) again, the electric tailgate moves in
the opposite direction to the one in which it NOTE
was moving before.  If the hands-free access is used while the
doors are locked, all doors are unlocked.
*: Backward direction CAUTION  The kick motion sensor may not react and
the electric tailgate may not operate nor-
 When you make a kicking motion on a slope, mally in the following operating environ-
If you make a kicking motion to move your unpaved road, icy road surface, etc., be care- ments:
foot underneath the right or left side of the ful not to injure yourself by falling.
• When there is equipment nearby that emits
rear bumper (where the sensor is fitted) and strong radio waves, such as: a power sta-
then withdraw it, while carrying the keyless tion, a radio/TV broadcasting station.
operation key within the operating range of • When the vehicle is parked in a metered
the keyless operation system, the warning parking space (because the radio waves to
buzzer sounds, the hazard warning lamps detect a vehicle may affect)
flash, and the electric tailgate operates as fol- • When wearing a material that hardly con-
lows: duct electricity, such as rubber boots.

Tailgate
NOTE NOTE
 Do not attach or install plated parts or metal  If you perform unlocking operation while the
parts, etc., near the kick motion sensor. Oth- close and lock function is operating, all
erwise, the kick motion sensor may not react doors and the tailgate are unlocked, and the
3 and the electric tailgate may not operate nor- electric tailgate is closed to its fully closed
mally. position.
Refer to “To operate using the keyless opera-
tion function” on page 3-8.
 Close and lock function
E00315400035
Refer to “To lock/unlock without using the
keyless operation function” on page 3-10.
It is a function to make a reservation to lock Refer to “Locking and unlocking the tail-
all doors before the electric tailgate closes gate” on page 3-17.
automatically. 2. When the operation is completed nor-
 If the close and lock function is activated
mally, the external buzzer sounds, the
with the keyless operation key left in the
hazard warning lamps flash, and the door vehicle, the warning buzzer sounds and the
 Operational conditions
mirror is retracted. warning is displayed. In this case, all doors
The close and lock function operates when all and the tailgate cannot be unlocked.
of the following conditions are met. NOTE
 Make sure all doors and the tailgate are
 All doors except the electric tailgate are locked when leaving the vehicle.
fully closed.  If you operate the electric tailgate while the
 The keyless operation key is within the close and lock function is operating, the elec-
Make sure you have the keyless operation
operation range of the keyless operation tric tailgate stops moving, and all doors and
key with you before locking the doors and
system. the tailgate are unlocked.
the tailgate.
Refer to “Automatic operation” on page
3-19.  When the operation of close and lock func-
 To operate the close and lock function tion is completed with the security alarm set
Refer to “Manual operation” on page 3-27.
to “Activate”, the security alarm is set.
1. Press the close and lock switch (A) inside
For details, refer to “Security alarm system”
the electric tailgate once. on page 3-29.
The warning buzzer sounds intermittently,
all doors and the tailgate are locked, and
the electric tailgate is closed to its fully
closed position.

Tailgate
 Height memory NOTE

E00315500036
 The stop position of the electric tailgate can
The electric tailgate can be set to stop half- not be set to a height less than 1/5 from the
way while opening automatically. bottom.
3
[To set]
[To reset]
1. Use one of the following methods to stop
1. Open the electric tailgate to its fully open
the electric tailgate at an angle that you do
position manually.
not want to open it further.
2. Press and hold the tailgate inner switch
• Press an electric tailgate operation
for approximately 3 seconds.
switch or use the hands-free access while
3. The resetting is completed when a buzzer CAUTION
the electric tailgate is opening or closing.
sounds.  The safety mechanism will sometimes not
• Manual operation
2. Press and hold the tailgate inner switch operate depending on the condition of the
(A) for approximately 3 seconds.  Safety mechanism trapped object or how it is trapped.
E00315600037 Therefore, be especially careful not to trap a
The safety mechanism is activated if the elec- hand, part of your body or an object at this
time.
tric tailgate should trap a person or an object
 The safety mechanism is deactivated in the
during automatic operation, or if the sensors
following cases. Therefore, be especially
(A) on either side of the electric tailgate are
careful not to trap a hand or finger.
hit by a person or luggage. The warning
• Just before the electric tailgate is fully
buzzer sounds once for safety and the electric closed (to ensure complete closing of the
tailgate automatically moves in the direction electric tailgate)
opposite to the one in which it is operating. • When the electric tailgate is closed manu-
ally
3. The setting is completed when a buzzer

sounds.

Tailgate
CAUTION NOTE  Switching automatic operation of

 If the safety mechanism is repeatedly acti-  If snow has accumulated on the electric tail- the electric tailgate ON/OFF
E00315900030
vated, the tailgate could be switched to man- gate, remove it before operation.
ual operation. Be careful at this time, as the  The drop prevention mechanism could be When the operation mode is ON, automatic
3 electric tailgate could open or close sud- activated if manual operation is attempted operation can be switched ON/OFF by setting
denly, depending on its position. immediately after the electric tailgate is fully functions on the meter.
Once the electric tailgate is fully open or opened automatically.
closed, normal automatic operation is possi- [For vehicles equipped with Instruments -
ble again. Type A]
 Sudden operation prevention mech-
anism 1. Operate the multi information display
NOTE E00315800039 switch to switch the information screen to
 If the environment or usage conditions sub-
If the engine is started while the electric tail- the menu screen.
ject the sensors to the same kind of force as Refer to “Multi information display
gate is operating automatically, it may switch
that of trapping a person or object, the safety switch” on page 5-4.
mechanism could be activated. to manual operation due to insufficient bat-
tery voltage, making the electric tailgate stop Refer to “Changing the function settings”
 Do not damage the sensors when loading or on page 5-12.
unloading luggage, or when cleaning the rear intermittently while it moves. This is to stop
the electric tailgate from operating suddenly. 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
window. Doing so could prevent the tailgate
from closing automatically. After the tailgate is fully open or close, nor- play switch to select “ ”
mal automatic operation is possible again (Electric tailgate ON/OFF switch).
approximately 10 seconds later. 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
 Drop prevention mechanism play switch for approximately 2 seconds
or more to switch from ON to OFF or
E00315700038
CAUTION OFF to ON.
After the electric tailgate is opened automati-  The safety mechanism is deactivated while
cally, if it is detected that the tailgate drops The setting is changed to the selected con-
the sudden operation prevention mechanism
due to factors such as accumulated snow, the is operating. Therefore be especially careful
dition.
electric tailgate is closed automatically. not to trap a hand or finger at this time.
The warning buzzer sounds continuously [For vehicles equipped with Instruments -
while the drop prevention mechanism oper- Type B]
ates.
switches to switch the multi information
screen to the function setting display.
Tailgate
Refer to “8 inch colour LCD meter After unlocking the electric tailgate, press the 1. Insert the cloth-covered tip of a straight
switches” on page 5-21. tailgate open switch (A) and pull up the tail- blade (or minus) screwdriver into the
Refer to “Function setting display” on gate. notch of the lid (A) inside of the tailgate
page 5-38. and pry gently to open the lid.
2. Operate the 8 inch colour LCD meter 3
(Electric tailgate ON/OFF switch). Then,
press the Enter switch.
switches to select ON or OFF and press
the Enter switch to confirm the setting.
WARNING
 If automatic operation is turned off while
the electric tailgate is operating, it will
stop moving and switch to manual opera- NOTE 2. Move the lever (B) to open the tailgate.
tion. At this time, the electric tailgate  The electric tailgate cannot be pulled up
could open or close suddenly, depending when you do not open it as soon as the tail-
on its position. gate open switch is pressed.
In this case, press the tailgate open switch
once again and pull up the electric tailgate.
NOTE  The electric tailgate cannot be opened when
 If the electric tailgate is operated with each the battery is flat or disconnected.
switch while automatic operation is OFF, the
warning buzzer sounds 4 times to notify the <To open from inside the vehicle>
driver that the electric tailgate cannot be The electric tailgate can also be opened from
operated.
inside the vehicle.
It is designed to provide a way to open the 3. Push out on the electric tailgate to open it.
tailgate in the case of a discharged battery.
Manual operation
E00316200030
<To open from outside the vehicle>

Tailgate
WARNING CAUTION CAUTION

 Always keep the release lever lid on the  The safety mechanism is deactivated when  Do not touch the latch (A) on the inside of
electric tailgate closed when driving so the electric tailgate is closed manually. the electric tailgate. Otherwise, your fingers
that your luggage cannot accidentally Therefore be especially careful not to trap a could trapped in the latch when the tailgate
3 bump the lever and open the electric tail- hand or finger at this time. easy closer operates.
gate.
Tailgate easy closer
<To close> E00316100039
To close the electric tailgate, pull the electric
The tailgate easy closer is a mechanism for
tailgate grip (A) downward and release it
assisting the closing of the electric tailgate.
before the electric tailgate is completely
If the electric tailgate is closed to a position
closed, then gently push shut the electric tail-
where it is detected as being ajar, it closes
gate from the outside.
automatically.
 The tailgate easy closer operates even when
automatic operation of the electric tailgate is
WARNING set to OFF by the function settings on the
 Be careful not to trap your hands or fin- meter. Therefore, be especially careful not to
gers during operation of the tailgate easy trap a hand or finger at this time.
closer. If you think this could occur, press
an electric tailgate operation switch or use
the hands-free access. NOTE
The electric tailgate will return to the door  Repeated continuous operation of the open
ajar position. switch could activate the protection circuit
and temporarily prevent the tailgate easy
closer from operating.
In this case, press the open switch again after
CAUTION waiting for approximately 1 minute.
Then, the electric tailgate will open.
 When closing the electric tailgate, do not
close it directly putting the hands on the
electric tailgate grip. If the hands or arms got
caught, a serious injury could result.

Security alarm system
Security alarm system The security alarm has four System armed mode
E00301502491 modes:
The security alarm system is for alerting the (The buzzer stops and the security indicator
surrounding area of suspicious behaviour to lamp continues to blink with the indicator’s
reduced lit-up duration time.)
3
prevent unlawful entry into the vehicle by System preparation mode
operating an alarm if a door or the tailgate is Once the system preparation mode has ended,
(approximately 20 seconds)
opened when the vehicle has not been the system armed mode starts.
unlocked using the keyless entry system or If an unlawful opening of any of the doors or
(The buzzer sounds intermittently and the tailgate is detected during the system armed
the keyless operation function.
security indicator lamp in the instrument clus- mode, the alarm will be activated to warn
ter blinks.) people around the vehicle of an abnormal
CAUTION condition.
 Do not modify or add parts to the security Indicator lamp
Also, if unlawful moving of the vehicle is
alarm system.
attempted or a vehicle intrusion is detected,
Doing so could cause the security alarm to
malfunction.
the alarm will be activated.
The system preparation time extends from the Alarm activation

NOTE point at which all of the doors and the tailgate
 The alarm system will not be activated if the are locked by pressing of the LOCK switch Inside alarm (approximately 10 seconds):
doors and the tailgate have been locked using on the key, the keyless operation function or
a key, the inside lock knob or the central the close and lock function to the point at The buzzer sounds, warning those inside
door lock switch (instead of the keyless entry which the system armed mode goes into the vehicle of an abnormal condition.
system, the keyless operation function or the effect.
close and lock function). During this time, it is possible to temporarily Outside alarm (approximately 30 seconds):
open a door or the tailgate without using the
keyless entry system or the keyless operation The turn-signal lamps blink and the horn
function and without causing the alarm to sounds, warning people around the vehi-
sound (for example, when you forget some- cle of an abnormal condition.
thing inside the vehicle or realize that a win-
dow is open). Refer to “Alarm activation” on page 3-32.

1. Put the operation mode in OFF.
NOTE 2. Exit the vehicle and close all of the doors
Tailgate LOCK switch (except for vehicles
 The alarm will resume if unlawful actions equipped with the electric tailgate)
and tailgate.
are taken again, even if the alarm has
3. Press the LOCK switch (A) on the key,
stopped.
3 the driver’s or front passenger’s door
lock/unlock switch (B), the tailgate
LOCK switch (C) or use the close and
System cancellation
lock function in order to lock all the doors
and the tailgate.
It is possible to cancel the system activation
during the system preparation mode or the
system armed mode.
In addition, it is possible to cancel the alarm Tailgate LOCK switch (vehicles equipped with
once it has been activated. the electric tailgate)
Refer to “Cancelling the system” on page
3-31, “Cancelling the alarm” on page 3-32.
NOTE
 When lending the vehicle to another person
or allowing the vehicle to be driven by some-
one who is unfamiliar with the security alarm
system, be sure to give the person a proper Driver’s and front passenger’s door lock/unlock
explanation of the security alarm system. switches
If a person who is unfamiliar with the secu- By locking the vehicle using the keyless
rity alarm system accidentally unlocked the entry system, the keyless operation func-
vehicle, causing the alarm to sound, the tion or the close and lock function, the
alarm would be a nuisance to people nearby. system preparation mode is activated.
The buzzer makes an intermittent beeping
sound and the security indicator lamp in
Setting the system the instrument cluster flashes for confir-
E00301702578 mation.
Follow the procedure below to set the system
to the system armed mode.
Indicator lamp
NOTE NOTE
 The security alarm system can be activated  If the battery terminals are disconnected
when people are riding inside the vehicle or while the system is in the system preparation
when the windows are open. To prevent acci- mode, the memory will be erased.
dental activation of the alarm, do not set the  It is possible to register up to 4 keys. 3
NOTE system to the system armed mode while peo- As long as they are registered, any of the
 The system preparation mode is not activated ple are riding in the vehicle. keys, other than the one used to activate the
when the doors and the tailgate have been  Avoid leaving valuable items inside the vehi- system, can be used to cancel the system.
locked using a method other than the keyless cle even when the security alarm system has If you want to register additional keys,
entry system, the keyless operation function been set to the “active” mode. please contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
or the close and lock function (namely a key, MOTORS dealer.
the inside lock knob or the central door lock  The activation distance for keyless entry sys-
switch). tem is approximately 4 m.
 If the security indicator lamp in the instru-
Cancelling the system
If it is not possible to lock or unlock the
E00301802348
ment cluster does not blink after the locking vehicle by pressing the switch at the correct
operation using the keyless entry system or The following methods can be used to cancel distance or the security alarm system cannot
the keyless operation function, the security the system when it is in the system prepara- be set or cancelled using the switch, the bat-
alarm system may be malfunctioning. tion mode or the system armed mode. tery may need to be replaced.
Have the vehicle inspected at an authorised Replace the battery at your authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.  Pressing the UNLOCK switch on the key. MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
 Putting the operation mode in ON. If you replace the battery yourself, refer to
 Opening any one of the doors or the tail- “Procedure for replacing the key battery” on
4. After approximately 20 seconds, the page 3-5.
buzzer stops, and when the blinking of the gate, when the system is in the system
preparation mode.  If the UNLOCK switch on the key, or the
security indicator lamp starts to slow driver’s or front passenger’s door
down, the system armed mode goes into  Holding the keyless operation key and
lock/unlock switch is pressed and no door or
effect. pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s
the tailgate is opened within 30 seconds, the
The security indicator lamp continues to door lock/unlock switch, or pulling the doors and the tailgate will automatically
blink during the system armed mode. tailgate handle lever to unlock the doors relock. In this case as well, the system prepa-
and the tailgate. ration mode will go into effect.

NOTE NOTE
 The time between pressing of the UNLOCK  When the operation mode is put in ON, the
switch on the key, or the driver’s or front buzzer sounds 4 times. This operation indi-
passenger’s door lock/unlock switch and cates that the alarm was activated while the
3 automatic locking can be adjusted. Please vehicle was parked.
consult your authorised MITSUBISHI Please check the inside of the vehicle to con-
MOTORS dealer. firm that nothing was stolen.
 Even if the battery is disconnected, the alarm
activation memory will not be erased.
Alarm activation
E00301902495
When the system is in the system armed

mode, the alarm will be activated as follows
3. The alarm will resume if unlawful actions Electric window control
are taken again, even if the alarm has E00302201717
if the vehicle is unlocked or if any of the stopped.
doors or tailgate is opened using a method The electric windows can only be operated
other than the keyless entry system or the with the operation mode in ON.
keyless operation function. Cancelling the alarm
1. The inside alarm will be activated for
E00302001786
Electric window control switch
It is possible to halt the activation of an alarm E00302303611
approximately 10 seconds. using the following methods:
2. The alarm will be activated for approxi- Each door window opens or closes while the
mately 30 seconds.  Pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK switch corresponding switch is operated.
The turn-signal lamps will flash, and the on the key.
horn will sound intermittently. (After pressing of the LOCK switch, the
vehicle will lock if all the doors and the
tailgate are closed, after which the system
preparation mode will once again go into
effect.)
 Putting the operation mode in ON.
 Holding the keyless operation key and
locking or unlocking the doors and the
tailgate using the keyless operation func-
tion.
Driver’s switch Driver’s switches
The driver’s switches can be used to operate

all door windows. A window can be opened
or closed by operating the corresponding
3
switch.
Press the switch down to open the window,
and pull up the switch to close it.
If the switch is fully pressed down/pulled up,
the door window automatically opens/closes
1- Driver’s door window completely.
2- Front passenger’s door window If you want to stop the window movement, NOTE
3- Rear left door window operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc-  Repeated operation with the engine stopped
4- Rear right door window tion. will run down the battery. Operate the win-
5- Lock switch dow switches only while the engine is run-
ning.
NOTE  The rear door windows only open halfway.
 When the door window does not close auto-
WARNING matically even if the switch is fully pulled
 Before operating the electric window con- up, pull up the door window switch until the
trol, make sure that nothing is capable of window has been fully closed. Lock switch
being trapped (head, hand, finger, etc.). You should now be able to operate the door E00303102680
 Never leave the vehicle without removing window in a normal fashion. When this switch is operated, the passenger’s
the key.
switches cannot be used to open or close the
 Never leave a child (or other person who
might not be capable of safe operation of door windows and the driver’s switch cannot
the electric window control) in the vehicle
Passenger’s switches open or close any door windows other than
alone. the driver’s door window.
The passenger’s switches can be used to oper- To unlock, push it once again.
ate the corresponding passenger’s door win-
dows.
Press the switch down for opening the win-
dow, and pull up the switch for closing it.

Safety mechanism NOTE

E00302502456  The safety mechanism can be activated if the
When the door window is automatically driving conditions or other circumstances
cause the door windows to be subjected to a
3 closed by pulling up the switch fully, if a
physical shock similar to that caused by a
hand or head is trapped in the closing win-
trapped hand or head.
dow, it will lower automatically.
 If the following operation is performed, the
Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts safety mechanism will be cancelled and the
their head or hand out of the window when door window will not automatically
closing a window. open/close completely.
The lowered window will become operational • When the battery terminals are discon-
1- Lock after a few seconds. nected.
2- Unlock • When the fuse for electric window is
WARNING replaced.
• When the safety mechanism is activated
WARNING  If the battery terminals are disconnected
five or more times consecutively.
or the fuse for electric window is replaced,
 A child may tamper with the switch at the In such a case, the following procedure
the safety mechanism will be cancelled.
risk of its hands or head being trapped in should be implemented to rectify this situa-
If a hand or head got trapped, a serious
the window. When driving with a child in tion.
injury could result.
the vehicle, please press the window lock If the window is open, repeatedly raise the
switch to disable the passenger’s switches. appropriate window switch until that win-
dow has been fully closed. Following this,
CAUTION release the switch, raise the switch once
 The safety mechanism is cancelled just
Timer function before the window is fully closed. This
again and hold it in this condition for at least
1 second, then release it. You should now be
E00302402165
allows the window to close completely. able to operate door window in the normal
The door windows can be opened or closed Therefore be especially careful that no fin- fashion.
for 30 seconds after the engine is stopped. gers are trapped in the window.
However, once the driver’s door or the front  The safety mechanism is deactivated while
passenger’s door is opened, the windows can- the switch is pulled up. Therefore be espe-
not be operated. cially careful that fingers are not trapped in
the door window opening.

Seat and seat belts
Seat arrangement .............................................................................4-2 4

Seat adjustment ................................................................................4-4
Front seats ........................................................................................4-4
Second seats .....................................................................................4-5
Third seats ........................................................................................4-6
Head restraints .................................................................................4-7
Making a luggage area .....................................................................4-9
Making a flat seat ...........................................................................4-13
Seat belts ........................................................................................4-14
Pregnant women restraint ..............................................................4-19
Seat belt pre-tensioner system and force limiter system ...............4-19
Child restraint ................................................................................4-20
Seat belt inspection ........................................................................4-28
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-airbag .................................4-28
Seat arrangement
Seat arrangement
E00400202043
By operating the front, second or third seat,

select the desired seat arrangement.
4-2 Seat and seat belts

Seat arrangement
Normal usage
Flat seat  P.4-13
Folding the second seats

 P.4-9
Folding the third seatbacks forward

Making a luggage area
 P.4-11
Folding the third seats

 P.4-12
Seat and seat belts 4-3

Seat adjustment
Seat adjustment WARNING CAUTION

E00400302044  To minimize the risk of personal injury in  When sliding or reclining the seat rearward,
the event of a collision or sudden braking, pay careful attention to the rear seat passen-
Adjust the driver’s seat so that you are com-
the seatbacks should always be in the gers.
fortable and that you can reach the pedals, almost upright position while the vehicle is
steering wheel, switches etc. while retaining a in motion. The protection provided by the
4 clear field of vision. seat belts may be reduced significantly Front seats
when the seatback is reclined. There is E00400401628
WARNING greater risk that the passenger will slide

under the seat belt, resulting in serious
 Do not attempt to adjust the seat while
injury, when the seatback is reclined.
Manual type*
driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-
 Do not place objects under the seats. This
trol and result in an accident.
could prevent the seat from locking
 After seat adjustments are made, ensure
securely, and it could lead to an accident.
the adjusting mechanism (levers or han-
It may also cause damage to the seat or
dles etc.) are returned to their original
other parts.
positions, and the seating is locked in posi-
tion by attempting to move the seat for-
ward and rearward without using the
adjusting mechanism. CAUTION
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in the  Make sure the seat is adjusted by an adult or
luggage area of a vehicle. Also, the luggage with adult supervision for correct and safe
area and rear seats should never be used operation.
as a play area by children. In a collision,  Do not place a cushion or the like between
your back and the seatback while driving. 1- To adjust forward or backward
people or children riding unrestrained in
these areas are more likely to be seriously The effectiveness of the head restraints will Lift the handle and adjust the seat to the
injured or killed. be reduced in the event of an accident. desired position, and release the han-
 Do not allow people or children to ride in  The reclining mechanism of the front manual dle.
any area of your vehicle that is not seat’s seatback is spring loaded, causing it to 2- To recline the seatback
equipped with seats and seat belts, and fold the seatback forward when the lock Pull the lever up and then lean back-
make sure that everyone travelling in your lever is operated. When using the lever, sit ward to the desired position, and
vehicle is in a seat and wearing a seat belt, close to the seatback or hold it with your release the lever.
or in the case of a child is strapped in a hand to control its return motion.
child restraint.  When sliding the seats, be careful not to
catch your hand or foot.

Second seats
3- To adjust seat cushion height (driver’s 4- To adjust seat cushion angle
side only) Operate the switch as indicated by the
CAUTION
 The reclining mechanism of the seatback is
Turn the dial and adjust the seat cush- arrows and adjust the seat cushion
spring loaded, causing it to return to the ver-
ion height to the desired position. angle to the desired position. tical position when the lock lever is operated.
When using the lever, sit close to the seat-
Power type* NOTE back or hold it with your hand to control its
 To prevent the battery from running down, return motion. 4
operate the switch with the engine running.  If the seatback is reclined while the cup
holder is used, drinks could be spilled. If the
spilt drink is very hot, you could be burnt.
Second seats
E00402001530
NOTE
To recline the seatback.  It is possible to adjust the seatback angle
In order to recline the seatback, lean forward independently on each side.
slightly, pull the seatback lock lever up, and
then lean backward to the desired position
and release the lever. The seatback will lock Armrest
1- To adjust forward or backward in that position. E00402401736
Operate the switch as indicated by the To use the armrest, fold it down.
arrows and adjust the seat to the desired To return to the original position, push it
position. backward until it is flush with the seat.
2- To recline the seatback
Operate the switch as indicated by the
arrows and adjust the seatback angle to
the desired position.
3- To adjust seat height
Operate the switch as indicated by the
arrows and adjust the seat height to the
desired position.
If the entire switch is operated, then the
entire seat moves.

Third seats
To get in and out of the third

seat
E00402500280
Getting in and out of the third seat can be

made easily by folding the second seat.
4 Refer to “Folding the second seats” on page
4-9.
NOTE CAUTION
 Do not climb or sit on the armrest. Doing so  For reasons of safety, do not sit in the third
could damage the armrest. seat when using the tether anchor strap.
 The armrest contains a cup holder for second Refer to “Installing a child restraint system
seat occupants. to the lower anchorage (ISOFIX child
Refer to “Cup holder” on page 7-24. restraint mountings) and tether anchorage”
 When using the armrest, the cup holder may on page 4-26.
come out automatically.
However this phenomenon does not indicate To recline the seatback
a malfunction. Pull the seatback lock release band and adjust
A lock mechanism is released because of a
shock by folding or returning the seat
Third seats the seatback by hand to the desired position,
extremely hard. E00402701625 and release the strap.
 When returning the armrest to the original
position, make sure to stow the cup holder.
WARNING
 For reasons of safety, whenever passen-
gers sit in the third seat, be sure to raise
all the head restraints of the second seats.

Head restraints
To adjust height Second or third seats
To reduce the risk of injury in an accident,

Front seat pull up the head restraint to the locked posi-
tion.
Adjust the head restraint height so that the
centre of the head restraint is as close as pos- To raise the head restraint, move it upward. 4
sible to ear level to reduce the chances of To lower the restraint, move it downward
injury in the event of collision. Any person while pushing the height adjusting knob (A)
too tall for the head restraint to reach their in the direction of the arrow. After adjust-
seated ear level, should adjust the restraint as ment, push the head restraint downward and
high as possible. make sure that it is locked.
To raise the head restraint, move it upward.
Head restraints To lower the restraint, move it downward
Second seats
E00403302928 while pressing the height adjusting knob (A)
in the direction of the arrow. After adjust-
WARNING ment, push the head restraint downward and
 Driving without the head restraints in make sure that it is locked.
place can cause you and your passengers
serious injury or death in an accident. To
reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
always make sure the head restraints are
installed and properly positioned when
the seat is occupied.
 Never place a cushion or similar device on
the seatback. This can adversely affect
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the
restraint.

Head restraints
Third seats WARNING To install

 When a person sits in the second or the
third seats, pull up the head restraint to a Confirm that the head restraint is facing the
height at which it locks in position. Be
correct direction, and then insert it into the
sure to make this adjustment before start-
seatback while pressing the height adjusting
ing to drive. Serious injuries could other-
4 wise be suffered in the result of an impact. knob (A) in the direction indicated by the
arrow.
Second seats The head restraint stalk with the adjustment
notches (B) must be installed in the hole with
the adjusting knob (A).
Third seats
CAUTION
 Confirm that the height adjusting knob (A) is
correctly adjusted as shown in the illustra-
tion, and also lift the head restraints to
To remove ensure that they do not come out of the seat-
back.
Lift the head restraint with the height adjust-
ing knob (A) pressed in.

CAUTION
 When folding or storing the seat, be sure not
to catch your hand or leg.
NOTE 4
 It is possible to folding the seat indepen-
dently on each side.
Folding the second seats

CAUTION E00403801287
 The shape and size of the head restraint dif- Making a luggage area
fers according to the seat. Always use the E00403401485 To fold
correct head restraint provided for the seat
To create luggage space, you can fold the sec-
and do not install the head restraint in the 1. Adjust the angle of the front seatbacks in
ond and/or the third seats.
wrong direction. the upright position and move the front
seat forward. (Refer to “Front seats” on
WARNING page 4-4)
 When driving the vehicle, do not allow 2. Store the seat belt buckles in the storage
anyone to sit on the third seat if the second pockets of the second seats.
seat is folded. The second seat could tip Refer to “Second and third seat belt stor-
rearward in the event of hard braking, a age” on page 4-18.
collision or sudden starts resulting in seri-
3. Lower the head restraints of the second
ous injuries.
seat to the lowest position.
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7.
4. Pull up the lever (A), then tilt the seatback
CAUTION forward.
 Do not stack luggage above the seatback
height. Secure the luggage firmly.
Serious accidents could result due to unre-
strained objects entering the passenger com-
partment during sudden braking.

CAUTION
 Do not allow any person to sit on the folded
seat, and do not place luggage on it. The
seat’s mounting fittings could bend under the
weight, making it impossible for the seat to
be retained on the vehicle.
4
To return
1. Remove the retaining band while support-
5. Lift the whole seat forward. 7. Securely retain the second seat by hooking the seat by hand. Store the retaining
ing the retaining bands onto the head band in the original position then gently
restraint of the front seat and adjusting the lower the seat.
length of the retaining band.
6. Remove the retaining band (B) in the

original position from the second seat.
CAUTION
WARNING  When returning the second seat while there
 Be sure to securely retain the folded seat are occupants in the third seat, be careful not
using the retaining bands. Unless retained, to trap the feet of the third seat occupants
the seat may tip, causing a serious acci- with the second seat.
dent.

2. Push the seat until you hear a “click” and 4. Pull the seatback lock release band (B),
the seat locks securely. then tilt the seatback forward until you
Folding the third seatbacks for- hear a “click”.
ward
E00403601113
To fold
1. Lower the head restraints of the third seat
to the lowest position. (Refer to “Head
restraints” on page 4-7.)
2. Store the seat belt buckles in the storage
pockets of the third seats.
Refer to “Second and third seat belt stor-
3. Raise the seatback until it locks securely
age” on page 4-18.
into place.
3. Pull the lock release band (A), then lift the
Push lightly on the seatback to confirm To return
seat cushion forward.
that it has actually been secured.
1. Pull the seatback lock release band (B),
then raise the seatback until it locks
securely into place.

Push lightly on the seatback to confirm
Folding the third seats
E00403901129
To fold
4 1. Fold the second seats. (Refer to “Folding

the second seats” on page 4-9.)
2. Lower the head restraints of the third seat
to the lowest position. (Refer to “Head
restraints” on page 4-7.)
3. Store the seat belt buckles in the storage
pockets on the third seats. 6. Pull the seatback lock release band (B),
Refer to “Second and third seat belt stor- then tilt the seatback forward until you
2. Gently lower the seat cushion, then push age” on page 4-18. hear a “click”.
the seat cushion until you hear a “click” 4. Pull the lock release band (A), then lift the
and the seat locks securely. seat cushion forward.
7. Pull up the cover (D) from the rear direc-

tion.
5. Raise the stand (C), and then gently lower
the seat cushion.

Making a flat seat
3. Lift the seat cushion backward. Fold the

To return stand (C) and then gently lower the seat
cushion.
Making a flat seat
E00404302130
1. Fasten the cover to the seatback with the
band (E). By removing the head restraints and fully
reclining the seatbacks of the seats, one large
flat seat is achieved.
WARNING
 Never drive with passengers on the flat
seat. This is highly dangerous.
CAUTION
4. Push the seat cushion until you hear a  To make a flat seat, stop the vehicle in a safe
“click” and the seat locks securely. place.
2. Pull the seatback lock release band (B),  Make sure the seat is adjusted by an adult or
then raise the seatback until it locks with adult supervision for correct and safe
operation.
securely into place.
 Do not walk around on top of the seats after
Push lightly on the seatback to confirm
they have been laid flat.

Seat belts
4. Store the front head restraints between the
CAUTION front seats.
 To ensure the seats are locked securely,
The flat seat configuration is now com-
attempt to move them back and forth.
plete.
 Do not jump on, or impact the seatbacks
Reverse the above procedures when
heavily.
returning the seat to the normal position.
4  To raise the seatback, put a hand on the seat-
back and raise slowly. Never have a child do
this operation, or an unexpected accident
may result.
1. Remove the head restraints from the front

seats, and raise the armrest.
3. Recline the second seatbacks backward.
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7,
Refer to “Second seats” on page 4-5.
“Armrest” on page 4-5.
Seat belts
E00404802018
To protect you and your passengers in the

event of an accident, it is the most important
that the seat belts be worn correctly while you
drive.
2. Slide the front seats fully forward, then tip CAUTION The front seat belts have a pre-tensioner sys-
their seatbacks backward.  Since the gap is made between the seatbacks tem. These belts are used the same way as a
Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-4. and the seat cushion, do not recline the front conventional seat belt.
seatbacks backward beyond necessity. Refer to “Seat belt pre-tensioner system and
Doing so could wrinkle the front or second force limiter system” on page 4-19.
seats and damage them.

Seat belts
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle until
WARNING WARNING a “click” is heard.
 Seat belts should always be worn by every  Always adjust the seat belt to a snug fit.
adult who drives or rides in this vehicle,  Always wear the lap portion of the belt
and by all children who are large enough over your hips.
to wear seat belts properly.
Other children should always use proper
child restraint systems. 3-point type seat belt (with 4
 Always place the shoulder belt over your emergency locking mechanism)
shoulder and across your chest. Never put E00404902905
it behind you or under your arm.
This type of belt requires no length adjust-
 One seat belt should be used by only one
person. Doing otherwise can be danger-
ment. Once worn, the belt adjusts itself to the
ous. movement of wearer, but in the event of a
 The seat belt will provide its wearer with sudden or strong shock, the belt automatically
maximum protection if the recliner seat- locks to hold the wearer’s body. WARNING
back is placed in fully upright position.  Never wear the lap portion of the belt
When the seatback is reclined, there is NOTE across your abdomen. During accidents it
greater risk that the passenger will slide can press sharply against abdomen and
 You can check if the belt locks by pulling it
under the belt, especially in a forward increase the risk of injury.
forward quickly.
impact accident, and may be injured by  The seat belts must not be twisted when
the belt or by striking the instrument worn.
panel or seatbacks.
 Remove any twists when using the belt. To fasten
 No modifications or additions should be
3. Pull the belt slightly to adjust slackness as
made by the user which will either prevent 1. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding desired.
the seat belt adjusting devices from oper- the latch plate.
ating to remove slack, or prevent the seat To unfasten
belt assembly from being adjusted to NOTE
remove slack.  When the seat belts cannot be pulled out in a
 Never hold a child in your arms or on locked condition, pull the belts once force- Hold the latch plate and press the button on
your lap when riding in this vehicle, even fully and then return them. After that, pull the buckle.
if you are wearing your seat belt. To do so the belts out slowly once again.
risks severe or fatal injury to your child in
a collision or sudden stop.

Seat belts
Seat belt reminder NOTE

E00409802749  If the seat belt subsequently remains unfas-
Warning lamp tened, the warning lamp and the tone will
issue further warnings each time the vehicle
starts moving from a stop.
4  For the front passenger seat, the warning

function works only while a person is sitting
on the seat.
Warning display
 When luggage is placed on the front passen-
ger seat, a sensor in the seat cushion may,
depending on the weight and position of the
luggage, cause the warning tone to sound
NOTE and the warning lamp to come on.
 As the belt retracts automatically, keep the
latch plate held while retracting so that the
If the operation mode is put in ON while a
belt stows slowly. Failure to do this could
seat belt is not fastened, the warning lamp Adjustable seat belt anchor
damage the vehicle.
 If the seat belt (A) or ring (B) becomes dirty, comes on and the tone sounds for approxi- (front seats)
the belt may not retract smoothly. If the seat mately 6 seconds to remind the driver and/or E00405001674
belt and ring are dirty, clean them with a the front passenger to fasten the seat belt. The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted.
mild soap or detergent solution. If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still To move the anchor, pull the lock knob (A)
unfastened, the warning lamp will blink and and slide the anchor to the desired position.
the tone will sound intermittently until the Release the lock knob to lock the anchor into
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, “FAS- position.
TEN SEAT BELT” is displayed on the infor-
mation screen in the instrument cluster.
WARNING
 Do not install any accessory or sticker that
makes the lamp difficult to see.

Seat belts
WARNING WARNING NOTE

 When adjusting the seat belt anchor, set it  Be sure to securely connect the both latch  Pulling out the latch plate by force may dam-
at a position that is sufficiently high so plate (A and B). Failing to do so could sig- age the headliner.
that the belt will make full contact with nificantly reduce the amount of protection
your shoulder but will not touch your and cause serious injures in a collision or a
2. Pull out the buckle (C) from the seat cush-
neck. sudden stop.
ion.
3. Pull the seat belt and insert the small latch
plate (A) into the buckle (C).
Second-centre 3-point type seat To fasten 4. Insert the latch plate (B) into the buckle
belt 1. Pull out the latch plate (B) and then pull (D).
E00412701080
out the small latch plate (A) by tilting it as
The second-centre 3-point type seat belt must shown in the illustration.
be worn correctly as illustrated.

Seat belts
5. Pull the belt slightly to adjust slackness as
desired.
To unfasten
1. Hold the latch plate and press the button
4 on the buckle.
NOTE
 As the belt retracts automatically, keep the
latch plate held while retracting so that the
belt stows slowly. Failure to do this could 3. Store the seat belt buckle in the storage
damage the vehicle and hit passengers. pocket. Centre seating position (3-point type seat
 To release the buckle (C), press the button (Refer to next column.) belt)
(E) with a narrow-tipped object (latch plate
or mechanical key etc.). Refer to “Second-centre 3-point type seat
Second and third seat belt stor- belt” on page 4-17.
age
E00405401115 Seat belt buckle storage
Seat belt plate storage Store the seat belt buckles in the storage
pockets.
Outboard seating position
After passing the belt through the rear notch

(A), insert the plate into the front notch (B).
2. After the seat belt is retracted completely,

insert the small latch plate (A) into holder
(F), and then insert the latch plate (B) into
the holder (F).

Pregnant women restraint
Second seat Seat belt pre-tensioner sys- CAUTION

tem and force limiter system  Installation of audio equipment or repairs in
the vicinity of the pre-tensioner seat belts or
E00405701509
floor console must be performed by an
The driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
each have a seat belt equipped with a pre-ten- It is important to do so because the work
sioner system and force limiter system. could affect the pre-tensioner systems. 4
Third seat  If you need to scrap the vehicle, please con-
sult an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Pre-tensioner system dealer. It is important to do so because unex-
E00405802477 pected activation of the pre-tensioner seat
When the operation mode is in ON, if there is belts could cause injuries.
a frontal impact or a side impact (vehicles
equipped with SRS side airbags and SRS cur-
tain airbags) severe enough to injure the NOTE
driver and/or front passenger, the pre-ten-  The pre-tensioner seat belts will be activated
sioner system will retract their respective seat if the vehicle suffers a severe impact, even if
Pregnant women restraint the seat belts are not worn.
E00405600064
belts instantaneously, thus maximizing the
seat belt’s effectiveness.  The pre-tensioner seat belts are designed to
work only once. After the pre-tensioner seat
WARNING belts have been activated, they must be
 Seat belts work for everyone, including WARNING replaced by an authorised MITSUBISHI
pregnant women. Pregnant women should  To obtain the best results from your pre- MOTORS dealer.
use the available seat belts. This will tensioner seat belt, make sure you have
reduce the likelihood of injury to both the adjusted your seat correctly and wear
woman and the unborn child. The lap belt
should be worn across the thighs and as
your seat belt properly. SRS warning
E00405900360
snug against the hips as possible, but not
across the waist. Consult your doctor if The same warning lamp/display is shared by
you have any additional questions or con- the SRS airbags and the pre-tensioner seat
cerns. belts.
Refer to “SRS warning lamp/display” on
page 4-38 .

Child restraint
Force limiter system WARNING WARNING

E00406001248  When attaching a child restraint system to  Extreme Hazard!
In the event of a collision, each force limiter the rear seat, prevent the front seatbacks NEVER use a rearward facing child
from touching the child restraint system. restraint on a seat protected by an
system will effectively absorb the load
Otherwise, the child could be seriously ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH
applied to the seat belt so as to minimize the
injured in the event of hard braking or a or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
4 impact to the passenger. collision. occur.
Child restraint Caution for installing the child Use rearward facing child restraints in the
rear seat or turn off the front passenger’s air-
E00406403770
restraint on vehicle with front bag ON-OFF switch. (Refer to “To turn an
When transporting children in your vehicle,
some type of child restraint system should
passenger airbag airbag off” on page 4-32.)
always be used according to the size of the
child. This is required by law in most coun- The label shown here is attached on vehicles
with front passenger airbag. Front passenger’s
tries.
airbag ON
The regulations concerning driving with chil-
dren in the front seat may differ from country
to country. You are advised to comply with
the relevant regulations.
WARNING
 When possible, put children in the rear
seat. Accident statistics indicate that chil-
dren of all sizes and ages are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat rather
than in the front seat.
 Holding a child in your arms is no substi-
tute for a restraint system. Failure to use a
proper restraint system can result in
severe or fatal injury to your child.
 Each child restraint device or fixing is to
be used only by one child.

Child restraint
If the child restraint system can be pulled
WARNING forward or to either side easily on the seat
A REARWARD FACING CHILD
cushion after the seat belt has been tight-
RESTRAINT must NOT be used in the
ened, choose another manufacturer’s child
front passenger seat if the front passen-
ger’s airbag has not been deactivated. The restraint system.
force of an inflating airbag could kill or
cause serious injuries to the child. A rear- WARNING
4
ward facing child restraint should be used
 When installing a child restraint system,
in the rear seat.
refer to the instructions provided by the
A FORWARD FACING CHILD
manufacturer of the restraint system.
RESTRAINT should be used in the rear
Failure to do so can result in severe or
seat whenever possible; if it must be used
fatal injury to your child.
in the front passenger seat, turn off the
 After installation, push and pull the child
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch. Instruction:
restraint system back and forth, and side
Failure to do so could kill or cause serious
 For small infants, an infant carrier should to side, to see that it is positively secured.
injuries to the child.
If the child restraint system is not installed
be used. For small children whose height
securely, it may cause injury to the child
when seated allows the shoulder belt to lie or other occupants in the case of accident
Infants and small children in contact with the face or the throat, a or sudden stops.
E00406602283
child seat should be used.  When the child restraint system is not in
 The child restraint system should be use, keep your child restraint system
When transporting infants and small children
appropriate for your child’s weight and secured with the seat belt or remove it
in your vehicle, follow the instruction given
height and properly fit the vehicle. For a from the vehicle in order to prevent it
below.
higher degree of safety: THE CHILD from being thrown around inside the vehi-
RESTRAINT SYSTEM SHOULD BE cle during an accident.
INSTALLED IN THE REAR SEAT.
 Before purchasing a child restraint sys-
tem, try installing it in the rear seat to NOTE
make sure there is a good fit. Because of  Depending on the seating position in the
the location of the seat belt buckles and vehicle and the child restraint system that
the shape of the seat cushion, it may be you have, the child restraint can be attached
using one of the following two ways:
difficult to securely install some manufac-
turer’s child restraint systems.

Child restraint
NOTE
• Using the lower anchorage in the second
seat ONLY if the child restraint has ISOFIX
mountings (See page 4-26).
• Using the seat belt (See page 4-27).
4
Older children
E00406701405
Children who have outgrown the child

restraint system should be seated in the rear
seat and wear combination lap shoulder belt.
The lap portion of the belt should be snug and
positioned low on the abdomen so that it is
below the top of the hip-bone. Otherwise, the
belt could intrude into the child’s abdomen
during an accident and cause injury.

Child restraint
Suitability for various ISOFIX positions

E00411402612
Vehicle ISOFIX positions

Mass Group Size class Fixture
Second Outboard
carrycot F ISO/L1 X 4
G ISO/L2 X
0 -Up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X
0+ -Up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 X
D ISO/R2 X
C ISO/R3 X
I -9 to 18 kg D ISO/R2 X
C ISO/R3 X
B ISO/F2 IUF
B1 ISO/F2X IUF
A ISO/F3 IUF
II & III -15 to 36 kg －－ X
CAUTION
 When installing a child restraint system, remove the head restraint from the seat.
 Do not sit in the middle seating position of the second seat when installing a child restraint system to the left outboard seating position of the second seat.
Because the child restraint interferes with the seat belt, you cannot fasten the seat belt correctly.

Child restraint
Key of characters to be inserted in the above table:

 IUF- Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
 X- ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group.
4 Suitability for various seating positions

E00406803615
Seating Position
Front Passenger
Mass Group Second
Deactivated Air- Second Centre Third
Activated Airbag Outboard
bag*1
0 -Up to 10 kg X U U X U
0+ -Up to 13 kg X U U X U
I -9 to 18 kg X U U X U
II & III -15 to 36 kg X U*2 U*2 X U*2
*1: With front passenger’s airbag deactivated by means of front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.
*2: Do not remove the head restraint when installing a booster cushion.
CAUTION
 When installing a child restraint system, remove the head restraint from the seat.
However, do not remove the head restraint when installing a booster cushion (see page 4-27).
 When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger power seat, adjust the seat height to the highest position.
 When installing “universal” category child restraint system on the outboard seating position of the second seat, adjust the second seatback angle to 1 step
rearward from the most upright position.
 Do not sit in the middle seating position of the second seat when installing a child restraint system to the left outboard seating position of the second seat.
Because the child restraint interferes with the seat belt, you cannot fasten the seat belt correctly.

Child restraint
Key of characters to be inserted in the above table:

 U- Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
 X- Seating position not suitable for children in this mass group.

Child restraint
Installing a child restraint sys-

tem to the lower anchorage
(ISOFIX child restraint mount-
ings) and tether anchorage
4 E00408902192
Lower anchorage location
Your vehicle’s rear seat is fitted with lower

anchorages for attaching a child restraint sys- A: Child restraint system connectors
tem with ISOFIX mountings. CAUTION
 The anchorages are only applicable for child
restraints fitted in the second seat with the To install
head restraints removed.
1. Remove any foreign material in or around
the connectors and ensure the vehicle seat
Child restraint system with ISO- belt is in its normal storage position.
2. Remove the head restraint from the loca-
FIX mountings tion in which you wish to install a child
restraint system.
The child restraint system is designed only Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7.
for seats that incorporate lower anchorages. 3. Push the child restraint system’s connec-
Retain the child restraint system using the tors (A) into the lower anchorages (B) in
lower anchorages. accordance with the instructions provided
It is not necessary to retain the child restraint by the child restraint system’s manufac-
Tether anchorage locations system using the vehicle’s seat belts. turer.
There are 2 child restraint anchorage points

located on the headliner behind the second
seats.

Child restraint
Installing a child restraint sys-

tem to a 3-point type seat belt
(with emergency locking mech-
anism)
E00407102168
4
Installation:
1. Put a child restraint system on the seat in
which you wish to install it, and remove
If your child restraint system with a tether the head restraint from the seat.
strap, perform the step 4 through 6. Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7.
If your child restraint system without a tether
strap, perform the step 6. CAUTION
NOTE  Do not remove the head restraint when
4. Open the cover from the tether anchor  If it is difficult to latch the tether strap hook, installing a booster cushion.
installation point with your hand as illus- turn the hook sideways.
trated.
5. Latch the tether strap hook (C) of the 6. Push and pull the child restraint system in
child restraint system to the tether anchor- all directions to be sure it is secured.
age fitting (D) and tighten the top tether
strap hook so it is securely fastened.
To remove
Remove the child restraint system in accord-

ance with the instructions provided by the
2. Route the belt through the child restraint
child restraint system’s manufacturer.
according to the child restraint system
manufacturer’s instructions, then insert
the latch plate into the buckle.
3. Remove all slack by using the locking
clip.
Seat belt inspection
4. Before putting the child in the restraint,
push and pull the restraint in all directions Seat belt inspection WARNING
 Do not insert any foreign objects (pieces of
to be sure it is secure. Do this before each E00406301847
plastic, paper clips, buttons, etc.) in the
use. Check the belts for cuts, worn or frayed web-
buckle or retractor mechanism. In addi-
bing and for cracked or deformed metallic tion, do not modify, remove, or install the
To remove parts. Replace the belt assembly if defective. seat belt. Otherwise, the seat belt may not
4 be able to provide adequate protection in a
Remove the plate from the buckle, then WARNING collision or other situation.
remove the seat belt from the child restraint  All seat belt assemblies including retrac-
system. tors and attaching hardware should be
inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer after any collision. We
WARNING recommend that seat belt assemblies in
 For some type of child restraint, the lock- use during a collision be replaced unless
ing clip (A) should be used to help avoid the collision was minor and the belts show
personal injury during a collision or sud- no damage and continue to operate prop-
den manoeuvre. erly.
 A dirty belt should be cleaned with neu-
It must be fitted and used in accordance  Do not attempt to repair or replace any
tral detergent in warm water. After rins-
with the child restraint manufacturer’s part of the seat belt assemblies; this work
ing in water, let it dry in the shade. Do not
instructions. should be done by an authorised
attempt to bleach or re-dye the belts
The locking clip must be removed when MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. Failure
because this affects their characteristics.
the child restraint is removed. to have an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer perform the work could
reduce the effectiveness of the belts and Supplemental restraint sys-
could result in serious injury in the event
of a collision. tem (SRS)-airbag
 Once the pre-tensioner has activated, it E00407203805
cannot be re-used. The information for SRS airbags includes

It must be replaced together with the important information concerning the driver’s
retractor.
and front passenger’s airbags, the driver’s
knee airbag, the side airbags and the curtain
airbags.

Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-airbag
The SRS driver’s and front passenger’s air- occupants, including the passengers as well
bags are designed to supplement the primary as the driver, must wear their seat belts.
protection of the driver and front passenger
side seat belt systems by providing those
occupants with protection against head and
How the supplemental restraint
chest injuries in certain moderate-to-severe system works
frontal collisions. E00407303301 4
The SRS includes the following components:
The SRS driver’s knee airbag (if so equipped)
is designed to supplement the primary protec-
tion of the driver’s seat belt system. It can
reduce the forward movement of the driver’s 6- Side airbag modules*
lower legs and provide increased overall body 7- Curtain airbag modules*
protection in certain moderate-to-severe fron-
tal collisions. Only when the operation mode is in ON, the
airbags will operate.
The SRS side airbags (if so equipped) are
The airbags deployment produces a sudden,
designed to supplement properly worn seat
loud noise, and releases some smoke and
belts and provide the driver and front passen-
powder, but these conditions are not injuri-
ger with protection against chest injuries in
1- Airbag module (Passenger) ous, and do not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
certain moderate-to-severe side impact colli-
2- Front passenger’s airbag indicator People with respiratory problems may feel
sions.
3- Airbag module (Driver) some temporary irritation from chemicals
The SRS curtain airbags (if so equipped) are 4- Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF used to produce the deployment; open the
designed to supplement properly worn seat switch windows after airbag deployment, if safe to
belts and provide the driver and passenger 5- Driver’s knee airbag module* do so.
with protection against head injuries in cer- The airbags deflate very rapidly after deploy-
tain moderate-to-severe side impact colli- ment, so there is little danger of obscured
sions. vision.
The SRS is NOT a substitute for the seat

belts. To ensure the maximum protection dur-
ing all types of collisions and accidents, all

CAUTION
 Airbags inflate at an extremely rapid speed.
In certain situations, contact with inflating
airbags can result in abrasions, bruises, light
cuts, and the like.
4
WARNING
 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP-
ERLY SEATED.
A driver or front passenger too close to
the steering wheel or instrument panel
during airbag deployment can be killed or WARNING WARNING
seriously injured.  Infants and small children should never  Older children should be seated in the
Airbags inflate very fast, and with great be unrestrained, stand up against the rear seat, properly wearing the seat belt,
force. instrument panel or held in your arms or with an appropriate booster seat if
If the driver and front passenger are not on your lap. They could be seriously needed.
properly seated and restrained, the air- injured or killed in a collision, including
bags may not protect you properly, and when the airbag inflates. They should be
properly seated in the rear seat in an
could cause serious or fatal injuries when
appropriate child restraint system. See the
Caution for installing the child
they inflate.
 Do not sit on the edge of the seat, or sit “Child restraint” section of this owner’s restraint on vehicle with front
with your lower legs too close to the manual. passenger’s airbag
instrument panel, or lean head or chest E00408802146
close to the steering wheel or instrument
The label shown here is attached on vehicles
panel. Do not put feet or legs on or against
the instrument panel. with front passenger’s airbag.
 Place all infants and small children in the
rear seat and properly restrained using an
appropriate child restraint system.
The rear seat is the safest for infants and
children.

(Refer to “To turn an airbag off” on page
4-32)
Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is
located as shown in the illustration.
The indicator normally comes on when the

WARNING operation mode is put in ON, and goes off a
 Extreme Hazard!
few seconds later.
NEVER use a rearward facing child
When the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
restraint on a seat protected by an
ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH switch is turned OFF, the OFF indicator will
or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can stay on to show that the front passenger’s air-
occur. Front passenger’s airbag indi- bag is not operational. When the front passen-
ger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is turned ON,
cator the OFF indicator goes off, and the ON indi-
E00410201645
Front passenger’s airbag ON- cator comes on for approximately 1 minute to
The front passenger’s airbag indicator is show that the front passenger’s airbag is oper-
OFF switch located in the instrument panel. ational.
E00410101501
The front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch

can be used to disable the front passenger’s
WARNING
 Do not fit any accessory that makes the
airbag. If you have a child restraint system
indicator impossible to see, and do not
that cannot be fitted to any seat other than the cover the indicator with a sticker. You
front passenger seat, be sure to turn OFF the would not be able to verify the status of
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch the passenger airbag system.
before using it.

The front passenger’s airbag is now deacti-
To turn an airbag off WARNING vated and will not deploy until switched on
E00412301220 • If the OFF indicator remains on when
again.
the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
WARNING switch is turned ON, do not allow anyone
 To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury: to sit on the front passenger seat. We rec- Driver’s and front passenger’s
ommend you to have the system
4 • Always put the operation mode in OFF,
before operating the front passenger’s inspected by an authorised
airbag system
E00407401920
airbag ON-OFF switch. Failure to do so MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
could adversely affect the airbag perfor- The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-
mance. To turn an airbag off, follow these steps: ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.
• Wait at least 60 seconds to operate the
1. Insert the key into the front passenger’s The front passenger’s airbag is contained in
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch the instrument panel above the glove box.
after putting the operation mode in OFF.
airbag ON-OFF switch, and turn it to the
“OFF” position. The driver’s airbag and the front passenger’s
The SRS airbag system is designed to airbag are designed to inflate at the same time
retain enough voltage to deploy the air- 2. Remove the key from the front passen-
ger’s airbag ON-OFF switch. even if the passenger seat is not occupied.
bag.
• Always remove the key from the front 3. Put the operation mode in ON. The front
passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch after passenger’s airbag OFF indicator lamp
operating that switch. Failure to do so will stay on.
could lead to improper position of the
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
switch.
• Do not turn OFF the front passenger’s
airbag ON-OFF switch except when a
child restraint system is fitted to the
front passenger seat.
• If the OFF indicator does not come on
when the front passenger’s airbag ON-
OFF switch is turned OFF, do not fit a
child restraint system to the front pas-
senger seat. We recommend you to have
the system inspected by an authorised

moderate to severe frontal impact. The typi- another stationary vehicle, pole or a guard
Driver’s knee airbag system* cal condition is shown in the illustration. rail).
E00412401188
Because frontal collisions can easily move
The driver’s knee airbag is located under the you out of position, it is important to always
steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is properly wear your seat belts. Your seat belts
designed to deploy at the same time as the will help keep you a safe distance from the
driver’s front airbag. steering wheel and instrument panel during 4
the initial stages of airbag deployment. The
initial stage of airbag inflation is the most
forceful, and can possibly cause serious or
fatal injuries. Moreover, the seat belts in your
vehicle are your primary means of protection
in a collision. The SRS airbags are designed
1- Head-on collision with a solid wall at to provide additional protection. Therefore,
speed of approximately 25 km/h or for your safety and the safety of all occu-
higher pants, be sure to always properly wear your
2- Moderate to severe frontal impact seat belts.
within the shaded area between the
arrows The front airbags and driver’s
knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY
Deployment of front airbags The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag when…
and driver’s knee airbag* will deploy if the severity of impact is above
E00407502872
the designed threshold level, comparable to With certain types of frontal collisions, the
an approximately 25 km/h collision when vehicle’s body structure is designed to absorb
impacting straight into a solid wall that does the shock to help protect the occupants from
The front airbags and driver’s not move or deform. If the severity of the harm. (The vehicle body’s front area may
knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO impact is below the above threshold level, the deform significantly as it absorbs the impact.)
DEPLOY when… front airbags and driver’s knee airbag may Under such circumstances, the front airbags
not deploy. However, this threshold speed and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy irre-
will be considerably higher if the vehicle spective of the deformation and damage to
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are
strikes an object that absorbs the impact by the vehicle body.
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a
either deforming or moving (for example,
Examples of some typical conditions are they cannot typically provide protection to Examples of some typical conditions are
shown in the illustration. the occupant. shown in the illustration.
Such conditions are shown in the illustration.
1- When colliding with a utility pole, tree 1- Collision with an elevated

or other narrow object. 1- Rear end collisions median/island or kerb
2- Vehicle slides under the rear body of a 2- Side collisions 2- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pot-
truck 3- Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof hole
3- Oblique frontal impacts 3- Vehicle drives down a steep slope and
Because the front airbags and driver’s knee hits the ground
Because the front airbags and driver’s knee airbag do not protect the occupant in all types
airbag do not protect the occupant in all types of collisions, be sure to always properly wear Because the front airbags and driver’s knee
of frontal collisions, be sure to always prop- your seat belts. airbag may deploy in certain types of unex-
erly wear your seat belts. pected impacts as shown in the illustration
The front airbags and driver’s that can easily move you out of position, it is
The front airbags and driver’s important to always properly wear your seat
knee airbag MAY DEPLOY belts. Your seat belts will help keep you a safe
knee airbag ARE NOT when… distance from the steering wheel and instru-
DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when… ment panel during the initial stages of airbag
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag deployment. The initial stage of airbag infla-
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are may deploy if the bottom of the vehicle suf- tion is the most forceful and can possibly
not designed to deploy in conditions where fers a moderate to severe impact (undercar- cause serious or fatal injuries if you contact it
riage damage). at this stage.
WARNING WARNING
 Do not attach anything to the steering  Do not attach accessories to the lower por-
wheel’s padded cover, such as badges or tion of the driver’s side instrument panel.
accessories. It might strike and injure an Such objects could prevent the driver’s
occupant if the airbag inflates. knee airbag from inflating normally or
could be propelled to cause serious injury
 Do not set anything on, or attach anything
to, the instrument panel above the glove if the airbag inflates. 4
box. It might strike and injure an occu-  Do not put packages, pets or other objects
pant if the airbag inflates. between the airbags and the driver or
front passenger. It could affect airbag per-
formance, or could cause injury when the
airbag inflates.
The label shown here is attached to the seat-
 Right after the airbag inflation, several
backs with a side airbag.
airbag system components will be hot. Do
not touch these components. There is a
danger of being burnt.
 The airbag system is designed to work
only once. Once the airbags have
deployed, they will not work again. They
must promptly be replaced and we recom-
mend you to have the entire airbag system
MOTORS dealer.
WARNING
 Do not attach accessories to, or put them Side airbag system*
in front of, the windscreen. These objects
E00407601805
could restrict the airbag inflation, or
strike and injure an occupant if the air- The side airbags (A) are contained in the
bags inflate. driver and front passenger seatbacks.
Curtain airbag system*
E00409101992
The side airbag is designed to inflate only on
the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even The curtain airbags are contained in the front
with no passenger in the front seat. pillars and roof side rail. The curtain airbag is
designed to inflate only on the side of the

vehicle that is impacted, even with no passen- vehicle body. Examples of some typical con-
ger in the front seat or rear seat. ditions are shown in the illustration.
The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-

mary means of protection in a collision. The
SRS side airbags and curtain airbags are 1- Side impacts in an area away from the
designed to provide additional protection. passenger compartment
Deployment of side airbags and Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all 2- Motorcycle or other similar small vehi-
occupants, be sure to always properly wear cle collides with the side of vehicle
curtain airbags your seat belts.
E00407702672
3- Collision with a utility pole, tree or
other narrow object
The side airbags and curtain air- The side airbags and curtain air-
bags ARE DESIGNED TO bags MAY NOT DEPLOY when...
DEPLOY when...
With certain types of side collisions, the vehi-
cle’s body structure is designed to absorb the
The side airbags and curtain airbags are
shock to help protect the occupants from
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a
harm. (The vehicle body’s side area may
moderate to severe side impact to the middle
deform significantly as it absorbs the impact.)
of the passenger compartment.
Under such circumstances, the side airbags
The typical condition is shown in the illustra-
and curtain airbags may not deploy irrespec-
tion.
tive of the deformation and damage to the
4- Oblique side impacts

5- Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof Because the side airbags and curtain airbags
do not protect the occupant in all types of col-
WARNING
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags  Do not allow any rear seat occupant to
lisions, be sure to always properly wear your
do not protect the occupant in all types of side hold onto the seatback of either front seat,
seat belts.
collisions, be sure to always properly wear in order to reduce risk of injury from the
deploying side airbag. Special care should
your seat belts.
WARNING be taken with children.
4
 The side airbags and curtain airbags are  Do not place any objects near or in front
The side airbags and curtain air- designed to supplement the driver and of the seatback of either front seat. They
bags ARE NOT DESIGNED TO passenger seat belts in certain side could interfere with proper side airbag
impacts. Seat belts should always be worn inflation, and also could cause injury if
DEPLOY when... thrown free by side airbag deployment.
properly, and the driver and passenger
should sit well back and upright without  Do not place stickers, labels or additional
The side airbags and curtain airbags are not leaning against the window or door. trim on the seatback of either front seat.
designed to deploy in conditions where they  The side airbag and curtain airbag inflate They could interfere with proper side air-
cannot usually provide protection to the occu- with great force. The driver and passenger bag inflation.
pant. Typical conditions are shown in the should not put their arms out the window,  Do not install seat covers on seats with
illustration. and should not lean against the door, in side airbags.
order to reduce risk of serious or possible Do not re-cover seats that have side air-
fatal injury from the deploying side airbag bags. This could interfere with proper side
and curtain airbag. airbag inflation.
 Do not attach a microphone (A) or any
other device or object around the part
where the curtain airbags (B) activate
such as on the windscreen, side door glass,
front and rear pillars and roof side or
assist grips. When the curtain airbags
inflate, the microphone or other device or
object will be hurled with great force or
the curtain airbags may not activate cor-
rectly, resulting in death or serious injury.
1- Head-on collisions
2- Rear end collisions

The SRS warning lamp/display is shared by
WARNING the SRS airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner
 We recommend work around and on the
system.
side airbags and curtain airbags system to
be done by an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer. WARNING
4  If any of the following conditions occur,
there may be a problem with the SRS air-
SRS warning lamp/display bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and
E00407803393
they may not function properly in a colli-
Warning lamp sion or may suddenly activate without a
collision:
• Even when the operation mode is in ON,
WARNING the SRS warning lamp does not come on
 Do not put a hanger or any heavy or or it remains on.
pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur- Warning display • The SRS warning lamp and/or the warn-
tain airbag was activated, any such item ing display comes on while driving.
could be propelled away with great force The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten-
and could prevent the curtain airbag from sioners are designed to help reduce the
inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly risk of serious injury or death in certain
on the coat hook (without using a hanger). collisions. If either of the above conditions
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp occurs, immediately have your vehicle
objects in the pockets of clothes that you There is a supplemental restraint system checked by an authorised MITSUBISHI
hang on the coat hook. (“SRS”) warning lamp on the instrument MOTORS dealer.
 Do not allow the child to lean against or panel. The system checks itself every time the
close to the front door even if the child is operation mode is put in ON. The SRS warn-
seated in a child restraint system.
ing lamp will come on for several seconds
The child’s head should also not be leaned
and then go out. This is normal and means the
against or be close to the area where the
side airbag and curtain airbag are located. system is working properly.
It is dangerous if the side airbag and cur- If there is a problem involving one or more of
tain airbag inflate. the SRS components, the warning lamp will
Failure to follow all of these instructions come on and stay on. At the same time, the
could lead to serious or fatal injury to the warning display will appear on the informa-
child. tion screen in the instrument cluster.

SRS servicing NOTE

E00407902847  If your vehicle has to be scrapped, do this in
line with local legislation and contact an
WARNING authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer
 We recommend any maintenance per- to safely dismantle the airbag system.
formed on or near the components of the
SRS to be performed by an authorised
4
Improper work on the SRS components or
wiring could result in inadvertent deploy-
ment of the airbags, or could render the
SRS inoperative; either situation could
result in serious injury.
 Do not modify your steering wheel, seat
belt retractor or any other SRS compo-
nents. For example, replacement of the
steering wheel, or modifications to the
front bumper or body structure can
adversely affect SRS performance and
lead to possible injury.
 If your vehicle has received any damage,
we recommend you to have the SRS
inspected to ensure it is in proper working
order.
 On vehicles with the side airbag, do not
modify your front seats, centre pillar and
centre console.
It can adversely affect SRS performance
and lead to possible injury.
 If you found any tear, scratch, crack or
damage to the portion where the airbag is
stored, you should have the SRS inspected
by an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer.

Instruments and controls
Types of instruments ........................................................................5-2

Instruments - Type A .......................................................................5-2
Instruments - Type B .....................................................................5-17 5
Indicator and warning lamps .........................................................5-48
Information screen display list .......................................................5-51
Indicator lamps ..............................................................................5-74
Warning lamps ...............................................................................5-75
Information screen display ............................................................5-77
Combination headlamps and dipper switch ...................................5-79
Turn-signal lever ............................................................................5-81
Active Cornering Lights (ACL) .....................................................5-82
Hazard warning flasher switch ......................................................5-83
Front fog lamp switch ....................................................................5-83
Wiper and washer switch ...............................................................5-84
Rear window demister switch ........................................................5-88
Horn switch ....................................................................................5-89
Types of instruments
Types of instruments Instruments - Type A

E00569700033 E00500103141
Type A (Refer to page 5-2.)
Meter illumination control

1- Tachometer
E00531301161
speed (r/min). The tachometer can help Each time you press the rheostat illumination
Type B (Refer to page 5-17.) button, there is a sound and the brightness of
you obtain more economical driving
and also warns you of excessive engine the instruments changes.
speeds (Red zone).
2- Multi information display  P.5-3
Information screen display list 
P.5-51
3- Speedometer (km/h)
4- Rheostat illumination button  P.5-2
CAUTION
 When driving, watch the tachometer to make
sure that the engine speed indication does
not rise into the red zone (excessive engine 1- Brightness level
r/min). 2- Rheostat illumination button
5-2 Instruments and controls

Instruments - Type A
[When the operation mode is OFF] [When the operation mode is ON]
NOTE
 You can adjust to 8 different levels respec-
tively for when the position lamps are illumi-
nated and when they are not.
 As the vehicle is equipped with the auto-
matic lamp control, when the lamp switch is
in a position other than the “OFF” position,
the meter illumination switches automati-
cally to the adjusted brightness, depending
5
on the brightness outside the vehicle.
 The brightness level of the instruments is
stored when the operation mode is put in
OFF.
 If you press and hold the button for about 1-
2 seconds or more when the position lamps mark display  P.5-6
are illuminated, the brightness level changes 2-Information screen  P.5-4
to the maximum level. Pressing and holding Interrupt display screen  P.5-6
the button for about 2 seconds or more again 3-Door ajar warning display  P.5-7 1-Off Road mode indicator display*
returns the brightness level to the previous 4-Odometer  P.5-8  P.6-35
level. 5-“ ” or “ ” mark indicator P.5-6 2-Drive mode indicator display*
 P.6-27
Multi information display
4-Forward Collision Mitigation System
E00569900051
(FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration
Always stop the vehicle in a safe place before Mitigation System (UMS) OFF indica-
operating. tor display*  P.6-83, 6-90
The following information is included on the 5-Cruise control indicator display* 
multi information display: warnings, odome- P.6-63
ter, tripmeter, average and momentary fuel 6-Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)
consumption, average speed etc. display*  P.6-69
7-“ ” or “ ” mark indicator P.5-6
8-Information screen  P.5-5
Instruments and controls 5-3

9-Selector lever position display  P.6-22 Information screen (when the
10-Engine coolant temperature display
 P.5-7
operation mode is OFF)
E00571800031
12-Fuel remaining display  P.5-7 Each time you lightly press the multi infor-
13-Outside temperature display  P.5-8 mation display switch, the display screen
switches in the following order.
NOTE
5  The fuel units, outside temperature units,
display language, and other settings can be
changed.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
page 5-12. NOTE
*1
 Each time the multi information display back
switch is operated, the buzzer sounds and the
Multi information display switch multi information display return to the posi- *2
E00571700043 tion before pressing the multi information
display switch.
Each time the multi information display
switch is operated, the buzzer sounds and the
*1: When there is no warning display
multi information display changes between
information such as warnings, tripmeter, *2: When there is a warning display
average and momentary fuel consumption, 1- Tripmeter  P.5-8
distance range etc. 2- Tripmeter  P.5-8
It is also possible to change elements such as 3- ECO score display  P.5-12
the language and units used on the multi 4- Service reminder  P.5-8
information display by operating the multi 5- Redisplay of a warning display screen
information display switch.  P.5-6

Information screen (when the Information screen (when the 3- Driving range display  P.5-10
ECO drive assist display  P.5-12
operation mode is changed from operation mode is ON) 4- Average fuel consumption display 
OFF to ON) E00572000030
P.5-10
E00571900032 Each time you lightly press the multi infor- ECO drive assist display  P.5-12
When the operation mode is put in ON, the mation display switch, the display screen 5- Average speed display  P.5-11
display screen switches in the following switches in the following order. Momentary fuel consumption display
order.  P.5-11
6- ECO score display  P.5-12
5
7- 2WD/4WD operation indicator dis-
play* P.6-30
8- Service reminder  P.5-8
9- Function setting screen  P.5-12
*
10- Redisplay of a warning display screen
 P.5-6
*1 NOTE
 While driving, the service reminder are not
*2 displayed even if you operate the multi infor-
*: When the inspection time has arrived mation display switch. Always stop the vehi-
1- Screen when the operation mode is cle in a safe place before operating.
OFF  While driving, the function setting screen is
not displayed even if you operate the multi
2- System check screen  P.5-10
information display switch.
3- Screen when the operation mode is ON
Always stop the vehicle in a safe place
4- Service reminder  P.5-8 before operating and firmly apply the park-
ing brake and put the selector lever into the
AH4100196 “P” (PARK) position (A/T).
*1: When there is no warning display page 5-12.
2:
* When there is a warning display
1- Tripmeter  P.5-8
2- Tripmeter  P.5-8

If you press the multi information display  Redisplay of a warning display
NOTE switch, the display screen switches to the
 When there is information to be announced, screen
screen that was displayed before the warning
such as a system fault, the buzzer sounds and
the screen display is switched. display and the mark (A) is displayed.
When the mark is displayed, if you lightly
Refer to “Interrupt display screen” on page
press the multi information display switch a
5-6.
few times, the warning display screen you
switched from is redisplayed.
5 Interrupt display screen
E00572100044
 Other interrupt displays
 Warning display
The operation status of each system is dis-
played on the information screen.
When there is information to be announced,
Refer to the appropriate page in the warning
display list for further details.
the information screen is switched to the
Refer to “Other interrupt displays” on page
warning display screen.
5-70.
Refer to the warning list and take the neces- If you want to switch the display
sary measures.
Refer to “Warning display list” on page 5-51. mark display
Warning display screens with a “ ” or “ ”
When the cause of the warning display is mark displayed in the upper right of the
E00572200045
eliminated, the warning display goes out screen can be switched. If you want to switch This is displayed when you press the multi
automatically. the display, press the multi information dis- information display switch and return from
play switch as follows. the warning display screen to the previous
To return to the screen displayed before screen.
“ ”: Press lightly. This mark is also displayed if there is another
the warning display
“ ”: Press for about 2 seconds or more. warning other than the one displayed.
Even if the cause of the warning display is When the cause of the warning display is
not eliminated, you can return to the screen eliminated, the mark goes out automati-
that was displayed before the warning dis-
cally.
play.

NOTE Engine coolant temperature dis-

 When the mark is displayed, the warning play
E00570900048
display screen can be redisplayed on the
information screen.
Refer to “Information screen (when the oper-
ation mode is OFF)” on page 5-4.
Refer to “Information screen (when the oper-
ation mode is ON)” on page 5-5. 5
Door ajar warning display F (1) - Full

E00572300046 E (0) - Empty
This indicates the engine coolant tempera-
ture.
If the coolant becomes hot, “ ” will blink. NOTE
Pay careful attention to the engine coolant  It may take several seconds to stabilise the
temperature display while you are driving. display after refilling the tank.
 If fuel is added with the operation mode is in
If any of the doors or the tailgate is not com- CAUTION ON, the fuel gauge may incorrectly indicate
pletely closed, this displays the open door or the fuel level.
tailgate.  If the engine is overheating, “ ” will blink.  The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank
When the operation mode is ON, if the vehi- In this case, the bar graph is on the red zone. filler is located on the left side of the body.
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place
cle speed exceeds approximately 8 km/h
and take the required measures. Refer to
while a door is ajar, a buzzer sounds 4 times.
“Engine overheating” on page 8-3.  Fuel remaining warning display
This notifies the driver that a door is ajar.
E00571100047
When the fuel is reduced to about 9 litres, the

CAUTION Fuel remaining display information screen switches to the interrupt
 Before moving your vehicle, check that the E00571000046
display of the fuel remaining warning display,
warning lamp is OFF.
This displays the amount of fuel remaining. and the “ ” mark (B) on the fuel remaining
display flashes slowly (about once per sec-
ond). After a few seconds, the information

screen returns from the fuel remaining warn- It is possible to measure two currently
Outside temperature display
ing display to the previous screen. travelled distances, from home using trip-
E00570700075
If the remaining fuel level is reduced further, meter and from a particular point on
the information screen switches to the fuel This displays the temperature
outside the vehicle. the way using tripmeter .
remaining warning display and the “ ” mark
(B) on the fuel remaining display flashes  To reset the tripmeter
quickly (about twice per second).
5 To return the display to 0, hold down the
multi information display switch for about 2
NOTE seconds or more. Only the currently dis-
 The display setting can be changed to the played value will be reset.
preferred units (°C or °F).
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on Example
page 5-12.
If tripmeter is displayed, only tripmeter
 Depending on factors such as the driving
conditions, the displayed temperature may
will be reset.
vary from the actual outside temperature.
NOTE
 When disconnecting the battery terminal, the
Odometer memory of tripmeter and are
CAUTION E00570200054 cleared, and the display returns to “0”.
 Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
The odometer indicates the distance travelled.
level; running out of fuel could cause dam-
age to the fuel system.
Tripmeter Service reminder
E00571200051
E00570300055
NOTE The tripmeter indicates the distance travelled

Displays the approximate time until the next
 On inclines or curves, the display may be periodic inspection recommended by
between two points.
incorrect due to the movement of fuel in the MITSUBISHI MOTORS. “---” is displayed
tank. when the inspection time has arrived.
Example usage of tripmeter and tripmeter

2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-
NOTE tion is due. Please consult an authorised
 Depending on the vehicle specifications, the
displayed time may differ from the next peri-
odic inspection time recommended by At that time, when the operation mode is
MITSUBISHI MOTORS.
changed from OFF to ON, the warning
In addition, the display settings for the next
periodic inspection time can be modified.
display is displayed for a few seconds on
the information screen.
To modify the display settings, have it
adjusted at an authorised MITSUBISHI
5
MOTORS dealer.
For more details, consult an authorised
2. Press and hold the multi information dis-
play switch for about 2 seconds or more to
3. After your vehicle is inspected at an
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS display “ ” and make it flash. (If there is
dealer, it displays the time until the next no operation for about 10 seconds with
periodic inspection. flashing, the display returns to the previ-
ous screen.)
 To reset 3. Lightly press the multi information dis-
play switch while the icon is flashing to
The “---” display can be reset while the oper- change the display from “---” to
ation mode is in OFF. When the display is “CLEAR”. After this, the time until the
reset, the time until the next periodic inspec- next periodic inspection will be displayed.
tion is displayed and the warning display is
1. Displays the time until the next periodic
no longer displayed when the operation mode
inspection.
is changed from OFF to ON.
NOTE 1. When you lightly press the multi informa-
 The distance is shown in units of 100 km tion display switch a few times, the infor-
(100 miles). The time is shown in units of mation screen switches to the service
months.
reminder display screen.

System check screen

E00572500035
When the operation mode is put in ON, the

system check screen is displayed for about
4 seconds. If there is no fault, information
screen (when the operation mode is ON) is
displayed.
NOTE
5 If there is a fault, the screen changes to warn-
 The driving range is determined based on the
fuel consumption data. This may vary
ing display. depending on the driving conditions and hab-
Refer to “Warning display list” on page 5-51. its. Treat the distance displayed as just a
rough guideline.
CAUTION  When you refuel, the driving range display is
 The customer is responsible for making sure updated.
that periodic inspection and maintenance are However, if you only add a small amount of
performed. fuel, the correct value will not be displayed.
Inspections and maintenance must be per- Fill with a full tank whenever possible.
formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-  On rare occasions, the value displayed for
tions.
NOTE
the driving range may change if you are
 The system check screen display varies
parked on an extremely steep incline. This is
depending on the customer’s equipment.
due to the movement of fuel in the tank and
NOTE does not indicate any malfunction.
 “---” display cannot be reset when the opera-  The display setting can be changed to the
tion mode is in ON.
Driving range display preferred units (km or miles).
 When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-
E00570500057 Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
tance and a certain period of time, the dis- This displays the approximate driving range page 5-12.
play is reset and the time until the next (how many more kilometres or miles you can
periodic inspection is displayed. drive). When the driving range falls below
 If you accidentally reset the display, we rec- approximately 50 km (30 miles), “---” is dis- Average fuel consumption display
ommend you to consult an authorised played. E00570600058
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. Refuel as soon as possible. This displays the average fuel consumption
from the last reset to the present time.

The reset mode conditions for the average
fuel consumption display can be switched
NOTE NOTE
 The memory of the auto reset mode or man-  The average speed display can be reset sepa-
between “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”.
ual reset mode for the average fuel consump- rately for the auto reset mode and for the
Refer to “Changing the reset mode for aver-
tion display is erased if the battery is manual reset mode.
age fuel consumption and average speed” on disconnected.  “---” is displayed when the average speed
page 5-13.  The display setting can be changed to the cannot be measured.
For information on how to change the aver- preferred units {km/L, mpg (US), mpg (UK)  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
age fuel consumption display setting, refer to
“Changing the function settings” on page
or L/100 km}.
mode”. 5
 The display setting can be changed to the
5-12. page 5-12. preferred units (km/h or mph).
Average speed display page 5-12.
E00572600049
 The memory of the auto reset mode or man-
ual reset mode for the average speed display
This displays the average speed from the last is erased if the battery is disconnected.
reset to the present time.
The reset mode conditions for the average
NOTE speed display can be switched between “Auto
 The average fuel consumption display can be
Momentary fuel consumption dis-
reset” and “Manual reset”.
reset separately for the auto reset mode and play
for the manual reset mode. E00572700040
age fuel consumption and average speed” on
 “---” is displayed when the average fuel con- While driving, this displays the momentary
sumption cannot be measured.
page 5-13.
For the method for changing the average fuel consumption, using a bar graph.
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
mode”. speed display setting, refer to “Changing the
 The average fuel consumption will depend function settings” on page 5-12. A
on the driving conditions (road conditions,
how you drive, etc.). The displayed fuel con-
sumption may vary from the actual fuel con-
sumption. Treat the fuel consumption The “ ” mark (A) in the momentary fuel
displayed as just a rough guideline. gauge shows the average fuel consumption.
When the momentary fuel consumption sur-
passes the average fuel consumption, the

momentary fuel consumption is displayed operation mode is set to “ON” to the time
with a green bar graph. when it is set to “OFF”.
ECO drive level
Be conscious of maintaining the momentary
fuel consumption above the average fuel con-
sumption, driving with the better fuel con-
ECO drive level
sumption can be possible.
Low High
5 NOTE
 When the momentary fuel consumption can-
not be measured, the bar graph is not dis-
played. Low High
preferred units {km/L, mpg (US), mpg (UK)
NOTE
or L/100 km}.  The ECO drive assist is displayed only when
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on vehicle is driving with the selector lever in
page 5-12. the “D” (DRIVE) position or when vehicle is
driving in the sport mode. Changing the function settings
 It is possible to cancel the green bar graph.
E00571300049
page 5-12. The “Display language”, “Temperature unit”,
ECO score display “Fuel consumption unit”, and “Average fuel
E00572900042 consumption and speed reset method” etc.
ECO drive assist display ECO score indicates the points you have setting can be modified as desired.
E00572800041 scored on fuel-efficient driving by the num-
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
This function displays how fuel-efficiently ber of leaves as follows:
Firmly apply the parking brake and put
you are driving under different driving condi- the selector lever into the “P” (PARK)
tions. [When the operation mode is ON]
The display shows the score you achieved in position.
The ECO drive assist display will change as 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
follows if you do fuel-efficient driving using the last several minutes.
play switch a few times to switch the
the accelerator in a way well matched with [When the operation mode is put in OFF] information screen to the function setting
the vehicle speed. The display shows the overall ECO score the screen.
function has counted from the time when the Refer to “Information screen (when the
operation mode is ON)” on page 5-5.

Refer to “Returning to the factory set-
NOTE tings” on page 5-16.
 If no operations are made within approxi-
mately 30 seconds of the menu screen being
displayed, the display returns to the function
NOTE
setting screen.  If the battery is disconnected, these function
settings are reset from memory and is auto-
CAUTION 4. Select the item to change on the menu matically to the factory settings.
 For safety, stop the vehicle before operating. screen and change to the desired setting.
While driving, even if you operate the multi Refer to the following items for further
5
information display switch, the function set-
details on the operation methods.  Changing the reset mode for aver-
ting screen is not displayed. age fuel consumption and average
Refer to “Changing the reset mode for speed
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- average fuel consumption and average E00571400040
play switch for approximately 2 seconds speed” on page 5-13. The mode conditions for the average fuel
or more to switch from the setting mode Refer to “Changing the fuel consumption consumption and average speed display can
screen to the menu screen. display unit” on page 5-14. be switched between “Auto reset” and “Man-
Refer to “Changing the temperature unit” ual reset”.
on page 5-15.
Refer to “Changing the display language” 1. Press and hold the multi information dis-
on page 5-15. play switch for about 2 seconds or more to
Refer to “Operation sound setting” on switch from the setting mode screen to the
page 5-15. menu screen.
Refer to “Changing the time until “REST Refer to “Changing the function settings”
REMINDER” is displayed” on page 5-16. on page 5-12.
Refer to “Changing the turn-signal sound” 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
on page 5-16. play switch to select
Refer to “Changing the momentary fuel “AVG (average fuel consumption and
consumption display” on page 5-16. average speed setting)”.
NOTE Refer to “Switching automatic operation
 To return the menu screen to the function set-
of the electric tailgate ON/OFF” on page
ting screen, press and hold the multi infor-
mation display switch for approximately
3-26.
2 seconds or more.

3. Press and hold the multi information dis- 1. Press and hold the multi information dis-
Auto reset mode
play switch for about 2 seconds or more to play switch for about 2 seconds or more to
switch from A/1 (Auto reset mode) to  When the average fuel consumption and switch from the setting mode screen to the
M/2/P (Manual reset mode), or from average speed are being displayed, if you menu screen.
M/2/P to A/1. hold down the multi information display Refer to “Changing the function settings”
The setting is changed to the selected switch, the average fuel consumption and on page 5-12.
mode condition. average speed displayed at that time are 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
5 reset.
 When the operation mode is in ACC or
play switch to select
“AVG UNIT (fuel consumption display
Manual reset mode
OFF for approximately 4 hours or longer, setting)”.
 When the average fuel consumption and the average fuel consumption display and 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
average speed are being displayed, if you average speed display are automatically play switch for about 2 seconds or more to
hold down the multi information display reset. display “AVG UNIT”.
switch, the average fuel consumption and 4. Lightly press the multi information dis-
average speed displayed at that time are play switch to select the units.
reset.
NOTE 5. Press and hold the multi information dis-
 The average fuel consumption display and
 When the operation mode is changed play switch for about 2 seconds or more to
average speed display can be reset separately
from ACC or OFF to ON, the mode set- change the setting to the selected unit.
for the auto reset mode and for the manual
ting is automatically switched from man- reset mode.
ual to auto.  The memory of the auto reset mode or man- NOTE
ual reset mode for the average fuel consump-  The display units for the driving range, the
Switching to auto occurs automatically. If tion display and average speed display is
switching to manual mode is done, how- average fuel consumption, the average speed
erased if the battery is disconnected. and the momentary fuel consumption are
ever, the data from the last reset is dis-
switched, but the units for the indicating nee-
played.
dle (speedometer), the odometer and the trip-
 Changing the fuel consumption dis- meter will remain unchanged.
play unit
E00571500041
The distance and speed units are also
The display unit for fuel consumption can be
switched in the following combinations to
switched. The distance, speed, and amount
match the selected fuel consumption unit.
units are also switched to match the selected
fuel consumption unit.

Distance Speed NOTE NOTE
Fuel con-
(driving (average  The temperature value on air conditioning  If “---” is selected in the language setting, a
sumption
range) speed) panel is switched in conjunction with outside warning message is not displayed when there
L/100 km km km/h temperature display unit of the multi infor- is a warning display or interrupt display.
mation display.
mpg (US) mile (s) mph However, “°C” or “°F” are not shown to tem-
mpg (UK) mile (s) mph perature display of an air conditioning.  Operation sound setting
km/L km km/h E00573100038
5
You can turn off the operation sounds of the
 Changing the display language multi information display switch and rheostat
 Changing the temperature unit E00573000037
illumination button.
E00571600042 The language of the multi information display
The display unit for temperature can be can be switched. 1. Press and hold the multi information dis-
switched. play switch for about 2 seconds or more to
1. Press and hold the multi information dis- switch from the setting mode screen to the
1. Press and hold the multi information display switch for about 2 seconds or more to menu screen.
play switch for about 2 seconds or more to switch from the setting mode screen to the Refer to “Changing the function settings”
switch from the setting mode screen to the menu screen. on page 5-12.
menu screen. Refer to “Changing the function settings” 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on page 5-12.
play switch to select “ ” (operation
on page 5-12. 2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
sound setting).
2. Lightly press the multi information display switch to select
play switch to select “ ” (temperature “LANGUAGE” (language setting).
play switch for about 2 seconds or more to
unit setting). 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
switch from ON (operation sound on) to
3. Press and hold the multi information display switch for about 2 seconds or more to
OFF (operation sound off), or from OFF
play switch for about 2 seconds or more to display “LANGUAGE”.
to ON.
switch in from °C to °F, or from °F to °C. 4. Lightly press the multi information dis-
The setting is changed to the selected con-
The setting is changed to the selected tem- play switch to select the desired language.
dition.
perature unit. 5. If you hold down the multi information
display switch for about 2 seconds or
more, the setting is changed to the
selected language.

NOTE NOTE play switch for about 2 seconds or more to
 The operation sound setting only deactivates  The drive time is reset when the operation
switch from the setting mode screen to the
the operation sound of the multi information mode is put in OFF.
menu screen.
display switch and rheostat illumination but-
ton. The warning display and other sounds Refer to “Changing the function settings”
cannot be deactivated. on page 5-12.
 Changing the turn-signal sound
E00573300030
2. Lightly press the multi information dis-
5 It is possible to change the turn-signal sound. play switch to select (changing
 Changing the time until “REST the momentary fuel consumption display).
REMINDER” is displayed 1. Press and hold the multi information dis- 3. Press and hold the multi information dis-
E00573200039 play switch for about 2 seconds or more to play switch for about 2 seconds or more to
The time until the display appears can be switch from the setting mode screen to the switch from ON (with the green bar
changed. menu screen. graph) to OFF (without the green bar
Refer to “Changing the function settings” graph), or from OFF to ON.
1. Press and hold the multi information dis- on page 5-12. The setting changes to the selected bar
play switch for about 2 seconds or more to 2. Lightly press the multi information dis- graph setting.
switch from the setting mode screen to the
play switch to select (changing the
menu screen.
turn-signal sound).  Returning to the factory settings
Refer to “Changing the function settings”
3. Press and hold the multi information dis- E00573500032
on page 5-12.
play switch for about 2 seconds or more to Many of the function settings can be returned
switch from 1 (turn-signal sound 1) to 2 to their factory settings.
play switch to select “ALARM” (rest time
(turn-signal sound 2), or from 2 to 1.
setting). 1. Press and hold the multi information dis-
The setting changes to the selected turn-
3. Press and hold the multi information display switch for about 2 seconds or more to
signal sound.
play switch for about 2 seconds or more to switch from the setting mode screen to the
display “ALARM”. menu screen.
4. Lightly press the multi information dis-  Changing the momentary fuel con-
Refer to “Changing the function settings”
play switch to select the time until the dis- sumption display on page 5-12.
play. E00573400031
5. Press and hold the multi information dis- It is possible to change the bar graph setting play switch to select “RESET” (returning
play switch for about 2 seconds or more, of the momentary fuel consumption display. to the factory settings).
the setting is changed to the selected time.

Instruments - Type B
3. When you press and hold the multi infor-
mation display switch for about 5 seconds Instruments - Type B
or more, the buzzer sounds and all of the E00500103154
function settings are returned to the fac-

tory settings.
NOTE
 The factory settings are as follows. 5
• Average fuel consumption and average
speed reset mode: A (Auto reset)
• Fuel consumption display unit: L/100 km 1- Brightness level
• Temperature unit: °C (Celsius) 2- Rheostat illumination button
• Display language: THAI
• Operation sounds: ON (Operation sounds 1- Engine coolant temperature display
on)  P.5-18 NOTE
• “REST REMINDER” display: OFF 2- 8 inch colour LCD meter  P.5-19  You can adjust to 8 different levels respec-
• Turn-signal sound: Turn-signal sound 1 3- Fuel remaining display  P.5-18 tively for when the position lamps are illumi-
• Momentary fuel consumption with the 4- Rheostat illumination button  P.5-17 nated and when they are not.
green bar graph: ON  As your vehicle is equipped with the auto-
matic lamp control, when the lamp switch is
Meter illumination control in a position other than the “OFF” position,
E00531301389
the meter illumination switches automati-
cally to the adjusted brightness, depending
Each time you press the rheostat illumination on the brightness outside the vehicle.
button, there is a sound and the brightness of  The brightness level of the instruments is
the instruments changes. stored when the operation mode is put in
OFF.

NOTE If the coolant becomes hot, “ ” will blink. NOTE

 If you press and hold the button for approxi- Pay careful attention to the engine coolant  It may take several seconds to stabilise the
mately 2 seconds or more when the position temperature display while you are driving. display after refilling the tank.
lamps are illuminated, the brightness level  If fuel is added with the operation mode is
changes to the maximum level. Pressing and CAUTION ON, the fuel gauge may incorrectly indicate
holding the button for approximately 2 sec- the fuel level.
onds or more again returns the brightness  If the engine is overheating, “ ” will blink.  The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank
5 level to the previous level.
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-
In this case, the bar graph is on the red zone.
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place
filler door is located on the left side of the
body.
link Display Audio (SDA) navigation sys- and take the required measures. Refer to
tem, the map screen colour may not be “Engine overheating” on page 8-3.
switched to nighttime setting when the meter
illumination brightness level is at the maxi-
Fuel remaining warning display
E00573800035
mum.
Fuel remaining display When the fuel is reduced to approximately
 The 8 inch colour LCD meter may become
E00573700034
dark in hot weather, but this is not a malfunc- 9 litres, the information screen switches to the
tion. This displays the amount of fuel remaining. interrupt display of the fuel remaining warn-
ing display, and the “ ” mark (B) on the fuel
Engine coolant temperature remaining display flashes slowly (approxi-
display mately once per second). After a few seconds,
E00573600033
the information screen returns from the fuel
remaining warning display to the previous
screen.
If the remaining fuel level is reduced further,
the information screen switches to the fuel
remaining warning display and the “ ” mark
(B) on the fuel remaining display flashes
quickly (approximately twice per second).
1- Full
0- Empty
This indicates the engine coolant tempera-
ture.

average and instant fuel consumption, aver-
age speed, driving support etc.
[When the operation mode is OFF]
CAUTION 3 types of screen display can be displayed on

 Do not drive with an extremely low fuel 8 inch colour LCD meter as shown below. In
level; running out of fuel could cause dam- addition, each type has screen display of
age to the fuel system. standard mode and multi-mode.
1- Hi-beam indicator lamp  P.5-74
2- For details on the screen display, refer to
mark display  P.5-43
“Indication in the display” on page 5-24.
NOTE 3- Small information screen  P.5-34
 On inclines or curves, the display may be Interrupt display screen  P.5-42
incorrect due to the movement of fuel in the 4- Door ajar warning display  P.5-43
tank. 5- Odometer  P.5-44
[When the operation mode is ON]

8 inch colour LCD meter
E00569900064
Always stop the vehicle in a safe place before

operating.
The following information is included on the
8 inch colour LCD meter: speedometer,
tachometer, warnings, odometer, tripmeter,

Type 1 Type 2 Type 3
Standard mode Standard mode Standard mode
Multi-mode Multi-mode Multi-mode

8 inch colour LCD meter switches

E00571700056
The 8 inch colour LCD meter switches can

change the display type, change vehicle infor-
mation and various settings etc.
1- Enter switch
2- Back switch
3- Left switch
4- Up/Down switch
5- Right switch

How to change of display type

E00573900036
Type 1 Type 2 Type 3
Standard mode Standard mode Standard mode
Multi-mode Multi-mode Multi-mode
: Enter/Back switch
: Left/Right switch
: Changing by function setting display. Refer to “Changing the display type setting” on page 5-39.

 Changing by the 8 inch colour LCD type setting” on page 5-39.

meter switches
E00574000034 NOTE
“Standard mode” and “Multi-mode” can be  The screen changes to “Standard mode” at
changed by using the Enter switch and Back the time of re-ON after the operation mode is
switch. put in OFF.
When “Standard mode” of Type 1 or Type 2  When you remove the battery terminal, the
is displayed, Type 1 and Type 2 can be screen switches to “Standard mode” of Type
1.
5
changed by using the Left switch and Right
switch.
NOTE
 When “Multi-mode” of Type 1 or Type 2 is
displayed if you want to change between
Type 1 and Type 2, change to “Standard
mode” before changing display type.
 Changing from Type 1 or Type 2 to Type 3
and changing from Type 3 to another type
can be changed by “Function setting display:
Display Type” of multi information screen.
Refer to “Changing the display type setting”
on page 5-39.
 Changing by function setting dis-

play
E00574100035
It can be changed by “Function setting dis-

play” of multi information screen.
If “Standard mode” is displayed, you can
change to “Multi-mode” by pressing the
Enter switch. Refer to “Changing the display

Indication in the display

E00574200036
 Type 1
Standard mode
1-Digital clock display (vehicles equipped 4-Analog gauge speedometer 10-Drive mode indicator display*
with the Smartphone-link Display Audio 5-Digital speedometer  P.6-27
(SDA) or Smartphone-link Display 6-Sub unit speedometer  P.5-39 11-Off Road mode indicator display*
Audio (SDA) navigation system. Refer 7- mark display  P.5-43  P.6-35
to the separate owner’s manual) 8-Hill Descent Control indicator lamp* 12-Brake auto hold standby indicator lamp
2-High-beam indicator lamp  P.5-74  P.6-55 (white)  P.6-51
3-Forward Collision Mitigation System 9-Rear differential lock indicator lamp* Brake auto hold indicator lamp (green)
(FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration  P.6-36  P.6-52
Mitigation System (UMS) OFF indicator 13-Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator
display*  P.6-83, 6-90 lamp*  P.6-98

14-Small information screen  P.5-34
Interrupt display screen  P.5-42
 P.6-63
- Blind Spot Warning display*  P.6-95
5
 P.6-22
19-Analog gauge tachometer
speed (r/min). The tachometer can help
you obtain more economical driving and
also warns you of excessive engine
speeds (Red zone).
CAUTION
not rise into the red zone (excessive engine
r/min).

Multi-mode
1-Digital clock display (vehicles equipped 8-Rear differential lock indicator lamp* 15-Selector lever position display
with the Smartphone-link Display Audio  P.6-36  P.6-22
(SDA) or Smartphone-link Display 9-Drive mode indicator display* 16-Odometer  P.5-44
Audio (SDA) navigation system. Refer  P.6-27 17-Driving support display
to the separate owner’s manual) 10-Off Road mode indicator display* - Cruise control indicator display*
2-High-beam indicator lamp  P.5-74  P.6-35  P.6-63
3-Forward Collision Mitigation System 11-Sub unit speedometer  P.5-39 - Adaptive Cruise Control System
(FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration 12-Brake auto hold standby indicator lamp (ACC) display*  P.6-69
Mitigation System (UMS) OFF indicator (white)  P.6-51 - Blind Spot Warning display*
display*  P.6-83, 6-90 Brake auto hold indicator lamp (green)  P.6-95
4-Analog gauge speedometer  P.6-52 18-Outside temperature display  P.5-43
5-Digital speedometer 13-Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator
6- mark display  P.5-43 lamp*  P.6-98
7-Hill Descent Control indicator lamp* 14-Multi information screen  P.5-35
 P.6-55 Interrupt display screen  P.5-42

 Type 2
Standard mode
1-Digital clock display (vehicles equipped 4-Analog gauge tachometer 10-Drive mode indicator display*
(SDA) or Smartphone-link Display speed (r/min). The tachometer can help 11-Off Road mode indicator display*
Audio (SDA) navigation system. Refer you obtain more economical driving and  P.6-35
to the separate owner’s manual) also warns you of excessive engine 12-Brake auto hold standby indicator lamp
2-High-beam indicator lamp  P.5-74 speeds (Red zone). (white)  P.6-51
3-Forward Collision Mitigation System 5-Digital speedometer Brake auto hold indicator lamp (green)
(FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration 6-Sub unit speedometer  P.5-39  P.6-52
Mitigation System (UMS) OFF indicator 7- mark display  P.5-43 13-Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator
display*  P.6-83, 6-90 8-Hill Descent Control indicator lamp* lamp*  P.6-98
 P.6-55 14-Small information screen  P.5-34
 P.6-36
 P.6-63
 P.6-95
5  P.6-22
19-Instant fuel consumption indicator
CAUTION
r/min).

Multi-mode
1-Digital clock display (vehicles equipped 4-Analog gauge tachometer 10-Off Road mode indicator display*
(SDA) or Smartphone-link Display speed (r/min). The tachometer can help 11-Sub unit speedometer  P.5-39
Audio (SDA) navigation system. Refer you obtain more economical driving and 12-Brake auto hold standby indicator lamp
to the separate owner’s manual) also warns you of excessive engine (white)  P.6-51
2-High-beam indicator lamp  P.5-74 speeds (Red zone). Brake auto hold indicator lamp (green)
3-Forward Collision Mitigation System 5-Digital speedometer  P.6-52
(FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration 6- mark display  P.5-43 13-Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator
Mitigation System (UMS) OFF indicator 7-Hill Descent Control indicator lamp* lamp*  P.6-98
display*  P.6-83, 6-90  P.6-55 14-Multi information screen  P.5-35
 P.6-36 15-Selector lever position display
9-Drive mode indicator display*  P.6-22
 P.6-27

 P.6-63
 P.6-95
5 18-Outside temperature display  P.5-43
CAUTION
r/min).

 Type 3
Standard mode
1-Digital clock display (vehicles equipped 6-Sub unit speedometer  P.5-39 12-Analog gauge tachometer
with the Smartphone-link Display Audio 7- mark display  P.5-43 The tachometer indicates the engine
(SDA) or Smartphone-link Display 8-Hill Descent Control indicator lamp* speed (r/min). The tachometer can help
Audio (SDA) navigation system. Refer  P.6-55 you obtain more economical driving and
to the separate owner’s manual) 9-Rear differential lock indicator lamp* also warns you of excessive engine
2-High-beam indicator lamp  P.5-74  P.6-36 speeds (Red zone).
3-Forward Collision Mitigation System 10-Drive mode indicator display* 13-Brake auto hold standby indicator lamp
(FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration  P.6-27 (white)  P.6-51
Mitigation System (UMS) OFF indicator 11-Off Road mode indicator display* Brake auto hold indicator lamp (green)
display*  P.6-83, 6-90  P.6-35  P.6-52
4-Small information screen  P.5-34 14-Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator
Interrupt display screen  P.5-42 lamp*  P.6-98

 P.6-63
 P.6-95
5  P.6-22
CAUTION
r/min).

Multi-mode
1-Digital clock display (vehicles equipped 8-Rear differential lock indicator lamp* 12-Brake auto hold standby indicator lamp
with the Smartphone-link Display Audio  P.6-36 (white)  P.6-51
(SDA) or Smartphone-link Display 9-Drive mode indicator display* Brake auto hold indicator lamp (green)
to the separate owner’s manual) 10-Off Road mode indicator display* 13-Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator
3-Forward Collision Mitigation System 11-Analog gauge tachometer 14-Multi information screen  P.5-35
(FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration The tachometer indicates the engine Interrupt display screen  P.5-42
Mitigation System (UMS) OFF indicator speed (r/min). The tachometer can help 15-Selector lever position display
display*  P.6-83, 6-90 you obtain more economical driving and  P.6-22
4-Digital speedometer also warns you of excessive engine
5-Sub unit speedometer  P.5-39 speeds (Red zone).
7-Hill Descent Control indicator lamp*
 P.6-55

16-Driving support display switch of the 8 inch colour LCD meter switch of the 8 inch colour LCD meter
- Cruise control indicator display* switches. switches.
 P.6-63
 P.6-95
17-Odometer  P.5-44 *1
5 18-Outside temperature display  P.5-43
19-Analog gauge speedometer *2
CAUTION *1
 When driving, watch the tachometer to make *2
not rise into the red zone (excessive engine : Up/Down switch
r/min). 1:
* When there is no warning display
*2: When there is a warning display
1-Tripmeter  P. 5-44
3-ECO score display  P.5-47
4-Service reminder  P.5-44
5-Redisplay of a warning display screen
 P.5-43 : Up/Down switch
*1: When there is no warning display
Small information screen (when *2: When there is a warning display
the operation mode is OFF) Small information screen (when
E00574300040
the operation mode is ON)
Small information screen switches as follows E00574300053
according to the operation of the Up/Down Small information screen switches as follows 3-Driving range display  P.5-45
according to the operation of the Up/Down ECO drive assist display  P.5-47

4-Average fuel consumption display Multi information screen 6-Function setting display  P.5-38
 P.5-46 E00574400038 *:If there is no equipment for navigation
ECO drive assist display  P.5-47
information display or audio information
5-Average speed display  P.5-46
display is not displayed.
Momentary fuel consumption display
 P.5-47
7-2WD/4WD operation indicator display*  ECO infromation display
 P.6-30 E00577600031 5
8-Service reminder  P.5-44
9-Redisplay of a warning display screen
 P.5-43
NOTE
 While driving, the service reminder are not
displayed even if you operate the 8 inch col-
our LCD meter switches. Always stop the
vehicle in a safe place before operating.
 When there is information to be announced,
the screen display is switched. Refer to
“Interrupt display screen” on page 5-42.
: Left switch/Right switch
1-ECO information display  P.5-35

2-Driving information display  P.5-36
3-Navigation information display*
 P.5-36 : Up/Down switch
4-Audio information display*  P.5-37
5-Warning information display  P.5-37

1-Average fuel consumption display (Auto  Driving information display When 1 or 2 is displayed, pressing the Enter
reset mode)  P.5-46 E00577700032 switch for 2 seconds or more resets the value.
Average speed display  P.5-46
2-Average fuel consumption display  Navigation information display*
(Manual reset mode)  P.5-46 E00577800033
Average speed display  P.5-46

3-ECO drive assist display  P.5-47
5
When 1 or 2 is displayed, pressing the Enter
switch for 2 seconds or more resets the value.
: Up/Down switch
1-Navigation turn - by - turn distance, dis-

tance to the destination and time, next
intersection name will be displayed.
2-Navigation direction (compass) is dis-
played.
: Up/Down switch
1-Tripmeter On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-

 P.5-44
link Display Audio (SDA) navigation system,
2-Tripmeter  P.5-44 the following information on navigation will
3-Driving range display  P.5-45 be displayed when guidance location such as
4-2WD/4WD operation indicator display* junction and destination is approached after
 P.6-27, 6-30 you set the destination and started the route
Rear differential lock indicator display* guidance.
 P.6-36

NOTE NOTE
 You can switch whether Navigation informa-  Screen display varies depending on audio
tion display is displayed or not displayed usage situation.
with Interrupt display.  If the audio source information changes, an
Refer to “Changing the pop-up display set- interrupt will be displayed. You can switch
ting” on page 5-39. ON/OFF of the interrupt display on the
 If navigation is not activated, the turn by turn changing “Function setting display”.
screen will be blank.
 Please read this section and also the separate
Refer to “Changing the pop-up display set-
ting” on page 5-39.
5
owner’s manual for Smartphone-link Display
Audio (SDA) navigation system.
1- Guidance display
 Warning information display
Display the direction of vehicle travel E00578000032
and the guidance location.  Audio information display*
E00577900034
Direction of vehicle travel (Example)
Intermediate
Ferry destination
Destination terminal (Example)
2- Remaining distance display

Display the distance to the location Audio source information, channel/radio sta-
where the guidance is displayed. tion name, song title/artist name, etc. are dis-
played.

: Up/Down switch Please follow the procedure below. Refer to “Switching automatic operation
of the electric tailgate ON/OFF” on page
1-When warning has not occurred 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Firmly 3-26.
2-When a warning occurs apply the parking brake and put the selec- Refer to “To operate the nanoe™” on
3-When a warning occurs tor lever into the “P” (PARK) position. page 7-13.
2. Change to the multi-mode screen, press Refer to “Changing the time until “REST
the Left switch or Right switch, select the REMINDER” is displayed” on page 5-39.
NOTE function setting display from the multi Refer to “Changing the turn-signal sound”
5 information screen and press the Enter on page 5-40.
 When multiple warnings occur simultane-
ously, all warnings can be displayed by using
switch. Refer to “Multi information Refer to “Operation sound setting” on
the Up/Down switch. screen” on page 5-35. page 5-40.
Refer to “Changing the display language”
CAUTION on page 5-40.
 Function setting display  For safety, stop the vehicle before operating. Refer to “Changing the fuel consumption
E00578100033 You can not change the setting while driving. display unit and the temperature unit” on
page 5-40.
3. Press the Up/Down switch to select the Refer to “Changing the reset mode for
desired setting item, then press the Enter average fuel consumption and average
switch to change to each setting screen. speed” on page 5-41.
Please read each item about detailed set- Refer to “Returning to the factory set-
ting method. tings” on page 5-42.
Refer to “Changing the display type set-
ting” on page 5-39.
Refer to “Changing the sub unit speedom-
NOTE
 To return menu screen to the function setting
eter is displayed” on page 5-39.
display, press the Back switch.
Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
 If the battery is disconnected, these function
“Display type”, “Sub unit speedometer”, (with Lane Change Assist): To operate” setting are reset from memory and is auto-
“Driver assistance”, “Pop-up display”, “Rest on page 6-98. matically to the factory settings (except the
reminder”, “Turn-signal sound”, “Operation Refer to “Changing the remote device set- “Driver assistance”, “Remote”, “Tailgate”,
sound”, “Language”, “Unit”, “Reset mode”, ting” on page 2-9. “nanoe™”, “Turn-signal sound” settings).
“Factory mode”, etc. can be changed to the Refer to “Changing the pop-up display
setting of your choice. setting” on page 5-39.

 Changing the display type setting NOTE  Changing the pop-up display setting
E00578200034 E00578400036
 When you remove the battery terminal, the
You can change display type to the screen screen switches to “Standard mode” of Type You can set the navigation, audio, call display
display of your choice. 1. to interrupt the interrupt display screen. Refer
to “Interrupt display screen” on page 5-42.
1. Change to function setting display.
 Changing the sub unit speedometer is
Refer to “Function setting display” on 1. Change to the function setting display.
displayed
page 5-38. Refer to “Function setting display” on
E00578300035
page 5-38.
5
2. After selecting “Dis- You can set ON/OFF of the mph speed indi-
play Type” (display type setting), press cator. 2. After selecting “Pop-
the Enter switch. up Display” (pop-up display setting),
3. Use the Up/Down switch to select your press the Enter switch.
mph or not displayed
preferred “Display type”, then press the 3. After selecting the display of your choice
Enter switch to confirm. It changes to the and pressing the Enter switch, the setting
selected screen display. ON is displayed and selected.
If you press the Enter switch again for the
item set to ON, the setting OFF is dis-
NOTE played and the selection is cancelled. If
 The screen after changing the selected screen
you do not wish to display interrupts, you
display is changed to standard mode of the
screen type selected respectively. can turn off all items.
 Changing between Type 1 and Type 2 can be
changed by the Left switch and Right switch Display items may differ depending on equip-
of the 8 inch colour LCD meter switches ment specifications.
1. Change to function setting display.
besides setting on function setting display. Refer to “Function setting display” on
Refer to “Changing by the 8 inch colour page 5-38.  Changing the time until “REST
LCD meter switches” on page 5-23. REMINDER” is displayed
 Changing from Type 1 or Type 2 to Type 3
2. After selecting “Sub E00578500037
and changing from Type 3 to another type Unit Speed” (sub unit speedometer set-
The time until the display appears can be
can be changed by “Function setting display: ting), press the Enter switch.
changed.
Display Type” of multi information screen. 3. After selecting ON or OFF, press the
 The screen after the change will switch to Enter switch to confirm. 1. Change to the function setting display.
“Standard mode”. It changes to the selected screen display.

Refer to “Function setting display” on  Operation sound setting 2. After selecting “Lan-
page 5-38. E00578700039 guage” (language setting), press the Enter
2. After selecting “Rest You can set the presence or absence of opera- switch.
reminder” (rest reminder setting), press tion sound. 3. After selecting the language you want to
the Enter switch. set up, press the Enter switch.
3. Turn off or select the time until your 1. Change to the function setting display. It changes to the language that you set.
desired break and press the Enter switch. Refer to “Function setting display” on
page 5-38.
5 It will be changed to OFF or the desired
time.
NOTE
2. After selecting
 If “---” is selected in the language setting, a
“Operation Sound” (operation sound set- warning message is not displayed when there
ting), press the Enter switch.
NOTE is a warning display or interrupt display.
3. After selecting ON or OFF, press the
 The drive time is reset when the operation
mode is put in OFF.
Enter switch.
It changes to the selected operation sound.  Changing the fuel consumption display
unit and the temperature unit
 Changing the turn-signal sound NOTE E00578900031
E00578600038
 The operation sound setting only deactivates The display unit for fuel consumption and
It is possible to change the turn-signal sound. the operation sound of the 8 inch colour LCD outside temperature can be switched.
meter switches. The warning display and
1. Change to the function setting display. other sounds cannot be deactivated. 1. Change to the function setting display.
Refer to “Function setting display” on Refer to “Function setting display” on
page 5-38. page 5-38.
2. After selecting  Changing the display language 2. After selecting “Unit” (fuel con-
“Turn Signal Sound” (turn- signal sound E00578800030
sumption display setting and temperature
setting), press the Enter switch. The language of the 8 inch colour LCD meter unit setting), press the Enter switch.
3. Select the sound and press the Enter can be switched. 3. After selecting the item you want to set,
switch. press the Enter switch.
The setting changes to the selected turn- 1. Change to the function setting display.
signal sound. Refer to “Function setting display” on
page 5-38.

[When fuel consumption is selected] [When temperature is selected] [Auto reset mode]
E00579300032 E00579400033
 When the average fuel consumption and
NOTE NOTE average speed are being displayed, if you
 The display units for the driving range, the  The temperature value on air conditioning press the Enter switch, the average fuel
average fuel consumption, the average speed panel is switched in conjunction with outside consumption and average speed displayed
and the instant fuel consumption are temperature display unit of the 8 inch colour at that time are reset.
switched, but the units for the indicating nee- LCD meter.  When the operation mode is in ACC or
dle (speedometer), the odometer and the trip- However, “°C” or “°F” are not shown to tem- OFF for approximately 4 hours or longer, 5
meter will remain unchanged. perature display of an air conditioning.
the average fuel consumption display and
average speed display are automatically
The distance and speed units are also reset.
switched in the following combinations to  Changing the reset mode for average
match the selected fuel consumption unit. fuel consumption and average speed
E00579100030 [Manual reset mode]
Distance Speed The mode conditions for the average fuel  When the average fuel consumption and
Fuel con- consumption and average speed display can average speed are being displayed, if you
(driving (average
sumption be switched between “Auto reset” and “Man- press the Enter switch, the average fuel
range) speed)
ual reset”. consumption and average speed displayed
km/L km km/h
at that time are reset.
L/100km km km/h 1. Change to the function setting display.  When the operation mode is changed
Refer to “Function setting display” on from ACC or OFF to ON, the mode set-
MPG (US) mile (s) mph page 5-38. ting is automatically switched from man-
MPG (UK) mile (s) mph 2. After selecting “Reset ual to auto.
Mode” (average fuel consumption and
average speed), press the Enter switch. Switching to auto occurs automatically. If
3. After selecting the item, press the Enter switching to manual mode is done, however,
switch. the data from the last rest is displayed.
The setting switches to reset mode.

NOTE NOTE  To return to the screen displayed before

 The average fuel consumption display and • “Rest reminder”: OFF the warning display
E00576300031
average speed display can be reset separately • “Turn-signal sound setting”: Sound 1
for the auto reset mode and for the manual • “Operation sound setting”: ON Even if the cause of the warning display is
reset mode. • “Display language”: THAI not eliminated, you can return to the screen
 The memory of the auto reset mode or man- • “Fuel consumption display unit”: L/100km that was displayed before the warning dis-
ual reset mode for the average fuel consump- • “Temperature unit”: °C play.
5 tion display and average speed display is
erased if the buttery is disconnected.
• “Average fuel consumption and average If you press the multi information switch’s
speed reset mode”: AUTO “Back switch”, the display screen switches to
 “Driver assistance”, “Remote”, “Tailgate”, the screen that was displayed before the
“nanoe™”, “Turn-signal sound” settings warning display and the mark (A) is dis-
 Returning to the factory settings cannot be returned to their factory setting.
E00579200031 played.
Many of the function setting can be returned
to their factory settings. Interrupt display screen
E00572100057
1. Change to the function setting display.

Refer to “Function setting display” on  Warning display
page 5-38. E00576200030
2. After selecting “Fac- When there is information to be announced,

tory Reset” (returning to the factory set- such as a system fault, the buzzer sounds and
ting), press the Enter switch. the information screen is switched to the
3. Press the Enter switch for more than warning display screen.
5 seconds on the Reset screen. The buzzer Refer to the warning list and take the neces-
sounds and the setting returns to the fac- sary measures.
tory default. Refer to “Warning display list” on page 5-51.
When the cause of the warning display is  If you want to switch the display
eliminated, the warning display goes out E00576400032
NOTE automatically. Warning display screen with “ ” mark dis-
 The factory settings are as follows.
played in the upper right of the screen can be
• “Display setting”: Type 1
switched. If you want to switch the display,
• “Sub Unit Speed”: OFF
press the 8 inch colour LCD meter switches.
• “Pop-up display”: ON

 Redisplay of a warning display NOTE CAUTION

screen  Before moving your vehicle, check that the
E00576500033
 When the mark is displayed, the warning
warning display is OFF
display screen can be redisplayed on the
When the mark is displayed, if you lightly information screen.
press the Up/Down switch of the 8 inch col- Refer to “Small information screen (when
our LCD meter switches a few times, the the operation mode is OFF)” on page 5-34. NOTE
warning display screen you switched from is Refer to “Small information screen (when  When the operation mode is OFF, if all doors
redisplayed. the operation mode is ON)” on page 5-34. and tailgate are closed, the display turns into 5
Refer to “Multi information screen: Warning a state with the door or tailgate closed, and
information display” on page 5-37. the display disappears.
 Other interrupt display
E00576600034  When the operation mode is ON, if all doors
and tailgate are closed, the display turns into
The operation status of each system is dis-
played on the information screen. Door ajar warning display a state with the door or tailgate closed, and
E00572300059
the display disappears a few seconds later.
Refer to the appropriate page in the warning
display list for further details.
Refer to “Other interrupt displays” on page Outside temperature display
5-70. E00570700062
This displays the temperature outside the

mark display vehicle.
E00572200058
This is displayed when you press the

Up/Down switch of the 8 inch colour LCD If any door or the tailgate is not completely
meter switches and return from the warning closed, this displays the open door or tailgate.
display screen to the previous screen. When the operation mode is ON, if the vehi- NOTE
This mark is also displayed if there is another cle speed exceeds approximately 8 km/h  The display setting can be changed to the
warning other than the one displayed. while a door or tailgate is ajar, a buzzer preferred units (°C or °F).
When the cause of the warning display is sounds 4 times. This notifies the driver that a Refer to “Function setting display” on page
door is ajar. 5-38.
eliminated, the mark goes out automati-  Depending on factors such as the driving
cally. conditions, the displayed temperature may
vary from the actual outside temperature.

Odometer NOTE
E00570200067  When disconnecting the battery terminal, the
The odometer indicates the distance travelled. memory of tripmeter is displayed, only
tripmeter will be reset.
Tripmeter
E00570300068
Service reminder
5 The tripmeter indicates the distance travelled
E00571200064
between two points.
Displays the approximate time until the next
Example usage of tripmeter and tripmeter periodic inspection recommended by
. MITSUBISHI MOTORS. “---” is displayed 1. Displays the time until the next periodic
It is possible to measure two currently trav- when the inspection time has arrived. inspection.
elled distances, from home using tripmeter
and from a particular point on the way NOTE NOTE
 Depending on the vehicle specifications, the  The distance is shown in units of 100 km
using tripmeter .
displayed time may differ from the next peri- (100 miles). The time is shown in units of
odic inspection time recommended by months.
 To reset the tripmeter MITSUBISHI MOTORS.
2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-
To return the display to “0”, hold Enter tion is due. Please consult an authorised
In addition, the display setting for the next
switch for approximately 2 seconds or more. MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
periodic inspection time can be modified.
Only the currently display value will be reset. At that time, when the operation mode is
To modify the display settings, have it
adjusted at an authorised MITSUBISHI changed from OFF to ON, the warning
Example
MOTORS dealer. display is displayed for a few seconds on
If tripmeter is displayed, only tripmeter the information screen.
will be reset.

3. After your vehicle is inspected at an 2. Press the Enter switch for about 2 seconds
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
NOTE
or more to display “ ” and make it flash.  “---” display cannot be reset when the opera-
dealer, it displays the time until the next (If there is no operation for about 10 section mode is in ON.
periodic inspection. onds with flashing, the display returns to  When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-
the previous screen.) tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
 To reset 3. Lightly press the Enter switch while the play is reset and the time until the next
E00576800036
icon is flashing to change the display from periodic inspection is displayed.
The “---” display can be reset while the oper- “---” to “CLEAR”. After this, the time  If you accidentally reset the display, we rec-
ommend you to consult an authorised
5
ation mode is in OFF. When the display is until the next periodic inspection will be
reset, the time until the next periodic inspec- displayed. MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
tion is displayed and the warning display is
no longer displayed when the operation mode
is changed from OFF to ON. Driving range display
E00570500060
1. When you lightly press the Up/Down This displays the approximate driving range
switch a few times, the information screen (how many more kilometres or miles you can
switches to the service reminder display drive). When the driving range falls below
screen. approximately 50 km (30 miles), “---” is dis-
played.
Refuel as soon as possible.
CAUTION
 The customer is responsible for making sure
that periodic inspection and maintenance are
performed.
Inspections and maintenance must be per-
formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-
tions.

“Function setting display” on page 5-38.
NOTE Average speed display
 The driving range is determined based on the E00572600052
fuel consumption data. This may vary This displays the average speed from the last
depending on the driving conditions and hab- reset to the present time.
its. Treat the distance displayed as just a There are 2 types of mode settings of [1]
rough guideline.
automatic reset and [2] manual reset.
 When you refuel, the driving range display is
5 updated. However, if you only add a small
amount of fuel, the correct value will not be NOTE age fuel consumption and average speed” on
displayed. Fill with a full tank whenever pos-  The average fuel consumption display can be page 5-41.
sible. reset separately for the auto reset mode and For the method for changing the average
 On rare occasions, the value displayed for for the manual reset mode. speed display setting, refer to “Function set-
the driving range may change if you are  “---” is displayed when the average fuel con- ting display” on page 5-38.
parked on an extremely steep incline. This is sumption cannot be measured.
due to the movement of fuel in the tank and  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
does not indicate any malfunction. mode”.
 The display setting can be changed to the  The average fuel consumption will depend
preferred units (km or miles). on the driving conditions (road conditions,
Refer to “Function setting display” on page how you drive, etc.). The displayed fuel con-
5-38. sumption may vary from the actual fuel con-
sumption. Treat the fuel consumption NOTE
displayed as just a rough guideline.
 The average speed display can be reset sepa-
Average fuel consumption display  The memory of the auto reset mode or man-
rately for the auto reset mode and for the
ual reset mode for the average fuel consump-
E00570600061 manual reset mode.
tion display is erased if the battery is
This displays the average fuel consumption disconnected.
 “---” is displayed when the average speed
from the last reset to the present time. cannot be measured.
There are 2 types of mode settings of [1]  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
preferred units {km/L, mpg (US), mpg (UK)
automatic reset and [2] manual reset. mode”.
or L/100 km}.
Refer to “Changing the reset mode for aver- Refer to “Function setting display” on page  The display setting can be changed to the
age fuel consumption and average speed” on 5-38. preferred units (km/h or mph).
Refer to “Function setting display” on page
page 5-41.
5-38.
For information on how to change the aver-
age fuel consumption display setting, refer to

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 The memory of the auto reset mode or man-  The display setting can be changed to the  The ECO drive assist is displayed only when
ual reset mode for the average speed display preferred units {km/L, mpg (US), mpg (UK) vehicle is driving with the selector lever in
is erased if the battery is disconnected. or L/100 km}. the “D” (DRIVE) position or when vehicle is
Refer to “Function setting display” on page driving in the sport mode.
5-38.
Momentary fuel consumption dis-
play
E00572700053
ECO drive assist display ECO score display 5
E00572800054 E00572900055
This function displays how fuel-efficiently ECO score indicates the points you have
you are driving under different driving condi- scored on fuel-efficient driving by the num-
tions. ber of leaves as follows:
The ECO drive assist display will change as
follows if you do fuel-efficient driving using [When the ignition switch or the operation
the accelerator in a way well matched with mode is ON]
The “ ” mark (A) in the momentary fuel
the vehicle speed. The display shows the score you achieved in
gauge shows the average fuel consumption.
the last several minutes.
When the momentary fuel consumption sur-
passes the average fuel consumption, the [When the ignition switch is turned off or the
momentary fuel consumption is displayed ECO drive level operation mode is put in OFF]
with a green bar graph. The display shows the overall ECO score the
Be conscious of maintaining the momentary function has counted from the time when the
fuel consumption above the average fuel con- operation mode is set to “ON” to the time
sumption, driving with the better fuel con- when it is set to “OFF”.
sumption can be possible.
Low High
NOTE
 When the momentary fuel consumption can-
not be measured, the bar graph is not dis-
played.

Indicator and warning lamps
ECO drive level
Low High
5

E00523701456
E00576900037

1- Position lamp indicator lamp  P.5-75 18- Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning
2- Turn-signal indicator lamps/Hazard lamp  P.6-58
warning indicator lamps  P.5-74 19- Active Stability & Traction Control
3- Front fog lamp indicator lamp (ASTC) indicator lamp P.6-62
 P.5-75 20- Electric parking brake warning lamp
4- High-beam indicator lamp  P.5-74 (yellow) P.5-76
5- Rear differential lock indicator lamp* 21- Brake warning lamp (red)  P.5-75 5
P.6-36
6- Brake auto hold standby indicator
lamp (white)  P.6-51
7- Security indicator lamp  P.3-29
8- Brake auto hold indicator lamp (green)
 P.6-52
9- Check engine warning lamp  P.5-76
10- Parking brake indicator lamp 
P.5-75
11- Diesel preheat indicator lamp 
P.5-75
12- Charge warning lamp  P.5-77
13- LED headlamp warning lamp P.5-77
14- Information screen display list
 P.5-51
15- Seat belt warning lamp  P.4-16
16- Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
warning lamp  P.4-38
17- Active Stability & Traction Control
(ASTC) OFF indicator lamp P.6-62

E00577000035
1- Front fog lamp indicator lamp 8- Supplemental restraint system (SRS) 14- Active Stability & Traction Control
 P.5-75 warning lamp  P.4-38 (ASTC) OFF indicator lamp  P.6-62
2- LED headlamp warning lamp 9- Brake warning lamp (red)  P.5-75 15- 8 inch colour LCD meter  P.5-19
 P.5-77 10- Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning 16- Diesel preheat indicator lamp 
3- Position lamp indicator lamp lamp  P.6-58 P.5-75
 P.5-75 11- Electric parking brake warning lamp 17- Fuel remainig display  P.5-18
4- Parking brake indicator lamp (yellow)  P.5-76 18- Check engine warning lamp  P.5-76
 P.5-75 12- Engine coolant temperature display 19- Charge warning lamp  P.5-77
5- Turn-signal indicator lamps/Hazard  P.5-18
warning indicator lamps  P.5-74 20- Oil pressure warning lamp  P.5-77
13- Active Stability & Traction Control
6- Security indicator lamp  P.3-29 (ASTC) indicator lamp  P.6-62
7- Seat belt warning lamp  P.4-16

Information screen display list

E00523701469
When there is information to be announced, such as lamp reminder, the buzzer sounds and the screen switches to the displays shown below. Refer
to the appropriate page and take the necessary measures.
When the cause of the warning display is eliminated, the warning display goes out automatically.
Refer to “Warning display list” on page 5-51.
Refer to “Other interrupt displays” on page 5-70.
5
NOTE
 A warning may be displayed on the information screen and the buzzer may sound in the following rare cases.
This is caused by the system picking up interference such as noise or strong electromagnetic waves, and is not a functional problem.
• An extremely strong electromagnetic wave is received from a source such as an illegal radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar station.
• Abnormal voltage or a static electricity discharge is generated by the operation of installed electrical equipment (including after-market parts).
If the warning display appears many times, consult an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Warning display list

E00577200037
Screen Cause Solution (Reference)

 There is a fault in the electronic immobi- Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
lizer (Anti-theft starting system). starting system)” on page 3-3.
 There is a fault in the electrical system.  Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and consult an authorised

 There is a fault in the keyless operation Refer to “Keyless operation system” on page
system. 3-6.
 You put the operation mode in ON without  Fasten your seat belt properly. Refer to
fastening your seat belt. “Seat belt reminder” on page 4-16.
 There is a fault in the SRS airbag or the  Contact an authorised MITSUBISHI

pre-tensioner system. MOTORS dealer to have the system
checked, immediately.
Refer to “SRS warning lamp/display” on
page 4-38.
 One of the doors or the tailgate is not com-  Close the door or tailgate.
pletely closed. Refer to “Door ajar warning display” on
The open door is displayed. page 5-7 (Instruments - Type A), 5-43
(Instruments - Type B).

 The outside temperature is 3 °C (37 °F) or  Be careful of ice on the road.
less.  The road can be icy even when this warn-
ing is not displayed, so drive carefully.
 The fuel is running low.  Refuel as soon as possible. Refer to “Fuel

remaining warning display” on page 5-7 5
(Instruments - Type A), 5-18 (Instruments -
Type B).
 There is a fault in the fuel system.  Have your vehicle inspected at an author-
ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
 You are driving with the parking brake still  Release the parking brake.
applied. Refer to “Brake warning display” on page
5-77.
 The brake fluid level in the reservoir has  Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
fallen to a low level. place and consult an authorised
 There is a fault in the brake system. MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Refer to “Brake warning display” on page
5-77.
 There is a fault in the electric parking  Immediately have your vehicle inspected at
brake. an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer.
Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page
6-4.

 The parking brake cannot be applied tem- Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page 6-4.
porarily due to repeated operation of the
Electric parking brake switch within a
short time.
 The accelerator pedal is depressed when Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page 6-4.
5 the Electric parking brake has been applied
or is applied.
 You try to release the electric parking Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page 6-4.
brake switch without depressing the brake
pedal.
 The Electric parking brake has been auto- Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 6-50.
matically applied.
 The brake auto hold is automatically can- Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 6-50.
celled.
 The brake auto hold is not available. Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 6-50.

 The Electric parking brake is not automati-  When the operation mode is put in OFF,
cally applied because there is a fault in the place the selector lever in the “P” (PARK)
Electric parking brake system. position and depress the brake pedal more
firmly than usual with the right foot.
Then, operate the engine switch.
 We recommend you to have the brake auto
hold system inspected by an authorised 5
Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 6-50.
 The brake auto hold system does not turn  Press the brake auto hold switch after fas-
on because the driver’s seat belt is not fastening the driver’s seat belt.
tened. Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 6-50.
 The brake auto hold system does not turn  Depress the brake pedal more firmly than
off because the brake pedal is not pressed. usual with the right foot. Then, press the
brake auto hold switch.
 There is a fault in the charging system.  Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and consult your nearest authorised
Refer to “Charge warning display” on page
5-78.
 There is a fault in the engine oil circulation  Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
system. place and consult your nearest authorised
Refer to “Oil pressure warning display” on
page 5-78.

 The washer fluid is running low.  Replenish the container with washer fluid.
Refer to “Washer fluid” on page 10-7.
Refer to “Capacity” on page 11-6.
 You have forgotten to turn off the lamps. Refer to “Lamps (headlamps, fog lamp, etc.)
5 auto-cutout function” on page 5-80.
 There is a fault in the LED headlamps.  Please consult an authorised MITSUBISHI

MOTORS dealer.
Refer to “LED headlamp warning lamp”
on page 5-77.
 The driver’s door is open when the opera-  Put the operation mode in OFF.
tion mode is in any mode other than OFF. Refer to “Operation mode ON reminder
system” on page 6-16.
 An attempt was made to lock all the doors  Put the operation mode in OFF.
and the tailgate when the operation mode is Refer to “Operation mode OFF reminder
in any mode other than OFF. system” on page 6-16.
 There is a fault in the steering wheel lock.  Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and consult an authorised
Refer to “Steering wheel lock” on page
6-16.

 The steering wheel is locked.  Press the engine switch while turning steer-
ing wheel.
Refer to “Steering wheel lock” on page
6-16.
 The engine is stopped while the selector  Place the selector lever in the “P” (PARK)
lever is in a position other than the “P” position to put the operation mode in OFF. 5
(PARK) position.
 The driver’s door is opened with the steer- Refer to “Steering wheel lock” on page 6-16.
ing wheel unlocked.
 The keyless operation key is not detected.  Insert the keyless operation key into the
key slot.
Refer to “If the keyless operation key is not
operating properly” on page 6-19.
 You have forgotten to remove the keyless  Remove the keyless operation key from the
operation key from the key slot. key slot.
Refer to “Keyless operation key reminder”
on page 6-20.
 The A/T fluid temperature is too high. Refer to “When a malfunction occurs in the
A/T” on page 6-25.

 There is a fault in the A/T.  Have your vehicle inspected at an author-
ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer,
immediately.
Refer to “When a malfunction occurs in the
 The selector lever is shifted from the Refer to “Drive mode indicator display and
5 “N”(NEUTRAL) position to the other 2WD/4WD operation indicator display” on
position or release the brake pedal during page 6-30.
shifting process between “4HLc” 
“4LLc”.
 There is a fault in the A/T.  Have your vehicle inspected at an Author-
ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as
soon as possible.
Refer to “Drive mode indicator display and
2WD/4WD operation indicator display” on
page 6-30.
 There is a fault in the Super Select 4WD II.  Have your vehicle inspected at an Author-
ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as
soon as possible.
Refer to “Drive mode indicator display and
2WD/4WD operation indicator display” on
page 6-30.
 The Off Road mode will not be available Refer to “Off Road mode-selector operation”
even if the Off Road mode selector is on page 6-34.
pressed because the drive mode-selector is
in “2H” or “4H”.

 The Off Road mode will not be available Refer to “Off Road mode indicator display” on
even if the Off Road mode selector is page 6-35.
pressed because the brake system is abnor-
mally overheated.
 The Off Road mode will not be available Refer to “Off Road mode indicator display” on
even if the Off Road mode selector is page 6-35. 5
pressed because the rear differential lock is
ON.
 There is a fault in the rear differential lock  Have your vehicle inspected at an author-
system. ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as
soon as possible.
Refer to “The rear differential lock indica-
tor lamp/display” on page 6-36.
 You try to be turned on the rear differential Refer to “Rear differential lock” on page 6-36.
lock switch during driving.
 The Hill Descent Control (HDC) brake Refer to “To operate” on page 6-55.
control is not available because the brake
system is abnormally overheated.
 The Hill Descent Control (HDC) cannot be Refer to “To operate” on page 6-55.
set to ON (Stand by) because the vehicle
speed is 20 km/h or more.

 The Hill Descent Control (HDC) cannot be Refer to “To operate” on page 6-55.
set to ON (Stand by) because the rear dif-
ferential lock is activating.
 There is a fault in the Hill start assist.  Have your vehicle inspected at an Author-
5 ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Refer to “Warning lamp/display” on page
6-54.
 There is a fault in the active stability &  Have your vehicle inspected at an Author-
traction control (ASTC). ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Refer to “ASTC warning lamp/display” on
page 6-63.
 There is a fault in the ABS.  Avoid sudden braking and high-speed driv-
ing, stop the vehicle in a safe place, and
take corrective measures. Refer to “ABS
warning lamp/display” on page 6-58.
 The braking system temperature is too  Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
high. place.
Refer to “ASTC indicator or ASTC OFF
indicator” on page 6-62.

 The Adaptive Cruise Control System  Increase the following distance by depress-
(ACC) has detected the approach of the ing the brake pedal or making other decel-
vehicles in front. erating control.
Refer to “Proximity alarm” on page 6-71.
 The Forward Collision Mitigation System  Take appropriate action such as depressing
(FCM) has detected the danger of collision. the brake to avoid collision.
Refer to “Forward collision warning func- 5
tion” on page 6-84.
 The Adaptive Cruise Control System  Depress the brake pedal as soon as your
(ACC) detected a stop of the vehicle in vehicle comes to a stop.
front and stopped your vehicle, but the Refer to “When ACC detects a vehicle in
brake will be released soon. front within the set distance” on page 6-70.
 The brake auto hold is automatically can-  Depress the brake pedal as soon as possi-
celled. ble.

 The Adaptive Cruise Control System Refer to “How to use ACC” on page 6-75.
(ACC) control is automatically cancelled.
 Conditions for the start of control are not

5 met, the Adaptive Cruise Control System
(ACC) can not start the control.
 The Adaptive Cruise Control System

(ACC) can not start the control because the
speed is out of speed range.

(ACC) can not start the control because not
detected the approach of the vehicles in
front.

(ACC) is not available temporarily.

 The Adaptive Cruise Control System Refer to “How to use ACC” on page 6-75.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) is operating.

(ACC) can not start the control because the 5
rear differential lock is ON.

drive mode-selector of Super Select 4WD
II is in “4HLc” or “4LLc”.
 There is a fault in the Adaptive Cruise  We recommend you to have it checked.

Control System (ACC). Refer to “To terminate ACC control” on
page 6-79.
 FCM braking function of the Forward Col- Refer to “FCM braking function” on page
lision Mitigation System (FCM) has been 6-85.
activated.
 There is a fault in the Forward Collision  Have your vehicle inspected at an author-
Mitigation System (FCM). ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Refer to “FCM braking function” on page
6-85.

 The Forward Collision Mitigation System Refer to “FCM braking function” on page
(FCM) is not available temporarily. 6-85.
 Foreign matter such as dirt adheres to the Refer to “To terminate ACC control” on page
5 Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) 6-79.
sensor. Refer to “FCM braking function” on page
 Foreign matter such as dirt adheres to the 6-85.
Forward Collision Mitigation System
(FCM) sensor.
 Foreign matter such as dirt adheres to the Refer to “FCM braking function” on page
Forward Collision Mitigation System 6-85.
(FCM) sensor.
 When the Forward Collision Mitigation Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation Sys-
System (FCM) is ON, if the drive mode- tem (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration
selector of Super Select 4WD II is set to Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch”
“4LLc”, the FCM will be switched to OFF on page 6-88.
automatically.
 When the FCM is OFF, the FCM will not
be switched to ON even if the Forward
Collision Mitigation System (FCM) and
Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation Sys-
tem (UMS) ON/OFF switch is pressed
because the drive mode-selector of Super
Select 4WD II is in “4LLc”.

System (FCM) is ON, if the rear differen- tem (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration
tial lock switch is set to ON, the FCM will Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch”
be switched to OFF automatically. on page 6-88.
 When the FCM is OFF, even if the For-
ward Collision Mitigation System (FCM)
and Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation 5
System (UMS) ON/OFF switch is pressed,
the FCM will not be switched to ON
because the rear differential lock switch is
ON.
System (FCM) is ON, if the Hill Descent tem (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration
Control (HDC) is set to ON, the FCM will Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch”
be switched to OFF automatically. on page 6-88.
 When the FCM is OFF, even if the For-
ward Collision Mitigation System (FCM)
and Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation
System (UMS) ON/OFF switch is pressed,
the FCM will not be switched to ON
because the Hill Descent Control (HDC)
operates.

 The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation  When the warning display does not disap-
System (UMS) sensor is temporarily not pear after waiting for a while, contact an
available for some reason such as the envi- authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
ronmental condition or increase of the sen- dealer.
sor temperature. Refer to “When the sensor is temporarily
not available” on page 6-95.
5
 The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation  Immediately have your vehicle inspected at

System (UMS) does not operate normally an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
because there are some malfunctions in the dealer.
sensor or the system. Refer to “When there is a malfunction in
the system or the sensor” on page 6-95.

 The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation Refer to “Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitiga-
System (UMS) is activated. tion System (UMS)” on page 6-90.
 When the Ultrasonic misacceleration Miti- Refer to “When the Ultrasonic misacceleration
gation System (UMS) is ON, if the drive Mitigation System is not available” on page
mode-selector of Super Select 4WD II is 6-95.
set to “4LLc”, the Ultrasonic misaccelera-
tion Mitigation System (UMS) will be
switched to OFF automatically.
 When the Ultrasonic misacceleration Miti-
gation System (UMS) is OFF, even if the
Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch
is pressed, the Ultrasonic misacceleration
Mitigation System (UMS) will not be
switched to ON because the drive mode-
selector of Super Select 4WD II is in
“4LLc”.

gation System (UMS) is ON, if the rear dif- Mitigation System is not available” on page
ferential lock switch is set to ON, the 6-95.
tem (UMS) will be switched to OFF auto-
matically.
5  When the Ultrasonic misacceleration Miti-
switched to ON because the rear differen-
tial lock switch is ON.
gation System (UMS) is ON, if the Hill Mitigation System is not available” on page
Descent Control (HDC) is set to ON, the 6-95.
tem (UMS) will be switched to OFF auto-
matically.
 When the Ultrasonic misacceleration Miti-
switched to ON because the Hill Descent
Control (HDC) operates.

 The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) sensor is  When the warning display does not disap-
temporarily not available for some reason pear after waiting for a while, contact an
such as the environmental condition or authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
increase of the sensor temperature. dealer.
Refer to “When the sensor is temporarily
not available” on page 6-99.
 The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) does not  Have your vehicle inspected at an author- 5
operate normally because there are some ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as
malfunctions in the sensor or the system. soon as possible.
Refer to “When there is a malfunction in
the system or the sensor” on page 6-99.
 Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice,  Remove a foreign object on the bumper
adhere to the bumper surface around the surface around the sensor.
sensor. When the warning display does not disap-
pear after having cleaned the bumper sur-
face around the sensor, contact an
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer.
Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW):
When there is a foreign objects on the sen-
sor” on page 6-100.
 The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) is  Pay special attention to the rear of your
detected vehicle approaching your vehicle. vehicle.
Refer to “Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA)” on page 6-100.

 The engine is overheated.  Stop the vehicle in a safe place and take
corrective measures.
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-3.
 More than specified limit water has accu-  Refer to “Removal of water from the fuel
5 mulated in the fuel filter. filter” on page 8-5.
Other interrupt displays

E00577300038
Screen System operation status Reference

 When starting the engine, the selector lever  Place the selector lever in the “P” (PARK)
is in a position other than the “P” (PARK) position, depress the brake pedal with the
or the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, or you right foot. Then, press the engine switch.
pressed the engine switch without depress- Refer to “Starting the engine” on page
ing the brake pedal. 6-18.

The operation status of each system is displayed on the information screen. Refer to the appropriate page for the system for further details.

 When the drive mode is shifted by operat- Refer to “Super Select 4WD Ⅱ ”on page 6-27.
ing the drive mode-selector.
 When “GRAVEL” mode of Off Road Refer to “Control mode” on page 6-34.
mode is selected.
 When “MUD/SNOW” mode of Off Road Refer to “Control mode” on page 6-34.
mode is selected.
 When “SAND” mode of Off Road mode is Refer to “Control mode” on page 6-34.
selected.

 When “ROCK” mode of Off Road mode is Refer to “Control mode” on page 6-34.
selected.
 When the auto parking brake function is Refer to “Auto parking brake function” on
5 activated. page 6-7.
 When the auto parking brake function is Refer to “Auto parking brake function” on
deactivated. page 6-7.
System (FCM) is deactivated. tem (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration
 When the Ultrasonic misacceleration Miti- Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch”
gation System (UMS) is deactivated. on page 6-88.
System (FCM) is activated or the timing of tem (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration
an alarm is changed. Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch”
on page 6-88.

 When approaching the guidance location, Refer to “Navigation information display” on
etc. page 5-36.
 When the reversing sensor system detects Refer to “Reversing sensor system: To oper-
an obstruction. ate” on page 6-103.
5
 When the sensor system detects an obstruc- Refer to “Sensor system: To operate” on page
tion. 6-107.
This informs you that a periodic inspection is due.
Screen Solution
We recommend you to have it checked. Refer to “Service reminder” for further details on page
5-8 (Instruments - Type A), 5-44 (Instruments - Type B).

Indicator lamps
The setting for rest interval can be changed.
Screen Solution
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and take a rest.
Use this display as rough guide for taking rests during a long drive.
The interval from the start of your trip until this message is displayed can be set.
Refer to “Changing the time until “REST REMINDER” is displayed” on page 5-16 (Instru-
5 ments - Type A), 5-39 (Instruments - Type B).
The display and buzzer alert the driver when the set time is reached. If you continue to drive
without having a rest, the buzzer sounds approximately every 5 minutes to encourage you to
take a rest.
 In the following cases, the time driven is reset and the display returns to the previous dis-
play screen. After this, when the set time is reached again, the buzzer and display encourage
you to take a rest.
• The buzzer sounds 3 times.
• Put the operation mode in OFF.
• The multi information display switch (Instruments - Type A) or 8 inch colour LCD meter
switches (Instruments - Type B) is held for approximately 2 seconds or more.
 When the turn-signal lever is moved to

Indicator lamps activate a turn-signal lamp.
High-beam indicator lamp
E00501801343
E00501600100
Refer to “Turn-signal lever” on page 5-81.
 When the hazard warning flasher switch This indicator lamp illumi-
Turn-signal indicator is pressed to activate the hazard warning nates when the high-beam is
lamps/Hazard warning indica- lamps. used.
Refer to “Hazard warning flasher switch”
tor lamps on page 5-83.
E00501701704
 When the hazard warning lamps automat-
These indicator lamps blink in
ically activate due to sudden braking
the following situations.
while driving.
Refer to “Emergency stop signal system”
on page 6-57.

Warning lamps
Front fog lamp indicator lamp NOTE CAUTION

E00501901689  If the engine is cold, the diesel preheat indi-  As your vehicle is equipped with the Electric
cator lamp is on for a longer time. parking brake, if this lamp blinks, the Elec-
This lamp illuminates while
 When the engine is warm, the diesel preheat tric parking brake cannot be applied.
the front fog lamps are on.
indicator lamp does not come on even if the When this lamp continues blinking after
operation mode is put in ON. waiting for a while, contact an authorised
Also, if the Electric parking brake warning
lamp (yellow) illuminates while the parking
5
Parking brake indicator lamp brake indicator lamp is blinking, the Electric
Position lamp indicator lamp This lamp illuminates when
E00577400039
parking brake system has a malfunction.
Immediately have your vehicle inspected at
E00508901356
the parking brake is applied an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
This indicator lamp illumi- while the operation mode is in dealer.
nates while the position lamps ON.
are on. As your vehicle is equipped
with the Electric parking brake, this lamp Warning lamps
illuminates and then goes off after a few sec- E00502400147
onds even when the parking brake applies
while the operation mode is in OFF.
Diesel preheat indicator lamp Brake warning lamp (red)
E00502301491
When the operation mode in ON, a buzzer E00502504250
sounds if your vehicle starts driving with the This lamp illuminates when
This indicates the glow plug
parking brake applied. the operation mode is put in
preheat condition.
ON, and goes off after a few
When the operation mode is
seconds.
put in ON, the lamp illumi-
Always make sure that the
nates and preheating of the
lamp goes off before driving.
glow plug starts automatically. As the glow
plug becomes hot, the lamp goes out and the With the operation mode in ON, the brake
engine starts. warning lamp illuminates under the following
conditions:

Warning lamps
 When the brake fluid level in the reservoir
falls to a low level.
Electric parking brake warning Check engine warning lamp
 When the brake force distribution func- lamp (yellow) E00502603209
This lamp is a part of an

tion is not operating correctly. E00568900096
This warning lamp will illu- onboard diagnostic system

minate when there is a fault in which monitors the emissions,
CAUTION the electric parking brake sys- engine control system or A/T
 In the situations listed below, brake perfor- tem. control system.
5 mance may be compromised or the vehicle
Normally, this warning lamp If a problem is detected in one of these sys-
may become unstable if brakes are applied tems, this lamp illuminates or flashes.
illuminates when the operation mode is put in
suddenly; consequently, avoid driving at Although your vehicle will usually be driva-
high speeds or applying the brakes suddenly. ON, and goes off in a few seconds.
ble and not need towing, we recommend you
Furthermore, immediately the vehicle should
to have the system checked as soon as possi-
be brought to a stop in a safe location and CAUTION ble.
your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI  When the warning lamp remains on or does
MOTORS dealer should be contacted. This lamp will also illuminate when the oper-
not come on, there is the possibility that the
• The brake warning lamp and the ABS ation mode is put in ON, and goes off after
parking brake cannot be operated or
warning lamp illuminate at the same time. released. Immediately contact the nearest
the engine has started. If it does not go off
For details, refer to “ABS warning authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. after the engine has started, we recommend
lamp/display” on page 6-58. When the warning lamp comes on during you to have the vehicle checked.
• The brake warning lamp remains illumi- driving, immediately stop the vehicle in a
nated while driving. safe place, and contact your authorised CAUTION
 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. If you inev-
 Prolonged driving with this lamp on may
following manner when brake performance itably have to park, park the vehicle on level
cause further damage to the emission control
has deteriorated. and stable ground, shift the select position in
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
• Depress the brake pedal harder than usual. “P” (PARK) position and place chocks or
drivability.
Even if the brake pedal moves down to the blocks.
 If the lamp does not illuminate when the
very end of its possible stroke, keep it
operation mode is put in ON, we recommend
pressed down hard.
you to have the system checked.
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking
to reduce your speed and keep pulling the
electric parking brake switch. (Refer to
“Electric parking brake” on page 6-4)
Depress the brake pedal to operate the stop
lamp to alert the vehicles behind you.

Information screen display
CAUTION CAUTION LED headlamp warning lamp

 If the lamp illuminates while the engine is  If it illuminates while the engine is running, E00569000081
running, avoid driving at high speeds and there is a problem in the charging system. This warning lamp in the
have the system inspected by an authorised Immediately park your vehicle in a safe instrument cluster will illumi-
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as soon as place and we recommend you to have it nate when there is a fault in
possible. checked. the LED headlamps.
Accelerator pedal and brake pedal response
may be negatively influenced under these
conditions.
5
Oil pressure warning lamp CAUTION
(Instruments - Type B)  If the warning lamp illuminates, there may
NOTE E00502801959 be a fault on the unit. Have the vehicle
 The engine electronic control module This lamp illuminates when checked at an authorised MITSUBISHI
accommodating the onboard diagnostic sys- the operation mode is put in MOTORS dealer.
tem has various fault data (especially about ON, and goes off after the
the exhaust emission) stored. engine has started. If it illumi-
nates while the engine is run- Information screen display
ning, the oil pressure is too low.
This data will be erased if a battery cable is E00524601205
Turn the engine off and have it inspected.
disconnected which will make a rapid diagno-
sis difficult. Do not disconnect a battery cable Brake warning display
when the check engine warning lamp is ON. CAUTION E00524701730
 This warning lamp does not indicate the
amount of oil level in the engine. This must
Charge warning lamp be determined by checking the oil level on
E00502702535 the dipstick, while the engine is switched off.
This lamp illuminates when Refer to “Maintenance: Engine oil” on page
the operation mode is put in 10-5.
ON, and goes off after the  If this lamp illuminates when the engine oil
This warning is displayed if you drive with
engine has started. level is not low, have it inspected.
the parking brake still applied. The warning
A warning is also displayed  If you continue driving with low engine oil
level or with this warning lamp illuminated, lamp in the instrument cluster also illumi-
on the instrument cluster.
engine seizure may occur. nates when the parking brake is applied.

Information screen display
If this warning is displayed, press down the If there is a fault with the charging system,
Electric parking brake switch to release the
CAUTION the warning display is displayed on the infor-
 If the brake warning display is displayed and
parking brake while depressing the brake mation screen in the instrument cluster. The
the brake warning lamp and the ABS warn-
pedal. warning lamp in the instrument cluster also
ing lamp are illuminated at the same time,
the braking force distribution function will illuminates.
CAUTION not operate, so the vehicle may be destabi-
 If a vehicle is driven without releasing the lised during sudden braking. Avoid sudden CAUTION
5 parking brake, the brake will be overheated,
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
braking and high-speed driving, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, and we recommend
 If the warning is displayed while the engine
is running, immediately park your vehicle in
brake failure. you to have it checked. a safe place and we recommend you to have
 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the it checked.
following manner when brake performance
has deteriorated.
• Depress the brake pedal harder than usual.
Even if the brake pedal moves down to the Oil pressure warning display
very end of its possible stroke, keep it E00524901527
pressed down hard.

• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking
When the operation mode is put in ON, if the to reduce your speed and keep pulling the
brake fluid is low, this warning is displayed. electric parking brake switch. (Refer to
The warning lamp in the instrument cluster “Electric parking brake” on page 6-4)
also illuminates. Depress the brake pedal to operate the stop
lamp to alert the vehicles behind you. If the engine oil pressure drops while the
CAUTION engine is running, the warning display is dis-
 If this warning stays illuminated and does Charge warning display played on the information screen in the
not go out while driving, there is a danger of E00524801425
instrument cluster.
ineffective braking. If this happens, immedi-
ately park your vehicle in a safe place and
we recommend you to have it checked.
CAUTION
 If the vehicle is driven while the engine oil is
low, or the oil level is normal but the warn-
ing is displayed, the engine may burn out and
be damaged.

Combination headlamps and dipper switch
Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps.
CAUTION NOTE
 If the warning is displayed while the engine  The sensitivity of the automatic on/off con-
is running, immediately park your vehicle in trol can be adjusted. For further information,
a safe place and check the engine oil level. contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
Refer to “Maintenance: Engine oil” on page MOTORS dealer.
10-5.  If the front fog lamps turn on when they are
 If the warning is displayed while the engine supposed to with the switch in the “AUTO”
oil level is normal, have it inspected. position, the lamps turn off automatically
with the operation mode off.
5
 When the headlamps are turned off by the
Combination headlamps automatic on/off control with the operation
and dipper switch mode in ON, the front fog lamps also go off.
E00506004181
When the headlamps are subsequently turned
back on by the automatic on/off control, the
OFF All lamps off front fog lamps also come on.
Headlamps With the operation mode is in ON,  Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automatic
headlamps, position, tail, licence on/off control by affixing a sticker or label to
plate and instrument panel lamps the windscreen.
NOTE turn on and off automatically in
 Do not leave the lamps on for a long time AUTO
accordance with outside light A
while the engine is stationary (not running).
level. All lamps turn off automati-
A run-down battery could result.
cally when the operation mode is
 When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
put in OFF.
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
becomes foggy, but this does not indicate a Position, tail, licence plate and
functional problem. instrument panel lamps on
When the lamp is switched on, the heat will
remove the fog. However, if water gathers Headlamps and other lamps go on  If the lamps do not turn on or off with the
inside the lamp, we recommend you to have switch in the “AUTO” position, manually
checked. operate the switch and we recommend you to
have your vehicle checked.

Combination headlamps and dipper switch
The buzzer will automatically stop if the
Lamps (headlamps, fog lamp, auto-cutoff function is activated, the lamp
Headlamp flasher
etc.) auto-cutout function switch is turned off, or the door is closed.
E00506301402
E00532701683 The high-beams flash when the lever is

 If the operation mode is put in OFF or pulled slightly (2), and will go off when it is
ACC while the lamp switch is in the “ ”
Daytime running lamp released.
E00530601385
position, the lamps will turn off automati- When the high-beam is on, the high-beam
cally when the driver’s door is opened. The daytime running lamps comes on when indicator lamp in the instrument cluster will
5  If the operation mode is put in OFF or the engine is running and the lamp switch is illuminate.
in the “OFF” or “AUTO” position and the tail
ACC while the lamp switch is in the “ ”
lamps are off.
position, the lamps will remain on for NOTE
approximately 3 minutes while the  The high-beams can also flash when the
driver’s door is shut and will then auto- Dipper (High/Low beam lamp switch is OFF.
matically turn off. change)  If you turn the lamps off with the headlamps
set to high-beam, the headlamps are auto-
E00506201788
matically returned to their low-beam setting
NOTE When the lamp switch is in the “ ” posi- when the lamp switch is next turned to the
 The lamp auto-cutout will not function when tion, the beam changes from high to low (or “ ” position.
the lamp switch is in the “ ” position. low to high) each time the lever is pulled
 The lamp auto-cutout function can also be fully (1). While the high-beam is on, the
disabled.
For further information, please contact your
high-beam indicator lamp in the instrument Welcome light
cluster will also illuminate. E00528902287
This function turns on the position and tail
lamps for about 30 seconds after the
Lamp monitor buzzer UNLOCK switch on the key is pressed when
E00506101787
the combination headlamps and dipper switch
is in the “OFF” or “AUTO” position. The
If the driver’s door is opened when the opera-
welcome light function will operate only
tion mode is put in ACC or OFF while the
when it is dark outside the vehicle.
lamps illuminated, a buzzer will sound to
remind the driver to turn off the lamps.

Turn-signal lever
NOTE NOTE
 While the welcome light function is operat- • The time that the headlamps remain on can
ing, perform one of the following operations be changed.
to cancel the function. • The coming home light function can be
• Press the LOCK switch on the key. deactivated.
• Turn the combination headlamps and dip- For further information, please contact your
per switch to the “ ” or “ ” position. authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
• Put the operation mode in ON. 5
 It is possible to modify functions as follows: Automatic headlamp levelling
• The headlamps can be set to come on in the E00516801354
low beam setting.
4. The headlamps will come on in the low This mechanism automatically adjusts the
• The welcome light function can be deacti-
vated. beam setting for about 30 seconds. After direction of the headlamps (beam position)
For further information, please contact your the headlamps go off, the headlamps can depending on changes in the condition of the
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. be turned on again in the low beam setting vehicle, such as the number of occupants or
for about 30 seconds by pulling the turn- luggage weight. When the headlamps are illu-
signal lever towards you within 60 sec- minated with the operation mode in ON, the
Coming home light onds of putting the operation mode in beam position of the headlamps is automati-
OFF. cally adjusted when the vehicle is stopped.
E00529001796
To turn on the headlamps again after
This function turns on the headlamps in the
60 seconds of putting the operation mode Turn-signal lever
low beam setting for about 30 seconds after
in OFF, repeat the process from step 1.
the operation mode is put in OFF. E00506503219
The turn-signal lamps flash when the lever is

1. Turn the combination headlamps and dip- NOTE operated (with the operation mode is in ON).
per switch to the “OFF” or “AUTO” posi-  While the coming home light function is At the same time, the turn-signal indicator
tion. operating, perform one of the following flashes.
2. Put the operation mode in OFF. operations to cancel the function.
3. Within 60 seconds of putting the opera- • Pull the turn-signal lever towards you.
tion mode in OFF, pull the turn-signal • Turn the combination headlamps and dip-
lever towards you. per switch to the “ ” or “ ” position.
• Put the operation mode in ON.
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:

Active Cornering Lights (ACL)
night when all the following conditions are
NOTE satisfied.
 It is possible to activate the following func-
tions:  The operation mode is in ON.
• Flashing of the turn-signal lamps when the  The vehicle speed is approximately
lever is operated with the operation mode is 40 km/h or less.
in ACC.
• The turn-signal lamps 3-flash function for
 The lamp switch is in the position or
the headlamps turn on when the lamp
5 lane changes can be deactivated.
switch is in the “AUTO” position.
• The time required to operate the lever for
the 3-flash function can be adjusted.
For further information, please contact your
1- Turn-signals
When making a normal turn, use posi-
 It is possible to change the tone of a sound-
tion (1). The lever will return automati-
ing buzzer as the turn-signal lamps flash.
cally when cornering is completed. [Vehicles equipped with the Instruments -
2- Lane-change signals Type A]
When moving the lever to (2) slightly Refer to “Changing the turn-signal sound”
to change a lane, the turn-signal lamps on page 5-16.
and indicator lamp in the instrument [Vehicles equipped with the Instruments -
cluster will only flash while the lever is Type B]
operated. Refer to “Changing the turn-signal sound”
Also, when you move the lever to (2) on page 5-40.
slightly then release it, the turn-signal
lamps and indicator lamp in the instru- Active Cornering Lights
ment cluster will flash 3 times.
(ACL)
E00577500030
NOTE The Active Cornering Lights (ACL) is a

 If the lamp flashes unusually quickly, the device that illuminates the road on the inside
bulb in a turn-signal lamp may have burned of the turn based on the operation of the turn-
out. Have the vehicle inspected by an author- signal lever and steering wheel.
ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. The Active Cornering Lights (ACL) illumi-
nates to raise visibility at intersections at

Hazard warning flasher switch
The hazard warning flashers can always be in the “ON” direction to turn on the front fog
CAUTION operated, regardless of the operation mode. lamps. An indicator lamp in the instrument
 If the ACL are left illuminated for approxi-
cluster will also come on. Turn the knob in
mately 15 minutes or more, they will auto- Press the switch to turn on the hazard warn- the “OFF” direction to turn off the front fog
matically turn off to prevent them from being ing flashers, all turn-signal lamps flash con-
left illuminated. To illuminate the lights lamps. The knob will automatically return to
tinuously. its original position when you release it.
again, return the turn-signal lever and oper-
ate it again.
To turn them off, press the switch again.
5
NOTE
 The ACL do not illuminate in the following
cases.
• The lamp switch is in the position or
the “OFF” position.
• The steering wheel is operated when the
vehicle is stopped after driving once.
• The vehicle speed is 40 km/h or higher.
 Contact a nearby authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer if the lamps do not illumi-
NOTE
nate. NOTE  The front fog lamps are automatically turned
 If the selector lever is put into the “R”
 While the hazard warning lamps are blinking off when the headlamps or tail lamps are
(REVERSE) position when the illumination
due to having manually pushed the switch, turned off. To turn the front fog lamps on
conditions are satisfied, both the left and
the emergency stop signal system does not again, turn the knob in the “ON” direction
right ACL illuminate.
operate. after turning on the headlamps or tail lamps.
Refer to “Emergency stop signal system” on  Do not use fog lamps except in conditions of
page 6-57. fog, otherwise excessive lamp glare may
Hazard warning flasher temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.
switch
E00506602558 Front fog lamp switch
E00506802068
Use the hazard warning flasher switch when
the vehicle has to be parked on the road for The front fog lamps can be operated while the
any emergency. headlamps or tail lamps are on. Turn the knob

Wiper and washer switch
Wiper operation under these conditions can
Wiper and washer switch scratch the windscreen and damage the wip-
E00507102837
ers.
The windscreen wipers and washer can be
operated with the operation mode in ON or
ACC. A
If the blades are frozen to the windscreen or
rear window, do not operate the wipers until
5 the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
MIST- Misting function
CAUTION The wipers will operate once.
 If the washer is used in cold weather, the OFF- Off
washer fluid sprayed against the glass may AUTO- Auto-wiper control
freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm
Rain sensor
the glass with the defroster or rear window
demister before using the washer.
The wipers will automatically oper- CAUTION
ate depending on the degree of wet-  With the operation mode in ON and the lever
ness on the windscreen. in the “AUTO” position, the wipers may
LO- Slow automatically operate in the situations
Windscreen wipers HI- Fast described below.
E00516901977 If your hands get trapped, you could suffer
injuries or the wipers could malfunction. Be
NOTE Rain sensor sure to put the operation mode in OFF, or
 To ensure a clear rearward view, the rear move lever to the “OFF” position to deacti-
window wiper will automatically perform Can only be used when the operation mode is vate the rain sensor.
several continuous operations if the selector in ON. • When cleaning the outside surface of the
lever is put in the “R” position while the If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, the windscreen, if you touch on top of the rain
windscreen wipers are operating. sensor.
rain sensor (A) will detect the extent of rain
Refer to “Rear window wiper and washer” • When cleaning the outside surface of the
on page 5-86.
(or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.) and the
windscreen, if you wipe with a cloth on top
wipers will operate automatically. of the rain sensor.
Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the • When using an automatic car wash.
windscreen is dirty and the weather is dry.

CAUTION NOTE
• A physical shock is applied to the wind-  The wipers may automatically operate when
screen. things such as insects or foreign objects are
• A physical shock is applied to the rain sen- affixed to the windscreen on top of the rain
sor. sensor or when the windscreen is frozen.
Objects affixed to the windscreen will stop
the wipers when the wipers cannot remove
NOTE them. To operate the wipers again, move the
5
lever in the “LO” or “HI” position.
 To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this
Also, the wipers may operate automatically
operation of the wipers does not take place
due to strong direct sunlight or electromag-
even if the lever is put in the “AUTO” posi- “+”- Higher sensitivity to rain
netic wave. To stop the wipers, place the
tion when the vehicle is stationary and the
lever in the “OFF” position. “-”- Lower sensitivity to rain
ambient temperature is about 0 °C or lower.
 Contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
 Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker
MOTORS dealer when replacing the wind-
or label to the windscreen. Also, do not put
any water-repellent coating on the wind-
screen or reinforcing the glass around the NOTE
sensor.  It is possible to activate the following func-
screen. The rain sensor would not be able to
detect the extent of rain, and the wipers tions:
might stop working normally. To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor • Automatic operation (rain droplet sensitive)
 In the following cases, the rain sensor may can be changed to intermittent operation
With the lever in the “AUTO” (rain sensor) (vehicle-speed sensitive).
be malfunctioning.
For further information, please contact your position, it is possible to adjust the sensitivity • Automatic operation (rain droplet sensitive)
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. of the rain sensor by turning the knob (B). can be changed to intermittent operation
• When the wipers operate at a constant inter- (except vehicle-speed sensitive).
val despite changes in the extent of rain. For further information, please contact your
• When the wipers do not operate even authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
though it is raining.
Misting function
Move the lever in the direction of the arrow

and release, to operate the wipers once.
Use this function when you are driving in

mist or drizzle.

The wipers will operate once if the lever is
raised to the “MIST” position and released
Windscreen washer NOTE
E00507202463  The wipers’ operation combined with spray-
when the operation mode is in ON or ACC.
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the ing the washer fluid can be deactivated. For
The wipers will continue to operate while the
more details, consult an authorised
lever is held in the “MIST” position. windscreen by pulling the lever towards you.
The wipers operate automatically several
times while the washer fluid is being sprayed.
On vehicles equipped with the headlamp
5 washer, while the headlamps are on, the head- Rear window wiper and washer
lamp washer will operate once together with E00507302510
the windscreen washer. The rear window wiper and washer switch
can be operated with the operation mode in
ON or ACC.
The wipers will operate once if the lever is

moved to the “AUTO” position and the knob
(C) is turned in the “+” direction when the
operation mode is in ON.
CAUTION
 If the washer is used in cold weather, the INT - The wiper operates continuously
washer fluid sprayed against the glass may for several seconds then operates
freeze resulting in poor visibility. Heat the intermittently at intervals of about
glass with the defroster or demister before every 8 seconds.
using the washer. OFF - Off

The washer fluid will be sprayed
-
onto the rear window when the
NOTE NOTE
 The interval for intermittent operation can be  If the operation mode is in ON or ACC and
knob is turned fully in either direc-
adjusted. the headlamps are on, the headlamp washer
tion. For further information, please contact your operates together with the windscreen
The wipers operate automatically authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. washer the first time the windscreen washer
several times while the washer fluid lever is pulled.
is being sprayed.
Headlamp washer switch*
5
NOTE E00510101645
Precautions to observe when
 The rear window wiper will automatically The headlamp washer can be operated with using wipers and washers
perform several continuous operations if the the operation mode in ON or ACC and the E00507601590
selector lever is put in the “R” position while
the windscreen wipers or the rear window
lamp switch at the “ ” position.  If the moving wipers become blocked
wiper is operating. (automatic operation partway through a sweep by ice or other
Push the button once and the washer fluid deposits on the glass, the wipers may tem-
mode)
After the automatic operation, the rear win- will be sprayed on to the headlamps. porarily stop operating to prevent the
dow wiper will stop operating if the knob is motor from overheating. In this case, park
in the “OFF” position. If the knob is in the the vehicle in a safe place, put the opera-
“INT” position, the rear window wiper will tion mode in OFF, and then remove the
return to the intermittent operation. ice or other deposits. Because the wipers
It is possible to set the rear window wiper to will start operating again after the wiper
perform the automatic operation only if the
motor cools down, check that the wipers
selector lever is put in the “R” position while
the rear window wiper is operating with the
operate before using them.
knob in the “INT” position.  Do not use the wipers when the glass is
For further information, please contact your dry.
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. They may scratch the glass surface and
 If the knob is in the “OFF” position, turn the the blades wear out prematurely.
knob to the “INT” position twice quickly to  Before using the wipers in cold weather,
operate the rear window wiper continuously. check that the wiper blades are not frozen
(continuous operation mode) onto the glass. The motor may burn out if
Turn the knob to the “OFF” position to stop the wipers are used with the blades frozen
the rear window wiper continuous operation. onto the glass.

Rear window demister switch
 Avoid using the washer continuously for
more than 20 seconds. Do not operate the
Customizing the automatic rear
washer when the fluid reservoir is empty. window demister
Otherwise, the motor may burn out.
 Periodically check the level of washer Function can be changed as desired, as stated
fluid in the reservoir and refill if required. below.
During cold weather, add a recommended
washer solution that will not freeze in the  Enable automatic rear window demister:
5 washer reservoir. Failure to do so could If the outside air temperature drops below
result in loss of washer function and frost approx. 3 °C (37 °F), the rear window
damage to the system components. demister operates once automatically after
the engine starts.
NOTE
Rear window demister  The demister switch is not to melt snow but  Disable automatic rear window demister:
switch to clear mist. Remove snow before use of the The rear window demister does not oper-
E00507903018
demister switch. ate automatically.
 To avoid unnecessary discharge of the bat-
The rear window demister switch can be tery, do not use the rear window demister  Setting change method:
operated when the engine is running. during starting of the engine or when the Hold down the rear window demister
Press the switch to turn on the rear window engine is not running. Turn the demister off switch for approximately 10 seconds or
demister. It will be turned off automatically in immediately after the window is clear. more.
approximately 20 minutes. To turn off the  When cleaning the inside of the rear window, • When the setting is changed from enable
demister within approximately 20 minutes, use a soft cloth and wipe gently along the to disable
press the switch again. heater wires, being careful not to damage the 3 sounds are emitted and the indicator
The indicator lamp (A) will illuminate while wires.
lamp flashes 3 times.
the demister is on.  Do not allow objects to touch the inside of
• When the setting is changed from disa-
the rear window glass, damaged or broken
ble to enable
wires may result.
2 sounds are emitted and the indicator
lamp flashes 3 times.

Horn switch
NOTE
 The factory setting is “Disable automatic
rear window demister”.
Horn switch
5
E00508001722
Press the steering wheel on or around the

“ ”mark.

Starting and driving
Economical driving ..........................................................................6-2 Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC) ................................6-60
Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-3 Cruise control* ...............................................................................6-63
Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-3 Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)* ......................................6-69
Running-in recommendations ..........................................................6-4 Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM)* ..............................6-83
Electric parking brake ......................................................................6-4 Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System (UMS)* ................6-90 6
Parking ...........................................................................................6-10 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist)* ..............6-95
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment ..................................6-10 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)* ...............................................6-100
Inside rear-view mirror ..................................................................6-11 Reversing sensor system*.............................................................6-102
Outside rear-view mirrors ..............................................................6-12 Sensor system* .............................................................................6-105
Engine switch .................................................................................6-14 Rear-view camera* ....................................................................... 6-110
Steering wheel lock ........................................................................6-16 Multi Around Monitor*................................................................ 6-113
Starting and stopping the engine ....................................................6-18 Cargo loads ..................................................................................6-123
Turbocharger operation ..................................................................6-20
8-Speed automatic transmission with sports mode ........................6-20
Super Select 4WD II*.....................................................................6-27
Off Road mode*..............................................................................6-34
Rear differential lock* ....................................................................6-36
4-wheel drive operation* ................................................................6-41
Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation ........6-47
Cautions on handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles*...........................6-48
Braking ..........................................................................................6-49
Brake auto hold ..............................................................................6-50
Hill start assist ................................................................................6-53
Hill Descent Control (HDC)*.........................................................6-55
Brake assist system ........................................................................6-56
Emergency stop signal system .......................................................6-57
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .......................................................6-57
Power steering system ...................................................................6-59
Economical driving
slight release of the accelerator pedal will
Economical driving Shifting save a significant amount of fuel.
E00600102738
For economical driving, there are some tech- Shift only at an appropriate speed and engine
nical requirements that have to be met. The speed. Always use the highest shift position Tyre inflation pressure
prerequisite for low fuel consumption is a possible.
properly adjusted engine. In order to achieve The drive mode-selector should be set to“2H” Check the tyre inflation pressures at regular
longer life of the vehicle and the most eco- when driving 4WD vehicles on normal roads intervals. Low tyre inflation pressure
nomical operation, have the vehicle Serviced and express ways to obtain best possible fuel increases road resistance and fuel consump-
economy. tion. In addition, low tyre pressures adversely
6 by an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer. at regular intervals in accordance with affect tyre wear and driving stability.
the service standards. City traffic
Fuel economy and generation of exhaust gas Cargo loads
and noise are highly influenced by personal
Frequent starting and stopping increases the
driving habits as well as the particular operat-
average fuel consumption. Use roads with Do not drive with unnecessary articles in the
ing conditions. The following points should
smooth traffic flow whenever possible. When luggage compartment. Especially during city
be observed in order to minimize wear of
driving on congested roads, avoid use of a driving where frequent starting and stopping
brakes, tyres and engine as well as to reduce
low shift position at high engine speeds. is necessary, the increased weight of the vehi-
environmental pollution.
cle will greatly affect fuel consumption. Also
avoid driving with unnecessary luggage or
Accelerating and decelerating Idling carriers, etc., on the roof; the increased air
resistance will increase fuel consumption.
The vehicle consumes fuel even during
Drive according to traffic conditions, and
idling. Avoid extended idling whenever pos-
avoid sudden starts, sudden acceleration, and
sible. Cold engine starting
sudden braking, as they will increase fuel
consumption.
Starting of a cold engine consumes more fuel.
Speed Unnecessary fuel consumption is also caused
by keeping a hot engine running. After the
At higher the vehicle speed, more fuel is con- engine is started, commence driving as soon
sumed. Avoid driving at full speed. Even a as possible.
6-2 Starting and driving

Driving, alcohol and drugs
Cooler or air conditioning Safe driving techniques

E00600300446
The use of the air conditioning will increase Driving safety and protection against injury
the fuel consumption. cannot be fully ensured. However, we recom-
mend that you pay extra attention to the fol-
lowing:
Driving, alcohol and drugs
E00600200070
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent Seat belts

causes of accidents. 6
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired Before starting the vehicle, make sure that
even with blood alcohol levels far below the you and your passengers have fastened your
legal minimum. If you have been drinking, seat belts. Carrying children in the vehicle
don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use  Never leave your vehicle unattended with
public transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-
Floor mats the key and children inside the vehicle.
ing a cold shower will not make you sober. Children may play with the driving con-
Similarly, prescription and nonprescription trols and this could lead to an accident.
WARNING  Make sure that infants and small children
drugs affect your alertness, perception and  Keep floor mats clear of the pedals by cor-
reaction time. Consult with your doctor or are properly restrained in accordance with
rectly laying floor mats that are suitable
pharmacist before driving while under the for the vehicle.
the laws and regulations, and for maxi-
influence of any of these medications. To prevent the floor mats from slipping mum protection in case of an accident.
out of position, securely retain them using  Prevent children from playing in the lug-
the hook etc. gage compartment. It is quite dangerous
WARNING Note that laying a floor mat over a pedal to allow them to play there while the vehi-
 NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE. or laying one floor mat on top of another cle is moving.
Your perceptions are less accurate, your can obstruct pedal operation and lead to a
reflexes are slower and your judgment is serious accident.
impaired. Loading luggage
When loading luggage, be careful not to load

above the height of seats. This is dangerous
Starting and driving 6-3

Running-in recommendations
not only because rearward vision will be Shift point Speed limit
obstructed, but also the luggage may be pro-
CAUTION
jected into the passenger compartment under 3rd gear 50 km/h  On 4WD vehicles, the “4LLc” range gives
maximum torque for low-speed driving on
hard braking. 4th gear 65 km/h
steep slopes, as well as sandy, muddy, and
5th gear 75 km/h other difficult surfaces. Do not exceed
Running-in recommenda- 6th gear 95 km/h speeds of approximately 70 km/h in “4LLc”
range.
tions 7th gear 115 km/h
E00600404403
8th gear 120 km/h
6 During the running-in period for the first Electric parking brake
1,000 km, it is advisable to drive your new
vehicle using the following precautions as a
4WD models E00600502989
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-

guideline to aid long life as well as future
plete stop, fully apply the parking brake suffi-
economy and performance. Speed limit
ciently to hold the vehicle.
Shift point 2H, 4H, The Electric parking brake is the system that
 Do not race the engine at high speeds. 4LLc
 Avoid rapid starting, accelerating, braking 4HLc applies the parking brake by the electric
and prolonged high-speed running. 1st gear 15 km/h 5 km/h motor.
 Keep to the running-in speed limit shown 2nd gear 30 km/h 10 km/h
below. NOTE
Please note that the legal speed limits dis- 3rd gear 50 km/h 20 km/h
 You may hear an operation noise from the
played must be adhered to. 4th gear 65 km/h 25 km/h vehicle body when operating the Electric
 Do not exceed loading limits. 5th gear 75 km/h 30 km/h parking brake. This does not indicate a mal-
 Refrain from towing a trailer. function and the Electric parking brake is
6th gear 95 km/h 35 km/h operating normally.
7th gear 115 km/h  When the battery is weak or dead, the park-
2WD models 45 km/h ing brake cannot be applied or released.
8th gear 120 km/h Refer to “Emergency starting” on page 8-2.
Shift point Speed limit
1st gear 15 km/h
2nd gear 30 km/h

To apply CAUTION CAUTION

E00650200091  When the need arises to apply the parking  If the parking brake indicator lamp blinks,
brake as the emergency brake for a failure of the Electric parking brake cannot be applied.
the foot brake etc. during driving, pull and When this lamp continues blinking after
hold the Electric parking brake switch. waiting for a while, contact an authorised
While holding it, the brake is applied. At this MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
time, the following warning display appears
with a buzzer sound, but you should continue
to pull and hold the Electric parking brake NOTE
switch.  In the following conditions, the parking 6
brake indicator lamp will illuminate for
approximately 15 seconds and then go off.
• While the Electric parking brake is applied,
1. Stop the vehicle completely. the operation mode is put in OFF.
2. Pull up the Electric parking brake switch • While he operation mode is in OFF, the
Use the parking brake only in emergency. By Electric parking brake switch is pulled up.
while depressing the brake pedal.
the excessive use of the brake, the brake  When parking on steep grades, pull up the
parts are possibly worn early and the brake is Electric parking brake switch twice (once
When the parking brake is applied, the park- disabled by the overheat. more after the operation is completed once).
ing brake indicator lamp and the indicator  If you operate the Electric parking brake The maximum effect of the parking brake
lamp (A) on the Electric parking brake switch switch repeatedly within a short time, the will be obtained.
come on. warning display may appear and the parking  If the parking brake does not hold the vehicle
brake cannot be applied temporarily. In such stationary after the foot brake is released,
indicator lamp a case, wait for approximately one minute contact your authorised MITSUBISHI
and operate the Electric parking brake switch MOTORS dealer.
again after the warning display disappears.
 When the operation mode is other than ON,
if the parking brake is applied, the parking
brake indicator lamp comes on for a while.
 The parking brake indicator lamp and the
indicator lamp on the Electric parking brake
switch may blink. This does not indicate a
malfunction if the lamps go off when the
Electric parking brake is released.

When the parking brake is released, the park-
NOTE ing brake indicator lamp and the indicator
CAUTION
 Depending on the situation, the Electric  If the vehicle is operated in cold weather and
lamp on the Electric parking brake switch go
parking brake may be applied automatically. the vehicle speed does not increase more
off.
Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 6-50. than usual after releasing the Electric park-
 If the accelerator pedal is depressed when the ing brake, the Electric parking brake may not
Electric parking brake has been applied or is CAUTION be fully released. In this case, park the vehi-
applied, the warning will be displayed.  After the Electric parking brake switch has cle, and apply and release the Electric park-
been operated to apply or release the Electric ing brake again. When the vehicle speed
parking brake, if the parking brake indicator does not increase even if this operation is
6 lamp and the indicator on the Electric park- made, contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer.
ing brake switch remain blinking or the Elec-
tric parking brake warning lamp (yellow)
remain illuminated, the Electric parking
brake system may be malfunctioning and the NOTE
To release Electric parking brake may not be applied or  When the operation mode is other than ON,
E00650300106 released. Immediately park your vehicle in a the parking brake cannot be released.
safe place and contact the nearest  When there is a malfunction in the Electric
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. parking brake, release the Electric parking
 Before driving, be sure that the parking brake manually.
brake is released, the parking brake indicator Refer to “When the Electric parking brake
lamp and the Electric parking brake warning cannot be released” on page 6-8 for manual
lamp (yellow) are off. release of the Electric parking brake.
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the  When in other than “P” (PARK) position, if
parking brake, the brake will be overheated, you try to release the Electric parking brake
resulting in ineffective braking and possible switch without depressing the brake pedal,
brake failure. the warning display will appear.
1. Make sure that the operation mode is

ON.
2. Press down the Electric parking brake
switch while depressing the brake pedal.

2. Pull the Electric parking brake switch for
NOTE CAUTION 4 seconds or more. The Auto parking
 If you start driving without releasing the  When the Electric parking brake warning
brake function will turn ON, and the fol-
Electric parking brake, the warning display lamp (yellow) comes on while driving, the
lowing display appears in the instrument
will appear. Electric parking brake may not be applied or
released. Immediately contact the nearest cluster.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. For details,
refer to “Electric parking brake warning
lamp (yellow)” on page 5-76.
When parking your vehicle while the Elec-
tric parking brake warning lamp (yellow) is
illuminated, park the vehicle on level and
6
Warning display stable ground, move the selector lever to the
E00650400051 “P” (PARK) position and place chocks, CAUTION
Warning lamp (yellow) blocks, or stones behind and in front of the  Set the Auto parking brake function after
tyres to prevent the vehicle from moving. stopping the vehicle. If you operate the Elec-
tric parking brake switch while the vehicle is
moving, the Electric parking brake may be
applied, which may lead to an unexpected
Auto parking brake function accident.
Warning display E00696800020
The Electric parking brake can be applied or

released automatically in conjunction with NOTE
the operation of the selector lever.  The Auto parking brake function cannot be
enabled when the Electric parking brake
NOTE warning lamp remain illuminated.
If there is a malfunction in the system, the  Even when the Auto parking brake function
 The settings of the Auto parking brake func-
is enabled, you can operate the Electric park-
Electric parking brake warning lamp (yellow) tion are retained even if the operation mode
ing brake using the Electric parking brake
will come on. In addition, the warning dis- is put in OFF.
switch.
play appears on the information screen in the
instrument cluster.
Under normal conditions, the warning lamp  To enable the Auto parking brake
only comes on when the operation mode is function
put in ON and goes off a few seconds later.
1. Put the operation mode in ON.

NOTE CAUTION
 If the Electric parking brake switch fails with  Also when the system detects abnormality
the Electric parking brake applied, the Auto with the Auto parking brake function ON,
parking brake function will turn ON and the the Electric parking brake warning lamp
“ON” display appears even when the Auto NOTE remain illuminated in the instrument cluster,
parking brake function is OFF, and then the  Under the following conditions, the Electric and the Auto parking brake function will turn
Electric parking brake can be released in parking brake cannot be applied or released OFF.
conjunction with the operation of the selec- automatically even when the Auto parking
tor lever. brake function is enabled.
6 After the Electric parking brake is released,
the Auto parking brake function will turn
• The engine is stopped. When the Electric parking
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
OFF and the “OFF” display appears. barake cannot be released
• The vehicle is not stopped.
E00650500049
 Operate the selector lever with the brake
 How to operate the Electric parking pedal fully depressed. If you lift your foot off When the parking brake cannot be released
brake by using the Auto parking the brake pedal while operating the selector because even if the Electric parking brake
brake function lever, the Electric parking brake may not switch is operated, it can be released manu-
operate. ally in the following procedures. The manual
When the selector lever is placed in the “P” release of the Electric parking brake can be
(PARK) position with the Auto parking brake used only when the Electric parking brake
function enabled, the Electric parking brake  To disable the Auto parking brake needs to be released in an emergency.
is applied automatically, and the parking function
brake indicator lamp in the instrument cluster WARNING
comes on. Press the Electric parking brake switch for  Before the manual release of the Electric
When the selector lever is placed in other 4 seconds or more. The Auto parking brake parking brake, check the area around the
than the “P” (PARK) position, the Electric function will turn OFF, and the following dis- vehicle is safe.
parking brake is released automatically, and play appears in the instrument cluster.  After the manual release of the Electric
the parking brake indicator lamp in the instru- parking brake, have the vehicle inspected
ment cluster goes off. at an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer immediately.
Indicator lamp

5. Remove the bolts (A) (3 locations) secur-
CAUTION ing the cap (B) with a hexagon wrench
 Do not drive with the Electric parking brake
(C).
applied. The brake parts may be worn early
and the brake may be disabled by overheat.
 Do not use the hexagon wrench for any pur-
pose other than releasing the Electric parking
brake in an emergency.
1. Apply chocks to wheels.

2. Move the selector lever to the “P” 6
(PARK) position.
8. Insert the hexagon wrench into the hole
WARNING where the plug was installed, and con-
 When releasing the Electric parking brake
tinue to turn it anticlockwise while push-
manually, be sure to move the selector ing it in.
lever to the “P” (PARK) position. Other-
wise, the vehicle may begin to move, which
may lead to an unexpected accident.
6. Remove the cap by hooking the jack han-
dle (D) to the cap.
3. Stop the engine if it is running.
4. Make sure that the indicator lamp on the
Electric parking brake switch is off.
WARNING
 Be sure to ensure that the indicator lamp
on the Electric parking brake switch is off
before releasing the Electric parking
brake manually. Otherwise, the Electric CAUTION
parking brake may operate and the hexa-  When performing the release operation, use
gon wrench may move suddenly, which the hexagon wrench which are on-vehicle
may cause injury. tools, and do not use the power tool. Other-
7. Pull out the plug (E). wise, it may cause damage to the Electric
parking brake.

Parking
9. After turning the tool approximately 50 to
Parking on an uphill slope WARNING
100 times while pushing it, it becomes
 Leaving the engine running risks injury or
hard to turn it.
Turn the front wheels away from the kerb and death from accidentally moving the selec-
When the tool in turned to the opposite
move the vehicle back until the kerb side tor lever or the accumulation of toxic
direction by relaxing force to turn while exhaust fumes on the passenger compart-
pushing it, the parking brake is released wheel gently touches the kerb.
ment.
completely. Apply the parking brake and place the selec-
10. Install the plug and the cap in the reverse tor lever into the “P” (PARK) position.
procedure of removal. If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.
Where you park
6
Parking NOTE
E00600602805
 Be sure to apply the parking brake before WARNING
moving selector lever to the “P” (PARK)  Do not park your vehicle in areas where
To park the vehicle, fully engage the parking position. If you move selector lever to the combustible materials such as dry grass or
brake, and then set the selector lever to “P” “P” (PARK) position before applying the leaves can come in contact with a hot
(PARK) position. parking brake, it may be difficult to disen- exhaust, since a fire could occur.
gage selector lever from the “P” (PARK)
position when next you drive the vehicle,
Parking on a hill requiring application of a strong force the
selector lever to move from the “P” (PARK) When leaving the vehicle
To prevent the vehicle from rolling, follow position.
these procedures: Always carry the key and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
Parking on a downhill slope
Parking with the engine run- Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit
ning area.
Turn the front wheels towards the kerb and

move the vehicle forward until the kerb side Never leave the engine running while you Steering wheel height and
take a short sleep/rest. Also, never leave the
wheel gently touches the kerb.
engine running in a closed or poorly venti-
reach adjustment
Apply the parking brake and place the selec- E00600701610
tor lever into the “P” (PARK) position. lated place.
1. Release the lever while holding the steer-
If necessary, apply chocks to wheels. ing wheel up.

Inside rear-view mirror
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
Type 1
position.
3. Securely lock the steering wheel by pull-
ing the lever fully upward.
Type 2
6
WARNING
 Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view To adjust the mirror position
mirror while driving. This can be danger-
ous. It is possible to move the mirror up/down and
A- Locked Always adjust the mirror before driving.
left/right to adjust its position.
B- Release
Adjust the rear-view mirror to maximize the
view through the rear window.
WARNING
 Do not attempt to adjust the steering
wheel while you are driving the vehicle. To adjust the vertical mirror
position
Inside rear-view mirror It is possible to move the mirror up and down
E00600802139 to adjust its position.
Adjust the rear-view mirror only after making
any seat adjustments so you have a clear view
to the rear of the vehicle.

Outside rear-view mirrors
To reduce the glare WARNING

 Your vehicle is equipped with convex type
mirrors.
Type 1 Please take into consideration, but objects
you see in the mirror will look smaller and
farther away compared to a normal flat
The lever (A) at the bottom of the mirror can mirror.
be used to adjust the mirror to reduce the Do not use this mirror to estimate distance
glare from the headlamps of vehicles behind of following vehicles when changing lanes.
6 you during night driving.
Electric remote-controlled outside
When the operation mode is put in ON, the rear-view mirrors
reflection factor of the mirror is automatically
changed.
The outside rear-view mirrors can be oper-
ated when the operation mode is put in ON or
NOTE ACC.
 Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner
on the sensor (1), as reduced sensitivity 1. Place the lever (A) to the same side as the
could result. mirror whose adjustment is desired.
1- Normal Outside rear-view mirrors

2- Anti-glare
E00600900628
Type 2 To adjust the mirror position

E00601002008
When the headlamps of the vehicles behind WARNING

you are very bright, the reflection factor of  Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view
the rear-view mirror is automatically changed mirrors while driving. This can be danger- L- Left outside mirror adjustment
to reduce the glare. ous.
R- Right outside mirror adjustment
Always adjust the mirrors before driving.

Outside rear-view mirrors
2. Press the switch (B) to the left, right, up or
Retracting and extending the mir- CAUTION
down to adjust the mirror position.
rors using the mirror retractor  It is possible to retract and extend the mirrors
1- Up switch by hand. After retracting a mirror using the
2- Down mirror retractor switch, however, you should
3- Right extend it by using the switch again, not by
With the operation mode in ON or ACC, hand. If you extended the mirror by hand
4- Left
press the mirror retractor switch to retract the after retracting it using the switch, it would
mirrors. not properly lock in position. As a result, the
3. Return the lever (A) back to the middle Press it again to extend the mirrors to their mirror could move because of the wind or
position (•). original positions. vibration while you are driving, and this may
prevent the driver’s rearward visibility.
6
After putting the operation mode in OFF, it is
Retracting and extending the possible to retract and extend the mirrors
outside mirrors using the mirror retractor switch for approxi-
mately 30 seconds. NOTE
E00601102575
 Be careful not to get your hands trapped
The outside mirror can be retracted in while a mirror is moving.
towards the side window to prevent damage  If you move a mirror by hand or it moves
when parking in narrow areas. after hitting a person or object, you may not
be able to return it to its original position
using the mirror retractor switch. If this hap-
CAUTION pens, push the mirror retractor switch to
 Do not drive the vehicle with the mirror place the mirror in its retracted position and
retracted in. then push the switch again to return the mir-
The lack of rearward visibility normally pro- ror to its original position.
vided by the mirror could lead to an accident.
 When freezing has occurred and mirrors fail
to operate as intended, please refrain from
repeated pushing of the retractor switch as
this action can result in burn-out of the mir-
ror motor circuits.

Engine switch
Retracting and extending the mir- NOTE

rors without using the mirror • The outside rear-view mirrors can be
retractor switch retracted or extended by the following
operations, even if changing to the any of
above. After pressing the “LOCK” switch
The mirrors automatically retract or extend to lock the doors and tailgate, if the
when the doors and tailgate are locked or “LOCK” switch is pressed again twice in a
unlocked using the keyless entry system or row within approximately 30 seconds, the
the keyless operation function. outside rear-view mirrors will retract. After
6 Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page 3-3. pressing the “UNLOCK” switch to unlock
the doors and tailgate, if the “UNLOCK”
Refer to “Keyless operation system: To oper-
ate using the keyless operation function” on switch is pressed again twice in a row
pages 3-8.
within approximately 30 seconds, the out- CAUTION
side rear-view mirrors will extend again.  The indicator lamp (A) will flash orange
when there is a problem or malfunction in
NOTE the keyless operation system. Never drive if
 Functions can be modified as stated below.
Engine switch the indicator lamp on the engine switch is
Please consult an authorised MITSUBISHI E00631801516
flashing orange. Immediately contact your
MOTORS dealer. In order to prevent theft, the engine will not authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
• Automatically extend when the driver’s start unless a preregistered keyless operation  If the engine switch operation is not smooth
door is closed, put the operation mode in key is used. (Engine immobilizer function) and feels like it is sticking, do not operate the
ON. If you are carrying the keyless operation key, switch. Immediately contact your authorised
• Automatically retract when the operation you can start the engine. MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
mode is put in OFF or ACC, and the
driver’s door is then opened.
• Automatically extend when the vehicle NOTE
speed reaches 30 km/h.  When operating the engine switch, press the
• Deactivate the automatic extension func- switch all the way in. If the switch is not
tion. fully pressed, the engine may not start or the
operation mode may not change. If the
engine switch is pressed correctly, there is no
need to hold the engine switch down.

Engine switch
NOTE ON
 When the battery in the keyless operation
key has worn out, or the keyless operation All vehicle’s electrical devices can be oper-
key is out of the vehicle, warning display ated.
will appear. The indicator lamp on the engine switch illu-
minates green. The indicator lamp turns off
when the engine is running.
NOTE
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic 6
immobilizer.
Operation mode of the engine To start the engine, the ID code which the CAUTION
transponder inside the key sends must match
switch and its function the one registered in the immobilizer com-
 When the engine is not running, put the oper-
ation mode in OFF. Leaving the operation
puter. Refer to “Electronic immobilizer
mode in ON or ACC for a long time when
(Anti-theft starting system)” on page 3-3.
OFF the engine is not running may cause the bat-
tery to be discharged, making it impossible
The indicator lamp on the engine switch turns to start the engine, lock and unlock the steer-
off. Changing the operation mode ing wheel.
The operation mode cannot be put in OFF E00631901474  When the battery is disconnected, the current
when the selector lever is in any position If you press the engine switch without operation mode is memorized. After recon-
other than the “P” (PARK) position. depressing the brake pedal, you can change necting the battery, the memorized mode is
selected automatically. Before disconnect-
the operation mode in the order of OFF, ACC,
ing the battery for repair or replacement,
ACC ON, OFF. make sure to put the operation mode in OFF.
Electrical devices such as the audio and Be careful if you are not sure which opera-
tion mode the vehicle is in when the battery
accessory socket can be operated.
is run down.
The indicator lamp on the engine switch illu-
minates orange.

Steering wheel lock
system and other electric devices that can be and the tailgate by pressing the driver’s or
CAUTION operated with that position. (only that driver’s front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, or
 The operation mode cannot be changed from
door has closed and the selector lever in the the tailgate LOCK switch, warning display
OFF to ACC or ON if the keyless operation
“P” (PARK) position) will appear and the outer buzzer will sound
key is not detected to be in the vehicle. Refer
to “Keyless operation system: Operating When you open driver’s door or the engine and you cannot lock the doors and the tail-
range for starting the engine and changing switch operate again, the power is supplied gate.
the operation mode” on page 3-8. again.
 When there is the keyless operation key in Operation mode ON reminder
the vehicle and the operation mode isn’t NOTE system
6 change, the keyless operation key may have
worn out.
 When ACC power supply automatic stop, the E00632301097
steering wheel can’t lock and you can’t lock
and unlock the doors by the keyless entry If the driver’s door is opened with the engine
system. stopped and the operation mode in any mode
NOTE  It is possible to modify functions as follows: other than OFF, the operation mode ON
 If the operation mode cannot be changed to • The time until the power cuts out can be reminder inner buzzer sounds intermittently
OFF, perform the following procedure. changed to approximately 60 minutes. to remind you to put the operation mode in
1. Move the selector lever to the “P” • The ACC power auto-cutout function can OFF.
(PARK) position, and then change the be deactivated.
operation mode to OFF. For details, consult an authorised
2. One of the other causes could be low bat- MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
tery voltage. If this occurs, the keyless
entry system, keyless operation function,
and steering lock will also not operate.
Contact an authorised MITSUBISHI Operation mode OFF reminder
MOTORS dealer. system Steering wheel lock
E00632201663 E00601502641
ACC power auto-cutout func- To lock

tion
E00632801643
After pressing the engine switch and opera-
After approximately 30 minutes has elapsed tion mode in OFF, when driver’s door is
When the operation mode is in any mode
with the operation mode in ACC, the function opened, the steering wheel is locked.
other than OFF, if you try to lock the doors
automatically cuts out the power for the audio
Steering wheel lock
NOTE CAUTION NOTE

 When the following operation is performed  If the engine is stopped while driving, do not  When the steering wheel lock is abnormal,
with the operation mode in OFF and the open a door or press the LOCK switch on the the warning display will appear and the inner
selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position, key until the vehicle stops in a safe place. buzzer will sound. Put the operation mode in
the steering wheel is locked. This could cause the steering wheel to lock, OFF and then press the lock switch of the
• Open or close the driver’s door. making it impossible to operate the vehicle. keyless operation key. And then press the
• Close all the doors and the tailgate.  Carry the key with you when leaving the engine switch. If the warning lamp illumi-
• Open one of the doors or the tailgate when vehicle. nates again, contact an authorised
all the doors and the tailgate are closed.  If your vehicle needs to be towed, unlock the MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
• Lock all the doors and the tailgate with the steering wheel. Refer to “Towing: Emer- 6
keyless entry system or the keyless opera- gency towing” on page 8-18.
tion function.
 When the driver’s door is opened while the
steering wheel does not lock, warning dis- NOTE
play will appear and the buzzer sounds to  When the steering wheel does not unlock,  If there is a fault in the steering wheel lock,
alert the steering wheel is unlocked. the warning will be displayed on the infor- the warning display will appear. Immediately
mation screen in the instrument cluster. Press stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact
the engine switch again while moving the your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI
steering wheel slightly right and left. MOTORS dealer.
To unlock
The following methods can be used to unlock

the steering wheel.
 Put the operation mode in ACC.

 Start the engine.

Starting and stopping the engine
Starting and stopping the CAUTION

engine  Never attempt to start the engine by pushing
or pulling the vehicle.
E00620601497
 Do not run the engine at high speeds or drive
the vehicle at high speeds until the engine
Tips for starting has had a chance to warm up.
 If your vehicle is equipped with a turbo-
 The operation mode can be in any mode charger, do not stop the engine immediately
to start the engine. after high-speed or uphill driving. First allow
6  The starter motor will be turning for up to the engine to idle to give the turbocharger a
approximately 15 seconds if the engine chance to cool down.
switch is released at once. Pressing the 5. Press the engine switch.
engine switch again while the starter The diesel preheat indicator lamp will
motor is still turning will stop the starter Starting the engine first illuminate, and then after a short time
motor. The starter motor will be turning E00625501576 go out, indicating that preheating is com-
for up to approximately 30 seconds while 1. Fasten the seat belt. pleted. The engine will start.
the engine switch is pressed. 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
If the engine does not start, wait for a 3. Press and hold the brake pedal down NOTE
while and then attempt to start the engine firmly with your right foot.  If the engine is cold, the diesel preheat indi-
again. Trying repeatedly with the starter cator lamp is on for a longer time.
motor still turning will damage the starter NOTE  Putting the operation mode in ON will also
mechanism.  When the engine is not started, it may start preheating the engine. When the engine
become hard to depress the brake pedal and has not been started within approximately
the vehicle may not be able to detect the 5 seconds after the diesel preheat indicator
WARNING pedal operation. lamp went out, put the operation mode in
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly Therefore the engine may not be started. In OFF. Then, attempt the engine start proce-
ventilated area any longer than is needed such a case, depress the brake pedal more dure to preheat the engine again.
to move your vehicle in or out of the area. firmly than usual.  Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
Carbon monoxide gases are odourless and up. These will disappear as the engine warms
can be fatal. up.
4. Make sure the selector lever is in the “P”
(PARK) position.

Starting and stopping the engine
The engine sounds slightly different from
NOTE NOTE usual while the learning process is taking
 When starting the engine, the selector lever  If you have to bring the engine to an emer-
place. The change in the engine sound does
is in a position other than the “P” (PARK) or gency stop while driving, press and hold the
not indicate a fault.
the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, or you engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press
pressed the engine switch without depressing it quickly 3 times or more. The engine will
the brake pedal, warning display will appear. stop and the operation mode will go to ACC. If the keyless operation key is
 Do not stop the engine with the selector lever
Warning display in any position other than the “P” (PARK)
not operating properly
E00632901224
position. If the engine is stopped with the
selector lever in any position other than the
“P” (PARK) position, the operation mode
Insert the keyless operation key into the key 6
slot. Starting the engine and changing the
will go to ACC rather than OFF. operation mode should be now possible.
Put the operation mode in OFF after placing Remove the keyless operation key from the
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) posi-
key slot after starting the engine or changing
tion.
Stopping the engine the operation mode.
E00620801444
1. Stop the vehicle.
WARNING 2. Fully engage the parking brake while
 Do not operate the engine switch while depressing the brake pedal.
driving except in an emergency. If the 3. Move the selector lever to the “P”
engine is stopped while driving, the brake (PARK) position, press the engine switch
servomechanism will cease to function and to stop the engine.
braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,
the power steering system will not func-
tion and it will require greater manual Fuel injection amount learning
effort to operate the steering. This could process
result in a serious accident.
E00627901138
To keep exhaust emissions and engine noise

low, the engine very occasionally performs a
NOTE
 Do not insert into the key slot anything other
learning process for the fuel injection
than the keyless operation key. This could
amount.
cause damage or a malfunction.

Turbocharger operation
NOTE Turbocharger operation

 Remove the object or additional key from the E00611201211
keyless operation key before inserting the
key into the key slot. The vehicle may not be CAUTION
able to receive the registered ID code from  Do not run the engine at high speeds (for
the registered key. Therefore, the engine may example, by revving it or by accelerating
not start and the operation mode may not rapidly) immediately after starting it.
change.  Do not stop the engine immediately after
 The keyless operation key is fixed by insert- high-speed or uphill driving. First allow the
6 ing the key into the key slot as illustrated.
When removing the key, pulling out the key
engine to idle to give the turbocharger a
chance to cool down.
from the slot. 1- Air compressor
2- Compressed air
3- Cylinder
Keyless operation key Turbocharger 4- Turbo fin
reminder* 5- Turbine
E00633001277 The turbocharger increases engine power by 6- Exhaust gas
pushing large amounts of air into the engine’s
cylinders. The finned parts inside the turbo-
charger turn at extremely high speeds and are 8-Speed automatic transmis-
subjected to extremely high temperatures.
They are lubricated and cooled by engine oil.
sion with sports mode
E00603202033
If the engine oil is not replaced at the speci-
If the operation mode is in OFF and the
fied intervals, the bearings may seize or emit
driver’s door is opened with the keyless oper- NOTE
abnormal noise.
ation key in the key slot, the outer buzzer  During running-in period or immediately
sounds for approximately 3 seconds, and the after reconnection of the battery cable, there
inner buzzer sounds for approximately 1 min- may be a case where gear shifts are not made
ute, and the warning display appears for smoothly. This does not indicate a faulty
approximately 1 minute to remind you to transmission.
Gear shifts will become smooth after the
remove the key.
transmission has been shifted several times
by the electronic control system.

8-Speed automatic transmission with sports mode
Selector lever operation WARNING

E00603302441  If the lock button is always pushed to
The transmission has 8 forward gears and operate the selector lever, the lever may be
accidentally shifted into the “P” (PARK)
1 reverse gear.
or “R” (REVERSE) position. Be sure not
The individual gears are selected automati-
to push the lock button when performing
cally, depending on the speed of the vehicle
the operations indicated by in the illus-
and the position of the accelerator pedal.
tration.
The selector lever (A) has 2 gates; the main
 Always depress the brake pedal when
gate (B) and the manual gate (C). shifting the selector lever into a gear from 6
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
tion.
Never put your foot on the accelerator
pedal while shifting the selector lever from
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
tion.
NOTE
 To avoid erroneous operation, move the
selector lever firmly into each position and
briefly hold it there. Always check the posi-
In the main gate, selector lever has 4 position shown by the selector lever position dis-
The lock button must be pushed while play after moving the selector lever.
tions, and is equipped with a lock button (D)
the brake pedal is depressed to move  If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,
to avoid inadvertent selection of the wrong
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
gear. the selector lever.
selector lever from being moved from the
Lock button must be pushed to move “P” (PARK) position.
the selector lever.
Lock button need not be pushed to
move the selector lever.

When the selector lever cannot be Instruments - Type A

shifted from the “P” (PARK) posi-
tion
E00629101437
When the selector lever cannot be shifted

from the “P” (PARK) position to another
position while the brake pedal is pressed and
held down with the operation mode in ON,
6 the shift-lock mechanism may be malfunc-
tioning. Immediately have your vehicle
checked by an authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. NOTE
If you need to move the vehicle, shift the  If you would like to move your vehicle when
selector lever as follows. the selector lever cannot be moved from the
“P” (PARK) position and the Electric park-
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied. ing brake cannot be released, release the
2. Stop the engine if it is running. Electric parking brake manually before shift-
3. Depress the brake pedal with the right ing the selector lever. After releasing the
foot. Electric parking brake manually, shift the
4. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw- selector lever in Step 3 and after.
driver in the shift-lock release hole (A). Refer to “When the Electric parking brake
Shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEU- cannot be released” on page 6-8 for manual
release of the Electric parking brake.
TRAL) position while pressing the
straight blade (or minus) screwdriver Selector lever positions
down. E00603801869
Selector lever position display
E00603502140
“P” PARK
When the operation mode is put in ON, the
position of the selector lever is indicated in
This position locks the transmission to pre-
the instrument cluster.
vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can
be started in this position.

“R” REVERSE WARNING Sport mode

 To prevent rolling, always keep your foot E00603902724
This position is to back up. on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
“N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift-
motion, sports mode is selected by gently
ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
CAUTION tion.
pushing the selector lever from the “D”
 Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R” (DRIVE) position into the manual gate (A).
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in To return to “D” range operation, gently push
motion to avoid a transmission damage. “D” DRIVE the selector lever back into the main gate (B).
This position is used for most city and high- In sports mode, gear shifts can be made rap- 6
“N” NEUTRAL way driving. The transmission will automati- idly simply by moving the selector lever
cally change its gear depending on road and backward and forward or shift paddles at the
driving conditions. steering wheel can also be used to perform
At this position the transmission is disen- gearshift. In contrast to a manual transmis-
gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on sion, the sports mode allows gear shifts with
a manual transmission, and should only be CAUTION the accelerator pedal depressed.
used when the vehicle is stationary for an  To prevent transmission damage, never shift
extended length of time during driving, such into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R”
as in a traffic jam. (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in NOTE
motion.  You can shift into sports mode with shift
paddles when the selector lever is in the
WARNING main gate as well. Also, you can return to the
 Never move the selector lever to the “N” NOTE “D” range operation in any of following
(NEUTRAL) position while driving. A ways.
 While driving on uphills or downhills, when
serious accident could occur since you When returning to “D” range operation, the
the accelerator pedal is suddenly released or
could accidentally move the lever into the selector lever position display will change to
depressed or when the brake pedal is
“P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position “D” (DRIVE) position.
strongly depressed, the transmission shifts
or you will lose engine braking. • Pull the + (SHIFT UP) side shift paddle for-
up or shifts down its gear depending on road
 On a gradient, the engine should be ward (toward the driver) for over 2 seconds.
and driving conditions. Therefore, the gear
started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in • Stop the vehicle.
shift timing may change depending on road
the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
and driving conditions, which does not indi-
cate a malfunction.

NOTE CAUTION NOTE

• Push the selector lever from the “D”  Repeated continuous operation of the selec-  When driving away on a slippery road, push
(DRIVE) position into the manual gate (A) tor lever or the shift paddles will continu- the selector lever forward into the “+ (SHIFT
and push the selector lever back into the ously switch shift position. UP)” position. This cause the transmission to
main gate (B).  For vehicles equipped with the shift paddles, shift into the 2nd gear which is better for
do not use the left- and right-hand shift pad- smooth driving away on a slippery road.
dles at the same time. Doing so could cause a Push the selector lever to the “— (SHIFT
shift of gear ratio that you do not expect. DOWN)” side to shift back to the 1st gear.
SHIFT
UP SHIFT SHIFT
6 DOWN UP
Sports mode indicator display
SHIFT NOTE E00612301743
DOWN  Only the 8 forward gears can be selected. To
reverse or park the vehicle, move the selector
In sports mode, the currently selected posi-
lever to the “R” (REVERSE) or “P” (PARK) tion is indicated by the indicator (A) shown
position as required. on the instrument panel.
 To maintain good running performance, the
transmission may refuse to perform an Instruments - Type A
upshift when the selector lever is moved to
+ (SHIFT UP) the “+ (SHIFT UP)” position at certain vehi-
cle speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of
The transmission shifts up by one gear with the engine, the transmission may refuse to
each operation. perform a downshift when the lever is moved
to the “— (SHIFT DOWN)” position at cer-
tain vehicle speeds. When this happens, a
- (SHIFT DOWN) buzzer sounds to indicate that a downshift is
not going to take place.
The transmission shifts down by one gear
 Downward shifts are made automatically
with each operation. when the vehicle slows down. When the
vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically
CAUTION selected.
 In sports mode, the driver must execute
upward shifts in accordance with prevailing
road conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.

Instruments - Type B NOTE CAUTION

 The “A” indicator on the selector lever posi- After a while, confirm that the warning
tion display will only blink if there is a prob-
display is no longer showing. It is safe to
lem with the A/T position switch.
continue driving if the display is no longer
It is not seen during normal driving.
showing. If the warning display remains or
appears frequently, have your vehicle
CAUTION MOTORS dealer.
 If malfunction occurs in the A/T while driv-
ing, the warning display or the warn-
When warning display is showing
It may be that there is something unusual
6
ing display appears on the information happening in the A/T, causing a safety
screen in the instrument cluster. device to activate. Have your vehicle
When a malfunction occurs in In this case, immediately park your vehicle inspected by an authorised MITSUBISHI
in a safe place and follow these procedures: MOTORS dealer immediately.
the A/T
E00615101654
When warning display is showing
There could be a system malfunction if the The A/T fluid is overheating. The engine
Operation of the A/T
E00604201886
warning display or the warning display control may activate to lower the A/T fluid
temperature, causing the engine revolutions
is displayed on the information screen in the
and vehicle speed to decrease, or the gear CAUTION
instrument cluster. shift timing may change by activating the  Before selecting a gear with the engine run-
A/T control. In this case, take one of the fol- ning and the vehicle stationary, fully depress
or lowing procedures. the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from
• Slow down your vehicle. creeping.
• Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the
gear is engaged, especially when the engine
NOTE selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position,
speed is high, at fast idle or with the air con-
and open the bonnet with the engine run-
 The buzzer may sounds at the time of ning to allow the engine to cool down. ditioning operating, the brakes should only
warning display appears. be released when you are ready to drive
 The selector lever position indicator blinks at away.
 Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at
the time of warning display appears.
all times.
Using the left foot could cause driver move-
ment delay in case of an emergency.

CAUTION CAUTION NOTE

 To prevent sudden acceleration, never race  If the engine stalled, a creep phenomenon  In sports mode, downshifts do not take place
the engine when shifting from the “P” will not occur after engine restart causing the when the accelerator is depressed all the way
(PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position. A/T control to activate. In this case, after to the floor.
 Operating the accelerator pedal while the driving for a while, the A/T control is
other foot is resting on the brake pedal will released and a creep phenomenon comes
back again.
Waiting
affect braking efficiency and may cause pre-
E00604601372
mature wear of brake pads. When the warning display appears, the A/T
 Use the selector lever in the correct shift will be malfunctioning. Immediately have For short waiting periods, such as at traffic
6 position in accordance with driving condi- your vehicle inspected at an authorised
signals the vehicle can be left in gear and held
tions. stationary with the service brake.
Never coast downhill backward with the For longer waiting periods with the engine
selector lever in the {“D” (DRIVE) or sports running, place the selector lever in the “N”
mode} or coast forward with the selector (NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking
lever in the “R” (REVERSE) position.
brake, while holding the vehicle stationary
The engine may stop and the unexpected
with the service brake.
increase in brake pedal effort and steering
wheel weight could lead to an accident.
 Do not race the engine with brake pedal
Passing acceleration CAUTION
E00604501355
pressed when the vehicle is stationary.  Never hold the vehicle stationary on a hill
This can damage the A/T. To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) using the accelerator pedal (without using
Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal position, push the accelerator to the floor. The the brake pedal). Always apply the parking
while holding down the brake pedal with the A/T will automatically downshift. brake and/or service brakes.
selector lever in the “P” (PARK), “N” (NEU-
TRAL) or “D” (DRIVE) position, the engine
revolutions may not rise as high as when per- NOTE
forming the same operation with the selector  When the accelerator pedal is depressed, the
Parking
E00604700187
lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position. force on the pedal changes. When the accel-
erator pedal is fully depressed, the transmis- To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
sion shifts down automatically. The plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
transmission can control to shift down for and then move the selector lever to the “P”
rapid acceleration with the selector lever in (PARK) position.
the “D” (DRIVE) position by changing the
force on the pedal.

If you are going to leave the vehicle unat- appropriate position according to the road
When the A/T makes no speed
tended, always switch off the engine and surface conditions. In addition, the Drive
carry the key. change mode indicator display and the 2WD/4WD
E00604801909
operation indicator display indicate the drive
If the transmission does not change speeds mode-selector setting state. Refer to “Drive
NOTE while driving, or your vehicle does not pick
 On a slope, be sure to apply the parking
mode indicator display and 2WD/4WD oper-
up enough speed when starting on an uphill ation indicator display” on page 6-30.
brake before moving the selector lever to the
“P” (PARK) position. If you move the selec- slope, it may be that there is something unu-
tor lever to the “P” (PARK) position before sual happening in the transmission, causing a
applying the parking brake, it may be diffi-
cult to disengage the selector lever from the
safety device to activate. Immediately have
your vehicle checked at an authorised
6
“P” (PARK) position when next you drive MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
the vehicle, requiring application of a strong
force to the selector lever to move from the
“P” (PARK) position. Super Select 4WD II*
E00605701527
Shifting to rear-wheel drive or 4-wheel drive

can be made by operating the drive mode-
selector (A). Set the drive mode-selector to an
Drive mode-selector position, Drive mode indicator display and 2WD/4WD operation indicator dis-
play
E00605801629
2WD/4WD operation indicator display

Drive mode indica-
Drive mode-selector position Except for multi Multi information Driving conditions
tor display
information screen screen
2H Rear-wheel drive When driving on dry paved road.

2WD/4WD operation indicator display
Drive mode indica-
Drive mode-selector position Except for multi Multi information Driving conditions
tor display
information screen screen
The basic position for Super
Select 4WD II.
4H Full-time 4-wheel drive
When driving on dry paved or
slippery roads.
6 4HLc
Centre differential lock When driving on rough, sand or
engaged 4-wheel drive snow covered roads.
When driving up or down steep

Low range centre differen-
hills, on rough or muddy roads
4LLc tial lock engaged 4-wheel
(especially when increased
drive
torque is required).
: Illuminate CAUTION Drive mode-selector operation

: Remain off  Do not drive your vehicle in the “4HLc” or E00605901604
“4LLc” position on dry paved roads and The drive mode is shown on the drive mode-
highways. Doing so may result in excessive
CAUTION tyre wear, increased fuel consumption, and
selector knob.
 The “4LLc” range gives maximum torque
possible noise generation. It may also
for low-speed driving on steep slopes, as
increase the differential oil temperature,
well as sandy, muddy, and other difficult sur-
which may damage the drive system. Fur-
faces. Do not exceed speeds of approxi-
ther, the drive train will be subjected to
mately 70 km/h in “4LLc” range.
excessive loading, resulting in oil leakage,
component seizure, or other serious prob-
lems. On dry paved roads and highways,
drive the vehicle in “2H” or “4H” only.

: Turn the drive mode-selector while
holding it down
The drive mode-selector should be positioned

in accordance with the following operating
conditions:
6
: Turn the drive mode-selector
To shift from To Procedure
The drive mode-selector can be operated while the vehicle is either moving or stationary.
2H 4H When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position before operating the drive
mode-selector.
2H or When the vehicle is moving, and only while it can be steered straight ahead, shift the selector lever to the “D”
4H
4HLc (DRIVE) position, and release the accelerator pedal before operating the drive mode-selector.
4HLc 4H
4HLc 4LLc Stop the vehicle, shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position, depress and hold the brake pedal, and oper-
ate the drive mode-selector.
4LLc 4HLc If operation is made with the selector lever placed in any other position than “N” (NEUTRAL) position or release the
brake pedal, a gear noise may be generated, with a possible failure to shift into a proper gear.
NOTE
 Setting of the drive mode-selector between “2H”, “4H” and “4HLc” should only be done at speeds below 100 km/h.
 During driving, never attempt to shift from “4HLc” to “4LLc”.

NOTE
 When shifting between “2H”, “4H” and “4HLc” in cold weather while the vehicle is in motion, the transfer gear may make some noise. In cold weather, try
to shift the gear while the vehicle is stopped.
 When shifting between “4LLc” and “4HLc”, the transfer gear may make some noise.
 When the drive mode-selector is set between “2H”, “4H” and “4HLc” while the vehicle is stopped, the 2WD/4WD operation indicator display blinks while
the selection is in process. Drive slowly and normally after confirming that the display is illuminated. (Refer to “Drive mode indicator display and
2WD/4WD operation indicator display” on page 6-30.)
 When the drive mode-selector is set between “2H”, “4H” and “4HLc” while the cruise control or the Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) is activated,
the transfer gear may make some noise.
6  When the drive mode-selector is set between“4HLc”  “4LLc” in cold weather, its selection may not complete. Return the drive mode-selector to its pre-
vious position. After the engine is warmed up, make the range selection again.
CAUTION
 Do not operate the drive mode-selector while the rear wheels of the vehicle are slipping on snow or ice.
Drive mode indicator display Except for multi information screen Multi information screen
and 2WD/4WD operation indi-
cator display
E00606001644
Drive mode indicator display

(Example: When “4LLc” is selected)
2WD/4WD operation indictor display

A: Front wheel indicator display
B: Centre differential lock indicator dis-
play
C: Rear wheel indicator display
D: Low-range indicator display

When the operation mode is put in ON, Drive : Blink (Drive mode indicator dis- : Blink (Drive mode indicator dis-
mode indicator display and 2WD/4WD oper- play also blinks) play also blinks)
ation indicator display shows the shifting
: Illuminate : Illuminate
condition. The Drive mode indicator display
and 2WD/4WD operation indicator display : Remain off : Remain off
comes on at each drive mode-selector posi-
tion as follows: “4H”  “4HLc” “4HLc”  “4LLc”
“2H”  “4H” Indicator display Except for multi information screen

Drive mode- Except for Drive mode- 6
selector Multi infor- selector Indicator display
Indicator display multi infor-
position mation position
Drive mode- Except for mation
Multi infor- screen
selector multi infor- screen
position mation
mation
screen
screen 4HLc
4H
2H
Drive mode
Drive mode switching in
switching in progress
Drive mode progress
switching in
progress
4LLc
4HLc
4H : Blink (Drive mode indicator dis-

play also blinks)

: Illuminate NOTE NOTE
: Remain off  When the drive mode-selector is set between  When parking, apply the parking brake
“2H”, “4H” and “4HLc”, the front wheel before stopping the engine and make sure
Multi information screen and/or centre differential lock displays blink that the front and the rear wheel displays are
Drive mode- while the selection is in process. Take the not blinking during shifting process between
selector Indicator display following precautions when the indicator “4HLc”  “4LLc”. Otherwise, the vehicle
position display is blinking. could unexpectedly move even if the auto-
• Keep the steering wheel in the straight matic transmission is in the “P” (PARK)
ahead position while making range selec- position.
6 tions. If you attempt to drive forward with
the steering wheel turned, gear rattling or
 If, after a “4HLc”  “4LLc” selection has
been made, front and the rear wheel displays
4HLc
shock may occur and cornering may not be continue blinking and the desired range is
smooth and the desired range may not actu- not actually selected, return the drive mode-
ally be selected. selector to its previous position. Place the
• When the drive mode-selector is set steering wheel in the straight ahead position,
between “2H”, “4H” and “4HLc”, while the drive the vehicle forward, and release the
Drive mode vehicle is stopped, the front wheel and/or accelerator pedal. Next, place the selector
switching in centre differential lock displays blink while lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position,
progress the selection is in process. Drive slowly and depress and hold the brake pedal and make
normally after confirming that the display the range selection again.
is switched.  If the front and the rear wheel displays blink
• If the front wheel and/or centre differential when you attempt to make a “4HLc” 
4LLc lock displays blinking after a “2H”  “4H” “4LLc” selection, a “4HLc”  “4LLc”
 “4HLc” selection has been made with selection cannot be made. Stop the vehicle
the vehicle moving, hold the steering wheel and release the accelerator pedal. Next, place
in the straight ahead position and slowly the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL)
depress the accelerator pedal several times. position, depress and hold the brake pedal
: Blink (Drive mode indicator dis-
 The front and the rear wheel displays will and make the range selection again.
play also blinks)
blink during shifting process from “4HLc” to
: Illuminate “4LLc” or vice versa, as the transfer passes
: Remain off through the neutral position. Be sure to oper-
ate the drive mode-selector until the front
and the rear wheel displays illuminate again.

NOTE CAUTION
 If the selector lever is shifted from the “N”  If the warning display is displayed on the
(NEUTRAL) position to the other position or information screen in the instrument cluster,
release the brake pedal during shifting pro- a problem has occurred with the Super Select
cess between “4HLc  4LLc”, the warning 4WD II and the safety device has activated.
display will appear and the shifting process If this happens, please contact your nearest
will be stopped. authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer
for inspection as soon as possible.
 The active stability control function is sus-

pended while “4LLc” is selected. indica-  If the warning display is displayed on the
information screen in the instrument cluster,
tor lamp is illuminated while these functions
a problem has occurred with the A/T. If this
are suspended. It does not indicate a prob-
happens, please contact your nearest author-
lem. When “2H” or “4H” or “4HLc” is
ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer for
selected, this lamp goes out and function
inspection.
again. Refer to “ASTC indicator or ASTC
When this warning display appears, shifting
OFF indicator” on page 6-62.
only between a “2H”  “4H”  “4HLc”
selection can be made. In addition, when the
drive mode-selector is in “4LLc”, the trans-
fer mode cannot be switched.

Off Road mode*
Off Road mode*

E00642500095
The Off Road mode is the function that enhances driving smoothly on the off-road by selecting the most suitable engine, transmission, and brake
control according to the road surface conditions when the drive mode position of Super Select 4WD II is in “4HLc” or “4LLc”. Also refer to
“Super Select 4WD II” on page 6-27.
NOTE
6  If the driver fails to select an appropriate mode in the Off Road mode, driving will be difficult.
 Depending on the mode selected, you may hear the operation noise or feel the vibration, or shock on the vehicle body.
Control mode
E00642600070
It is possible to select the control mode from the followings according to the road surface conditions.
Control mode functions Drive mode-selector dial position

GRAVEL Suitable to drive on unpaved road surfaces with gravel and soil. 4HLc or 4LLc
MUD/SNOW Suitable to drive on muddy areas or deep snows. 4HLc or 4LLc
SAND Suitable to drive on fine sand areas. 4HLc or 4LLc
Suitable to drive on the rough road surface such as rocky roads or with some
ROCK 4LLc
wheels suspended in the air.
NOTE
 When stuck, use the rear differential lock (if so equipped). (Refer to page 6-36)
E00642700202
Off Road mode-selector opera- 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
tion

Off Road mode*
2. Set the drive mode-selector from “2H” or
“4H” to “4HLc” or “4LLc”. At this time,
NOTE
 The Off Road mode is not activated when the
the Off Road mode is switched to
drive mode is in “2H” or “4H”. If the Off
“GRAVEL” automatically.
Road mode-selector is pressed when the
3. The control mode is switched in the order drive mode-selector is set to “2H” or “4H”,
of GRAVEL  MUD/SNOW  SAND the warning display will appear and the oper-
 ROCK*  GRAVEL by pressing the ation will be cancelled.
Off Road mode-selector.
*: Only in 4LLc
6
The selected control mode is displayed on the
Off Road mode indicator display.
Off Road mode indicator dis- In addition, the selected mode is displayed as
an interrupt display on the information screen
play of the instrument cluster by switching the
E00642800199
control mode. The control mode display on
Example: When “GRAVEL” mode is selected the information screen will return to the pre-
vious display after a few seconds.
Indicator display
NOTE
Interrupt display  The Off Road mode will not operate even if
NOTE pressing the Off Road mode-selector in the
 When the rear differential lock switch is following conditions.
turned on while the Off Road mode is acti- • Brake System: brake temperature high
vated, the Off Road mode is returned to • Rear Differential Lock (if so equipped):
“GRAVEL” automatically if the rear differ- activating
ential lock switch is turned off. • ASTC warning lamp: illuminating or blink-
 When changing the drive mode-selector to ing
“4HLc” while the Off Road mode is in refer to “ASTC warning lamp/display” on
“ROCK” mode, the Off Road mode is page 6-63
switched to “GRAVEL” automatically.

Rear differential lock*
Rear differential lock* NOTE

E00606201486  If the rear differential lock switch is turned
on during driving, the warning display will
If one wheel starts to spin freely and the vehi- appear, the buzzer will sound and the rear
cle becomes stuck and cannot be freed even differential lock will remain deactivated.
using 4-wheel drive, the rear differential lock
switch (A) can be used to activate the rear
differential lock for extra traction.
6
The rear differential lock indi-
CAUTION
 Operate the rear differential switch after the
cator lamp/display
E00606301780
wheels are stopped. Operating the switch
with the wheels turning may cause the vehi- When the operation mode is put in ON, the
cle to dart in unexpected directions. rear differential lock indicator lamp/display
in the meter cluster illuminates for a few sec-
onds then indicates the rear differential lock’s
NOTE operating status (activated or deactivated).
 The rear differential lock does not operate
when the drive mode-selector is in “2H” or Indicator lamp
Operating the rear differential “4H” position.
lock  When the rear differential is locked with the
drive mode-selector in “4LLc” or “4HLc”
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. position, changing the drive mode-selector to
2. Move the drive mode-selector to “4LLc” “2H” or “4H” position makes the rear differ- Indicator display
ential unlock automatically.
or “4HLc” position.
3. To activate the rear differential lock, press
the rear differential lock switch (1).
4. To deactivate the rear differential lock,
press the rear differential lock switch (2).

Except for multi information screen
6
Multi information screen
NOTE
 The status of the rear differential lock
(resulting from depression of the rear differ-
ential lock switch) is shown by blinking or
steady illumination of the rear differential
lock indicator lamp/display.

Rear differential lock indicator lamp/display
The operation state of rear dif- Indicator display
ferential lock Indicator lamp Except for multi information
Multi information screen
screen
Rear differential lock deactivated
Switching in progress
Rear differential lock activated
: Blink (Drive mode indicator display also blinks)

: Illuminate (steady)
: Remain off

NOTE NOTE CAUTION

 The indicator lamp/display and drive mode • If the vehicle speed is 12 km/h or higher,  If a problem is detected in the rear differen-
indicator display blink while the rear differ- decelerate to a speed of 2.5 km/h or lower. tial lock system, a safety device will activate.
ential lock is being switched between its The indicator lamp/display will illuminate The rear differential lock indicator lamp will
activated and deactivated conditions. When steadily and the rear differential lock will blink rapidly (twice per second), warning
the switching operation is complete, the indi- be activated. display will appear, and the rear differential
cator lamp/display is either illuminated • If the vehicle speed is 12 km/h or lower, lock will deactivate. Park your vehicle in a
steadily or not illuminated. turn the steering wheel from side to side safe place, turn off the engine for a few
 The ASTC and ABS functions are suspended until the indicator lamp/display illuminates moments. Restart the engine. It is safe to
while the rear differential lock is activated.
ASTC indicator lamp, ASTC OFF indicator
steadily. If the vehicle is stuck in soft
ground, make sure the area around the vehi-
continue driving if the lamps/warning dis-
play resume normal operation. If the rear dif-
6
lamp and ABS warning lamp/display are cle is clear then repeatedly attempt to drive ferential lock indicator lamp blinks and
illuminated while these functions are sus- forward and backward. The indicator warning display appears, when the rear dif-
pended. lamp/display will illuminate steadily and ferential lock is reactivated, have the vehicle
It does not indicate a problem. When the rear the rear differential lock will be activated. checked by an authorised MITSUBISHI
differential lock is disengaged, these lamps MOTORS dealer as soon as possible.
go out and function again.
Refer to “ABS warning lamp/display” on
page 6-58, “ASTC indicator or ASTC OFF
indicator” on page 6-62.
 If the indicator lamp/display continues blink-
ing after the switch has been pressed to deac-
tivate the rear differential lock, hold the
steering wheel in the straight ahead position
then slowly depress and release the accelera-
tor pedal several times.
 If the indicator lamp/display continues blink-
ing after the switch has been pressed to acti-
vate the rear differential lock, bear in mind
the following instructions:

Examples of effective use of the When driving on rocky roads

rear differential lock
E00606401130 When the vehicle is unable to move because
one of the wheels is suspended in the air.
CAUTION
 Use the rear differential lock only as an
emergency measure when the vehicle is
stuck and cannot be freed with the drive
mode-selector in “4LLc” or “4HLc” posi-
6 tion. Deactivate the rear differential lock
immediately after using it.
Examples of incorrect use of the

When one of the wheels has fallen
rear differential lock
in a ditch E00606501131
WARNING
When getting out of snow  If the “4LLc” or “4HLc” position is
selected along with the rear differential
lock, the following phenomena appear and
When the vehicle is unable to get going it is very dangerous.
because one of the wheels is on the snow and Please be sure to release the rear differen-
the other on a paved road. tial lock on normal roads.
• If the rear differential lock is used by
mistake when driving on a paved road:
With the rear differential lock on, the
power to drive the vehicle straight ahead
becomes very strong, which may make it
difficult to turn the steering wheel.

6
WARNING WARNING
 If the rear differential lock is used by mis-  If the rear differential lock is used by mis-
take when turning a curve or making a take except when making an emergency
right or left turn at a crossing or the like: escape on snow or frozen road: It becomes
The vehicle is unable to make a turn and difficult to make a steady turn.
may go straight ahead.  In the case where the condition of the road
is different for the right tyre to drive from
the left tyre (such as one tyre on a paved
road and the other on ice), direction of the
vehicle may change abruptly when engine
braking or accelerating.
Do not use the rear differential lock except
when making an emergency escape on a
snow or frozen road, but drive with 4WD.

E00606602546
By selecting 4-wheel drive, both axles of the vehicle are rigidly connected with each other. This improves the traction characteristics. When turn-
ing sharp corners or moving forward and backward repeatedly, however, the drive line is stressed, which is felt as a braking effect. A 4-wheel
drive vehicle can accelerate more quickly and smoothly.

However, note that the braking distance is not shorter than that of a rear-wheel drive vehicle.
When using 4-wheel drive on rough roads (snow, mud, sand, etc.), it is important to operate the vehicle correctly.
WARNING
 Control the accelerator pedal, brake pedal, steering wheel, etc. according to the landform and nature of the soil. The driver should accurately
grasp the surrounding circumstances and drive carefully according to the respective circumstances. Especially, the off-road may lead to loss of
control and roll onto vehicle’s side or roof, which may cause an accident resulting in serious personal injury or death in the worst case.
6 NOTE
 The driving posture should be more upright and closer to the wheel than usual; adjust the seat to a good position for easy steering and pedal operation. Be
sure to wear the seat belt.
 After driving on rough roads, check each part of the vehicle and wash it thoroughly with water. Refer to the “Vehicle care” section and “Inspection and
maintenance following rough road operation” on page 6-47.

Even a vehicle without the equipment for Off Road mode and rear differential lock (if so equipped) run each road condition.
The vehicle with each equipment set the recommended mode of the list shown below in each road condition, it may help you drive smoothly.
Road conditions
Driving mode Dry paved road Packed snow Deep snow or
Gravel road Sandy road Rocky road
and highway road muddy road
Super Select 4WD II
2H or 4H 4H 4HLc or 4LLc 4HLc or 4LLc 4HLc or 4LLc 4HLc or 4LLc
( P.6-27)
Off Road mode-selector
− − GRAVEL MUD/SNOW SAND ROCK 6
( P.6-34)
Rear differential lock
− − − Active* Active* Active*
( P.6-36)
*:The Off Road mode and the rear differential lock cannot be used at the same time. When the rear differential lock is set to ON, the Off Road
mode turns off. In addition, when the rear differential lock is ON, the Off Road mode will be deactivated even if the Off Road mode-selector
is operated.
CAUTION
 When driving on the off-road, confirm the conditions of the road surface and the landscape, and drive after confirming that the components of the suspen-
sion and the bottom of the front and rear bumper do not contact with the road surface. (Refer to “Vehicle dimensions” on page 11-3.)

Driving on dry paved road and Driving on packed snow roads Driving on unpaved roads
highway E00646500022 E00646600023
E00646400021
Set the drive mode-selector to “4H” position, Check the road surface conditions and set the
Set the drive mode-selector to “2H” or “4H” in accordance with the road conditions, and drive mode-selector to “4HLc” or “4LLc”.
position to drive on the dry paved road. Espe- then gradually depress the accelerator pedal Setting the Off Road mode-selector (if so
cially on dry highway, never select the for a smooth start. equipped) to “GRAVEL” may help you drive
“4HLc” or “4LLc” position. smoothly.
NOTE
CAUTION  The use of snow tyres and/or tyre chains is Driving on deep snow or muddy
recommended.
 Selecting “4HLc” or “4LLc” position to roads
drive on dry paved road will increase the fuel  Maintain a safe distance between vehicles,
E00647300072
consumption with possible noise generation avoid sudden braking, and use engine brak-
and early tyre wear. ing (downshifting). Set the drive mode-selector to “4HLc” or
It may also increase the differential oil tem- “4LLc” position and then gradually depress
perature, resulting in possible damage to the the accelerator pedal for a smooth start. Keep
driving system. CAUTION the pressure on the accelerator pedal as con-
Further, the drive train will be subjected to  Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration, stant as possible, and drive at low speed.
excessive loading, possibly leading to oil and sharp turning; such operations could Set the Off Road mode-selector (if so
leakage, component seizure, or other serious cause skidding and spinouts. equipped) to “MUD/SNOW”, or set the rear
faults. differential lock to ON if the vehicle is likely

to get stuck. This may help you drive Check the sandy road condition and set the
smoothly.
NOTE drive mode-selector to “4HLc” or “4LLc”.
 If the vehicle becomes stuck in deep snow or
Gradually depress the accelerator pedal to
muddy roads, it can often be moved a rock-
WARNING start the vehicle and drive at a possible con-
ing motion. Move the selector lever rhythmi-
 When attempting to rock your vehicle out cally between the “D” (DRIVE) and “R” stant low speed. Either set the Off Road
of a stuck position, be sure that the area (REVERSE) position, while applying slight mode-selector (if so equipped) to “SAND”,
around the vehicle is clear of people and pressure to the accelerator pedal. or set the rear differential lock (if so
physical objects. The rocking motion may  If it is necessary to drive in extremely muddy equipped) to ON if the vehicle is likely to get
cause the vehicle to suddenly launch for- conditions, the use of tyre chains is recom- stuck. This may help you drive smoothly.
ward or backward, causing injury or
damage to nearby people or objects.
mended. Because the extent of muddy condi-
tions is difficult to judge and the vehicle
6
could become bogged down very deeply,
CAUTION
operation should be at a low speed. If possi-  Do not force the vehicle or drive recklessly
on sandy surfaces. In comparison with nor-
CAUTION ble, get out of the vehicle and check the con-
mal road surfaces, the engine and other
ditions ahead before proceeding.
 If any of following conditions occur while drive-system components are put under
the vehicle is being driven, immediately park  Driving over roads in coastal areas or roads
excessive strain when driving on such a sur-
your vehicle in a safe place and follow these on which anti-skid preparations have been
face, and this could lead to accidents.
procedures: spread can cause rust on the vehicle; wash
the vehicle thoroughly as soon as possible
• The bar graph of engine coolant tempera-
after such use.
ture display approaches the overheating
zone. Driving on rocky road
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-3. Driving on sandy roads E00646800025
• A/T fluid temperature warning display E00646700024

comes on.
Refer to “When a malfunction occurs in the
NOTE
 Avoid sudden braking, acceleration, and
turning; such operations could result in the
vehicle becoming stuck.

Set the drive mode-selector to “4HLc” or Set the drive mode-selector to “4HLc” or
“4LLc” and drive at a low speed. Depending “4LLc” position, use the engine brake (down-
Climbing steep grades
E00647000079
on the road condition, either set the Off Road shifting) and descend slowly.
mode-selector (if so equipped) to “ROCK”, If the vehicle cannot descend slowly even
or set the rear differential lock (if so using the engine brake. The Hill Descent
equipped) to ON if the vehicle is likely to get Control may help drive smoothly.
stuck. This may help you drive smoothly. For details, refer to “Hill Descent Control
(HDC)” on page 6-55.
CAUTION
6  Avoid driving alone on rocky roads. When WARNING
driving on rocky roads, follow an experi-  Avoid snaking down a sharp grade.
enced driver’s instruction for safe driving. Descend the grade as straight as possible.
Set the drive mode-selector to “4LLc” posi-

NOTE NOTE tion to maximize the engine torque.
 Drive on a road surface where the tyre treads  When descending a sharp grade, if the brakes
contact with rocks as far as possible. are applied suddenly because of an obstacle
encountered, control of the vehicle could be WARNING
lost. Before descending the slope, walk down  Go straight up. Do not try to traverse
Descending steep grades it and confirm the path. across a steep slope.
E00646900084
 Before descending a grade, it is necessary to  If you begin to lose traction, ease off the
choose the appropriate gear. Avoid changing accelerator pedal and gently turn the
gears while descending the grade. steering wheel alternatively left and right
 MITSUBISHI MOTORS is not responsible to regain adequate traction again.
to the operator for any damage or injury
caused or liability incurred by the improper
and negligent operation of a vehicle. All NOTE
techniques of vehicle operation described
 Choose as smooth a slope as possible with
herein depend on the skill and experience of
few stones or other obstacles.
the operator and other participating parties
 Before attempting to drive up the slope, walk
and any deviation from the recommended
up it to confirm that the vehicle can handle
operation instructions above is at their own
the grade.
risk.

Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation
Turning sharp corners Crossing a stream CAUTION

E00647100025 E00647200026  Never cross a stream where the water is
deep.
Do not change gears while crossing the
stream.
Frequent crossing of streams can adversely
affect the life span of the vehicle; consult an
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer
and take the necessary measures to prepare,
inspect, and repair the vehicle.
 After crossing a stream, apply the brakes to
6
be sure they are functioning properly. If the
brakes are wet and not functioning properly,
dry them out by driving slowly while lightly
When turning a sharp corner in “4HLc” or 4-wheel drive vehicles are not necessarily depressing the brake pedal.
“4LLc” position at low speed, a slight differ- waterproof. If the electrical circuits become
ence in steering may be experienced similar wet, further operation of the vehicle will be
to as if the brakes were applied. This is called impossible; therefore, avoid crossing streams Inspection and maintenance
tight corner braking and results from each of unless absolutely necessary. If crossing a
the 4 tyres being at a different distance from stream is unavoidable, use the following pro-
following rough road opera-
the corner. cedure: tion
The phenomenon is peculiar to 4-wheel drive E00606701595
vehicles. If this occurs, either straighten the 1. Check depths of a stream and geographi- After operating the vehicle in rough road con-
steering wheel, or change to “2H” or “4H” cal features before attempting to cross a ditions, be sure to perform the following
position. stream and ford the stream where the inspection and maintenance procedures:
water is as shallow as practicable.
2. Set the drive mode-selector to “4LLc”  Check that the vehicle has not been dam-
position. aged by rocks, gravel, etc.
3. Drive slowly at a speed of approximately  Carefully wash the vehicle with water.
5 km/h to avoid splashing too much water.

Cautions on handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles*
Drive the vehicle slowly while lightly  Check the tyre inflation pressure regu-
depressing the brake pedal in order to dry Cautions on handling of larly.
out the brakes. If the brakes still do not 4-wheel drive vehicles*
function properly, contact an authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as soon
E00606802157
CAUTION
 Always use tyres of the same size, same
as possible to have the brakes checked.
 Remove the insects, dried grass, etc. clog- Tyres and wheels type, and same brand which have no wear
differences. Using the tyres which differ in
ging the radiator core and A/T oil cooler. size, type, brands or the degree of wear or
 After crossing a stream, be sure to have Since the driving torque can be applied to the the inappropriate tyre inflation pressure, will
6 the following items inspected at an 4 wheels, the performance of the vehicle increase the differential oil temperature and
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS when operating in 4-wheel drive is greatly may be impossible to shift the transfer,
dealer and take the necessary measures. affected by the condition of the tyres. resulting in possible damage to the driving
• Check the brake system and, if neces- system. Further, the drive train will be sub-
sary, have it serviced. Pay close attention to the tyres. jected to excessive loading, possibly leading
to oil leakage, component seizure, or other
• Check the engine, transmission, transfer,
and differential oil or grease level and  Install specified tyres on all wheels. Refer serious faults.
turbidity. If the oil or grease is milky, it to “Tyres and wheels” on page 11-5.
indicates water contamination. Replace  Be sure to the appropriate tyre inflation
it with new oil or grease. pressure according to load or trailer tow- Towing
• Grease the propeller shaft. ing. Refer to “Tyre inflation pressures” on
• Check the inside of the vehicle. If page 10-11. If towing is necessary, we recommend you to
ingress of water is found, dry the carpet  Be sure to fit all 4 tyres and wheels of the have it done by your MITSUBISHI
etc. same size and type. MOTORS dealer or a commercial tow truck
• Inspect the headlamps. If the headlamp When replacement of any of the tyres or service.
bulb is flooded with water, have the wheels is necessary, replace all of them. In the following cases, transport the vehicle
headlamp drained off.  All tyres should be rotated whenever the using a tow truck.
wear difference between the front and rear
tyres is recognizable.  The engine runs but the vehicle does not
move or abnormal noise is produced.
Good vehicle performance cannot be  Inspection of the vehicle’s underside
expected if there is a difference in wear reveals that oil or some other fluid is leak-
between tyres. Refer to “Tyre rotation” on ing.
page 10-12.

Braking
Only when you cannot receive a towing ser-
vice from a MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer
CAUTION CAUTION
 Transport the vehicle with the driving wheels  Avoid driving habits that cause heavy brak-
or commercial tow truck service, tow your
on a carriage (Type C or D) as illustrated. ing and never “ride” the brakes by resting
vehicle carefully in accordance with the
Never try to tow with the front or rear wheels your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
instructions given in “Towing” on page 8-18. on the ground (Type A or B) as illustrated. It causes brake overheating and fade.
This could result in damage to the drivetrain,
or unstable towing.
Brake system
Jacking up a 4-wheel drive The service brake is divided into two brake
6
vehicles circuits. And your vehicle is equipped with
power brakes. If one brake circuit fails, the
other is available to stop the vehicle. If your
WARNING vehicle should lose the power assist for some
 Do not crank the engine while jacking up reason, the brakes will still work. In these sit-
the vehicle.
uations, even if the brake pedal moves down
The tyre on the ground may turn and the
to the very end of its possible stroke or resists
vehicle may roll off the jack.
being depressed, keep depressing the brake
pedal down harder and further than usual;
stop driving as soon as possible and have the
Braking brake system repaired.
E00607003355
All the parts of the brake system are critical WARNING

to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an  Do not turn off the engine while your vehi-
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer at cle is in motion.
regular intervals according to the service If you turn off the engine while driving,
booklet. the power assistance for the braking sys-
tem will stop working and your brakes
will not work effectively.

Brake auto hold
WARNING When driving downhill WARNING

 If the power assist is lost or if either brake  Driving with worn brake pads will make it
hydraulic system stops working properly, It is important to take advantage of the engine harder to stop, and can cause an accident.
take your vehicle to an authorised
braking by shifting to a lower shift position
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer immedi-
while driving on steep downhill roads in
ately.
order to prevent the brakes from overheating. Brake auto hold
E00652000237
Warning lamp/display WARNING When the vehicle is stopped at traffic signals
6  Do not leave any objects near the brake etc., the vehicle can be held stationary with
The brake warning lamp illuminates to indi- pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; the brake auto hold system even if you
cate a fault in the braking system. A warning doing so could prevent the full pedal release your foot from the brake pedal.
is also displayed on the instrument cluster. stroke that would be necessary in an When the accelerator pedal is depressed, the
Refer to “Brake warning lamp (red)” and emergency. Make sure that the pedal can brakes are released.
“Brake warning display” on page 5-75, 5-77. be operated freely at all times. Make sure
the floor mat is securely held in place.
WARNING
When brakes are wet  Do not overly rely on the brake auto hold
system. On steep slope, depress the brake
Brake pads pedal firmly because the system may not
Check the brake system while driving at a
hold the vehicle stationary.
low speed immediately after starting, espe-  Avoid hard braking situations.
 Never leave the vehicle while it is being
cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm New brakes need to be broken-in by mod-
stopped by the brake auto hold system.
they work normally. erate use for the first 200 km. When leaving the vehicle, apply the park-
A film of water can be formed on the brake  The disc brakes are provided with a warning brake and move the selector lever to
discs and prevent normal braking after driving device which emits a shrieking metal- the “P” (PARK) position.
ing in heavy rain or through large puddles, or lic sound while braking if the brake pads  Do not use brake auto hold system when
after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry have reached their wear limit. If you hear driving on slippery roads or towing. The
the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly this sound, have the brake pads replaced system may not hold the vehicle stationary
depressing the brake pedal. immediately by your MITSUBISHI and could result in an accident.
MOTORS dealer.

Brake auto hold
Indicator lamp (white)
NOTE How to use brake auto hold
 While operating the brake auto hold system, E00696300038
you may hear an operation noise to increase

braking force when the system detected the
movement of the vehicle. This does not indi-
cate a malfunction. To turn on brake auto hold NOTE
E00696400039
 When the brake auto hold system cannot be
If the brake auto hold switch is pressed while used, a buzzer will sound and the following
all of the following conditions are met, the warning will appear on the information
system will change to the standby state and screen in the instrument cluster. 6
the indicator lamp (white) in the instrument • If this warning appears, confirm that all of
cluster comes on. the conditions for system operation are met
and that there is no malfunction in the sys-
 The operation mode is in ON. tem.
 The driver’s seat belt is fastened.
 The driver’s door is closed.
 The rear differential lock is OFF.
 The drive mode-selector of Super Select
4WD II is in “2H”, “4H” or “4HLc”.
• If this warning appears, fasten the driver’s
seat belt.

Brake auto hold
NOTE NOTE NOTE

 If any of the following occur while the sys-  When the operating conditions of the brake  If the vehicle is stopped on a steep slope, the
tem is standby state, the brake auto hold sys- auto hold are met with the brake auto hold warning display may appear on the informa-
tem will be turned off automatically and the switch pressed, the indicator lamp (green) tion screen in the instrument cluster, and the
indicator lamp (white) in the instrument comes on, and the brake auto hold activates. brake auto hold may not be activated.
cluster goes off. Refer to “To activate brake auto hold” on
A buzzer will sound and the message will page 6-52.
appear on the information screen in the
instrument cluster.
To activate brake auto hold
6 • The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
E00696500030
• The driver’s door is opened.  In the following situations, the brake auto
When the vehicle is stopped by depressing
• The rear differential lock is ON. hold system may not operate temporarily.
the brake pedal with the selector lever in any
• When there is a malfunction in the system. • The vehicle is stopped on a slippery road.
position other than “P” (PARK) or “R”
• The drive mode-selector of Super Select • The vehicle was stopped while the steering
(REVERSE), the brake auto hold activates
4WD II is in “4LLc”. wheel was turned all the way to the left or
and the vehicle will be held stationary.
right.
The indicator lamp (green) in the instrument
• The vehicle is being turned on a parking lot
cluster will come on while the system acti- turntable.
vates. If this occurs, the brake auto hold system
will return to the normal operation if you
Indicator lamp (green) depress the accelerator pedal and the vehicle
 If keeping pressing the brake auto hold
switch after setting the brake auto hold to starts moving again.
ON (Stand by), the brake auto hold will  If the following operation is performed, the
return to OFF as a protection function is brake auto hold will be deactivated and the
operated. indicator lamp in the instrument cluster will
After returning to OFF, the brake auto hold turn from green to white.
CAUTION
will not be switched to ON (Stand by) even if • When shifting the selector lever to the “P”
 Release the brake pedal after the indicator
the brake auto hold switch is pressed. To set (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position with
lamp (green) is illuminated.
the brake auto hold to ON, restart the engine depressing the brake pedal.
and press the brake auto hold switch again. • When the Electric parking brake is applied
by using the Electric parking brake switch.

Hill start assist
NOTE NOTE To turn off brake auto hold

 While the vehicle is held stationary with the • The drive mode-selector of Super Select E00696700032
brake auto hold system, the Electric parking 4WD II is set to “4LLc”. Press the brake auto hold switch to turn off
brake will be automatically applied under the the brake auto hold. The indicator lamp
following conditions, and a buzzer will (white) in the instrument cluster goes off.
sound and the message will appear on the
If you want to turn off the system while The
information screen in the instrument cluster.
indicator lamp (green) in the instrument clus-
• After approximately 10 minutes has elapsed
with applying the brake auto hold system.
ter, press the switch with depressing the brake
 If the operation mode is put in OFF with the pedal.
• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened. selector lever in any position other than “P” 6
• When the driver’s door is opened. (PARK) position, the message may appear
• When the operation mode is put in OFF. on the information screen in the instrument NOTE
• When the system detects the vehicle rolling cluster.  If the brake auto hold system is turned off
down a slope. If the message appears, shift the selector without the brake pedal being depressed, a
• When there is a malfunction in the system lever to the “P” (PARK) position while buzzer will sound and the message will
depressing the brake pedal. appear on the information screen in the
instrument cluster.
 If the following operation is performed, the

brake hold state will be released automati-
cally, and the message will appear on the To start the vehicle
information screen in the instrument cluster. E00696600031
Depress the brake pedal.
Depress the acceleration pedal with the selec- Hill start assist
• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
tor lever in any position other than “P” E00628001400
• The driver’s door is opened.
(PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL). The hill start assist makes it easy to start off
• The rear differential lock is set to ON.
The brakes are released, and the indicator on a steep uphill slope by preventing the
lamp in the instrument cluster will turn from vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the
green to white. braking force for about 2 seconds when you
move your foot from the brake pedal to the
accelerator pedal.

Hill start assist
3. Release the brake pedal and the hill start
CAUTION assist will maintain the braking force
Warning lamp/display
 Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to E00628201763
applied while stopping for approximately
prevent backwards movement of the vehicle. If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-
2 seconds.
Under certain circumstances, even when hill
4. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill tem, the warning lamp/display will turn on.
start assist is activated, the vehicle may
move backwards if the brake pedal is not suf- start assist gradually will decrease the
braking force as the vehicle starts moving. Warning lamp
ficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily
loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip-
pery.
NOTE
6  The hill start assist is not designed to keep
the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes
 The hill start assist is activated when all of
Warning display
the following conditions are met.
for more than 2 seconds.
 When facing uphill, do not rely on using the • The engine is running.
hill start assist to maintain a stopped position (The hill start assist will not be activated
while the engine is starting or immediately
as an alternative to depressing the brake
pedal. after the engine is started.)
Doing so could cause an accident. • The selector lever is in any position other
 Do not put the operation mode in ACC or than “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL). CAUTION
OFF while the hill start assist is operating. • The vehicle is completely stationary, with  If the warning is displayed, the hill start
The hill start assist could stop operating, the brake pedal depressed. assist will not operate. Start off carefully.
which could result in an accident. • The parking brake is released.  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
 The hill start assist will not operate if the engine.
accelerator pedal is depressed before the Restart the engine and check whether the dis-
brake pedal is released. play/indicator goes out, in which case the hill
To operate  The hill start assist also operates when start assist is again working normally. If they
E00628101397
reversing on an uphill slope. remain displayed or reappear frequently, it is
1. Stop the vehicle completely using the  When the hill start assist is activated, you not necessary to stop the vehicle immedi-
brake pedal. may feel the operating sound. ately, but the vehicle should be inspected by
2. Place the selector lever into the “D” This is a normal result of the hill start assist an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
(DRIVE) position. operation, and does not indicate a problem. dealer.
NOTE
 When reversing on an uphill slope, place the
selector lever into the “R” position.

Hill Descent Control (HDC)*
Indicator lamp
Hill Descent Control CAUTION
(HDC)*  When there is a malfunction in the Hill
Descent Control system, ASTC warning
E00642900116
lamp come on. When ASTC warning lamp
come on, have the vehicle inspected at an
The Hill Descent Control is the system that
assists the steady driving with the constant
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. NOTE
(Refer to “ASTC warning lamp/display” on  The indicator lamp should illuminate when
speed when descending sharp grades where it page 6-63.) the operation mode is put in ON and should
is impossible to decelerate the vehicle suffi- When the warning lamp comes on, the warn- go off after a few seconds.
ciently by the engine brake only or rough
roads.
ing display may also appear.
 If pressing the Hill Descent Control switch 6
continuously after setting the Hill Descent
Control to ON (Stand by), the Hill Descent
WARNING To operate Control will return to OFF as a protection
 The driver has the responsibility to drive E00643000172 function is operated. After returning to OFF,
safely. Make sure to drive safely according 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. the Hill Descent Control will not be switched
to road conditions without relying too 2. Press the Hill Descent Control switch. to ON (Stand by) even if the Hill Descent
much on the Hill Descent Control. Control switch is pressed. To set the Hill
 When driving slippery roads such as Descent Control to ON, restart the engine
muddy, icy or unpaved roads, the vehicle and press the Hill Descent Control switch
will not allow you to stay at a certain low again.
speed, which may lead to a serious acci-  It is impossible to set the Hill Descent Con-
dent. trol to ON (Stand by) in the following condi-
tions.
• Vehicle speed: More than approximately
20 km/h
• Rear differential lock (if so equipped) ：
activating
• Brake system: brake temperature high
3. Make sure that Hill Descent Control indi- • ASTC warning lamp: illuminating or blink-
cator lamp comes on. ing
When the Hill Descent Control indicator Refer to “ASTC warning lamp/display” on
page 6-63
lamp comes on, the Hill Descent Control
set to ON (Stand by).

Brake assist system
In the following cases, the Hill Descent Con- firmly such as in emergency stop situations
trol brake control operates.
NOTE and provides greater braking force.
 The Hill Descent Control indicator lamp
 Vehicle speed: 20 km/h or less blinks on a flat road, but this does not indi- If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the
 The accelerator pedal or the brake pedal is cate a malfunction. brakes will be applied with more force than
not operated. usual.
To deactivate
When the control operates, the Hill Descent E00643200028 CAUTION
Control indicator lamp blinks, and the brake 1. Press the Hill Descent Control switch.  The brake assist system is not a device
lamps and the high mounted stop lamp are
6 illuminated. It is possible to change the con-
The Hill Descent Control will be gradu-
ally released.
designed to exercise braking force greater
than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a
trolled vehicle speed by operating the acceler- 2. Make sure that the Hill Descent Control sufficient distance between vehicles in front
ator pedal or the brake pedal. indicator lamp is off. of you without relying too much on the brake
When you lift your foot off the pedal, the Hill assist system.
Descent Control performs brake control so as
to keep the vehicle speed at that time. NOTE
 The Hill Descent Control turns off automati- NOTE
cally and the Hill Descent Control indicator
NOTE lamp in the meter goes off without pressing
 Once the brake assist system is operational,
it maintains great braking force even if the
 The Hill Descent Control will not operate the Hill Descent Control switch in the fol-
brake pedal is lightly released.
even if the Hill Descent Control is in ON lowing conditions.
To stop its operation, completely remove
(stand by), and the control will temporarily • Vehicle speed: More than about 80 km/h your foot from the brake pedal.
stop during the activation of it in the follow- • Rear differential lock (if so equipped): acti-
ing conditions.  When the brake assist system is in use while
vating driving, you may feel the brake pedal
• Vehicle speed: More than approximately • ASTC warning lamp: ON attempt to resist, the pedal moves in small
20 km/h • Brake system: brake temperature high motions in conjunction with the operation
 When the Hill Descent Control is activated,
noise, or the vehicle body and the steering
you may feel the vehicle body, the steering
wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake
wheel and the brake pedal vibrate and hear
the operation noise. You may also feel the Brake assist system assist system is operating normally and does
not indicate faulty operation. Continue to
depressed brake pedal is solid or loose. This E00627001865
depress the brake pedal.
does not indicate a malfunction and the Hill The brake assist system is a device assisting
Descent Control is operating normally.
drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal

Emergency stop signal system
NOTE NOTE Driving hints

 When the anti-lock brake system warning  [Activating condition for the emergency stop
lamp or only the active stability & traction signal system]  Always keep a safe distance from the
control (ASTC) indicator lamp is illumi- It activates when all of the following condi- vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi-
nated, the brake assist system may not functions are met. cle is equipped with the ABS, leave a
tion. • The vehicle speed is approximately greater braking distance when:
55 km/h or higher. • Driving on gravel or snow-covered
• The brake pedal has been depressed, and roads.
Emergency stop signal sys- the system judges that it was sudden brak- • Driving with tyre chains installed.
tem ing from the vehicle deceleration and the • Driving on roads where the road surface 6
operating condition of the anti-lock brake
E00626001132 is pitted or has other differences in sur-
system (ABS).
This is a device that reduces the possibility of face height.
[Deactivating condition for the emergency
rear end collisions by the rapid and automatic • Driving on uneven road surfaces.
stop signal system]
blinking of the hazard warning lamps to alert It deactivates when one of the following con-  Operation of ABS is not restricted situa-
vehicles approaching from behind during ditions is met. tions where brakes are applied suddenly.
sudden braking. When the emergency stop • The brake pedal is released. This system may also prevent the wheels
signal system operates, the hazard warning • The hazard warning flasher switch is from locking when you drive over man-
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster pressed. holes, steel roadwork plates, road mark-
blinks rapidly at the same time. • The system judges that it was not sudden ings, or any uneven road surface.
braking from the vehicle deceleration and  When the ABS is in use, you may feel the
the operating condition of the anti-lock brake pedal pulsation and the vibrations
CAUTION brake system (ABS). of the vehicle body and steering wheel. It
 If the ABS warning or ASTC warning is dis-
may also feel as if the pedal resists being
played, the emergency stop signal system
may not operate. Refer to “ABS warning pressed.
lamp/display” on page 6-58. Anti-lock brake system In this situation, simply hold the brake
pedal down firmly. Do not pump the
Refer to “ASTC warning lamp/display” on
page 6-63.
(ABS) brake, which will result in reduced
E00607102580
braking performance.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps pre-
vent the wheels from locking up when brak-
ing. This helps maintain vehicle drivability
and steering wheel handling.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
 An operation noise is emitted from the Warning display
engine compartment or feel a shock from
NOTE
 On vehicles with the rear differential lock
the brake pedal when start driving imme-
and the active stability & traction control
diately after starting the engine. These are
(ASTC), the ASTC and ABS functions are
normal sound or operation that the ABS suspended while the rear differential lock is
makes when performing a self-check. It activated.
does not indicate a malfunction. ASTC indicator lamp, ASTC OFF indicator
 The ABS can be used after the vehicle has If there is a malfunction in the system, the
lamp and ABS warning lamp are illuminated
reached a speed over approximately ABS warning lamp will come on and the while these functions are suspended.
warning display will appear on the informa-
6 10 km/h. It stops working when the vehi-
tion screen in the instrument cluster.
It does not indicate a problem. When the rear
differential lock is disengaged, these indica-
cle slows below 7 km/h.
Under normal conditions, the ABS warning tor lamp go out and function again.
lamp only comes on when the operation Refer to “ASTC indicator or ASTC OFF
CAUTION mode is put in ON and goes off a few seconds lamp” on page 6-62.
 The ABS cannot prevent accidents. It is your later.
responsibility to take safety precautions and
to drive carefully.
CAUTION If the warning lamp / display illu-
 To prevent failure of the ABS, be sure all
4 wheels and tyres are the same size and the  Any of the following warning lamp/display minate while driving
same type. behaviour indicates that the ABS is not func-
 Do not install any aftermarket limited slip tioning and only the standard brake system is
differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ABS working. (The standard brake system is func-  If only the ABS warning lamp/dis-
may stop functioning properly. tioning normally.) If this happens, please play illuminate
contact your nearest authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer for inspec-
Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
tion.
ABS warning lamp/display • When the operation mode is put in ON, the
Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
E00607202826 warning lamp does not come on or it Restart the engine and check to see whether
Warning lamp remains on and does not go off the lamp goes out after a few minutes driving;
• The warning lamp comes on while driving if it then remains off during driving, there is
• The warning display appears while driving no problem.
However, if the warning lamp/display do not
disappear, or if they come on again when the
vehicle is driven, have the vehicle checked by

Power steering system
an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE Power steering system
 The ABS warning lamp and brake warning E00607401472
lamp illuminate at the same time and the
 If the ABS warning lamp / display The power steering system operates while the
warning displays appear alternately on the
and brake warning lamp / display information screen in the instrument cluster.
engine is running. It helps reduce the effort
needed to turn the steering wheel.
illuminate at the same time
The power steering system has mechanical
Warning lamp steering capability in case the power assist is
After driving on icy roads lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea-
6
E00618801261
son, you will still be able to steer your vehi-
After driving on snow or icy roads, remove cle, but you will notice it takes much more
any snow and ice which may have be left effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehi-
Warning display around the wheels. When doing this, be care- cle inspected at an authorised MITSUBISHI
ful not to damage the wheel speed sensors MOTORS dealer.
(A) and cables located at each wheel.
WARNING
Front Rear  Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is
moving. Stopping the engine would make
the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,
possibly resulting in an accident.
CAUTION
The ABS and brake force distribution func-  Do not leave the steering wheel turned all the
tion may not work, so hard braking could way in one direction. This can cause damage
make the vehicle unstable. to the power steering system.
Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an

Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC)
Active Stability & Traction CAUTION NOTE

Control (ASTC)  Do not install any aftermarket limited slip
differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The
 On vehicles with the rear differential lock,
the ASTC and ABS functions are suspended
E00616701859
active stability control function may stop while the rear differential lock is activated.
The active stability & traction control functioning properly. ASTC indicator lamp, ASTC OFF indicator
(ASTC) takes overall control of the anti-lock lamp and ABS warning lamp are illuminated
brake system, active stability control function while these functions are suspended. It does
and active traction control function to help NOTE not indicate a problem. When the rear differ-
maintain the vehicle’s control and traction.  An operation noise may be emitted from the ential lock is disengaged, these indicator
6 Please read this section in conjunction with engine compartment in the following situa- lamp go out and function again. Refer to
“ABS warning lamp/display” on page 6-58,
the page on the anti-lock brake system, active tions. The sound is associated with checking
the operations of the ASTC. At this time, you “ASTC indicator or ASTC OFF indicator”
stability control function and active traction on page 6-62.
control function. may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you
depress it. These do not indicate a malfunc-
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)  P.6-57 tion. Active Stability Control func-
Active Stability Control function  P.6-60 • When the operation mode is put in ON.
• When the vehicle is driven for a while after
tion
Active Traction Control function  P.6-61 E00616901369
the engine is turned on.
 When the ASTC is activated, you may feel a The active stability control function is
CAUTION vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin- designed to help the driver maintain control
 Do not over-rely on the ASTC. Even the ing sound from the engine compartment. of the vehicle on slippery roads or during
ASTC cannot prevent the natural laws of This indicates that the system is operating rapid steering maneuvers. It works by con-
physics from acting on the vehicle. normally. It does not indicate a malfunction. trolling the engine output and the brake on
This system, like any other system, has lim-  When the anti-lock brake system warning each wheel.
its and cannot help you to maintain traction lamp is illuminated, the ASTC is not active.
and control of the vehicle in all circum-
stances. Reckless driving can lead to acci-
dents. It is the driver’s responsibility to drive
carefully. This means into account the traffic,
road and environmental conditions.
 Be sure to use the same specified type and
size of tyre on all 4 wheels. Otherwise, the
ASTC may not work correctly.

easier to extricate. (Brake control of the
NOTE active traction control function is still work-
 Vehicles with Super Select 4WD II, the
ing to prevent wheel spins when ASC OFF
active stability control function does not
switch “OFF” or “4LLc” position selected.)
operate when the drive mode-selector is in
the “4LLc” position. When the active stabil-
ity control function is operating with the NOTE
drive mode-selector in the “2H”, “4H” or  If you continue to press the “ASC OFF”
“4HLc” position, setting the drive mode- switch after the active stability control func-
selector to the “4LLc” position makes the tion is turned off, the “mistaken operation
active stability control function deactivate
automatically.
protection function” will activate and the 6
active stability control function will turn
 The active stability control function operates back on.
at speeds of about 15 km/h or higher. CAUTION  Even if the active stability control function is
 For safety reasons, the “ASC OFF” switch turned off, it may activate depending on the
should only be operated when the vehicle is vehicle’s movement.
“ASC OFF” switch stopped.
E00639800052  Be sure to keep the active stability control
function on while driving in normal circum- Active Traction Control func-
The active stability control function is auto-
stances.
matically activated when the operation mode tion
is put in ON. You can deactivate the system E00617001048
by pressing down the “ASC OFF” switch for
3 seconds or longer. Driving hints On slippery surfaces, the active traction con-
E00616801094 trol function prevents the drive wheels from
When the active stability control function is
spinning excessive, thus helping the vehicle
When extricating the vehicle from mud, sand
deactivated, the indicator will turn on. To to start moving from a stopped condition. It
or fresh snow with the drive mode-selector in
reactivate the ASC, momentarily press the also provides sufficient driving force and
the “2H”, “4H” or “4HLc” position, you may
“ASC OFF” switch; the indicator is turned steering performance as the vehicle turns
find that operation of the ASTC prevents the
off. while pressing the acceleration pedal.
engine speed from increasing in response to
depression of the accelerator pedal. If this
happens and the vehicle remains stuck as a CAUTION
result, place the drive mode-selector in the  When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy
“4LLc” position or turn the active stability road, be sure to install snow tyres and drive
control switch OFF. The vehicle will then be the vehicle at moderate speeds.

ASTC indicator or ASTC OFF CAUTION NOTE

indicator  If the temperature in the braking system con-  The indicator may turn on when you start
tinues to increase due to continuous brake
E00619301898 the engine. This means that the battery volt-
control on a slippery road surface, the warn-
The indicator lamps should illuminate when age momentarily dropped when the engine
ing display will appear and the warning
the operation mode is put in ON and should was started. It does not indicate a malfunc-
buzzer will sound intermittently to give a
tion, provided that the indicator goes out
go off after a few seconds. If the indicator warning to the driver. If the driver continues
immediately.
lamps stay on or do not illuminate when the driving even after the warning buzzer sounds
operation mode is put in ON, please contact and then the temperature is further increased,
6 your nearest authorised MITSUBISHI the warning display will appear again, and
the buzzer will sound continuously for sev- ASTC function indicator display
MOTORS dealer for inspection.
eral seconds. To prevent the brake system E00647400161
ASTC indicator from overheating, the brake control of the When the ASTC is operating, the indicator
- active traction control function will be tem-
The indicator will blink when the display of the wheels that are controlled by
ASTC is operating. porarily suspended. At this time, the indi- the ASTC will blink.
ASTC OFF indicator cator blinks slowly. The indicator for the wheel being subjected to
- The engine control of the active traction con-
This indicator will turn on when the antispin control blinks.
active stability control function is trol function and normal brake operation will
not be affected. Park your vehicle in a safe
deactivated by either of the following Except for multi information screen of Instru-
place. When the temperature in the braking
operations: ments - Type B
system has come down, the indicator will
be turned off and the active traction control
 The ASC OFF switch is pressed to deacti-
function will start operating again.
vated the system.
 The drive mode-selector is placed in the
“4LLc” position.
CAUTION
 When indicator blinks, ASTC is operat-
ing, which means that the road is slippery or
that your vehicle’s wheels are beginning to
slip. If this happens, drive slower with less
accelerator input.

Cruise control*
Warning display
Multi information screen of Instruments - Type Cruise control*
B E00609102656
Cruise control is an automatic speed control

system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti-
vated at approximately 40 km/h or more.
CAUTION
 The system may be malfunctioning.
CAUTION
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the  When you do not wish to drive at a set speed,
turn off the cruise control for safety.
6
engine.
Restart the engine and check whether the dis-  Do not use cruise control when driving con-
Example indication: ASTC function control-
play/indicator goes out. If they go out, there ditions will not allow you to stay at the same
ling front-right wheel speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads
is no abnormal condition. If they do not go
out or appear frequently, it is not necessary that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet,
NOTE to stop the vehicle immediately, but we rec- slippery, on a steep downhill slope.
 The ASTC function indicator display illumi- ommend you to have your vehicle inspected.
nates only when the 2WD/4WD operation
indicator display is selected. NOTE
Towing  Cruise control may not be able to keep your
E00624401129
speed on uphills or downhills.
ASTC warning lamp/display  Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.
E00619401974 CAUTION You may use the accelerator pedal if you
want to stay at your set speed.
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-  If the vehicle is towed with the operation
mode in ON and only the front wheels or  Your speed may increase to more than the set
tem, the following warning lamp/warning speed on a steep downhill. You have to use
only the rear wheels raised off the ground,
display will turn on. the brake to control your speed. As a result,
the ASTC may operate, resulting in an acci-
dent. the set speed driving is deactivated.
Warning lamp
Refer to “Towing” on page 8-18.
- ASTC indicator
- ASTC OFF indicator

Cruise control*
Cruise control switches B- “SET -” switch Type 1
Used to reduce the set speed and to set the

Type 1 desired speed.
C- “RES +” switch
Used to increase the set speed and to return to

the original set speed.
6
D- “CANCEL” switch
Used to deactivate the set speed driving. Type 2
Type 2 NOTE
 When operating the cruise control switches,
press the cruise control switches correctly.
The set speed driving may be deactivated
automatically if two or more switches of the
cruise control are pressed at the same time.
To activate Indicator display

E00609302818 Instruments - Type A
1. With the operation mode in ON, press the
A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch (A)
to turn on the cruise control. The indicator
Used to turn on and off the cruise control. display in the meter cluster will come on. Instruments - Type B

Cruise control*
2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired
speed, then push down and release the
NOTE Type 2
 When you release the “SET -” switch (B),
SET - switch (B) when the indicator dis-
the vehicle speed will be set.
play is illuminated. The vehicle will then
maintain the desired speed. The “SET”
indicator appears on the information dis-
play in the meter cluster. To increase the set speed
E00609402082
Type 1 There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.

6
RES + switch
To increase your speed in small amounts,
Push up and hold the “RES +” switch (C) push up the “RES +” switch (C) for less than
while driving at the set speed, and your speed approximately 1 second and release it.
will then gradually increase. Each time you push up the “RES +” switch
When you reach your desired speed, release (C), your vehicle will go approximately
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now 1.6 km/h faster.
set.
Type 2 Accelerator pedal
Type 1
While driving at the set speed, use the accel-
erator pedal to reach your desired speed and
then push down the “SET -” switch (B) and
release the switch momentarily to set a new
desired cruising speed.

Cruise control*
To slow down your speed in small amounts,
Type 1 SET - switch
push down the “SET -” switch (B) for less
than approximately 1 second and release it.
Push down and hold the “SET -” switch (B) Each time you push down the “SET -” switch
while driving at the set speed, and your speed (B), your vehicle will slow down by approxi-
will slow down gradually. mately 1.6 km/h.
When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
set. Brake pedal
6 While driving at the set speed, use the brake
Type 1
pedal, which disengages the cruise control,
Type 2 then push down the “SET -” switch (B) and
release the switch momentarily to set a new
desired cruising speed.
Type 1
Type 2
To decrease the set speed

E00609502012
There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed.

Cruise control*
Type 2 Type 2
To temporarily increase or To temporarily decrease the speed To deactivate

decrease the speed E00609703079
E00609601566 Depress the brake pedal to decrease the The set speed driving can be deactivated as
speed. To return to the previously set speed, follows:
To temporarily increase the speed push up the “RES +” switch (C).
Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page  Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
6-68. switch (A) (Cruise control will be turned
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would off.)
normally. When you release the pedal, you  Press the “CANCEL” switch (D).
will return to your set speed. Type 1
 Depress the brake pedal.
Type 1

Cruise control*
Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-
Type 2 Type 1
vated as follow:
 When the engine speed rises and

approaches the tachometer’s red zone (the
red-coloured part of the tachometer dial).
CAUTION
 When the set speed driving is deactivated
6 automatically in any situation other than
those listed above, there may be a system
malfunction.
The set speed driving is deactivated automati- Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF Type 2
cally in any of the following ways. switch to turn off the cruise control and have
your vehicle inspected by an authorised
 When your speed slows to approximately MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
15 km/h or more below the set speed
because of a hill, etc.
 When your speed slows to approximately To resume the set speed
40 km/h or less. E00609802262
 When the active stability & traction con- If the set speed driving is deactivated by the
trol (ASTC) starts operating. condition described in “To deactivate” on
Refer to “Active stability & traction con- page 6-67, you can resume the previously set
trol (ASTC)” on page 6-60. Under either of the following conditions,
speed by push up the “RES +” switch (C) however, using the switch does not allow you
while driving at a speed of approximately 40 to resume the previously set speed. In these
WARNING km/h or higher. The “SET” indicator appears situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:
 Although the set speed driving will be on the information display in the meter clus-
deactivated when shifting to the “N” ter.  The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
(NEUTRAL) position, never move the switch is pressed.
selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL)  The operation mode is put in OFF.
position while driving.  Indicator lamp go off.
You would have no engine braking and
could cause a serious accident.

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)*
Adaptive Cruise Control WARNING CAUTION

System (ACC)*  A driver is responsible for driving safely.
Even if the ACC is in use, always grasp
 In the following situations, the system may
become transiently unable to detect a vehicle
E00634601472
the surrounding circumstances and pro- in front or triggers its control and alarm
vide for safe driving. functions by detecting something other than
The ACC maintains a set speed with no need
 Never rely solely on the ACC. The ACC is a vehicle in front.
for you to use the accelerator pedal. Using a
the system to reduce load on the driver. • When driving in curved sections of road
sensor (A), the system also measures the rela- The ACC is not a collision avoidance sys- including their entrance/outlet or running
tive speed and distance between your vehicle tem or an automatic driving system. The beside a closed lane in a traffic work or
and a vehicle in front, and maintains a set fol-
lowing distance between your vehicle and the
system is not intended to compensate for
driver’s loss of attention to the front dur-
similar zone. 6
vehicle in front by automatically decelerating ing driving due to distraction or careless-
your vehicle if it becomes too close to the ness or supplement a drop in visibility due
vehicle in front. to the rain and fog.
The ACC is the driver assist system to aid It is never a substitute for your safe and
comfortable driving on a freeway. Stop lamps careful driving. Always be ready to apply
the brakes manually.
are illuminated during automatic braking.
 This system may not correctly detect the
If you desire, a cruise control without inter- • When your vehicle position in a lane is
actual situation depending on the type of
vention of the following distance control is vehicle in front and its conditions, the
instable, is frequently steered to right and
also selectable. left, or running unstably due to a traffic
weather conditions, and the road condi-
accident, trouble with some vehicles, etc.
tions.
Additionally, the system may be unable to • When driving on the road that the vehicle in
decelerate sufficiently if the vehicle in front runs in offset position from your vehi-
front applies the brakes suddenly or cle.
another vehicle cuts into your path, so
your vehicle approaches the front vehicle.
Improper usage of this system or loss of
attention to the front by the over-rely on
the ACC, may result in a serious accident.

CAUTION CAUTION NOTE

 Never use the ACC in any of the following • Avoid application of strong shock loads to  When depressing the brake pedal while auto-
situations. Failure to follow this instruction the sensor and never tamper with or remove matic brake is applied, the brake pedal is felt
could lead to an accident. the sensor mounting screws. solidly, but it is not abnormal. You can more
• On roads with heavy traffic or roads includ- • The emblem and the sensor should be kept depress the pedal and it provides greater
ing many winding or steep curves clean. braking force.
• On roads with slippery surfaces, such as • Do not cover the sensor mounted area of  Sound is heard while automatic brake, but it
frozen, snow-covered, and dirt roads the vehicle or the emblem on the front is operated a brake control and not abnormal.
• Under adverse weather conditions (rain, bumper with a sticker or anything such as a
6 snow, sand storms, etc.) grill guard etc.
When ACC detects a vehicle in
• On steep downslopes • The emblem should not be modified or
• On roads including steep up and down painted. front within the set distance
slopes or many changes in inclination • Avoid using different size tyres from those E00638000305
• In traffic requiring frequent acceleration specified and maintain even tyre wear. The ACC makes control to maintain a follow-
and deceleration • Do not modify the suspension of your vehi- ing distance (time gap) matched with the
• When the proximity alarm sounds fre- cle. vehicle speed between your vehicle and a
quently  When the emblem or the sensor is deformed vehicle in front while also activating brakes
• When your vehicle is towed or your vehicle for an accident, please do not use the ACC
as necessary.
tows another vehicle. and contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
• When your vehicle is on a chassis MOTORS dealer.
dynamometer or free rollers.
• When the air pressure in the tyres is not When ACC detects no vehicle
correct.
• When installing the spare tyre for emer-
in front within the set distance
E00638100061
gency. Instruments - Type B
• When snow traction device (tyre chains) are Your vehicle runs at a speed to which you set.
attached. It is possible to set the speed between approx-
 Be sure to take the following precautions to imately 40 and 150 km/h.
keep the system in proper operating condi-
tions.
Improper handling of the system components NOTE If the vehicle in front stops, the ACC reacts to
may result in degraded sensor performance.  If the vehicle speed exceed the set speed on it by stopping your vehicle.
down slope, the system automatically applies
the brake to maintain the vehicle speed.

Depress the brake pedal as soon as your vehi- screen. The vehicle is slowly accelerated to
cle comes to a stop. resume the set speed and continues running at
WARNING
• When driving on a curve.
that speed.
NOTE Instruments - Type B

 If you do not depress the brake pedal within  If the vehicle in front turns off or changes 6
1.5 seconds after an automatic stop, you are lane and another stationary vehicle is
alerted to automatic cancellation of the ACC located in front of that vehicle, the ACC
by a buzzer and display message and the will not make deceleration control to the
ACC shift into the ‘standby state’. stationary vehicle.
The vehicle will then start creeping as the
brakes are released. WARNING
 If the turn-signal lever is operated while the  Your vehicle may accelerate up to the set Proximity alarm
ACC is active, the system may accelerate the speed in the following situations. Apply E00634701255
vehicle to assist you in passing a vehicle in the brake, if necessary, to slow down.
While the ACC is active, if your vehicle
front, which reduces the distance between • When your vehicle no longer follows the
approaches too closely to a vehicle in front
your vehicle and the vehicle in front. (This vehicle in front, e.g. at a freeway exit or
function is activated even if the Blind Spot when your vehicle or the vehicle in front because the ACC cannot allow for an ade-
Warning alerts you that another vehicle is changes its lane. quate deceleration in such cases as rapid
running close to your vehicle.) deceleration of the vehicle in front or appari-
tion of a vehicle cutting in front of your vehi-
cle, the ACC gives a warning by sounding a
CAUTION buzzer and displaying a message.
 Never leave the vehicle during stopping by If this happens, increase the following dis-
automatic braking. tance by depressing the brake pedal or mak-
ing other decelerating control.
When the ACC no longer detects any vehicle

in front, a buzzer sounds and the symbol of
vehicle running ahead disappears from the

CAUTION CAUTION
 The ACC may not be able to maintain the set • When driving in curved sections of road
speed or the distance to a vehicle in front and including their entrance/outlet or running
may not alert the driver, if the system cannot beside a closed lane in a traffic work or
detect the front vehicle properly in the fol- similar zone.
lowing situations, even if Blind Spot Warn- • When the emblem and the sensor become
CAUTION ing or Sensor system is alerting you. dirty or adhering snow and ice*.
 When the ACC is not in use, turn off the sys- In these cases, the system may accelerate or • When water, snow or sand on the road are
tem to prevent it from operating by mistake decelerate the vehicle unintentionally. Be thrown up by the vehicle in front or an
6 and an unexpected accident. sure to confirm safety such as by depressing
the brake pedal if necessary.
oncoming vehicle*.
 Never operate the ACC from outside the • When driving on a road surrounded by a
vehicle. • When a vehicle enters in front of your vehi- tall wall etc.*
 Neither control nor a warning are performed cle very closely. • When being driven in a tunnel*.
by the following situation. • When a vehicle in front is offset to the left • Under adverse weather conditions (rain,
• Something other than vehicle such as a or right. snow, sand storms, etc.)*
pedestrian. • When a vehicle in front is towing a trailer. • An extremely strong electromagnetic wave
• A vehicle that is stationary or moving at a • The vehicle in front is moving at a speed is received from a source such as an illegal
very slow speed. much lower than your vehicle. radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar sta-
• When there is abnormality in the system • A motorcycle or a bicycle. tion*.
(When the ACC detected abnormality, • A freight trailer that is not carrying a con- *: After the ACC control has been cancelled
“ACC SERVICE REQUIRED” is indi- tainer. automatically due to detection of a state of
cated.) • The vehicle has a protruding load from the decline in performance, the ACC will not
• When the system is temporarily not availa- carrier. operate in the temporary condition and will
ble, “ACC TEMPORARILY NOT AVAIL- • The vehicle has a low vehicle height. inform the driver by buzzer and indication.
ABLE” appears. • The vehicle has an extremely high ground When the ACC is in the state in which it can
• When the sensor is not clean, “ACC/FCM clearance. operate, indication is cancelled.
RADAR BLOCKED” appears. • When there is repeated steep uphill and Should indications not cancel there is a pos-
downhill driving. sible abnormality in the system.
Please contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
• When driving on an irregular or uneven
road surface. MOTORS dealer.
• When you are carrying extremely heavy
loads in the rear seats or luggage area*.
• After the engine starting for a while.

3- “RES +” switch
Cruise control switch Used to make ACC operate at the origi-
E00634801142
nally set speed and also to increase the
Type 1 set speed.
4- “CANCEL” switch
Used to cancel the control function of
ACC or the cruise control.
5- ACC distance switch
Used to change the setting of the fol-
lowing distance between your vehicle 6
and a vehicle in front.
1-ACC indicator:
NOTE Indicates that the ACC is ON.
 Operate the individual switches correctly and 2-Control state indicator:
Type 2 one after another. Indicates that the ACC is active.
The ACC may be turned off or its control 3-Set speed:
function may be cancelled if two or more Indicates the target speed.
switches are pressed concurrently.
NOTE
Driving aid display  For vehicles equipped with Instruments -
E00634901130 Type B, when the target speed is set, marker
is displayed on the speedometer.
1- “ACC ON/OFF” switch

Used to turn on and off ACC or the
cruise control function.
2- “SET -” switch
Used to set a desired speed and to
reduce the set speed.

4-Vehicles in front symbol:
Comes on when the radar detects a vehicle ahead. Two types of indication; “Stand by” and “Active”
State
Display Stand by Active
Instruments - Type A Instruments - Type B Instruments - Type A Instruments - Type B
6 Vehicle in front detected
5-Following distance setting symbol:

Indicates the set following distance. Two types of indication; “Stand by” and “Active”
State
Following distance set-
Stand by Active
ting symbol
Instruments - Type A Instruments - Type B Instruments - Type A Instruments - Type B
Long
Middle
Short

The display on the information screen of the the ACC initiates the speed control to the set
How to use ACC instrument cluster will switch to show infor- speed.
E00635001561
mation on the ACC.
When the ACC is activated, it is placed in the
To start up (place in ‘standby Type 1
‘standby state’ at which any control function
state’) the system is not started.
With the operation mode set to “ON”, press Instruments - Type A

“ACC ON/OFF” switch shortly to activate
the ACC.
6
Type 1
Instrument - Type B
Type 2
NOTE
 Even if the ACC is in the activated state
when the operation mode is set to “OFF”, the
system does not automatically become acti-
vated when the operation mode is set to
Type 2 “ON” next time.
To activate ACC control The set speed is indicated on the information

screen of the instrument cluster.
With the ACC turned on (in the ‘standby The ACC can be selected between approxi-
state’), push down the “SET -” switch while mately 40 km/h to 150 km/h.
driving. You can set and initiate the speed control
When your desired speed is reached, release when driving at approximately 10 to 40 km/h
the “SET -” switch; then this speed is set and

while a vehicle in front is being detected. In
this case, the target speed is set to 40 km/h.
NOTE NOTE
• When the vehicle is running at a speed • The Hill Descent Control is operating (if so
Setting the ACC to any speed outside of this
between approximately 10 and 40 km/h and equipped).
range is not possible.
the ACC is not detecting any vehicle in Example: When the drive mode-selector of
When the ACC is initialized, the “SET” indi- front. Super Select 4WD II is in “4HLc” or
cator lights up on the screen. At the same • When the ASTC is in the OFF state. “4LLc”.
time, the display showing the following dis- • When ABS, ASTC, TCL or FCM is work-
tance setting and the running-ahead vehicle ing.
symbol (only when the ACC is detecting a • When the selector lever is in the “P”
6 vehicle in front) is switched to the in-control (PARK), the “R” (REVERSE), the “N”
mode display. (NEUTRAL) position.
• While the brake pedal is being depressed.  The ACC may not be set when shifting the
Instruments - Type A • When the parking brake is engaged. drive mode-selector of Super Select 4WD II.
• When the system determines that its perfor- You are alerted to this state by a sounding
mance has been degraded due to contami- buzzer.
nants adhered to the sensor or interference
by strong electromagnetic wave from a To increase the set speed
Instruments - Type B source such as an illegal radio set, a spark
from a wire, or a radar station.
• When there is any abnormality in the sys- There are two ways to increase the set speed.
tem.
• The engine is not running.
• The elapsed time after the engine start is
NOTE less than 2 seconds.
 The ACC cannot be set when any of the fol- • The drive mode-selector of Super Select
lowing conditions is present. You are alerted 4WD II is in “4HLc” or “4LLc” (if so
to this state by a sounding buzzer. equipped).
• When the vehicle speed is lower than • The rear differential lock is ON.
approximately 10 km/h or 150 km/h or
higher.

By using the “RES +” switch: NOTE Type 1

 There is some time lag between the setting to
The set speed increases by 1 km/h every time a new speed and actually accelerating to that
you push up the “RES +” switch while the speed.
ACC control is working. If you hold the  Speed setting operation is possible even in
switch pushed up, the set speed increases in presence of a vehicle in front. In this case,
5 km/h increments. however, the set speed alone increases with-
out actual acceleration taking place.
Type 1
6
CAUTION
 The setting speed should be set up the suita-
ble speed according to a situation. Type 2
By using the accelerator pedal:
When the accelerator pedal is depressed

while driving with the ACC control working,
you can accelerate the vehicle temporarily
beyond the presently set speed.
Type 2
At the point where the vehicle speed is raised
to your desired speed, push down and release
the “SET -” switch; the new speed is then set
in the system. CAUTION
 The ACC braking control and proximity
alarm functions will not work while the
accelerator pedal is depressed.
NOTE
 The set speed indication on the display turns
to “---” when the accelerator pedal is
depressed.

NOTE By using the “SET -” switch: NOTE

 The ACC control at the original set speed  There is some time lag between the setting to
resumes as soon as you release the accelera- The set speed decreases by 1 km/h every time a new speed and actually decelerating to that
tor pedal. Under certain conditions, however, you push down the “SET -” switch while the speed.
the braking control and alarming functions of ACC control is working. If you hold the  If there is a vehicle in front and your vehicle
the ACC may not work for a short while after switch pushed down, the set speed decreases is following that vehicle at a speed lower
releasing the accelerator pedal. in increments of 5 km/h. than the set speed, the set speed alone
 Set speed adjustment is impossible while the decreases with no actual deceleration taking
accelerator pedal is in a depressed position. place.
Type 1
6
To decrease the set speed
CAUTION
There are two ways to decrease the set speed. ble speed according to a situation.
Type 2

By using the brake pedal: NOTE NOTE

 The ACC control is cancelled if you depress  The set speed indication on the display turns
If you depress the brake pedal while the ACC the brake pedal and the ACC control does to “---” when the accelerator pedal is
control is working, the control is cancelled, not resume even when you release the pedal. depressed.
allowing you to decelerate the vehicle.  In certain conditions, the braking control and
At the point where the vehicle slows down to alarming functions of the ACC may not work
your desired speed, push down the “SET -” To temporarily accelerate the vehi- for a short while after releasing the accelera-
switch; the new speed is then set in the sys- tor pedal.
cle
tem.  Set speed adjustment is impossible while the
Simply depress the accelerator pedal to tem- accelerator pedal is in a depressed position. 6
Type 1 porarily accelerate the vehicle.
To terminate ACC control

E00638200349
To cancel of ACC control
You can cancel the ACC control by using

either of the methods below.
When the control is cancelled, the system is

placed in the ‘standby state’. You can make
Type 2 the system restart the control by using the
“SET -” or “RES +” switch if the conditions
for activating the control are met.
CAUTION
 The ACC braking control and proximity  Press the “CANCEL” switch.
alarm functions will not work while the  Depress the brake pedal.
accelerator pedal is depressed.
ble speed according to a situation.

tance setting and running-ahead vehicle sym-  When ABS, ASTC or TCL is in opera-
Type 1 tion.
bol (only when the ACC is detecting a
vehicle) is placed in the standby state of dis-  When the parking brake is engaged.
play.  When the selector lever is in the “P”
(PARK), the “R” (REVERSE), the “N”
Instruments - Type A (NEUTRAL) position.
 The engine stops while driving.
 The drive mode-selector of Super Select
4WD II is in “4HLc” or “4LLc” (if so
6 Instruments - Type B
equipped).
 The rear differential lock is ON.
 The Hill Descent Control is operating (if
Type 2 so equipped).
 The vehicle speed reaches approximately
160 km/h or higher.
The ACC control is automatically cancelled  The ACC no longer detects the vehicle in
and the ACC is placed in the ‘standby’ state front when your vehicle is close to the
in any of the situations listed below; you are vehicle in front.
alerted to this condition by the sound of a  Interference by strong electromagnetic
buzzer and a message on the display. You can wave from a source such as an illegal
make the system restart the control by using radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar
the “SET -” or “RES +” switch if the condi- station.
tions for resuming the control are reestab-  The FCM is activating. (In this case,
NOTE lished. “ACC CANCELLED” does not appear.)
 You can also cancel the ACC control by
pressing the “ACC ON/OFF” switch. If this
switch is pressed, the ACC is turned off.
WARNING
 Although the set speed driving will be
deactivated when shifting to the “N”
When the system shifts into the ‘standby (NEUTRAL) position, never move the
state’ as a result of cancellation of the ACC  When your vehicle stops as the vehicle in selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL)
control, the “SET” indicator goes out. At the front stops. position while engine braking and could
same time, the display of the following dis-  When the ASTC is turned off. cause a serious accident.

 A front vehicle or an oncoming vehicle is
NOTE splashing water, snow or dirt. Type 1
 The ACC control will also be cancelled
 Driving on a nonbusy road with a few
when shifting the drive mode-selector of
vehicles and obstacles in front.
Super Select 4WD II.
When the ACC system detects an abnormal-

When the ACC system determines that its ity in the system, the ACC system will be
performance has been degraded, a buzzer will turned off, a buzzer will sound and a message
sound and a message will be displayed in the will be displayed in the instrument cluster. If
instrument cluster. the message remains after the operation mode
has been turned to the “OFF” position and
6
then turned back to the “ON” position, con-
tact an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS Type 2
dealer.
For example: The brake system is overheat-
ing due to continuous brake control on long
downhill slope.
If the display keeps showing the message,

there is a possibility that the ACC has a mal- To turn off ACC
function. contact an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer. Press the “ACC ON/OFF” switch when the
ACC is in the ‘ON state’ to turn off the ACC.
NOTE
 Pressing the switch turns off the ACC even if
it is engaged.
 The set speed is cancelled when the ACC is
turned off or the operation mode is set to
 In adverse weather conditions, such as “OFF”.
rain, snow or sand storms, etc.
 Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice,
adhere to the surface of the sensor.

NOTE Type 2 Type 1

 If the ACC is in the ‘ON state’ when the
operation mode is set to “OFF”, the system is
set to the ‘OFF state’ when the operation
mode is set to “ON” next time.
To resume the control

E00638300180
6 After cancelling the ACC control (i.e. placing

the system in the ‘standby state’) by pressing
the “CANCEL” switch or depressing the
brake pedal, you can resume the ACC control NOTE Type 2
at the originally set speed if you push up the  The conditions to be met before the ACC
“RES +” switch. control can be resumed are the same as those
for starting the ACC control.
Type 1
To change the following distance
setting
E00638400149
Every time you press the following distance

setting switch, the setting changes sequen-
tially through three options “Long”, “Middle” NOTE
and “Short”, cycling back to “Long” after  The following distance varies as a function
“Short”. Even after turning off the ACC or of the speed; the faster the set speed, the
setting the operation mode to “OFF”, the sys- longer the following distance.
tem retains your last selected the distance set-
ting in memory.

Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM)*
Display Instrument - Type A
Following Forward Collision Mitiga-
distance set- Instrument - Instrument -
ting Type A Type B
tion System (FCM)*
E00635101474
Long Instrument - Type B The FCM uses a sensor (A) to determine the
distance to a vehicle in front in the same lane
and its speed relative to your vehicle’s speed.
Middle If the system judges that your vehicle is in
danger of colliding against the vehicle almost
straight from behind, it gives you visual and
6
CAUTION audible alarms (Forward collision warning
Short  Cruise control (automatic vehicle speed con-
function), increases the brake fluid pressure
trol system) does not alert by proximity
alarm and control distance between vehicles (FCM brake prefill function), provides the
to the vehicle in front. warnings with automatic short time braking
To activate cruise control (auto- (FCM warning brake) and also provides brak-
matic speed control) ing force assistance when you depress the
E00638500241 brake pedal (FCM brake assist function) to
If you hold the “ACC ON/OFF” switch avoid frontal collision.
pressed with the operation mode set to “ON” When the risk of collision increases more, the
and the ACC in the ‘OFF state’, the cruise system causes the brakes to work moderately
control is activated. The information screen to encourage you to apply brakes. If the sys-
• This telecommunication device is com-
of the instrument cluster then changes to the tem judges that a potential collision is immi-
plied with the NBTC standard and
cruise control screen and a buzzer sounds at nent, it initiates automatic emergency braking
• This telecommunication device has the
the same time. to mitigate collision-caused damages or to
level of Electro Magnetic Radiation in
Cruise control is turned off if you set the avoid possible collision (FCM braking func-
accordance with NBTC standard in terms
operation mode to “OFF”. tion).
of the standard of harmful to human on
 Cruise control (automatic speed control Stop lamps are illuminated during automatic
using this device by distance about
system) P.6-63 braking.
20 cm.

WARNING CAUTION
 The FCM works to avoid frontal collisions  This function does not work for a vehicle in
as much as possible. However, the effect of front which is moving extremely slower than
its operation varies depending on situa- your vehicle.
tions and conditions, such as driving con-  Under certain conditions, the audible alarm
ditions, road conditions, and steering, may not work at all or may be scarcely audi-
acceleration and braking operations, so ble. Do not overly rely on the system; if your
that the performance the function can vehicle is in danger of collision, take all nec-
deliver is not always the same. essary collision-evading actions, such as
6 If your vehicle is in danger of collision,
take all necessary collision-evading
depressing the brake pedal strongly regard-
less of whether the system is activated or not.
actions, such as depressing the brake
WARNING pedal strongly regardless of whether the
system is activated or not.
 A driver is responsible for driving safely. FCM brake prefill function
The FCM is the system to mitigate colli- E00635200016
sion-caused damages or to avoid collisions Forward collision warning If the system judges that there is a risk of
as much as possible.
The system is not intended to compensate function your vehicle colliding with a vehicle in front,
for driver’s loss of attention to the front E00635401275 this function prefills the brake line with addi-
during driving due to distraction or care- If the system judges that there is a risk of tional brake fluid to make the brakes more
lessness or supplement a drop in visibility your vehicle colliding with a vehicle in front, responsive to your brake pedal operation.
due to the rain and fog. this function warns you of the potential haz-
It is never a substitute for your safe and ard with visual and audible alarms.
careful driving. Always be ready to apply When this function is triggered, a buzzer
FCM warning brake function
the brakes manually. E00643300074
sounds and, at the same time, a “BRAKE!”
message appears on the information screen of If the system judges that there is a risk of
the instrument cluster. your vehicle colliding with a vehicle in front,
the automatic braking system may work mod-
erately for a short time to give a warning to
the driver.

FCM brake assist function FCM braking function CAUTION

E00635301030 E00635501843  When applying the brake during the auto-
If the system judges that there is a risk of If the system judges that there is a high risk of matic braking condition the pedal will feel
your vehicle colliding with a vehicle in front, firm. This is not abnormal. You can apply
your vehicle colliding with a vehicle in front,
the system applies the automatic brakes mod- more pressure to the pedal to assist in brak-
and the brake pedal is not sufficiently
erately to encourage you to apply the brakes. ing.
depressed, this function will provide greater
If the system judges that a collision is una-  In the following situations, the system pro-
braking force automatically. vides neither control nor alarming.
voidable, it initiates emergency braking con-
• The vehicle in front of your vehicle is mov-
trol to mitigate collision-caused damages or,
CAUTION if the situation permits, to avoid a collision.
ing at a speed much lower than your vehi- 6
 The brake assist function may not be trig- cle’s speed.
When the emergency braking control is trig-
gered when the brake pedal is operated in • When a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of
gered, you are warned of the hazard with vis- your vehicle.
certain ways.
Do not overly rely on the system; if your
ual and audible alarms like the Forward • When the distance from a vehicle in front is
vehicle is in danger of collision, take all nec- collision warning function. extremely short.
essary collision-evading actions, such as Once the emergency braking has worked, you • To an oncoming vehicle.
depressing the brake pedal strongly regard- are alerted to this by a message on the infor- • When your vehicle’s speed is much lower.
less of whether the system is activated or not. mation screen of the instrument cluster. • When the selector lever is in the “P”
(PARK) or the “R” (REVERSE) position.
CAUTION
 Do not use the FCM as a normal braking.
 After your vehicle has stopped following the
activation of the FCM, automatic braking is
released. As the vehicle will then start creep-
ing, be sure to depress the brake pedal to
hold the vehicle stationary.

CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION

• When the system is faulty (if the system • When the sensor is not clean, “FCM • When the vehicle in front is offset to the
self-detects any fault) the “FCM SERVICE RADAR BLOCKED” or “ACC/FCM left or right.
REQUIRED” message is indicated and the RADAR BLOCKED” appears and the indi- • When the vehicle in front is towing a
cator lights up on the information screen of trailer.
indicator lights up on the information
the instrument cluster. • A freight trailer that is not carrying a con-
screen of the instrument cluster.
Type 1 tainer.
If the message remains after the operation
mode has been turned to the “OFF” position • The vehicle has a protruding load from the
and then turned back to the “ON” position, carrier.
6 contact an authorised MITSUBISHI • The vehicle has a low vehicle height.
MOTORS dealer. • The vehicle has an extremely high ground
clearance.
Type 2 • When there is a different object near the
vehicle.
• When driving on a road with many and suc-
cessive curves, including when passing
• When the system is temporarily not availa- their entrances and outlets.
ble, “FCM TEMPORARILY NOT AVAIL- • When accelerating and decelerating
ABLE” appears and the indicator lights up • Braking function will not work when your quickly.
on the information screen of the instrument vehicle is driving at approximately 30 km/h • When the system recognises driver’s steer-
cluster. or faster while the vehicle in front is sta- ing, accelerating, braking or gear shifting
tionary or moving extremely slowly. actions as evasive actions to avoid colli-
 The forward collision warning function sion.
and/or the FCM braking function may not • When driving on a road with steep and
activate in the following situations. alternating up and down slopes.
• When a motorcycle, bicycle, pedestrian, • When a road surface is surging, and there is
animal, fallen objects, or anything other unevenness.
than a vehicle is present in front of your • When driving on a road surrounded by a
vehicle. tall wall etc.*
• When a vehicle suddenly appear just in • When being driven in a tunnel*.
front of your vehicle. • When the your vehicle changed lanes, and
• When a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle your vehicle approached immediately
very closely. behind the vehicle in front.


• During a certain time after your vehicle  When the FCM will be in the state which can • When passing through a gate with small
turns left or right. operate, indication is released automatically. head or side clearances.
• When you are carrying extremely heavy When indication keeps lighting up, there is • When there are metallic objects, steps or
loads in the rear seats or luggage area*. an abnormal possibility of the system. Please projections on the road surface.
• After the engine has been running for an contact an authorised MITSUBISHI • When quickly approaching a vehicle in
extended period of time. MOTORS dealer. front to overtake it.
• Under adverse weather conditions (rain,  Factors such as the lateral positional rela- • When passing an electronic toll collection
snow, sand storms, etc.)* tionship between your vehicle and a vehicle gate.
• When the emblem on the front bumper and in front, driver’s own technique of steering
the vehicle and irregularly moving traffic
• When running under an overpass, an pedes- 6
the sensor become dirty or adhering snow trian overpass or a tunnel.
and ice*. due to accidents or vehicle trouble may deter
• When running in multi-storey car park.
• When water, snow or sand on the road are the FCM control and alarm from function-
• When running the road the gradient
thrown up by the vehicle in front or an ing.
changes suddenly.
oncoming vehicle*.  When the system recognises driver’s steering
• When stopping very close to a wall or a
• An extremely strong electromagnetic wave or accelerating actions as evasive actions to
vehicle in front.
avoid collision, the FCM control and alarm
is received from a source such as an illegal • When passing close to the vehicle or an
radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar sta- functions may be cancelled.
object.
tion.  Be careful when cleaning the emblem and
*: When judging the state that detection per- the sensor so as not to cause damage.
formance deterioration by these situations  The FCM control and alarm functions may
automatically, “FCM RADAR BLOCKED” be triggered in the following situations.
or “ACC/FCM RADAR BLOCKED” mes- • When there is a structure (B) beside the
entrance of a curve and intersection.
sage is indicated, and a indicator lights
up. Additionally, it may be indicated when B
you are driving in light traffic with few vehi-
cles and obstacles in front.
 When judging the state that the FCM can’t
operate temporarily automatically, “FCM
TEMPORARILY NOT AVAILABLE” mes-
sage is indicated, and a indicator lights
• When running on a narrow iron bridge.
up.

CAUTION CAUTION Forward Collision Mitigation

• When driving on the road that the vehicle in • Avoid application of strong shock loads to System (FCM) and Ultrasonic
front runs in offset position from your vehi- the sensor and never tamper with or remove
cle. the emblem and the sensor mounting misacceleration Mitigation Sys-
screws. tem (UMS) ON/OFF switch
• The emblem and the sensor should be kept E00635601583
clean.
This switch is used to turn on and off the
• Do not cover the sensor mounted area of
FCM and also to select your desired collision
the vehicle or the emblem on the front
alarm timing.
6 bumper with a sticker or anything such as a
When the switch is held pressed, the ON/OFF
grill guard etc.
• The emblem and the sensor should not be state of the FCM changes from ON to OFF
• When the course of the vehicle is over- and vice versa. If you give the switch a short
grown with weeds. modified or painted.
• Avoid using different size tyres from those press with the FCM in the ON state, you can
 Turn off the system beforehand when the
specified and maintain even tyre wear. check the current alarm timing and also
vehicle is placed in any of the following situ-
ations as the system can operate unexpect- • Do not modify the suspension of your vehi- change the collision alarm timing.
edly. cle.
• When your vehicle’s wheels are driven by • Never spray or splash water on the emblem
the engine on a lift. on the front bumper and the sensors.
• When your vehicle is towed or your vehicle  If the sensor mounted area of the vehicle is
tows another vehicle. deformed or is applied strong shock loads
• When your vehicle is carried on a truck. due to an accident or some other causes, turn
off the system and please contact an author-
• When making sports driving on a circuit.
• When your vehicle is on a chassis
dynamometer or free rollers.
• When the tyre pressure is not proper.
• When tyre chains are attached.
NOTE
 A sound will be heard during the activation
 Improperly handling the system components
of automatic braking, this is a function of the
may result in such problems as degraded sen-
brake control and is not abnormal.
sor performance and ultimately in an acci-
dent. Be sure to take the following
precautions to keep the system in good oper-
ating conditions.

OFF” message appears on the screen and the
NOTE “Forward Collision Mitigation System
CAUTION
 When the Forward Collision Mitigation Sys- • The Hill Descent Control is ON (if so
(FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration Miti-
tem (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration equipped).
gation System OFF” indicator comes on.
Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch is • The ASTC is OFF.
held pressed to change the ON/OFF state of Example: When the drive mode-selector of
the FCM, the ON/OFF state of the Ultrasonic Super Select 4WD II is in “4LLc”.
misacceleration Mitigation System is also
changed at the same time.
Even if you switch the FCM from ON to

OFF, when the operation mode becomes ON,
6
To turn on/off the system
the FCM will be set ON.
If you press and hold the Forward Collision To change alarm timing
Mitigation System (FCM) and Ultrasonic NOTE
misacceleration Mitigation System (UMS)  The OFF indicator of the FCM and the OFF
indicator of the Ultrasonic misacceleration Give a short press to the Forward Collision
ON/OFF switch, you can switch the system
Mitigation System are the same indicator. Mitigation System (FCM) and Ultrasonic
from OFF to ON or ON to OFF.
misacceleration Mitigation System (UMS)
Once the system is turned on, the information
ON/OFF switch to change the timing at
screen of the instrument cluster shows the
collision alarm timing currently selected, and CAUTION which the frontal collision alarm is triggered.
 In the following conditions, even if the FCM Every time you press the switch, the alarm
the “Forward Collision Mitigation System
is ON, the FCM is automatically switched to timing changes alternately between “FAR”
(FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration Miti-
OFF. In this case, the warning display may (earlier alarming), “MIDDLE” (normally
gation System (UMS) OFF” indicator on the
appear if you press the Forward Collision alarming) and “NEAR” (later alarming).
screen goes out. Mitigation System (FCM) and Ultrasonic As you make selection, the selected alarm
misacceleration Mitigation System (UMS) timing is displayed on the information screen
ON/OFF switch. of the instrument cluster. Even after turning
• When the drive mode-selector of Super
off the FCM or setting the operation mode to
Select 4WD II is in “4LLc” (if so
“OFF”, the system retains your last selected
equipped).
When you turn off the system, the “Forward alarm timing in memory.
• The rear differential lock is ON (if so
Collision Mitigation System (FCM) and equipped).
Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System

Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System (UMS)*
When “NEAR” is selected When “FAR” is selected
• This telecommunication device is com-

plied with the NBTC standard and
When “MIDDLE” is selected
NOTE • This telecommunication device has the
 When the Forward Collision Mitigation Sys- level of Electro Magnetic Radiation in
6 tem (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration accordance with NBTC standard in terms
Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch is of the standard of harmful to human on
pressed, the information screen of the instru- using this device by distance about
ment cluster shows the collision alarm tim- 20 cm.
ing currently selected at first.

E00643400538
The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System operates to prevent sudden starts and mitigate collision-caused damages by suppressing the
engine output for up to approximately 5 seconds when the system judges that the system is detected the vehicle or obstacles within approximately
4 m in front and behind your vehicle and judges that accelerator pedal was depressed promptly and too strongly such as misoperation of it. This
system operates when the vehicle is at stop or is moving forward or backward at less than approximately 10 km/h.
When the Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System operates, the warning display appears on the information screen of the instrument cluster,
and the buzzer sounds intermittently.
Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System ON/OFF is switched in conjunction with the ON/OFF state of the Forward Collision Mitigation.
(Vehicles equipped with Forward Collision Mitigation System (FCM))

Situation Operation display Buzzer
When an obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle with the Intermittent
selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position or in the sport beeping sound
mode, if the accelerator pedal is depressed promptly and too
strongly, the engine output is suppressed for up to approxi-
mately 5 seconds.
When an obstacle is detected behind your vehicle with the

selector lever in the “R” (REVERSE) position, if the accelera-
tor pedal is depressed promptly and too strongly, the engine
output is suppressed for up to approximately 5 seconds.
WARNING WARNING WARNING

 Do not overly rely on the Ultrasonic mis-  As the Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitiga-  Depending on the situation, the system
acceleration Mitigation System. It is never tion System is not a function to keep the does not operate even if the vehicle or the
a substitute for your safe and careful driv- stop condition of the vehicle, depress the obstacle in front and behind your vehicle
ing. Always be careful to operate the brake pedal according to the environmen- and this may cause the vehicle to start
accelerator pedal perceiving the environ- tal condition. suddenly and lead to a serious accident.
mental conditions. Misoperation can lead
to a serious accident.

WARNING CAUTION CAUTION

 If the vehicle is trapped in the railway • The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation • When the rain, snow, water or dirt adheres
crossing because the system is activated as System is set to OFF by operating the For- to the sensor.
the crossing barrier is misrecognised as an ward Collision Mitigation System (FCM) • When the sensor is extremely hot or cold
obstacle, escape from the railway crossing and Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation (while the vehicle is parked for a long
without any panic by one of the following System (UMS) ON/OFF switch. period of time under a blazing sun or in
methods. • The Forward Collision Mitigation System cold weather).
• Release the foot from the accelerator (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration Mit- • Immediately after engine starting.
pedal and lightly depress the pedal again. igation System (UMS) OFF indicator lights • When driving on a road with many and suc-
6 • Turn the system OFF. (Continuously up. cessive curves, including when passing
press the Forward Collision Mitigation • The selector lever is set to the “P” (PARK) their entrances and outlets.
System (FCM) and Ultrasonic misaccel- or “N” (NEUTRAL) position. • When driving on a road with steep and
eration Mitigation System (UMS)  It sometimes happens that a motorcycle, alternating up and down slopes.
ON/OFF switch for more than 3 sec- bicycle or pedestrian are detected as obsta- • When a road surface is surging, and there is
onds.) cles, but these are not the object of the Ultra- unevenness.
• Continuously depress the accelerator sonic misacceleration Mitigation System • When the system judges driver’s steering or
pedal for more than 5 seconds. operation. gear shifting actions as evasive actions to
• Repeat to press the accelerator pedal  The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation avoid collision.
quickly to its full stroke more than System may not operate in the following • For a short period after the system judges
3 times. conditions. the repeated depression of the accelerator
 Do not perform inspection of the system • The sensors or surroundings have been pedal at a few seconds interval as a release
operation on your own. Depending on the wiped by hand. operation.
situation, this may cause the system to not • The stickers or accessories have been • When the vehicle body is extremely
operate properly and lead to a serious attached to the sensors or surroundings. inclined by carrying heavy loads or
accident. • When there is an extremely change in the improper adjustment of the tyre pressure.
outside temperature. • When the driving is unstable due to an acci-
• Under adverse weather conditions (rain, dent or trouble.
CAUTION strong winds, snow, sand storms, etc.) • The system receives ultrasonic noise from
 The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation • When approaching an obstacle too closely. other sources (the horns of other vehicles,
System does not operate in the following • When a vehicle cuts in front or behind your motorcycle engines, brakes, radios, pouring
conditions: vehicle very closely. rain, splashing water, snow traction device
• The operation mode is other than ON. • When only a part of the obstacle is within (tyre chains), etc.).
the detection areas of the sensor.


• When the obstacle is not horizontal to the • When leaving from a parallel parking. • When the tyre pressure is not proper.
ground or not perpendicular to the vehicle • When there is a ultrasonic near your vehicle • When tyre chains are attached.
traveling direction. by horn of other vehicle, engine sound of a  Improperly handling the system components
 The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation motorcycle, air brake noise of a large vehi- may result in such problems as degraded sen-
System operation can be cancelled when the cle, a vehicle detector and sonar of a vehi- sor performance and ultimately in an acci-
system judges the handle operation as eva- cle etc.. dent.
sive actions or when the obstacle moves out • When an electrical equipment on the mar- Be sure to take the following precautions to
of the detectable area of the sensor. ket (radio antenna etc.) is installed near the keep the system in good operating condi-
 The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation sensor. tions. 6
System may be triggerd operate in the fol- • When driving on a gravel road. • Avoid application of strong shock loads to
lowing situations.  Turn off the system by pressing the Forward the sensor.
• When the surrounding vehicle or oncoming Collision Mitigation System (FCM) and • The sensor should be kept clean.
vehicle drives blowing up the water, snow Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation Sys- • Do not cover the sensor with a sticker or
or sand on the road. tem (UMS) ON/OFF switch beforehand anything.
• When the rain, snow, water or dirt adheres when the vehicle is placed in any of the fol- • Do not modify the suspension of your vehi-
to the sensor. lowing situations as the system can operate cle.
• When there are objects, steps or projections unexpectedly.  If the bumper has been exposed to an impact,
on the road surface. • When using an automatic car wash. the sensors may fail and prevent the system
• When the parking gate or railway barrier is • When returning the fallen wheel in a ditch from functioning properly. Have the vehicle
raised imperfectly. or escaping from mud. inspected at an authorised MITSUBISHI
• When running the road, the gradient • When using a vehicle elevator or a multi- MOTORS dealer.
changes suddenly. storey car park.
• When passing through the mass of the • Do not modify the suspension of your vehi-
steam, fog. cle.
Obstacle detection areas
E00643500021
• When driving in close to the vehicle ahead, • When your vehicle’s wheels are driven by
and when stopping in close to the for- the engine on a lift. The detection areas of the front and rear sen-
ward/backward vehicle or a wall. • When your vehicle is towed or your vehicle sors are limited. Moreover, the sensors are
• When there is an obstacle in a curb or an tows another vehicle. unable to detect low or thin objects or objects
intersection. • When your vehicle is carried on a truck. near the rear bumper. Make sure to check the
• When passing through a vinyl curtain etc. • When enjoying sports driving on a circuit. surroundings as you operate the vehicle in a
• When the surrounding area is overgrown • When your vehicle is on a chassis safe manner.
with weeds. dynamometer or free rollers.

Sensor locations CAUTION NOTE

E00643600282 • When there is a loud noise or a ultrasonic  The sensors do not detect objects located in
There are the sensors (A) on each of 4 places near your vehicle by horn of other vehicle, the area directly below or near the bumper. If
of the front bumper and the rear bumper. engine sound of a motorcycle, air brake the height of an object is lower than the
noise of a large vehicle, a vehicle detector mounted position of the sensors, the sensors
and sonar of a vehicle etc.. may not continue detecting it even if they
• When an electrical equipment on the mar- detected it initially.
ket (radio antenna etc.) is installed near the
sensor.
6 • The vehicle is the specific shape such as the To turn on/off the Ultrasonic
carrier car.
• Obstacles that have irregular surface.
misacceleration Mitigation Sys-
• Obstacles that have the shape of the pole tem
such as the road marker or the streetlight. E00643800024
• Obstacles that exists in the high position The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation
from the ground. System is automatically turned ON by setting
• Obstacles that are soft and absorb ultra- the operation mode to ON. In addition, the
sonic easily, such as spongy material or
CAUTION snow.
Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation System
 The Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation ON/OFF is switched in conjunction with the
• Obstacles that are shaped with a sharp
System may not operate because the sensor angle.
ON/OFF state of the FCM.
cannot detect the vehicle or obstacle as fol-
• A wall surface is not flat
Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation Sys-
lows. tem (FCM) and Ultrasonic misacceleration
• When there is a obstacle that is not recog-
• Vehicle towing a trailer etc. Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF switch”
nized between your vehicle and the obsta-
• A freight trailer that is not carrying a con- cle that can be recognized. on page 6-88.
tainer.
• Vehicle that has a protruding load from the
carrier.
• Obstacles that have low positions.
• Vehicle that is extremely stained.
• Vehicle or obstacle that is covered with
snow.
• A large mesh screen fence.
• Moving object

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist)*
In the following conditions, even if the Ultra-
Warning display sonic misacceleration Mitigation System is
E00643900067
ON, the Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitiga-
tion System is automatically switched to
When the sensor is temporarily OFF. In addition, when the Ultrasonic misac-
not available celeration Mitigation System is OFF, the
When the warning display appears, the Ultra-
E00647600020 Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation Sys-
sonic misacceleration Mitigation System does
Example: When the front and/or rear sensors tem is not switched to ON even if the For-
not operate normally because there are some
are temporarily not available ward Collision Mitigation System (FCM) and
malfunctions in the system or the sensor.
Have the vehicle inspected at an authorised
Ultrasonic misacceleration Mitigation Sys- 6
tem (UMS) ON/OFF switch is pressed.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as soon as
• The drive mode-selector of Super Select
possible.
4WD II is in “4LLc” (if so equipped).
• The rear differential lock switch is set to ON
When the Ultrasonic misaccelera- (if so equipped).
When the warning display appears, the sen- tion Mitigation System is not avail- • The Hill Descent Control is operating (if so
sors are temporarily not available for some equipped).
reason such as the environmental condition or
able
E00644200126 • The ASTC is set to OFF by operating the
increase of the sensor temperature. When the ACS OFF switch.
warning display does not disappear after Example: When trying to set the Ultrasonic
waiting for a while, contact an authorised misacceleration Mitigation System to ON by
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. pressing the Forward Collision Mitigation
System (FCM) and Ultrasonic misaccelera- Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
tion Mitigation System (UMS) ON/OFF
When there is a malfunction in the switch with the rear differential lock ON.
(with Lane Change Assist)*
system or the sensor E00644300361
E00644000137
The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) is a driving
Example: When there is a malfunction in aid system that alerts the driver when another
both sensors vehicle which may not be visible through the
outside rear-view mirror is travelling in the
next lane behind your vehicle.
When a vehicle in the next lane is travelling
at same speed or faster in the detection areas,
the Blind Spot Warning lamp in the corre-
sponding outside rear-view mirror will illu- Instrument - Type B Detection areas
E00644400492
minate. If the turn-signal lever is operated to
The BSW uses two sensors (A) located inside
the side where the Blind Spot Warning lamp
the rear bumper.
is illuminated and the Blind Spot Warning
The detection areas are shown as illustrated.
display in the instrument cluster is appeared,
the Blind Spot Warning lamp will blink and
the system will beep three times to alert the
driver.
6 Depending on the relative speed between
your vehicle and a vehicle in the next lane,
the BSW system will detect up to approxi-
mately 70 m from your vehicle. (Lane WARNING
Change Assist)  Before using the BSW, read this entire sec-
tion to fully understand the limitations of
this system. Failure to follow instructions
Outside rear-view mirror could result in an accident.
 Never rely solely on the BSW system when
changing lanes. BSW is an aid only. It is
not a substitute for your safe and careful
driving. Always check visually behind and
all around your vehicle for other vehicles.
The performance of the BSW may vary
depending on driving, traffic and/or road
conditions.

WARNING WARNING
• When the heights of the next lane and • When the sensor is extremely hot or cold
your lane are different. (while the vehicle is parked for a long
• Immediately after the BSW has been period of time under a blazing sun or in
turned on. cold weather).
• Immediately after the engine switch is • When a bicycle carrier or accessory is
turned on. installed to the rear of the vehicle.
• Under adverse weather conditions, such
as rain, snow, strong winds or sand
storms. CAUTION 6
• When your vehicle becomes too close to  To maintain proper performance of the BSW,
another vehicle. follow the instructions below.
• While multiple vehicle are overtaking • Always keep the bumper surface around the
your vehicle. sensor clean.
• When driving near a pot hole and tram- • Avoid impacting the sensor or its surround-
line. ing area.
• When a surrounding vehicle or an • Do not put a sticker on the sensor or its sur-
oncoming vehicle is splashing water, rounding bumper surface.
snow or dirt. • Do not paint the sensor or its surrounding
• When driving on a curve including the bumper surface.
beginning and the end of the curve. • Do not modify the sensor or its surrounding
• When driving on a road with alternating area.
up and down steep slopes.  If the bumper has experienced an impact, the
WARNING • When driving on a bumpy or rough road. sensor may have been damaged and the BSW
 In certain situations, the BSW may not • When the rear of your vehicle is weighed may not function properly. Have the vehicle
detect a vehicle in the detection areas or down or your vehicle is leaning to the inspected at an authorised MITSUBISHI
the detection may be delayed. Some of right or left due to the weight of passen- MOTORS dealer.
these include; gers and luggage or the improper adjust-
• When a small motorcycle or a bicycle is ment of tyre pressure.
behind your vehicle. • When the bumper surface around the
• When a vehicle is travelling alongside of sensor is covered with dirt, snow and ice,
your vehicle at nearly the same speed for etc.
prolonged periods of time.

Indicator lamp appeared, the Blind Spot Warning lamp will
To operate blink and the system will beep three times to
E00652300432
alert the driver.
When the operation mode is put in ON and
“ON” is selected in the setting Outside rear-view mirror
screen, the BSW indicator lamp in the instru- If you turn the BSW ON/OFF, the Rear Cross
ment cluster comes on and the BSW enters Traffic Alert (RCTA) also turns ON/OFF at
the standby state. the same time.
When “OFF” is selected in the set-
6 ting screen, the BSW indicator lamp in the NOTE
instrument cluster goes off and the BSW  When the operation mode is set to OFF, the
turns off. selected condition just before setting to OFF
To turn the BSW ON/OFF, follow the proce- is retained.
dure below.  The BSW operates when all of the following
conditions are met.
1. Operate the 8 inch colour LCD meter • The operation mode is put in ON.
Instrument - Type B
switches to switch the information screen • The selector lever is in positions other than
to the menu screen. “P” (PARK) and “R” (REVERSE).
Refer to “8 inch colour LCD meter • The speed of your vehicle is approximately
switches” on page 5-21. 10 km/h or higher.
Refer to “Function setting display” on
page 5-38.
2. Operate the 8 inch colour LCD meter When the sensor detects an
switches to select . approaching vehicle
Then, press the Enter switch.
When the BSW indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster is on, if a vehicle is approaching
switches to select . your vehicle in the detection area, the Blind NOTE
Then, press the Enter switch. Spot Warning lamp in the outside rear-view  The Blind Spot Warning lamp in the outside
4. Operate the 8 inch colour LCD meter mirror illuminates. rear-view mirror and the Blind Spot Warning
switches to select “ON” or “OFF”, and If the turn-signal lever is operated to the side display in the instrument cluster may come
then press the Enter switch to confirm the where the Blind Spot Warning lamp is illumi- on or blink in the following conditions.
setting. nated and the Blind Spot Warning display is
NOTE When there is a malfunction in the When the sensor is temporarily

• When driving very near the guardrail or the system or the sensor not available
concrete wall. E00692600091 E00692700092
• When driving on the entrance and outlet of

the tunnel or very near the wall or near the
evacuation area inside the tunnel.
• When turning at an intersection in a town
area.
• Under adverse weather conditions (rain, When the warning display appears, the BSW When the warning display appears, the sensor
snow, sand storms etc.). does not operate normally because there are is temporarily not available for some reason 6
• When your vehicle drives with blowing up some malfunctions in the system or the sen- such as the environmental condition or
the water, snow or sand etc. on the road. sor. Have the vehicle inspected at an author- increase of the sensor temperature. When the
• When driving near a curb, pot hole and ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as soon warning display does not disappear after
tramline.
as possible. waiting for a while, contact an authorised
 Set the BSW to OFF when towing.
 The Blind Spot Warning lamp in the outside
rear-view mirror may not be visible due to NOTE
strong direct sunlight or the glare from the  When the warning display appears, the BSW
headlamps of vehicles behind you during will be deactivated.
night driving.
System problem warning

E00692500029
If a problem occurs with the system, a visual

warning specific to the type of the problem is
given together with an audible alarm.
The warnings are combined with the Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)*
sound to alert the driver. A warning message
When there is a foreign object on WARNING
will also appear on the information screen of
the sensor the instrument cluster.  Never rely solely on the RCTA when back-
E00692800152 ing up. The RCTA is an aid system. It is
not a substitute for your safe and careful
driving. Always check visually behind and
all around your vehicle for other vehicles,
persons, animals or obstructions.
The performance of the RCTA may vary
depending on driving, traffic and/or sur-
When the warning display appears, the sensor
6 cannot detect a vehicle travelling side by side
rounding conditions.
or an approaching vehicle, because foreign

objects, such as dirt, snow or ice, adhere to NOTE
the bumper surface around the sensor.
 The Blind Spot Warning lamps in the outside
Remove a dirt, freezing or foreign material on rear-view mirrors on both sides will blink
the bumper surface around the sensor. and the Blind Spot Warning displays in the
When the warning display does not disappear instrument cluster will appear, even when
after having cleaned the sensor, contact an only one vehicle is approaching from one
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. side.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert

(RCTA)*
E00652400358
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) is an

aid system for backing up. When the RCTA
system detects vehicles approaching from WARNING
sides while your vehicle is reversing, the  Before using the RCTA, read this entire
Blind Spot Warning lamps in outside rear- section to fully understand the limitations
view mirrors on both sides will blink and the of this system. Failure to follow instruc-
Blind Spot Warning displays in the instru- tions could result in an accident.
ment cluster will appear and a buzzer will

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)*
Detection areas CAUTION To operate

• When an approaching vehicle speed is
The detection area is shown as illustrated. approximately 7 km/h or less. 1. Press the BSW switch while the operation
• If the sensor detection area is blocked by a mode is put in ON.
nearby object, such as wall or parked vehi- (Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): To
cle. operate” on page 6-98.)
• When a vehicle is approaching from 2. When the selector lever is moved to the
straight behind your vehicle. “R” (REVERSE) position, the RCTA will
• When your vehicle is exiting from an operate.
angled parking spot. 6
NOTE
 Set the RCTA to OFF when towing.
 The Blind Spot Warning lamp in the outside
rear-view mirror may not be visible due to
strong direct sunlight or the glare from the
headlamps of vehicles behind you during
night driving.
• Immediately after the RCTA has been

turned on.
• Immediately after the operation mode has
When a problem is detected in
been put in ON. the system
• When the bumper surface around the sensor
is covered with dirt, snow and ice, etc. If the system detects a problem, a warning is
• When the sensor becomes extremely hot or displayed on the information screen in the
cold, such as after the vehicle has been instrument cluster.
parked for a prolonged time under the blaz-
Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): Sys-
CAUTION ing sun or in cold weather.
tem problem warning” on page 6-99.
 In certain situations, the RCTA may not  If the bumper has experienced an impact, the
detect a vehicle in the detection areas. Some sensor may have been damaged and the
of these situations include; RCTA may not function properly. Have the
• When the reversing speed of your vehicle is vehicle inspected at an authorised
approximately 18 km/h or higher. MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.

Reversing sensor system*
to detect low or thin objects or objects near
Reversing sensor system* the rear bumper. Thus, make sure to check the
Vehicles without a towbar
E00615501599 surroundings as you operate the vehicle in a The detection areas are within approximately
safe manner. 60 cm (A) from the corner sensors, 125 cm
This system operates when you are backing
the vehicle. It uses corner and back sensors to (B) from the back sensors.
detect an obstacle and the information screen Corner and back sensor locations
in the instrument cluster and the buzzer to
inform you of the approximate distance to the There are four sensors (A) in the rear bumper.
obstacle.
6
CAUTION
 The reversing sensor system assists you in
determining the approximate distance
between the vehicle and an obstacle located
behind the vehicle. It has limitations in terms
of detectable areas and objects, and may not
properly detect some objects. Therefore, do
not place excessive confidence in the revers-
ing sensor system, and operate the vehicle as Vehicles with a towbar
carefully as you would a vehicle without this
system.
The detection areas are within approximately
 Make sure to check the surroundings with
60 cm (A) from the corner sensors, 125 cm
your own eyes to ensure safety. Do not oper- Reversing sensor system detection (B) from the back sensors. The non-detection
ate the vehicle by relying on the reversing areas (C) are within approximately 20 cm (D)
areas
sensor system alone. from the bumper.
Depending on whether the vehicle is

equipped with a towbar, you can change the
Obstacle detection areas reversing sensor system between the standard
E00615602034
mode and the towbar mode. The towbar mode
The detection areas of the corner and back changes the system to exclude the area in
sensors are limited to those shown in the which the towbar is mounted from the detec-
illustration. Moreover, the sensors are unable tion areas.

CAUTION NOTE
• When there is an extremely change in the  The buzzer may sound lower than the normal
outside temperature. warning sound when the reversing sensor
• The sensors are frozen. system is receiving ultrasonic noise from
• The system receives ultrasonic noise from other sources, but this is not a malfunction.
other sources (the horns of other vehicles, The buzzer will stop sounding and the sys-
motorcycle engines, brakes, radios, pouring tem will return to normal operation after the
rain, splashing water, snow traction device noise is no longer received.
(tyre chains), etc.).
• The sensors are extremely hot or cold 6
(while the vehicle is parked for a long To operate
period of time under a blazing sun or in
NOTE cold weather).
E00615702279
 The sensors do not detect objects located in • The vehicle tilts significantly.
To operate the system, the operation mode is
the area directly below or near the bumper. If • The vehicle is driven on a rough road (with
put in ON. When the reversing sensor system
the height of an object is lower than the a bumpy, gravel, hilly, or grassy surface). is operated, the reversing sensor system oper-
mounted position of the corner or back sen- • The vehicle is too close to an obstacle. ation indicator lamp (A) will turn on. To stop
sors, the sensors may not continue detecting • Immediately after engine starting. the operation, press the “SONAR” switch; the
it even if they detected it initially. reversing sensor system operation indicator
 The reversing sensor system may not prop-
erly detect the following: lamp (A) is turned off.
For information on how to change the detec- • Objects that are thin, such as wire nets or
tion areas, please refer to “Changing the ropes.
detection areas” on page 6-104. • Objects that absorb sound waves, such as
snow.
• Objects that are shaped with a sharp angle.
CAUTION
• Objects with a smooth surface, such as
 The reversing sensor system may not operate
glass.
properly under the following conditions:
• Objects that are low, such as kerbstones.
• The sensors or surroundings have been
 If the rear bumper has been exposed to an
wiped by hand.
impact, the corner or back sensors may fail
• The stickers or accessories have been
and prevent the system from functioning
attached to the sensors or surroundings.
properly. Have the vehicle inspected at an
• The sensors or surroundings are covered authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
with ice, snow, or mud.

Corner sensor Vehicle to obstacle Warning dis-
Warning for obstacles
Vehicle to obstacle Warning dis- distance play/sound cycle
distance play/sound cycle Within approxi-
If there is an obstacle behind the vehicle, a
Continuous
warning will be issued with the information Approximately 60 to mately 60 cm
Intermittent
screen in the instrument cluster and a warning 40 cm
buzzer. Approximately 40 to
Fast intermittent CAUTION
30 cm  The distances given are to be used for refer-
Instruments - Type A Within approxi- ence only, as errors may be caused by vari-
Continuous
6 mately 30 cm ous factors, such as temperature, humidity,
or the shape of the obstacles.
Back sensor (vehicles without a towbar)

Vehicle to obstacle Warning dis- NOTE
distance play/sound cycle  When the sensors are detecting different
Approximately 125 obstacles at the same time, the information
Intermittent screen in the instrument cluster indicates the
to 80 cm
directions of the obstacles each sensors are
Approximately 80 to detecting. However, closer obstacles are
Fast intermittent
40 cm given priority over other detected obstacles
Instruments - Type B and the warning buzzer sounds to inform you
Within approxi-
Continuous of closer obstacles.
mately 40 cm
 The volume of the warning buzzer can be
adjusted.
Back sensor (vehicles with a towbar) For details, consult an authorised
Vehicle to obstacle Warning dis- MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
distance play/sound cycle
Approximately 125
Intermittent Changing the detection areas
to 100 cm
E00615801299
Approximately 100
1- Corner sensor (left) Fast intermittent The detection areas can be changed as fol-
to 60 cm
2- Back sensor lows:
3- Corner sensor (right)

Sensor system*
Even after the buzzer and display has stopped
Vehicles with a towbar NOTE warning, the indicator lamp (A) on
• Setting when towbar is equipped
While the operation of the system is stopped “SONAR” switch will continue blinking until
When reversing sensor system operation
at the “SONAR” switch, press the “SONAR” the system reverts to the normal state. Have
was stopped by pressing the “SONAR”
switch approximately 3 seconds or more, and switch, the reversing sensor system will not the vehicle inspected at an authorised
release it. The buzzer sounds twice to indicate operate until the engine has been stopped MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
that the detection area has been changed. even if the selector lever is moved to the
“R” (REVERSE) position.
To resume reversing sensor system opera-
tion, press the “SONAR” switch or stop and
restart the engine, and then move the selec-
6
While the operation of the system is stopped
tor lever to the “R” (REVERSE) position.
at the “SONAR” switch, press the “SONAR”
switch approximately 3 seconds or more, and
release it. The buzzer sounds once to indicate Reversing sensor system warn-
that the detection area has been changed. ing display
E00615901681
NOTE In case there is a malfunction in the reversing

 The mode of the detection area can be sensor system, the display for the malfunc-
switched only when the selector lever is in tioning sensor will blink and the warning
the “R” (REVERSE) position. buzzer will sound for approximately 5 sec- Sensor system*
 The detection area will not change if you onds. E00647700164
keep the “SONAR” switch pressed for
10 seconds or more. When parking in a garage or during parallel
Example: Rear corner sensor (left) malfunctioning
 After pressing the “SONAR” switch, revers- parking, these sensors alert the driver to any
(Instruments - Type A)
ing sensor system operation differs accord- objects near the vehicle and their distance,
ing to the detection area setting. through a buzzer, and the sensor display on
• Setting when towbar is not equipped the information screen the instrument cluster.
When the selector lever is moved to the “R”
And also, if your vehicle equipped with the
(REVERSE) position, the reversing sensor
Multi Around Monitor, a warning will be
system will operate even if corner sensor
operation was stopped by pressing the issued with the Smartphone-link Display
“SONAR” switch. Audio (SDA) or the Smartphone-link Display
AHA116899
Audio (SDA) navigation system.

Sensor system*
CAUTION
 The sensor system assists you in determining
the approximate distance between the vehi-
cle and any objects. It has limitations in
terms of detectable areas and objects, and
may not properly detect some objects. There-
fore, do not place excessive confidence in
the sensor system, and operate the vehicle as
carefully as you would a vehicle without this
6 system.
 Make sure to check the surroundings with
your own eyes to ensure safety. Do not oper-
ate the vehicle by relying on the sensor sys- Vehicles with a towbar
tem alone. Detection areas
The detection areas are within approximately
Depending on whether the vehicle is 60 cm (A) from the front and corner sensors
Obstacle detection areas equipped with a towbar, you can change the and 125 cm (B) from the back sensors. The
E00647800514 sensor system between the standard mode and non-detection areas (C) are within approxi-
The detection areas of the corner and back the towbar mode. The towbar mode changes mately 20 cm (D) from the bumper.
sensors are limited to those shown in the the system to exclude the area in which the
illustration. Moreover, the sensors are unable towbar is mounted from the detection areas.
to detect low or thin objects or objects near
the front or rear bumper. Thus, make sure to
check the surroundings as you operate the The detection areas are within approximately
vehicle in a safe manner. 60 cm (A) from the front and corner sensors
and 125 cm (B) from the back sensors.
Front, corner and back sensor
locations
There are 8 sensors (A) in the front and rear

bumper.

Sensor system*
NOTE CAUTION To operate

 The sensors do not detect objects located in • The vehicle tilts significantly. E00648100282
the area directly below or near the bumper. If • The vehicle is driven on a rough road (with To operate the system, the operation mode is
the height of an object is lower than the a bumpy, gravel, hilly, or grassy surface). put in ON. When the sensor system is oper-
mounted position of the sensors, the sensors • The vehicle is too close to an obstacle. ated, the sensor system operation indicator
may not continue detecting it even if they • Immediately after engine starting.
detected it initially. lamp (A) will turn on. To stop the operation,
 The sensor system may not properly detect press the “SONAR” switch; the sensor sys-
the following:
tem operation indicator lamp (A) is turned
For information on how to change the detec- • Objects that are thin, such as wire nets or
off.
tion areas, please refer to “Changing the ropes. 6
detection areas” on page 6-109. • Objects that absorb sound waves, such as
snow.
• Objects that are shaped with a sharp angle.
CAUTION • Objects with a smooth surface, such as
 The sensor system may not operate properly glass.
under the following conditions:
• Objects that are low, such as kerbstones.
• The sensors or surroundings have been
 If the bumper has been exposed to an impact,
wiped by hand.
the sensors may fail and prevent the system
• The stickers or accessories have been from functioning properly. Have the vehicle
attached to the sensors or surroundings. inspected at an authorised MITSUBISHI
• The sensors or surroundings are covered MOTORS dealer.
with ice, snow, or mud.
• When there is an extremely change in the
outside temperature. NOTE
• The sensors are frozen. Warning for obstacles
 The buzzer may sound lower than the normal
• The system receives ultrasonic noise from warning sound when the sensor system is
other sources (the horns of other vehicles, receiving ultrasonic noise from other If there is an obstacle in the vicinity of the
motorcycle engines, brakes, radios, pouring sources, but this is not a malfunction. The vehicle, a warning will be issued with the
rain, splashing water, snow traction device buzzer will stop sounding and the system information screen in the instrument cluster
(tyre chains), etc.). will return to normal operation after the and a warning buzzer. And also, if your vehi-
• The sensors are extremely hot or cold noise is no longer received. cle equipped with the Mult Arround Monitor,
(while the vehicle is parked for a long
a warning will be issued with the screen of
period of time under a blazing sun or in
cold weather). the SDA or the SDA navigation system.

Sensor system*
the SDA and the SDA navigation system Front and corner sensor
Vehicle to obstacle Warning dis-
Bird’s eye-view distance play/sound cycle
Approximately 60 to
Intermittent
40 cm
Approximately 40 to
Fast intermittent
30 cm
Within approxi-
Continuous
6 mately 30 cm
Instruments - Type B Back sensor (vehicles without a towbar)

Side-view Vehicle to obstacle Warning dis-
distance play/sound cycle
Approximately 125
Intermittent
to 80 cm
Approximately 80 to
Fast intermittent
40 cm
Within approxi-
Continuous
mately 40 cm
1- Corner sensors Back sensor (vehicles with a towbar)

2- Front sensors Vehicle to obstacle Warning dis-
3- Back sensors distance play/sound cycle
Approximately 125
Intermittent
to 100 cm
Approximately 100
Fast intermittent
to 60 cm

Sensor system*
Vehicle to obstacle Warning dis- Changing the detection areas NOTE
distance play/sound cycle E00648200023 • Setting when towbar is not equipped
Within approxi- The detection areas can be changed as fol- When the selector lever is moved to the “R”
Continuous (REVERSE) position, the sensor system
mately 60 cm lows:
will operate even if corner sensor operation
Vehicles with a towbar was stopped by pressing the “SONAR”
CAUTION switch.
 The distances given are to be used for refer- While the operation of the system is stopped • Setting when towbar is equipped
ence only, as errors may be caused by vari- at the “SONAR” switch, press the “SONAR” When sensor system operation was stopped
ous factors, such as temperature, humidity,
or the shape of the obstacles.
switch approximately 3 seconds or more, and by pressing the “SONAR” switch, the sen-
sor system will not operate until the engine
6
release it. The buzzer sounds twice to indicate
has been stopped even if the selector lever
that the detection area has been changed.
is moved to the “R” (REVERSE) position.
NOTE To resume sensor system operation, press
Vehicles without a towbar the “SONAR” switch or stop and restart the
 When the sensors are detecting different
engine, and then move the selector lever to
obstacles at the same time, the information While the operation of the system is stopped the “R” (REVERSE) position.
screen in the instrument cluster indicates the
at the “SONAR” switch, press the “SONAR”
directions of the obstacles each sensors are
switch approximately 3 seconds or more, and
detecting. However, closer obstacles are
release it. The buzzer sounds once to indicate
Warning display
given priority over other detected obstacles E00648300297
and the warning buzzer sounds to inform you that the detection area has been changed.
of closer obstacles. In case there is a malfunction in the sensor
system, the display for the malfunctioning
 The volume of the warning buzzer can be NOTE sensor will blink and the warning buzzer will
adjusted.
 The mode of the detection area can be
For details, consult an authorised sound for approximately 5 seconds.
switched only when the selector lever is in
the “R” (REVERSE) position.
 For vehicles equipped with the Multi Around
 The detection area will not change if you
Monitor, you can change the setting to hide
keep the “SONAR” switch pressed for
the warning displayed on the side-view and
10 seconds or more.
bird's eye-view screens.
 After pressing the “SONAR” switch, sensor
For details, consult an authorised
system operation differs according to the
detection area setting.

Rear-view camera*
Example: Rear corner sensor (left) malfunctioning Rear-view camera* Location of rear-view camera
(Instruments - Type A)
E00618402831
The rear-view camera (A) is integrated into
The rear-view camera is a system that shows the part near the rear gate handle.
the view behind the vehicle on a screen of the
Smartphone-link Display Audio (SDA) or the
Smartphone-link Display Audio (SDA) navi-
gation system.
6 AHA116899
WARNING
 The rear-view camera is an assistance sys-
Even after the buzzer and display has stopped
tem that enables the driver to check for
warning, the indicator lamp (A) on
obstacles behind the vehicle. Its range of
“SONAR” switch will continue blinking until view is limited, so you should not overly
the system reverts to the normal state. Have depend on it. Please drive just as carefully
the vehicle inspected at an authorised as you would if the vehicle did not have
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. the rear-view camera.
 Be sure to visually confirm safety around
the vehicle with your own eyes. Do not Range of view of rear-view camera
depend entirely on the rear-view camera.
Range of view of rear-view

camera
The range of view of the rear-view camera is

limited to the area shown in the illustrations.
It cannot show the both sides and the lower
part of the rear bumper, etc.
When reversing, be sure to visually confirm
safety around the vehicle.

Rear-view camera*
NOTE NOTE
 Because the rear-view camera has a special • Do not subject the camera to physical shock
lens, the lines on the ground between parking such as striking it strongly or throwing a
spaces may not look parallel on the screen. thing.
 In the following situations, the screen indica- • Do not adhere organic substances, waxes,
tion may be difficult to see. There is no oil remover, and glass cleaner to the cam-
abnormality. era.
• Low light (nighttime) If adhered to them, immediately wipe off.
• When the light of the sun or the light from a • Do not splash the camera with boiling
vehicle’s headlamps shines directly into the water. 6
lens. • Never spray or splash water on the camera
• If a fluorescent light shines directly into the or around it.
lens, the screen indication may be flicker. • Do not disconnect, disassemble or modify
How to use the rear-view cam- There is no abnormality. the camera.
era  If the camera is hot and is then cooled by • Do not scratch the camera, as this may
rain or a car wash, the lens can mist up. This cause damage to the rear-view camera
phenomenon does not indicate a malfunc- images.
When you place the selector lever in the “R”
tion.
(REVERSE) position with the operation
 If the atmospheric temperature is extremely
mode in ON, the view behind the vehicle will hot or extremely cold, the rear-view camera
Reference lines on the screen
automatically appear on the screen of the images may not be clear.
SDA or the SDA navigation system. When There is no abnormality. Reference lines and upper surface of the rear
you move the selector lever to any other posi-  If a radio set is installed near the camera, the bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.
tion, the screen will return to its original indi- rear-view camera images may cause electri-
cation. cal system interference and the system may  Red line (B) indicates approximately
stop functioning properly. 50 cm behind the rear bumper.
 It is not possible to fully see obstacles when  Two Green lines (C) indicate approxi-
CAUTION the lens is dirty. If the lens becomes contami- mately 20 cm outside of the vehicle body.
 The rear-view camera has a special lens that nated by water droplets, snow, mud, or oil,
can make objects shown on the screen appear  Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis-
wipe off the contamination, taking care not
to be closer or further away than they actu- tance from the rear bumper.
to scratch the lens.
ally are.
 Please observe the following cautions. Ignor-
ing them could lead to a camera malfunction.

Rear-view camera*
Errors between the display and B: Objects shown on the screen

the actual road surface
 When there is an upward slope
behind the vehicle
The reference lines for distance and vehicle
width are based on a level, flat road surface.
The reference lines are displayed closer than
In the following cases, errors are produced
the actual distance.
between the display reference lines and the
Therefore when there is an obstacle on the
distance on the actual road surface.
upward slope, it appears farther than its actual
6 position.
1: Approximately at the rear edge of the
 When the rear of the vehicle is
rear bumper (if so equipped) weighed down with the weight of
2: Approximately 100 cm passengers and luggage in the vehi-
3: Approximately 200 cm cle
The reference lines are displayed closer than

CAUTION the actual distance.
 Due to the number of people in the vehicle, Therefore when there is an obstacle on the
the fuel quantity, the weight and positioning upward slope, it appears farther than its actual
of luggage, and/or the condition of the road position.
surface, the lines in the view from the rear-
view camera may not be accurately posi-
tioned relative to the actual road.
A: Actual objects
Use the reference lines only as a guideline, B: Objects shown on the screen
and always do a safety check of your behind
and surroundings directly while driving.
 When there is a downward slope
behind the vehicle
The reference lines are displayed farther than

the actual distance.
A: Actual objects
Therefore when there is an obstacle on the not use them as a guide to distances to solid
downward slope, it appears closer than its objects.
actual position. Example: On the screen the point B appears
the nearest, then the point C and A in order of
distance. The point A and B actually are the
same distances from the vehicle, and the
point C is farther off than the point A and B.
A: Actual objects
B: Objects shown on the screen
 When solid objects are located close

to the vehicle
When solid objects are located close to the E00645000466
vehicle, the displayed distance on the screen
may differ from the actual distance.  When approaching to solid objects The Multi Around Monitor is a system that
Because the reference lines do not contact the shows the view combined with four cameras,
body of the truck, it looks as if it would not The reference lines for distance and vehicle i.e., “Front-view camera”, “Side-view cam-
hit the vehicle in following illustration. width are intended to indicate the distance to eras (right and left)” and “Rear-view camera”
However, the vehicle may hit the truck a flat object such as a level, flat road surface. on a screen of the Smartphone-link Display
because the body of the truck strays onto the This may make the distance to a projecting Audio (SDA) or the Smartphone-link Display
course in reality. object shown on the screen differ from the Audio (SDA) navigation system. It assists
actual distance to the projecting object. Do drivers to park their vehicles in parking
spaces and to parallel park their vehicles.

CAUTION NOTE
 The Multi Around Monitor is an assistance  Vehicle equipped with the sensor system has
system that enables the driver to check the a function to display the position and
safety around the vehicle. approximate distance of approaching obsta-
 Be sure to visually confirm safety around the cles on the bird's eye-view and side-view
vehicle with your own eyes. Especially, the screens along with the buzzer sound. For
four corners of the vehicle become blind details, refer to “Sensor system” on page
spots where an object is not displayed on the 6-105.
Multi Around Monitor. Do not depend  For vehicle equipped with the sensor system,
6 entirely on the Multi Around Monitor. you can change the setting to hide the warn-
ing displayed on the side-view and bird’s
 Do not use the Multi Around Monitor with
the door mirrors folded in and/or with the eye-view screens. A- Rear-view camera
doors and/or the tailgate open. It will prevent For details, consult an authorised B- Front-view camera
the Multi Around Monitor from displaying MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. C- Side-view camera
the appropriate range.
Location of each cameras WARNING

 Do not install anything which will disturb
The cameras are integrated into the location the operation of the cameras around the
as shown below. location of them.
Range of view of the Multi Around Monitor

E00645100425
The range of view of the Multi Around Monitor cameras is limited to the area shown in the illustrations. It cannot show around the both sides and
the lower part of the front and rear bumpers, etc. While driving, be sure to visually confirm safety around the vehicle.

Range of view of the Multi Around Monitor cameras
A: Front-view camera
A: Side-view camera (Right)
A: Side-view camera (Left)
A: Rear-view camera

Types of views of the Multi Side-view/Front-view mode

Around Monitor
Views of the passenger’s side of the vehicle
Two different types of views are displayed on and the front of the vehicle are displayed.
the left side and the right side respectively.
Bird’s eye-view/Rear-view mode

6
Views of the surroundings of the vehicle and
behind the vehicle are displayed.
Bird’s eye-view/Front-view mode
Views of the surroundings of the vehicle and

the front of the vehicle are displayed.
CAUTION
 The cameras have special lenses that can
make objects shown on the screen appear to
be closer or further away than they actually
are.
NOTE
Side-view/Rear-view mode  Because the cameras has a special lens, the
lines on the ground between parking spaces
Views of the passenger’s side of the vehicle may not look parallel on the screen.
and behind the vehicle are displayed.  In the following situations, the screen indica-
tion may be difficult to see. There is no
abnormality.
• Low light (nighttime)

NOTE NOTE Operation with the switch

• When the light of the sun or the light from a • Do not splash the camera with boiling
vehicle’s headlamps shines directly into the water. When the switch (A) is pressed, the bird’s-
lens. • Never spray or splash water on the camera eye view/front view is displayed.
• If a fluorescent light shines directly into the or around it.
lens, the screen indication may be flicker. • Do not disconnect, disassemble or modify
There is no abnormality. the camera. Type 1
 If the camera is hot and is then cooled by • Do not scratch the camera, as this may
rain or a car wash, the lens can mist up. This cause damage to the camera images.
phenomenon does not indicate a malfunc- 6
tion.
 If the atmospheric temperature is extremely
How to use the Multi Around
hot or extremely cold, the camera images Monitor
may not be clear.
There is no abnormality. The Multi Around Monitor can only be used
 If a radio set is installed near the camera, the when the operation mode is ON.
camera images may cause electrical system
interference and the system may stop func-
tioning properly. Operation with the selector lever Type 2
 It is not possible to fully see obstacles when
the lens is dirty. If the lens becomes contami- When you place the selector lever in the “R”
nated by water droplets, snow, mud, or oil, (REVERSE) position, the bird’s-eye
wipe off the contamination, taking care not
view/rear view is displayed on the screen of
to scratch the lens.
the SDA or the SDA navigation system.
 Please observe the following cautions. Ignor-
ing them could lead to a camera malfunction.
When you move the selector lever to any
• Do not subject the camera to physical shock
other position, the display disappears.
such as striking it strongly or throwing a
thing. NOTE
• Do not adhere organic substances, waxes,  The passenger’s side screen can be switched
oil remover, and glass cleaner to the cam- to the side view by pressing the switch.
era.
If adhered to them, immediately wipe off.

 The Orange line (D) indicates an expected
NOTE NOTE course when the vehicle moves forward
 If there is no operation for 3 minutes after  The display of the view may be delayed dur-
with the steering wheel turned. It disap-
the Multi Around Monitor is displayed by ing switching of the screen.
pears when the steering wheel is in the
pressing the switch with the selector lever in
a position other than “R” (REVERSE), the neutral position.
display disappears. How to read the screen  The approximate distance from the vehi-
E00645400200 cle body is as follows:
In any mode other than the bird’s eye-view
Switching of the screen mode, the lines in the screen give the follow-
6 ing information. Use them only as a guide.
Each time the switch is pressed, the mode of
Multi Around Monitor is switched as follows. CAUTION
Bird’s eye-view/Front-view mode  Side-  When you accidentally hit the camera and its
view/Front-view mode  Multi Around circumference against something, the view
Monitor is turned OFF. and the lines in the screen may not be dis-
played correctly. Be sure to have it inspected
by an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
NOTE dealer.
 When you place the selector lever in the “R”
(REVERSE) position with the front view
1- Approximately 100 cm from the front
displayed on the driver’s side screen, the edge of the front bumper
driver’s side screen switches to the Rear-
Front-view mode
view mode. When you move the selector
lever to any other position, the driver’s side Reference lines for the distance and the vehi- NOTE
screen switches to the Front-view mode. cle width and upper surface of the front  When the expected course lines are dis-
 When the switch is pressed at the vehicle bumper (A) are displayed on the screen. played in the front view, the expected course
speed of approximately 10 km/h or higher, lines are also displayed in the bird’s-eye
only the side view can be displayed on the  The Red line (B) indicates approximately view (Front: solid line, Rear: broken line).
passenger’s side screen. 50 cm from the front edge of the front
 The front view will not be displayed when bumper.
the vehicle speed exceeds approximately  The Two Green lines (C) indicate the
10 km/h. approximate vehicle width.

NOTE NOTE
6
1- Approximately 100 cm from the rear
Rear-view mode edge of the rear bumper Errors between the display and
E00645600215
2- Approximately 200 cm from the rear the actual road surface
Reference lines for the distance and the vehi- edge of the rear bumper E00645900029
cle width and upper surface of the rear The reference lines for distance and vehicle
bumper (A) are displayed on the screen. width are based on a level, flat road surface.
CAUTION In the following cases, errors are produced
 The Red line (B) indicates approximately  Due to the number of people in the vehicle, between the display reference lines and the
50 cm behind the rear edge of the rear the fuel quantity, the weight and positioning distance on the actual road surface.
bumper. of luggage, and/or the condition of the road
 The Two Green lines (C) indicate the surface, the lines in the view from the rear-
approximately vehicle width. view camera may not be accurately posi-  When the rear of the vehicle is
 The Orange line (D) indicates an expected tioned relative to the actual road. weighed down with the weight of
course when the vehicle is reserved with Use the reference lines only as a guideline, passengers and luggage in the vehi-
the steering wheel turned. It disappears and always do a safety check of your behind cle
when the steering wheel is in the neutral and surroundings directly while driving. E00648600027
position. The reference lines are displayed closer than

 The approximate distance from the vehi- the actual distance.
cle body is as follows: NOTE Therefore when there is an obstacle on the
 When the expected course lines are dis- upward slope, it appears farther than its actual
played in the rear view, the expected course
position.
lines are also displayed in the bird’s-eye
view (Front: broken line, Rear: solid line).

6
A: Actual objects A: Actual objects A: Actual objects
B: Objects shown on the screen B: Objects shown on the screen B: Objects shown on the screen
 When there is an upward slope  When there is a downward slope  When solid objects are located close
behind the vehicle behind the vehicle to the vehicle
E00648700028 E00648800029 E00648900020
The reference lines are displayed closer than The reference lines are displayed farther than When solid objects are located close to the
the actual distance. the actual distance. vehicle, the displayed distance on the screen
Therefore when there is an obstacle on the may differ from the actual distance.
upward slope, it appears farther than its actual Therefore when there is an obstacle on the Because the reference lines do not contact the
position. downward slope, it appears closer than its body of the truck, it looks as if it would not
actual position. hit the vehicle in following illustration.
However, the vehicle may hit the truck
because the body of the truck strays onto the
course in reality.

not use them as a guide to distances to solid
objects.
Example: On the screen the point B appears
the nearest, then the point C and A in order of
distance. The point A and B actually are the
same distances from the vehicle, and the
point C is farther off than the point A and B.
Bird’s eye-view mode

E00646200146
An overhead view in which the vehicle is

looked down is displayed so that you can eas-
ily identify the location of your vehicle and
the course to enter the parking space.
Side-view mode
E00646100028
Reference lines for the vehicle width and the

 When approaching to solid objects front end of the vehicle are displayed on the
E00649000028
screen.
The reference lines for distance and vehicle
width are intended to indicate the distance to 1- Approximate vehicle width including
a flat object such as a level, flat road surface. the door mirror.
This may make the distance to a projecting 2- Approximate location of the axle centre
object shown on the screen differ from the of the front wheel.
actual distance to the projecting object. Do 3- Approximate 50 cm from the front edge
of the front bumper.

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
CAUTION NOTE
 The bird’s-eye view is an simulated view  In the bird’s eye-view mode, since the views
processed by combining view captured by captured by the four cameras, “Front-view
CAUTION
 For reasons of safety, do not operate the
“Front-view camera”, “Side-view cameras camera”, “Side-view cameras (right and
switch while driving.
(right and left)” and “Rear-view camera”. left)” and “Rear-view camera” are processed
Because of this, in the bird’s eye-view mode, based on a level flat road surface, an image
objects will appear to be farther away than may be displayed as follows: 2. Press the switch (A) to display the bird’s
they actually are. In addition, there are blind • An object appears to have fallen down and eye-view/front-view.
spots in the vicinity of the actual vehicle looks longer or larger.
6 which are not displayed on the screen. You
may crash your vehicle even if there seems
• An object having a height from the road Type 1
surface may seem to appear from the joint
to be a little distance between your vehicle of the view composition processing
and an object, and there may be an object in regions.
the area where there seems to be nothing. Be  The brightness of the views from each cam-
sure to check the safety around the vehicle era may vary depending on the illuminance
with your own eyes. conditions.
 The vehicle icon displayed in the bird’s eye-  An object above the camera is not displayed.
view mode differs from the actual vehicle in
 The object displayed in the Front-view mode
colour and size. Because of this, an object
or the Rear-view mode may not be displayed
near the vehicle may appear to be in contact
in the Bird’s eye-view mode.
with the vehicle, and the positional relation-
 The view in the Bird’s eye-view mode may
ship between the vehicle and the object may Type 2
be displaced from its true position when the
differ from the actual one.
mounting location and angle of each camera
 The view composition processing regions are
are changed.
present in the four corners of the bird’s eye-
 The lines on the road may appear to be dis-
view display, mainly at the boundary sec-
placed or bent at the joint of the views.
tions of views from each camera. Because of
this, in the vicinity of the boundary sections,
the sharpness of the views may decrease and
an object may disappear and reappear on the To change the vehicle icon col-
screen. our in the bird’s eye-view
E00693000151
It is possible to change the vehicle icon col-

our in the bird’s eye-view.
Cargo loads
3. Press and hold down the switch (A) until
the vehicle icon blinks to enter the selec- Cargo loads NOTE
 Use a MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE
tion mode of the vehicle icon colour in the E00609902957
roof carrier, since the brackets to be used
bird’s eye-view.
have a special shape. For details, consult a
4. Press the switch until the desired colour Cargo loads precautions nearby authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
appears on the display. dealer.
Each time you press the switch, the vehi-
cle icon colour in the bird’s eye-view will CAUTION
change to the next one.  When loading luggage, be careful to the fol-
Roof carrier precaution
5. When it is changed to your desired colour, lowing.
• Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage
6
press and hold the switch (A) for a few
compartment whenever possible.
seconds. This completes the setting.
• Distribute cargo or luggage evenly so that it
CAUTION
is not unbalanced.  Make sure that the weight of the luggage
NOTE • Do not place cargo or luggage on the instru- does not exceed the allowable roof load.
ment panel. If the allowable roof load is exceeded, this
 When the selection mode is in the following
Also, do not stack up cargo or luggage on may cause damage to the vehicle.
situations, the vehicle icon colour does not
the front passenger’s seat or the rear seat. The roof load is the total allowable load on
change.
Having the driver’s vision blocked, and the roof (the weight of the roof carrier plus
• When you place the selector lever in the
your cargo being thrown inside the cabin if the weight of luggage placed on the roof car-
“R” (REVERSE) position.
you suddenly have to brake can cause a rier).
• When you do not operate anything for For the specific value, refer to “Maximum
30 seconds. serious accident or injury.
roof load” on page 11-4.
• The operation mode is put in OFF.
 For vehicles equipped with the sensor sys-
tem, the sensor display showing the position Loading a roof carrier
and approximate distance of approaching
obstacles are not displayed on the bird’s eye-
view and side-view screens while the vehicle CAUTION
icon colour is changed.  Use a roof carrier that properly fits your
vehicle. Do not load luggage directly onto
the roof.
For installation, refer to the instruction man-
ual accompanying the roof carrier.

Cargo loads
CAUTION
 When luggage is loaded onto the vehicle,
please make sure to drive slowly and avoid
excessive maneuvers such as sudden braking
or quick turning.
In addition, place the luggage on the carrier
so that its weight is distributed evenly with
the heaviest items on the bottom. Do not load
items that are wider than the roof carrier.
6 The additional weight on the roof could raise
the vehicle’s centre of gravity and affect
vehicle handling characteristics.
As a result, driving errors or emergency
maneuvers could lead to a loss of control and
result in an accident.
 Before driving and after travelling a short
distance, always check the load to make sure
it is securely fastened to the roof carrier.
Check periodically during your travel that
the load remains secure.
NOTE
 To prevent wind noise or reduction in fuel
economy, remove the roof carrier when not
in use.
 Remove the roof carrier before using an
automatic car wash.
 Be sure that adequate clearance is main-
tained for raising the tailgate when installing
a roof carrier.

For pleasant driving
Important air conditioning operating tips ........................................7-2

Ventilators ........................................................................................7-2
Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioning ....................7-6
Rear cooler .....................................................................................7-10
Customising the air conditioning ...................................................7-11
Air purifier .....................................................................................7-12
nanoe™*.........................................................................................7-12
7
Glass antenna* ................................................................................7-13
Link System ...................................................................................7-14
USB input terminal* .......................................................................7-14
HDMI terminal* .............................................................................7-15
Sun visors .......................................................................................7-15
Vanity mirror ..................................................................................7-16
Accessory socket ...........................................................................7-16
220 V AC power outlet ..................................................................7-17
USB port (for charging) .................................................................7-18
Interior lamps .................................................................................7-19
Storage spaces ................................................................................7-22
Cup holder .....................................................................................7-24
Bottle holder ..................................................................................7-25
Convenient hook ............................................................................7-25
Assist grip ......................................................................................7-26
Coat hook .......................................................................................7-26
Luggage hooks ...............................................................................7-26
Important air conditioning operating tips
 When operating the system, make sure the weather. This is to prevent poor lubrication of
Important air conditioning air intake, which is located in front of the the compressor internal parts and to maintain
operating tips windscreen, is free of obstructions such as the air conditioning in the best operating con-
E00708302551 leaves and snow. Leaves collected in the dition.
air-intake plenum may reduce air flow
CAUTION and plug the plenum water drains.
 The engine speed may increase when the air
Ventilators
conditioning is operating. E00700102117
With an increased engine speed, an A/T Air conditioning system refrig-

vehicle will creep to a greater degree than erant and lubricant recommen- Front ventilators
with a lower engine speed. Fully depress the
brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from
dations E00774900022
7 creeping.
If the air conditioning seems less effective
 Park the vehicle in the shade. than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant
Parking in the hot sun will make the vehi- leak. We recommend you to have the system
cle inside extremely hot, and it will inspected.
require more time to cool the interior. The air conditioning system in your vehicle
If it is necessary to park in the sun, open must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-
the windows for the first few minutes of 134a and the lubricant ND-OIL8.
air conditioning operation to expel the hot Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will
air. cause severe damage which will result in the
 Close the windows when the air condi- need to replace your vehicle’s entire air con- 1- Centre ventilators
tioning is in use. The entry of outside air ditioning system. The release of refrigerant 2- Side ventilators
through open windows will reduce the into the atmosphere should be prevented.
cooling efficiency. It is recommended that the refrigerant be
 Too much cooling is not good for the recovered and recycled for further use.
health. The inside air temperature should
only be 5 to 6 °C below the outside air During a long period of disuse
temperature.
The air conditioning should be operated for at
least 5 minutes each week, even in cold
7-2 For pleasant driving

Ventilators
Rear ventilators Left Right

E00775000020
1- Close 1- Close
2- Open 2- Open
7
Front side ventilators Rear ventilators

Adjusting the air flow direction
E00700202626
Move the knob (A) to adjust the air flow Move the knob (A) to adjust the air flow
direction. direction.
Front centre ventilators To close the vent, move the knob (A) to the
outside as far as possible.
Move the knob (A) to adjust the air flow
direction.
To close the vent, move the knob (A) to the
inside as far as possible.
For pleasant driving 7-3

Ventilators
NOTE NOTE
 The cool air from the ventilators may appear  Be careful not to spill beverages, etc., into
as a mist. the ventilators.
This is due to moist air being suddenly Doing so might cause the air conditioning
cooled by the air conditioning. This will not to function normally.
clear after a few moments.
7 Changing the position of air flowing from the front ventilators

E00700302786
Each time the MODE switch is pressed, the mode changes to the next one in the following sequence: “ ”  “ ”  “ ”  “ ”“ ”.
To change to the “ ” position, press the demister switch.
These symbols are used in the next several illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air coming from the front ventilators.
: Small amount of air from the ventilators
: Medium amount of air from the ventilators
: Large amount of air from the ventilators

Ventilators
The mode selection and air flowing from the front ventilators
Face position Foot/Face position Foot position
7
Foot/Demister position Demister position
NOTE
 When using the “ ” or “ ” position, set the outside position to prevent the windows from fogging up.

Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioning

E00773000260
The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is running.
1- Air conditioning switch  P.7-9 10- Rear window demister switch  Usage
2- Passenger’s side temperature control  P.5-88 • Changing the position of air flowing
dial  P.7-9 11- Air selection switch  P.7-10 from the ventilators  P.7-4
3- AUTO switch  P.7-7 12- OFF switch  P.7-7 • Demisting of the windscreen and door
4- Driver’s side temperature control dial 13- Passenger’s side temperature display windows  P.7-7
 P.7-8, 7-9  P.7-8, 7-9 • Operating the system in automatic mode
5- Rear fan switch  P.7-11 14- nanoe™ indicator  P.7-12  P.7-7
6- MODE switch  P.7-4 15- Mode selection display  P.7-4 • Operating the system in manual mode 
7- Demister switch  P.7-7 16- Blower speed display  P.7-8 P.7-8
8- Blower speed selection switch  P.7-8 17- SYNC indicator  P.7-9 • Adjusting the blower speed  P.7-8
9- SYNC switch  P.7-9 18- Driver’s side temperature display • Adjusting the temperature control 
 P.7-8, 7-9 P.7-8

• To control the driver’s side and the pas- 1. Press the demister switch to change to the
senger’s side temperature independently
NOTE
“ ” position. When the demister switch
 When demisting quick, set the blower to the
 P.7-9 is pressed, the indicator lamp (A) comes maximum speed and the temperature to the
• Switching the air conditioning system on. highest position.
ON/OFF  P.7-9 2. Set the temperature rather high by using  To demist the door windows effectively,
• Switching outside air and recirculated air the temperature control dial. direct the air flowing of the side ventilators
 P.7-10 3. Select your desired blower speed by towards the door windows.
• Driving in polluted outside air condi- pressing the blower speed selection  When the demister switch is pressed, the air
tions  P.7-10 switch. conditioning system automatically operates
and outside air (as opposed to recirculated
Press the demister switch or AUTO switch or air) is selected. This automatic switching
NOTE
 In extreme cold, the air conditioning control
MODE switch or OFF switch to turn off the control is carried out to prevent misting of 7
demister mode. the windows even if “Disable automatic air
panel screen may operate sluggishly. This conditioning control” or “Disable automatic
does not indicate a problem. air control” is set. (Refer to “Customising the
It will disappear when the vehicle interior CAUTION air conditioning switch” on page 7-11, “Cus-
temperature rises to a normal temperature.  For safety, make sure you have a clear view tomising the air selection” on page 7-12.)
through all the windows.
 When setting the MODE switch to the “ ”
Demisting of the windscreen position, it also can prevent the windows Operating the system in auto-
and door windows from fogging up. But the air conditioning
matic mode
E00773200145
system does not operate automatically and
E00773100258
outside air (as opposed to recirculated air) is
not selected. If operating the air conditioning
system and switching to outside air, press the
air conditioning switch and the air selection
switch.
 Do not set the temperature to the max. cool
position. Cool air will blow against the win-
dow glasses and prevent demisting.

In normal conditions, use the system in the
AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
NOTE
 Never place anything on top of the interior
1. Press the AUTO switch. air temperature sensor (B), which will pre-
2. Set the temperature control dial to the vent it from functioning properly.
desired temperature.
Press the OFF switch to turn off the air condi-

tioning system.
The mode selection, blower speed adjust-

ment, recirculated/outside air selection, tem-
7 perature adjustment, and air conditioning
ON/OFF status are all controlled automati- Adjusting the temperature con-
cally. When the AUTO switch is pressed, the
indicator lamp (A) comes on.
Operating the system in manual trol
mode E00773500236
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise

NOTE E00773300029
to make the air warmer.
 If the blower speed selection switch, air con- Blower speed and ventilator mode may be
controlled manually by setting the blower Turn it anticlockwise to make the air cooler.
ditioning switch, MODE switch, or air selec-
tion switch is operated while the system is speed selection switch and the MODE switch
operating in the AUTO mode, the activated to the desired positions.
function overrides the corresponding func- To return to automatic operation, press the
tion of automatic control. All other functions AUTO switch.
remain under automatic control.
Adjusting the blower speed

E00773400121
Press to increase the blower speed.

Press to decrease the blower speed.
The selected blower speed will be shown in
the display (A).

NOTE NOTE
 The temperature value of air conditioning is • When the temperature is set to the lowest
switched in conjunction with outside temper- setting (18.0°C)
ature display unit of the instrument cluster. Inside air will be recirculated and the air
On vehicles equipped with Instruments - conditioning will operate.
Type A, refer to “Changing the temperature  The settings described above are the factory
unit” on page 5-15. settings.
On vehicles equipped with Instruments - The air selection and air conditioning
Type B, refer to “Changing the fuel con- switches can be customised (function setting
sumption display unit and the temperature changed), and the automatic switching of
unit” on page 5-40. outside air and the air conditioning accord-
 While the engine coolant temperature is low, ing to operating conditions can be changed 7
the temperature of air flowing will not be as desired. NOTE
changed, even if you have selected warm air For further information, we recommend you  When the indicator (A) comes on by pressing
with the switch. to consult an authorised MITSUBISHI the SYNC switch, the passenger’s side tem-
To prevent the windscreen and windows MOTORS dealer. perature will be controlled to the same set-
from fogging up, the mode selection will be Refer to “Customising the air conditioning ting temperature as the driver’s side.
changed to “ ” and the blower speed will switch” on page 7-11. When the indicator (A) is shown in the dis-
be reduced while the system is operating in Refer to “Customising the air selection” on play, if the driver’s side temperature control
the AUTO mode. page 7-12. dial is turned clockwise or anticlockwise, the
 When the temperature is set to the highest or passenger’s side setting temperature will be
synchronized to the driver’s side.
the lowest, the air selection and the air condi- To control the driver’s side and
tioning will be automatically changed as fol-
lows. the passenger’s side tempera-
Also, if the air selection is operated manually ture independently Switching the air conditioning
after an automatic changeover, manual oper-
ation will be selected.
E00773600136
system ON/OFF
When the SYNC indicator (A) goes off by
• When the temperature is set to the highest E00774100239
setting (32.0°C) turning the passenger’s side temperature con-

Press the switch to turn the air conditioning
Outside air will be introduced and the air trol dial (B) clockwise or anticlockwise or
on, the indicator lamp (A) comes on.
conditioning will stop. pressing the SYNC switch, the driver’s side
Press the switch again to switch it off.
and the passenger’s side temperature can be
controlled independently.

Rear cooler
NOTE
 When the engine coolant temperature rises to
a certain level, the air selection is automati-
cally switched to the recirculation position
and the indicator lamp (A) comes on. At this
time, the system will not switch to the out-
side position even if the air selection switch
is pressed.
Driving in polluted outside air

7 conditions
Switching outside air and recir-  Normally, use the outside position to prevent If the outside air is dusty or otherwise con-
culated air the windows from fogging up. taminated when driving through a tunnel or in
Use of the recirculation position for
E00773900113 a traffic jam, set to the recirculation position
extended time may cause the windows to fog
To change the air selection, simply press the by pressing the air selection switch.
up.
air selection switch. Switch to the outside position periodically to Refer to “Switching outside air and recircu-
increase ventilation. lated air” on page 7-10.
 Outside air: Indicator lamp (A) is OFF
Outside air is introduced into the passen-
ger compartment. Rear cooler
NOTE
 Recirculated air: Indicator lamp (A) is ON  If effective cooling performance is desired,
E00707701160
Air is recirculated inside the passenger use the recirculation position. The rear cooler can only be used while the
compartment.  When pressing the AUTO switch after man- engine is running and the front air condition-
ual operation, the air selection switch is also ing is switched on.
controlled automatically.

Customising the air conditioning
A- ON/OFF switch
7
B- Blower speed adjustment switch NOTE
To operate the rear cooler in the  If the rear cooler is activated again after it is
rear seat stopped by pressing the “ON/OFF” switch or
NOTE E00774500028
after the engine is stopped, the blower speed
 When the front air conditioning is not will return to the previous setting.
1. Press the “ON/OFF” switch to activate the
switched on, only fan operation without
rear cooler.
cooling is possible.
2. Press the “UP” button to increase the
blower speed and press the “DOWN” but- Customising the air condi-
To operate the rear cooler in the
ton to decrease the blower speed. The tioning
selected blower speed will be shown with
front seat
E00774600087
the indicator lamp (A).
The following customise functions can be
E00774400085 3. Press the “ON/OFF” switch again to stop
applied.
When the switch is pressed, the fan starts and operation.
the indicator lamp (A) comes on. When the
switch is pressed again, the fan stops and the Customising the air condition-
indicator lamp goes off. ing switch
E00774700118
Functions can be changed as desired, as

stated below.

Air purifier
 Enable automatic air conditioning control
When the AUTO switch is pressed, or the
Customising the air selection NOTE
E00774800021  When the demister switch is pressed, in
temperature control switch is set to the
Functions can be changed as desired, as order to prevent misting of the windows
minimum temperature, the air condition-
from fogging up, the air ventilator automati-
ing switch is controlled automatically. stated below.
cally switches to outside air even if “Disable
 Enable automatic air control automatic air control” is set.
 Disable automatic air conditioning control
The air conditioning switch is not con- When the AUTO switch is pressed, the air
trolled automatically as long as the air selection switch is also controlled auto- Air purifier
conditioning switch is not operated. matically. E00708401887
 Disable automatic air control An air filter has been incorporated into this
 Setting change method
7 Hold down the air conditioning switch for Even when the AUTO switch is pressed, air conditioning so that dirt and dust are
the air selection switch is not controlled cleaned from the air.
about 10 seconds or more.
automatically. Replace the air filter periodically as its ability
• When the setting is changed from enable
to clean the air will be reduced as it collects
to disable
 Setting change method pollen and dirt. For the maintenance interval,
3 sounds are emitted and the “ ” indi- refer to the “SERVICE BOOKLET”.
Hold down the air selection switch for
cator flashes 3 times.
about 10 seconds or more.
• When the setting is changed from disa-
• When the setting is changed from enable NOTE
ble to enable
to disable  Operation in certain conditions such as driv-
2 sounds are emitted and the “ ” indi- 3 sounds are emitted and the indicator ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the
cator flashes 3 times. lamp flashes 3 times. air conditioning can lead to reduction of ser-
• When the setting is changed from disa- vice life of the filter. When you feel that the
NOTE ble to enable airflow is lower than normal or when the
2 sounds are emitted and the indicator windscreen or windows start to fog up easily,
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
lamp flashes 3 times. replace the air filter.
conditioning control”.
We recommend you to have it checked.
 When the demister switch is pressed, in
order to prevent misting of the windows NOTE
from fogging up, the air conditioning oper-
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
ates automatically even if “Disable auto-
control”.
nanoe™*
matic air conditioning control” is set. E00778400100
This vehicle incorporates a biocidal product.

Glass antenna*
Ionised air generated by a device incorpo- Refer to “8 inch colour LCD meter
rated in the vehicle purifies the air in the
WARNING switches” on page 5-21.
 Do not disassemble or repair the genera-
cabin by suppressing bacteria. Refer to “Function setting display” on
tor because nanoe™ system contains high
Active substance: Free radicals generated in page 5-38.
voltage parts.
situ from ambient air or water. Check with an authorised MITSUBISHI 2. Operate the 8 inch colour LCD meter
MOTORS dealer when it is necessary to switches to select “ ”
nanoe™* is very fine ionized water particle repair it. (nanoe).
generated from air moisture.
Then, press the Enter switch.
nanoe™’s slight acidity is gentle and benefi-
cial for skin. NOTE switches to select “ON” or “OFF”, and
 According to temperature and humidity con- press the Enter switch to confirm the set-
*: nanoe™ and the nanoe™ mark are trade-
marks of Panasonic Corporation.
ditions, fan speed and direction of the air ting. 7
flow, an effect of the nanoe™ may be weak-
ened.
Only when the fan is operating, nanoe™ is  When nanoe™ is generated, a small amount Glass antenna*
emitted from the driver’s front side ventilator. of ozone is emitted and may be faintly E00710501973
smelled in some situations.
However, this is approximately the same Antenna leads are printed on the rear window
amount as that already exists in nature, such glass.
as in forests, and it has no affect on the
human body.
NOTE
 When the rear window glass is cleaned, wipe
the glass with a soft cloth by moving the
To operate the nanoe™* cloth along the antenna so as not to damage
E00779300034 it.
 Applying a reflective film or metal object
The nanoe™* is operated by following pro- (after-market antenna or the like) to the rear
cedure. window glass causes reduced reception sen-
sitivity.
1. Operate the 8 inch colour LCD meter There is also a risk of the reception sensitiv-
switches to switch the multi information ity being reduced by an antenna line being
screen to the function setting display. damaged with a cutter or the like when you
apply a film.

Link System
Link System USB input terminal* How to connect a USB memory

E00764501790 E00761902022 device
The Link System takes overall control of the E00762002004
You can connect your USB memory device or
devices connected via the USB input terminal
iPod* to play music files stored in the USB 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and put
allowing the connected devices to be operated
memory device or iPod. the operation mode in OFF.
by using the switches in the vehicle.
2. Connect a commercially available USB
See the following section for details on how *: “iPod” is a registered trademark of connector cable (C) to the USB memory
to operate. Apple Inc. in the United States and other device (B).
Refer to “USB input terminal” on page 7-14. countries.
7 The USB input terminal (A) is located in the

indicated position.
3. Connect the USB connector cable to the

USB input terminal.
NOTE
 Do not connect the USB memory device to
This section explains how to connect and the USB input terminal directly.
remove a USB memory device or iPod. The USB memory device may be damaged.
4. To remove the USB connector cable, put

the operation mode in OFF first and per-
form the installation steps in reverse.

HDMI terminal*
3. Connect a HDMI cable to the HDMI ter-
How to connect an iPod HDMI terminal* minal.
E00762102063
E00771400215 4. To remove the HDMI cable, perform the
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and put installation steps in reverse.
You can connect a commercially available
the operation mode in OFF. HDMI device such as a video camera and a
2. Connect the connector cable to the iPod. smart phone to the HDMI terminal (A). Sun visors
NOTE E00711202512
 Use a genuine connector cable from Apple

Inc.
3. Connect the connector cable to the USB 7

input terminal.
4. To remove the connector cable, put the
operation mode in OFF first and perform
the installation steps in reverse.
Types of connectable devices 1- To eliminate front glare

and supported file specifica- NOTE 2- To eliminate side glare
tions  For details, refer to the separate owner’s
manual for a the Smartphone-link Display
E00762201386
Audio (SDA) or the Smartphone-link Dis-
For details about the types of connectable play Audio (SDA) navigation system.
Card holder
devices and supported file specifications,
refer to the separate owner’s manual. Cards can be slipped into the holder (A) on
To connect the back of the sun visor.
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and put

the operation mode in OFF.
2. Connect a commercially available HDMI
cable to the HDMI device.

Vanity mirror
CAUTION For the third seat

 If the lid of vanity mirror with lamp is kept
open for prolonged periods of time, the vehi-
cle’s battery will be discharged.
Accessory socket
E00711603294
The accessory socket can be used while the

operation mode is in ON or ACC.
7 To use a plug-in type accessory, remove the
cap or open the lid, and insert the plug in the CAUTION
Vanity mirror accessory socket.  Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory
E00711301864 operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.
When using more than one socket at the
A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun Centre console same time, make sure that the electrical
visor. accessories are 12 V accessories and that the
Operating the lid of the vanity mirror will total power consumption does not exceed
automatically turn on the mirror lamp (A). 120 W.
 Long use of the electric appliance without
running the engine may run down the bat-
tery.
 When the accessory socket is not in use, be
sure to close the lid, because the socket
might become clogged by foreign material
and be short-circuited.
NOTE
 Accessory sockets in 2 locations can be used
at the same time.

220 V AC power outlet
220 V AC power outlet WARNING WARNING

E00749300165  Never use the 220 V AC power outlet to  Do not spill a beverage on the 220 V AC
charge an electric vehicle or a plug-in power outlet, or do not insert any objects
The 220 V AC power outlet is located on the
hybrid vehicle. Also, never connect the into the receptacles. This may cause over-
back of the floor console box. 220 V AC power outlet to a household heating resulting in a fire and/or electrical
220 V AC power outlet can be used as a powerline or a distribution panel. This shock.
power source of household appliances when may lead to electric shock or a malfunc-  Do not let children touch the 220 V AC
the operation mode is put in ON. tion. power outlet.
 Do not connect or disconnect the plug with  Never use the 220 V AC power outlet
CAUTION a wet hand. Doing so can cause an electric when lightning or thunder is observed or
shock. expected.
 Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory
operating at 220 V and at 150 W or less.
 Never pull the cable to remove the plug.  Never use the 220 V AC power outlet for 7
Pull straight with holding the plug of an electromedical apparatus.
electrical appliance.
 Do not disassemble or modify the 220 V
To use AC power outlet. CAUTION
 When using electrical appliance while  When the 220 V AC power outlet is not in
1. Open the lid. driving, make sure that it is firmly use, be sure to disconnect the plug and close
secured. Flying objects entering the pas- the lid. This will prevent the 220 V AC
senger compartment during sudden brak- power outlet from becoming clogged and
ing or sharp turning could result in a short circuiting.
serious accident and/or injury.  Make sure that the plug is inserted all the
 Do not use an electrical appliance which way into the 220 V AC power outlet before
emits steam while the windows are closed. using an electrical appliance.
Lack of visibility due to steam could lead  Do not use an electrical appliance in the
to an accident. vehicle which emits heat such as a heater.
 Never use a multi-plug adapter. Using it Heat damage to interior parts could result.
may cause overheating resulting in fire.  Do not connect a malfunctioning electrical
 If you use an electrical appliance that appliance to the 220 V AC power outlet.
emits light, your visibility at night may be Doing so could damage the 220 V AC power
2. Insert the plug in the power outlet firmly. affected which could impede safe driving. outlet.
Make sure the plug is connected correctly.
3. Disconnect the plug and close the lid after
using the electrical appliance.

USB port (for charging)
NOTE NOTE NOTE

 Accessory socket and 220 V AC power out-  When the 220 V AC power outlet is used  The voltage of the 220 V AC power outlet
let can be used simultaneously. Refer to while the vehicle interior temperature is too cannot be correctly gauged with a commer-
“Accessory socket” on page 7-16. hot, electricity supply stops by activating the cially available tester. Consult an authorised
 If the plug of the electrical appliance was built-in protection circuit. MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer when you
loose or wobbled when inserted in the outlet, If this occurs, put the operation mode in OFF need measurement of the voltage.
replace the 220 V AC power outlet by an after the vehicle interior temperature is  Also refer to the instruction manual and label
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. cooled by using the air conditioning and so accompanying the electrical appliance.
 Never leave the vehicle, perform refueling or on, and then put the operation mode in ON
washing the vehicle while using the 220 V again.
AC power outlet.  The 220 V AC power outlet can use while USB port (for charging)
7  Never use electrical appliance which is vul- the operation mode is put in ON, but use it E00778300196
nerable to vibration or heat in the cabin. while the engine is running as much as possi- The USB port (for charging) can be used as a
When exposed to the strong direct sunlight, ble.
power source of the USB appliances when the
the cabin will become extremely hot. It could If it is used for a long period while the
operation mode is in ON or ACC.
cause product failure. engine is not running, the battery could go
flat. There are two USB ports (for charging)
 Electrical appliance may not operate nor-
 The following electrical appliance may not located on the back of the floor console box.
mally and electricity supply stops by activat-
operate normally even if the power con- When using the USB port (for charging),
ing the built-in protection circuit under the
following conditions. sumption is less than 150 W. open the lid and connect the USB connector
If this occurs, electricity supply restarts auto- • Electrical appliance to which large current cable to it.
matically, but if it doesn’t restart automati- flows momentarily
cally, put the operation mode in OFF, and • Electrical appliance which gauges precise
then put the operation mode in ON again. data
• When the power consumption of the electri- • Electrical appliance which does not operate
cal appliance exceeds 150 W. normally when it is not placed horizontally
• When the battery is not fully charged. • Electrical appliance which needs extremely
stable operation
• Electrical appliance with a timer function,
which needs the consecutive output
 Use of electrical appliance could cause radio
or television noise.

Interior lamps
CAUTION NOTE NOTE

 When the USB port (for charging) is not in  Do not charge many mobile devices together  If you leave the lamps on without running
use, be sure to close the lid, because the USB by using a multi-plug adapter of the USB the engine, you will run down the battery.
port (for charging) might be short-circuited port (for charging). Before you leave the vehicle, make sure that
by clogging foreign materials and the con-  If water or spill beverages has splashed on all the lamps are off.
nected devices and the USB port (for charg- the USB ports (for charging), stop using it
ing) might be damaged. and have the vehicle checked by an author-
 Insert the USB connector cable in the USB ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. Front room & map lamps/Rear
port (for charging) firmly.
If the USB connector cable does not insert in personal lamps
it firmly, it may become extremely hot and Interior lamps E00717301808
the fuses may blow. E00712002979

Front room & map lamps 7
 Be sure that the power consumption does not
exceed 10.5 W {The peak outlet current or
voltage of the USB port (for charging) is DC
5 V-2.1 A}.
The connected devices or the USB port (for
charging) may be damaged.
 Do not use the reversible USB connector
cable that the USB connector board is
located in the centre.
The USB port (for charging) might be dam-
aged.
 Long use of the electric appliance without 1- Front room & map lamps
running the engine may run down the bat- Rear personal lamps
2- Rear personal lamps
tery.
3- Luggage compartment lamp
4- Door courtesy lamps
5- LED interior illumination (Console
NOTE box)
 These USB ports (for charging) can be used
only as a power source. They do not connect
to the audio devices of the vehicles.

Interior lamps
Position Position NOTE
of lamp On/off control of lamp On/off control  When the keyless operation function was
switch switch used to start the engine, if the operation
1- The lamps illuminates regard- Auto cut-out function mode is put in OFF while the doors and the
less of whether a door or the If the lamps is left switched on tailgate are closed, the lamp illuminates and
( )
tailgate is open or closed. with the operation mode is in after about 15 seconds it goes off. (if so
equipped)
2- Door Delayed off function OFF or ACC, and a door or the
 The time until the lamp goes off (delayed
() The lamps illuminates when a tailgate is opened, it goes off
off) can be adjusted. For details, please con-
door or the tailgate is opened. It automatically after approxi- sult an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
goes off about 15 seconds after mately 30 minutes. dealer.
7 the all doors and the tailgate are The lamp will illuminate again
after it automatically goes off in
 The auto cut-out function cannot be operated
closed. when the front room lamp switch is in the
However, the lamp goes off the following cases: “ ” position.
immediately with all doors and  When the operation mode is Also, this function can be deactivated. For
the tailgate closed in the follow- put in ON. details, please consult an authorised
ing cases:  When the keyless operation MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
system is operated.
 When the operation mode is  When all doors and the tail-
put in ON. gate are closed.
Map lamps
 When the central door lock E00712401181
function is used to lock the 3- OFF The lamps goes off regardless
Push the lens (A) to turn on the lamp. Push it
vehicle. ( ) of whether a door or the tailgate
again to turn it off.
 When the keyless operation is open or closed.
key is used to lock the vehi-
cle. NOTE
 When the keyless operation  When the key was used to start the engine, if
function is used to lock the the key is removed while the doors and the
vehicle. tailgate are closed, the lamps is illuminated
and after a few seconds it goes off.

Interior lamps
Luggage compartment lamp

E00712701807
7
Rear personal lamps LED interior illumination
1- ( )
E00712601457
The lamp illuminates regardless of whether
(Console box)
Pressing the lens (A) makes the lamp go on E00776100158
the tailgate is open or closed.
and pressing the lens again makes it go off. When the lamps are illuminated with the
2- (•)
The lamp illuminates when the tailgate is lamp switch in the “ ”, “ ”, or “AUTO”
opened, and goes off when the tailgate is position, the LED interior illumination (Con-
closed. sole box) illuminates.
3- ( )
The lamp goes off regardless of whether the
tailgate is open or closed.
Door courtesy lamps

E00717501233
Each door courtesy lamp comes on when the

relevant door is opened and goes off when the
door is closed.

Storage spaces
Storage spaces Glove box

E00713103655 E00717602794
To open, press the button (A).

CAUTION
 Never leave lighters, canned carbonated bev-
erage, and spectacles in the cabin when park-
ing the vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin
will become extremely hot, so lighters and
other flammable items may catch fire and
unopened drink cans may rupture. Also,
spectacles with plastic lenses or materials
7 could deform or crack.
 Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while WARNING
driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a  Do not put the objects which are easy to
storage space could otherwise cause injuries. roll and protrude from the Console under
tray.
Things stored in the tray may jump out
NOTE and roll underneath the pedals during
 When the lamps are illuminated with the sudden braking, and they could prevent
lamp switch in the “ ”, “ ”, or the brake or accelerator from being
“AUTO” position (vehicles with automatic depressed properly.
lamp control), the glove box lamp illumi- It could lead to a serious accidents or inju-
nates. ries.
Refer to “Combination headlamps and dip-
per switch” on page 5-79.
Floor console box
E00723302549
1- Glove box Console lower tray To open the floor console box, raise the lid.
2- Sunglasses holder E00779400035 The floor console box can also be used as an
3- Floor console box The console lower tray is located in the indi- armrest.
4- Console lower tray cated position.
5- Seatback pocket
6- Luggage floor boxes

Storage spaces
The pocket is also possible to store the small
items by partitioning it with the loop fastener
Luggage floor boxes
E00718701942
(A).
To use the box, raise the luggage floor board.
A- Tray
7
NOTE
 The tray can be stored in the floor console
box lid by turning it over and installing it. CAUTION
When storing the tray, hook the tray’s hooks  When the mobile device charging by the
(B) to the holes (C) of lid side. USB port (for charging) is stored in the seat- Sunglasses holder
back pocket, do not adjust the front seat and E00718601420
not fold the second seat. To open, press the lid.

The seatback pocket, mobile device or USB
connector cable may be damaged by trapping
the connector cable to the seat.
Refer to “USB port (for charging)” on page
7-18.
NOTE
 When storing the cloth fabrics such as towels
Seatback pocket in the seatback pocket, be careful that the
E00778200052 thread will not be frayed by catching in the
There is a storage pocket located on the back loop fastener.
of the front seats.
Cup holder
The cup holder will automatically come out
CAUTION NOTE when pushed in the centre area.
 The holder should not be used to store any-  Some bottles may not be fastened tightly
When stowing the cup holder, push the centre
thing heavier than sunglasses. These objects depending on the shape.
area until you hear clicking sounds.
could drop out. Before using the cup holder, make sure the
some bottles are tightly fastened to the cup
holder.
NOTE If the some bottles are unstable while driv-
ing, it could fall from the cup holder.
 The holder may not be able to accommodate
every possible size and shape of sunglasses;
it is advisable to check compatibility before
use. For the front seat
7
The cup holder is located between the front
Cup holder seats.
E00714502620
WARNING CAUTION
 Do not spray water or spill beverages  Wipe up drips immediately when it collects
inside the vehicle. If the switches, wires, or in the tray (A) of the cup holder. When the
electrical components become wet, they cup holder is used while collecting drips, it
could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire. could be spilled. And also stowing the cup
If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe holder with collecting drips could cause a
up as much liquid as possible and immedi- malfunction.
ately consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer.
CAUTION
 Do not drink beverages while driving. This is For the second seat
distracting and could cause an accident. E00718901234
 Drinks could be spilled by the vibration and
In order to use the cup holder, allow the arm-
jolts while driving. If the spilt drink is very
hot, you could be burnt. rest to drop down.

Bottle holder
CAUTION Bottle holder

 Do not apply excessive force to the cup E00718201527
holder. Otherwise it could cause a break-
down. WARNING
 Do not spray water or spill beverages
inside the vehicle. If the switches, wires, or
NOTE electrical components become wet, they
 When not using the cup holder, push the cup could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire.
holder to stow it away. If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe
up as much liquid as possible and immedi-
ately consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
For the third seat MOTORS dealer. 7
NOTE
E00719001131
 Do not store cup or drink can in the bottle
The cup holder is located at the right side of CAUTION holder.
the third seat.  Do not drink beverages while driving. This is  Tightly close the cap on drink bottles before
The cup holder is designed for holding cups distracting and could cause an accident. storing them.
or drink-cans securely in its holes.  Drinks could be spilled by the vibration and  Some bottles may be too big or the wrong
jolts while driving. If the spilt drink is very shape to fit in the holder.
hot, you could be burnt.
The bottle holders are provided at both sides Convenient hook

of front and rear doors. E00732901254
Light items of luggage can be hung from the

hook.

Assist grip
7
NOTE CAUTION WARNING
 Do not hang heavy luggage (more than about  Do not use the assist grips when getting into  Do not put a hanger or any heavy or
4 kg) on the hook. or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur-
Doing so could cause damage to the hook. detach causing you to fall. tain airbag was activated, any such item
could be propelled away with great force
and could prevent the curtain airbag from
inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly
Assist grip Coat hook on the coat hook (without using a hanger).
E00732801413 E00725601709
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp
The assist grips (located above the doors on There is a coat hook on the rear seat assist objects in the pockets of clothes that you
the headliner) are not designed to support grip. hang on the coat hook.
body weight. They are intended for use only
while seated in the vehicle.
Luggage hooks
E00715701664
There are 6 hooks on the floor, the third seat-

back and the side of the luggage compart-
ment.

Luggage hooks
Use the hooks on the floor for securing the
luggage.
Third seatback
Fold the third seatback, pull up the cover (A).

CAUTION
 Do not pile up the luggage beyond the seat-
back height. Also, firmly secure the luggage.
Otherwise, serious accidents could result due
to hindered rearward view or flying objects
during sudden braking.
Floor and side 7
NOTE
 Do not hang heavy luggage (more than about
4 kg) on the hook (Side).
Doing so could cause damage to the hook.

For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2

If the operation mode cannot be changed to OFF ............................8-2
Emergency starting ..........................................................................8-2
Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-3
Bleeding the fuel system ..................................................................8-5
Removal of water from the fuel filter ..............................................8-5
Tools, jack and jack handle ..............................................................8-6
Tyre repair kit ..................................................................................8-7 8
How to change a tyre .....................................................................8-14
Towing ...........................................................................................8-18
Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-21
If the vehicle breaks down
2. One of the other causes could be low bat-
If the vehicle breaks down tery voltage. If this occurs, the keyless
CAUTION
 Check the other vehicle. It must have a
E00800101137
entry system, keyless operation function,
12-volt battery.
If the vehicle breaks down on the road, move and steering lock will also not operate.
If the other system isn’t 12-volt, shorting can
it to the shoulder and use the hazard warning Contact an authorised MITSUBISHI damage both vehicles.
flashers and/or the warning triangle etc. MOTORS dealer.  Use the proper cables suitable for the battery
Refer to “Hazard warning flasher switch” on size to prevent overheating of the cables.
page 5-83.
Emergency starting  Check the jumper cables for damage and cor-
rosion before use.
E00800504493
If the engine stops/fails If the engine cannot be started because the
 Always wear protective eye goggles when
working near the battery.
battery is weak or dead, the battery from  Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
Vehicle operation and control are affected if another vehicle can be used with jumper
8 the engine stops. Before moving the vehicle cables to start the engine. 1. Get the vehicles close enough so the
to a safe area, be aware of the following: jumper cables can reach, but be sure the
vehicles aren’t touching each other.
 The brake booster becomes inoperative WARNING 2. Turn off all lamps, heater and other elec-
and the pedal effort will increase. Press  To start the engine using jumper cables trical loads.
down the brake pedal harder than usual. from another vehicle, perform the correct
3. Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
procedures according to the instruction
 Since the power steering system is no cle. Put an A/T in “P” (PARK) or a M/T in
below. Incorrect procedures could result
longer operative, the steering wheel feels “N” (Neutral). Stop the engine.
in a fire or explosion or damage to the
heavy when turning it. vehicles.
 Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames away WARNING
If the operation mode can- from the battery because the battery may  Turn off the ignition on both vehicles
beforehand. Make sure that the cables or
produce an explosion.
not be changed to OFF your clothes cannot be caught by the fans
E00804900181 or drive belt. Personal injury could result.
If the operation mode cannot be changed to CAUTION
OFF, perform the following procedure.  Do not attempt to start the engine by pulling 4. Make sure battery electrolyte is at the
or pushing the vehicle. proper level.
1. Move the selector lever to the “P” It could damage your vehicle.
Refer to “Battery” on page 10-8.
(PARK) position, and then change the
operation mode to OFF.
8-2 For emergencies

Engine overheating
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has
WARNING the booster battery, let the engine idle a
 If electrolyte fluid is not visible, or
few minutes, then start the engine in the
appears to be frozen, Do Not Attempt
vehicle with the discharged battery.
Jump Starting!
A battery might rupture or explode if the
temperature is below the freezing point or CAUTION
if it is not filled to the proper level.  Keep the engine of the vehicle giving assis-
 Electrolyte is corrosive diluted sulphuric tance running.
acid.
If electrolyte (battery acid) comes into 7. After the engine is started, disconnect the
contact with your hands, eyes, clothes or cables in the reverse order and keep the
the painted surface of your vehicle, it
engine running for several minutes.
should be thoroughly flushed with water. WARNING
If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
 Make sure that the connection is made NOTE 8
with water immediately and thoroughly,
to the appointed position (shown in the
and get prompt medical attention.  If the vehicle is put in motion without fully
illustration). If the connection is made
charging the battery, it might cause the loss
directly to the negative (−) side of the bat-
of the smooth engine operation and the anti-
5. Connect one end of one jumper cable tery, the inflammable gases generated
lock brake warning lamp to illuminate.
to the positive (+) terminal of the dis- from the battery might catch fire and
Refer to “Anti-lock brake system (ABS)” on
explode.
charged battery (A), and the other end page 6-57.
 When connecting the jumper cables, do
to the positive (+) terminal of the booster not connect the positive (+) cable to the
battery (B). negative (−) terminal. Otherwise sparks
Connect one end of the other jumper cable might cause explosion of the battery. Engine overheating
to the negative (−) terminal of the E00800604159
booster battery (B), and the other end When the engine is overheating, the informa-
to the engine block of the vehicle with the CAUTION tion screen in the multi information display
discharged battery at the point farthest  Use care not to get the jumper cable caught will be interrupted and the engine coolant
from the battery. in the cooling fans or other rotating part in temperature warning display will appear.
the engine compartment.
Also “ ” will blink.
If this occurs, take the following corrective

measures:
For emergencies 8-3

Engine overheating
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. After the high coolant temperature warn-
2. Check whether steam is coming from the ing has gone off, stop the engine.
engine compartment. [If the cooling fans are not turning]
Stop the engine immediately and contact
[If steam does not come from the engine an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
compartment] FULL
dealer for assistance.
With the engine still running, raise the
bonnet to ventilate the engine compart-
ment. LOW
[If steam is coming from the engine com-

partment]
Stop the engine, and when the steam 5. Add coolant to the radiator and/or reserve
tank if necessary (refer to the “Mainte-
8 stops, raise the bonnet to ventilate the
nance” section).
engine compartment. Restart the engine.
WARNING WARNING
 Do not open the bonnet while steam is A- Cooling fans  Make sure that the engine has cooled
down before removing the radiator cap
coming from the engine compartment. It B- Reserve tank
could cause steam or hot water to spurt (C), because hot steam or boiling water
C- Radiator cap
out, causing burns. Hot water could spurt otherwise will gush from the filler port
*: If so equipped and may scald you.
out even when there is no steam coming
out, and some parts will be very hot. Be
very careful when opening the bonnet.
WARNING CAUTION
 Be careful of hot steam, which could be
 Be careful not to get your hands or clothes
blowing off the reserve tank cap.  Do not add coolant while the engine is hot.
caught in the cooling fans.
 Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap Suddenly adding cold coolant could damage
while the engine is hot. the engine. Wait for the engine to cool down,
4. Check the coolant level in the reserve tank then add coolant a little at a time.
(B).
3. Confirm that the cooling fans (A) are
turning. 6. Examine the radiator hoses for coolant
[If the cooling fans are turning] leakage and the drive belt for looseness or
damage.
8-4 For emergencies

Bleeding the fuel system
If there is anything wrong with the cool-
ing system or drive belt, have the problem
CAUTION
 Be sure to carefully clean away any spilt fuel
corrected at an authorised MITSUBISHI
which could ignite and cause a fire.
MOTORS dealer.
Bleeding the fuel system Removal of water from the

E00800701537 fuel filter
E00800801639
The fuel system should be bled to remove air
as described below if the fuel supply is If the fuel filter indicator display on the infor-
exhausted during travel. mation screen in the multi information dis-
Pump the hand pump (A) at the top of the fuel play appears during driving, it indicates that
2. Operate the hand pump (B) slowly 6 or
filter until the hand pump becomes stiff. water has accumulated in the fuel filter. If this
7 times in order to force the water out
Then try again to start the engine. occurs, remove the water as described below.
through the drain plug (A). 8
If the engine does not start, repeat the process
above. Indicator display
1. Loosen the drain plug (A) of the fuel fil-

ter.
3. Tighten the drain plug (A) when water no

longer comes out.
4. Bleed the air in the fuel system.
CAUTION (Refer to “Bleeding the fuel system” on
 Do not smoke or have any other open flame page 8-5.)
near the vehicle while bleeding the fuel sys-
tem.
For emergencies 8-5

Tools, jack and jack handle
5. Check to be sure that the fuel filter indica- 4- Hexagon wrench*
tor display does not appear when the oper- (Refer to “When the Electric parking
ation mode is put in ON. If in doubt, brake cannot be released” on page 6-8.)
consult your nearest authorised
Removing and storing the tools,
jack and jack handle
 Do not smoke or have any other open flame 1. While pressing the knob (A), remove the
near the vehicle while bleeding the fuel sys- lid (B).
tem.
 Be sure to carefully clean away any water A- Tools and jack handle
drained out because any fuel mixed with the B- Jack
water could ignite and cause a fire.
8
Tools and jack handle
Tools, jack and jack handle E00801902155
E00800902725
Storage
The tools, jack and jack handle are stowed in 2. Remove the securing band (C), and then
the luggage compartment. take out the tools and jack handle (D).
The storage location of the tools, jack and
jack handle should be remembered in case of
an emergency.
1- Tool bag
2- Wheel nut wrench
3- Jack handle
8-6 For emergencies

Tyre repair kit
Tyre repair kit

E00804501227
This kit enables emergency repair of a small

puncture in the tread area of a tyre that has
run over a nail, screw, or similar object.
Storage
The tyre repair kit is stored beneath the lug-

A- Thin handle section (with notch) gage floor board of the luggage compartment.
3. Remove the securing band (E) and the B- Thick handle section The storage location of the tyre repair kit
securing nut (F), and then take out the
jack (G).
C- Thin handle section should be remembered in case of an emer- 8
gency.
2. With the snap pin (D) pressed, insert han-
dle section (A) into handle section (B)
until it is locked. Insert handle section (C)
into handle section (B) in the same way.
4. Reverse the removing procedure when

storing the tools, jack and jack handle.
To use the jack handle

E00802401206
1. Check that you have all sections of the

handle.
For emergencies 8-7
Tyre repair kit
How to use the tyre repair kit NOTE

E00804601231  The tyre sealant cannot be used in any of the
situations listed below. If any of these situa-
WARNING tions occurs, please contact an authorised
 Using the tyre repair kit may damage the MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or another
wheel and/or the tyre inflation pressure specialist.
sensor for the tyre. • The tyre sealant’s expiry date has passed.
The vehicle must promptly be inspected (The expiry date is shown on the bottle
and repaired by an authorised label.)
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer after
using the tyre repair kit.
8 CAUTION
 The tyre sealant can cause health damage if
swallowed. If you accidentally swallow it,
drink as much water as possible and immedi-
ately have yourself examined by a doctor.
• More than one tyre is punctured.
 If the tyre sealant gets in your eyes or on
• The puncture hole has a length or width of
your skin, rinse it away with lots of water. If
4 mm or more.
you still sense an abnormality, have yourself
examined by a doctor. • The tyre is punctured in the side wall (A),
not in the tread (B).
 Consult a doctor immediately if any allergic
reactions occur.
 Be careful not to allow children to touch the
1- Tyre repair set tyre sealant.
2- Tyre compressor  Do not breathe in the vapours of tyre sealant.
3- Tyre sealant bottle  Be sure to use a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
4- Filler hose GENUINE tyre sealant.
5- Valve remover
6- Valve insert (spare)
7- Speed restriction sticker • The vehicle has been driven with the tyre
almost completely flat.
8-8 For emergencies

Tyre repair kit
4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a 7. Remove the valve insert (F) by turning it
NOTE warning triangle, flashing signal lamp, anticlockwise using the valve remover
• The tyre has completely slipped over the
etc., at an adequate distance from the (E). Put the removed valve insert in a
wheel rim and come off the wheel.
vehicle, and have all your passengers clean place so it does not get dirty.
• The wheel is damaged.
leave the vehicle.
 Use the tyre sealant only at ambient tempera-
5. Take out the tyre repair kit.
tures of -30 °C to + 60 °C.
6. Take the valve cap (C) off the tyre valve
 Effect an emergency repair without pulling
out the object (nail, screw, etc.) that is stuck (D), then press the valve remover (E) onto
in the tyre. the valve as illustrated. Allow all of the
 Do not use the tyre sealant if the tyre has air in the tyre to escape.
been damaged by being driven when insuffi-
ciently inflated (e.g. bumps, cuts, cracks etc.
on the tyre).
 Wipe tyre sealant off the paintwork immedi- 8
ately with a damp cloth.
 Immediately wash clothes contaminated with
tyre sealant. CAUTION
 Check the tyre sealant’s expiry date regu-  If there is any air left in the tyre when you
larly, and be sure to purchase a new one from remove the valve insert, the valve insert may
an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS fly out and injure you. Make sure the tyre
dealer before the expiry date. contains no air before removing the valve
insert.
Before repairing a tyre, first stop your vehicle
in a safe, flat location.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable

ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. Move the selector lever to the “P”
(PARK) position, and stop the engine.
For emergencies 8-9

Tyre repair kit
8. Shake the tyre sealant bottle well. 9. Take the cap (G) off the tyre sealant bottle 10. Press the hose onto the valve (D). Holding
(H). Do not remove the seal (I). Screw the the sealant bottle upside-down, squeeze it
filler hose (J) onto the bottle (H). As you again and again to inject all of the sealant
screw the filler hose onto the bottle, the into the tyre.
seal will break, allowing the sealant to be
used.
8 NOTE
 In cold conditions (when the ambient tem-
perature is 0 °C or lower), thickening of the
tyre sealant can make the tyre sealant hard to NOTE
squeeze out of the bottle. Warm the bottle  When injecting the sealant, position the
inside the vehicle. CAUTION valve away from the bottom, i.e., away from
 If you shake the bottle after screwing on the the point where the tyre touches the ground.
hose, sealant may spray out of the hose. If the valve is near the point where the tyre
touches the ground, the sealant may not go
into the tyre easily.
8-10 For emergencies

Tyre repair kit
11. After injecting the sealant, pull the hose 12. After injecting the sealant, securely fit the Pull out the compressor’s power cord (N),
off the valve, remove any residual sealant valve remover (E) into the end of the filler insert the plug on the cord into the acces-
from the valve, rim and/or tyre. Fit the hose (J) to prevent sealant from leaking sory socket (O), and then put the opera-
valve insert (F) into the valve (D), and from the empty bottle. tion mode of the power switch in ACC.
screw the valve insert securely into place (Refer to “Accessory socket” on page
using the valve remover (E). 7-16.)
Turn ON the compressor switch (P) and
inflate the tyre to the specified pressure.
(Refer to “Tyre inflation pressures” on
page 10-11.)
8
13. Pull out the compressor hose (K) from the
side of the tyre compressor, and then
securely attach the hose to the tyre valve
NOTE (D).
 When removing and screwing in the valve
insert using the valve remover, turn the valve
remover by hand. Using a tool to turn the
valve remover could damage it.
14. Place the compressor (L) with its air pres-

sure gauge (M) on top.
For emergencies 8-11

Tyre repair kit
17. Affix the speed restriction sticker (Q) to
CAUTION CAUTION the three-diamond mark on the steering
 The supplied compressor is designed only  The surface of the compressor will get hot
wheel.
for inflation of your vehicle tyres. while the compressor is running. Do not
 The compressor is designed to run on a vehi- keep the compressor running continuously
cle’s 12 V power supply. Do not connect it to for more than 15 minutes. After using the
any other power source. compressor, wait for the compressor to cool
 The compressor is not waterproof. If you use before using it again.
it in rain, make sure water does not get on it.  If the compressor becomes sluggish or hot
 Any sand or dust sucked into the compressor while operating, it is overheating. Immedi-
could make the compressor break down. Do ately place the switch in the OFF position
not place the compressor directly on any and let the compressor cool down for at least
sandy or dusty surface when using it. 30 minutes.
 Do not disassemble or modify the compres-
8 sor. Also, do not subject the air pressure
gauge to shock. It could malfunction. NOTE
 If the tyre pressure does not rise to the speci- CAUTION
fied level within 15 minutes, the tyre may be  Do not affix the sticker anywhere except the
15. Check and adjust the tyre pressure with
so severely damaged that the tyre sealant specified position on the pad of the steering
reference to the air pressure gauge on the
cannot be used to effect an emergency repair. wheel. Affixing the sticker in an incorrect
compressor. If you overinflate the tyre, Please contact an authorised MITSUBISHI position could prevent the SRS airbag from
release air by loosening the hose’s end fit- MOTORS dealer or another specialist in this working normally.
ting. event.
If there is a gap between the tyre and
wheel because the tyre has moved inward 18. When you have inflated the tyre to the
16. Turn OFF the compressor switch, then specified pressure, stow the compressor,
from the wheel rim, press the periphery of
pull the power cord plug out of the socket. bottle, and other items in the vehicle and
the tyre towards the wheel to close the gap
before running the compressor. (With no promptly start driving the vehicle so that
NOTE the tyre sealant can spread evenly in the
gaps, the tyre pressure will rise.)
 Simply putting sealant and air into the tyre tyre. Drive with great care. Do not exceed
using the tyre repair kit does not seal the a speed of 80 km/h. Observe local speed
CAUTION puncture hole. Air will leak through the limits.
 Be careful not to get your fingers trapped puncture hole until the emergency repair pro-
between the tyre and wheel as the tyre cedure is completed (through step 19 or step
inflates. 20 of these instructions).

Tyre repair kit
20. After driving for 10 minutes or 5 km, 21. Immediately drive with great care to an
CAUTION check the tyre pressure using the air pres- authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
 If you sense any abnormality while driving,
sure gauge on the compressor. If the tyre dealer and have tyre repair/replacement
stop the vehicle and contact an authorised
pressure has apparently not dropped, the performed.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or another
specialist. Otherwise the tyre pressure may emergency repair procedure is complete.
drop before the emergency repair procedure You must still not exceed a speed of CAUTION
is completed, rendering the vehicle unsafe. 80 km/h. Observe local speed limits.  Be sure to check the tyre pressure for confir-
mation that the emergency repair procedure
NOTE is complete.
NOTE  If the tyre pressure has dropped below the
 Driving faster than 80 km/h can make the specified level when you check it at the end
vehicle vibrate. of the repair procedure, do not drive the NOTE
vehicle any further. Contact an authorised  Please give the empty sealant bottle to your
19. After driving for 10 minutes or 5 km,
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or another authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer 8
specialist. when you purchase new sealant or dispose of
check the tyre pressure using the air pres-  In cold conditions (when the ambient tem- the sealant bottle according to national regu-
sure gauge on the compressor. If the tyre perature is 0 °C or lower), the time and driv- lations for the disposal of chemical waste.
pressure has apparently not dropped, the ing distance necessary until completion of  A tyre in which puncture sealant has been
emergency repair procedure is complete. the repair can be longer than in warmer con- used should ideally be replaced with a new
Continue the process from step 21. ditions, meaning that the tyre pressure can one. If you wish to have such a tyre properly
If the tyre pressure is not sufficient, inflate drop below the specified level even when repaired for reuse, please contact an author-
the tyre to the specified pressure again you have inflated the tyre a second time and ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or
subsequently driven the vehicle. If this hap- another specialist. Note that a proper repair
and drive the vehicle carefully without
pens, inflate the tyre to the specified pressure is impossible following an emergency repair
exceeding a speed of 80 km/h.
once more, drive for about 10 minutes or 5 if the puncture hole cannot be located.
km, then check the tyre pressure again. If the  The manufacturer is unable to guarantee that
CAUTION tyre pressure has again dropped below the all tyre punctures can be repaired with the
 If the tyre pressure is lower than the mini- specified level, stop driving the vehicle and tyre repair kit, in particular cuts or perfora-
mum permitted pressure (1.3 bar {130 kPa}), contact an authorised MITSUBISHI tions with a diameter of more than 4 mm or
the tyre cannot successfully be repaired with MOTORS dealer or another specialist. away from the tyre’s tread. The manufacturer
the tyre sealant. Do not drive the vehicle any is not liable for damage sustained through
further. Contact an authorised MITSUBISHI improper use of the tyre repair kit.
MOTORS dealer or another specialist.

How to change a tyre
NOTE To change a tyre

 The manufacturer is not liable for damage E00803202530
sustained through re-use of any tyre in which 1. Loosen the wheel nuts a quarter turn with
tyre sealant has been used. the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the
wheel nuts yet.
E00801204181
Before changing a tyre, first stop your vehicle

in a safe, flat location.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable

ground, free of loose pebbles, etc. WARNING
8 2. Set the parking brake firmly.  Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the
3. Move the selector lever to the “P” correct tyre when jacking up the vehicle.
If the vehicle moves while jacked up, the
(PARK) position and put the operation
jack could slip out of position, leading to
mode in OFF.
an accident. 2. Place the jack under one of the jacking
4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a
warning triangle, flashing signal lamp, points shown in the illustration. Use the
etc., at an adequate distance from the jacking point closest to the tyre you wish
NOTE to change.
vehicle, and have all your passengers
 The chocks shown in the illustration do not
leave the vehicle. come with your vehicle. It is recommended
5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when that you keep ones in the vehicle for use if
jacking up the vehicle, place chocks or needed.
blocks (A) at the tyre that is diagonally  If chocks are not available, use stones or any
opposite from the tyre (B) you are chang- other objects that are large enough to hold
ing. the wheel in position.
6. Get the jack, jack handle and wheel nut

wrench ready.
Refer to “Tools, jack and jack handle” on
page 8-6. A- Front jacking point

5. Move the jack handle up and down to
NOTE raise the ram until just before the jack
 When jacking up the rear of the vehicle, turn
contacts the jacking point of the vehicle.
the tip of the jack so that the grooved portion
Ensure that the jack will properly contact
(C) properly meets the designated point.
the vehicle jacking point.
Move the jack handle up and down to
raise the vehicle.
B- Rear jacking point
8
WARNING 3. Using the jack handle, turn the release
 Set the jack only at the positions shown valve (D) clockwise until it stops.
here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,
it could dent your vehicle or the jack
might fall over and cause personal injury.
 Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-
face. Otherwise, the jack might slip and
NOTE
cause personal injury. Always use the jack  This jack is a 2 stage expansion type.
on a flat, hard surface. Before setting the
jack, make sure there are no sand or peb-
bles under the jack base. WARNING
 Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the
tyre is raised off the ground. It is danger-
ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
4. Insert the jack handle in the bracket of the  Do not get under your vehicle while using
the jack.
jack and hook the notch (E) on the jack
 Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
handle end to the claw (F) of the bracket.
sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
are very dangerous.

8. Turn the wheel nuts clockwise by hand to
WARNING initially tighten them.
 Do not use a jack except the one that came
Tighten the wheel nuts until the flanges of
with your vehicle.
the wheel nuts touch the wheel and the
 The jack should not be used for any pur-
wheel is not loose.
pose other than to change a tyre.
 No one should be in your vehicle when
using the jack.
 Do not start or run the engine while your
vehicle is on the jack.
 Do not turn the raised wheel. The tyres
still on the ground could turn and make
your vehicle fall off the jack.
WARNING
8 6. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut  Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem
wrench, then take the wheel off. (J) facing outboard. If you cannot see the
valve stem (J), you have installed the
CAUTION wheel backwards.
 Handle the wheel carefully when changing Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel CAUTION
the tyre, to avoid scratching the wheel sur- installed backwards can cause vehicle
 Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or
face. damage and result in an accident.
the nuts or they will tighten too much.
7. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-

face (G), hub bolts (H) or in the installa- NOTE
tion holes (I) in the wheel, and then mount  If all 4 aluminium wheels are changed to
the spare wheel. steel wheels, e.g. when fitting winter tyres,
use tapered nuts.
9. Put the notch (K) provided on the jack

handle end on the valve (L) of the jack.
Using the jack handle, turn the release
valve anticlockwise slowly to lower the
vehicle until the tyre touches the ground.

NOTE
 Occasionally when the vehicle is jacked up,
the grooved portion of the designated point
will not come off. When this happens, rock
the vehicle to lower the ram.
 If the jack is difficult to remove by hand,
insert the jack handle (M) into the bracket
(N). Then using the handle, remove the jack.
WARNING CAUTION
 Be sure to open the release valve slowly. If  Never use your foot or a pipe extension for 8
it is opened quickly, the vehicle will drop extra force in the wheel nut wrench. If you
abruptly and the jack may come out of do so, you will tighten the nut too much.
AHZ101131
position, causing a serious accident.
11. Lower the jack all the way and remove it.
10. Tighten the nuts crisscross in 2 or 3 steps 12. Push the piston down all the way, and turn
until each nut has been tightened securely. CAUTION the release valve clockwise as far as pos-
sible.
 If the release valve is loosened too much
Tightening torque 13. Check your tyre inflation pressure. The
(2 or more turns) in the anticlockwise direc-
118 to 137 N•m correct pressures are shown on the door
tion, the jack’s oil will leak and the jack can-
(Achieved by applying a force of 440 to not be used. label. See the illustration.
500 N at the end of the wheel nut  Close the release valve slowly when lower-
wrench supplied with the vehicle.) ing the vehicle, or the valve may be dam-
aged.

Towing
The regulations concerning towing may differ
Towing from country to country. It is recommended
E00801506537
that you obey the regulations of the area
where you are driving your vehicle.
If your vehicle needs to be
towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to

have it done by your authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or a com-
mercial tow truck service.
CAUTION In the following cases, transport the vehicle
8  After changing the tyre and driving the vehi- using a tow truck.
cle about 1,000 km, retighten the wheel nuts
to make sure that they have not come loose.
 The engine runs but the vehicle does not
 If the steering wheel vibrates when driving
move, or an abnormal noise is produced.
after changing the tyre, have the tyre  Inspection of the vehicle’s underside
checked for balance at your nearest author- reveals that oil or some other fluid is leak-
ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. ing.
 Do not mix one type of tyre with another or
use a different size from the one listed. This If a wheel gets stuck in a ditch, do not try to
would cause early wear and poor handling. tow the vehicle. Please contact your author-
ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer or a
commercial tow truck service for assistance.
To store the tools, jack and jack
Only when you cannot receive a towing ser-
handle vice from an authorised MITSUBISHI
E00803801193
MOTORS dealer or commercial tow truck
Reverse the removing procedure when stor- service, tow your vehicle carefully in accord-
ing the jack, jack handle and wheel nut ance with the instructions given in “Emer-
wrench. gency towing” in this part.
Refer to “Tools, jack and jack handle” on
page 8-6.
Towing
Towing the vehicle by a tow CAUTION Towing with rear wheels off the
truck  If you tow the vehicles with the driving ground (Type C)
wheels on the ground (Type B) as illustrated,
make sure that the towing speed and distance
Place the selector lever in the “N” (NEU-
CAUTION given below are never exceeded, causing
TRAL) position. Put the operation mode in
damage to the transmission.
 This vehicle must not be towed by a tow ACC and secure the steering wheel in a
truck using sling lift type equipment (Type Towing speed: 30 km/h straight-ahead position with a rope or tie-
A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam- Towing distance: 80 km down strap. Never put the operation mode in
age the bumper and front end.
OFF when towing.
 On 4WD vehicles, transport the vehicle with For the towing speed and the towing dis-
the driving wheels on a carriage (Type D or tance, follow the local driving laws and regu-
E) as illustrated. Never try to tow with the lations. Emergency towing
front or rear wheels on the ground (Type B or
C) as illustrated. This could result in the 8
driving system damage or vehicle may jump Towing with front wheels off the If towing service is not available in an emer-
at the carriage. ground (Type B) gency, your vehicle may be temporarily
 As your vehicle is equipped with the Active towed by a rope secured to the towing hook.
Stability & Traction Control system (ASTC), If your vehicle is to be towed by another
Place the selector lever in the “N” (NEU-
if the vehicle is towed with the operation vehicle or if your vehicle tows another vehi-
TRAL) position.
mode in ON and only the front wheels or cle, pay careful attention to the following
Release the parking brake.
only the rear wheels raised off the ground, points.
the active traction control system may oper-
ate, resulting in an accident. CAUTION If your vehicle is to be towed by
 On 2WD vehicles, if the transmission is mal-  Never tow a vehicle with the front wheels up
functioning or damaged, transport the vehi- (and the rear wheels on the ground) (Type B) another vehicle
cle with the driving wheels on a carriage when the A/T fluid level is low. This may
(Type C, D or E) as illustrated. cause serious and expensive damage to the 1. The front towing hook (A) is located as
transmission. shown in the illustration. Secure the tow
rope to the front towing hook.

Towing
2. Keep the engine running. 5. Turn on the hazard warning lamps if
If the engine is not running, put the opera- required by law. (Follow the local driving
tion mode in ON to unlock the steering laws and regulations.)
wheel. 6. During towing make sure that close con-
tact is maintained between the drivers of
WARNING both vehicles, and that the vehicles travel
 When the engine is not running, the brake at low speed.
booster and power steering pump do not
operate. This means higher brake depres- WARNING
sion force and higher steering effort are  Avoid sudden braking, acceleration and
required. Therefore, vehicle operation is steering wheel movements; such driving
very difficult. operation could cause damage to the tow-
CAUTION ing hook or towing rope.
8  Do not use the tie-down hook (B) for towing. People in the vicinity could be injured as a
This hook is provided only for the purpose of CAUTION result.
transporting the vehicle itself.  Do not leave the operation mode in OFF. The  When going down a long slope, the brakes
Using any part other than the designated steering wheel will lock, causing loss of con- may overheat, reducing effectiveness.
towing hook (A) could result in damage to trol. Have your vehicle transport by a tow
vehicle body.  For vehicle equipped with the Adaptive truck.
Cruise Control system (ACC) and Forward
Collision Mitigation system (FCM), stop
NOTE these systems to prevent an unexpected acci- CAUTION
 Using a wire rope or metal chain can result dent or unexpected operation during towing.  The person in the vehicle being towed must
in damage to the vehicle body. It is best to Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control system pay attention to the brake lamps of the tow-
use a non-metallic rope. If you use a wire (ACC)” on page 6-69 and “Forward Colli- ing vehicle and make sure the rope never
rope or metal chain, wrap it with cloth at any sion Mitigation system (FCM)” on page becomes slack.
point where it touches the vehicle body. 6-83.
 Use care that the tow rope is kept as horizon-
tal as possible. An angled tow rope can dam- 3. Place the selector lever in the “N” (NEU-
age the vehicle body. TRAL) position.
 Secure the tow rope to the same side towing 4. On 4WD vehicles, set the drive mode-
hook, to keep the tow rope as straight as pos- selector to “2H” position.
sible.

Operation under adverse driving conditions
CAUTION NOTE
 When the vehicle is to be towed by another  Do not tow a vehicle heavier than your own
vehicle with the all wheels on the ground, vehicle.
make sure that the towing speed and distance
given below are never exceeded, avoiding
damage to the transmission.
Towing speed: 30 km/h

Towing distance: 80 km
For the towing speed and the towing dis-

tance, follow the local driving laws and regu-
lations.
CAUTION
 Do not use the tie-down hook (B) for towing. 8
If your vehicle tows another vehi- This hook is provided only for the purpose of Operation under adverse
cle transporting the vehicle itself.
driving conditions
Using any part other than the designated
towing hook (A) could result in damage to E00801703987
Only use the rear towing hook (A) as shown vehicle body.
in the illustration. Secure the tow rope to the
rear towing hook.
 On 4WD vehicles, when you are going to On a flooded road
tow another vehicle, set the drive mode-
Otherwise, the instructions are the same as selector to “4H” position.  Avoid flooded roads. In the event driving
for “When being towed by another vehicle”. Selecting “2H” drive may increase the differ- flooded roads, doing so may cause the fol-
ential oil temperature, resulting in possible
lowing serious damage to the vehicle.
damage to the driving system.
• Engine stalling
Further, the drive train will be subjected to
excessive loading possibly leading to oil • Short in electrical components
leakage, component seizure, or other serious • Engine damage caused by water immer-
faults. sion
After driving flooded roads, be sure to
have an inspection at an authorised
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer and take
the necessary measures or repair.

Operation under adverse driving conditions
 Depressing the brake pedal during travel
On a wet road on snowy or icy roads may cause tyre
CAUTION
 The impact on tyres and/or wheels when
 When driving in rain or on a road with slippage and skidding. When traction
driving on a bumpy or rutted road can dam-
many puddles a layer of water may form between the tyres and the road is reduced
age the tyre and/or wheel.
between the tyres and the road surface. the wheels may skid and the vehicle can-
This reduces a tyre’s frictional resistance not readily be brought to a stop by con-
on the road, resulting in loss of steering ventional braking techniques. Braking
stability and braking capability. will differ, depending upon whether you
have anti-lock brake system (ABS). As
To cope with this, observe the following your vehicle is equipped with anti-lock
items: brake system (ABS), brake by pressing
the brake pedal hard, and keeping it
(a) Drive your vehicle at a slow speed. pressed.
8 (b) Do not drive on worn tyres.  Allow extra distance between your vehi-
(c) Always maintain the specified tyre cle and the vehicle in front of you, and
inflation pressures. avoid sudden braking.
 Accumulation of ice on the braking sys-
tem can cause the wheels to lock. Pull
On a snow-covered or frozen away from a standstill slowly after con-
firming safety around the vehicle.
road
 When driving on a snow-covered or fro- CAUTION
zen road, it is recommended that you use  Do not press the accelerator pedal rapidly. If
snow tyres or snow traction device (tyre the wheels break free of the ice, the vehicle
could suddenly start moving and possibly
chains).
cause an accident.
Refer to the “Snow tyres” and “Snow
traction device (tyre chains)” sections.
 Avoid high-speed operation, sudden
acceleration, abrupt brake application and On a bumpy or rutted road
sharp cornering.
Drive as slow as possible when driving on
bumpy or rutted roads.

Vehicle care
Vehicle care precautions ..................................................................9-2

Cleaning the interior of your vehicle ...............................................9-2
Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle ..............................................9-3
9
Vehicle care precautions
2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out
Vehicle care precautions Cleaning the interior of your well. Using this cloth, wipe off the deter-
E00900102005
vehicle gent thoroughly.
In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, E00900201865
it is necessary to perform regular mainte- After cleaning the interior of your vehicle NOTE
nance using the proper procedures. with water, cleaner or similar, wipe and dry in  Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-
Always maintain your vehicle in compliance a shady, well-ventilated area. tectants containing silicones or wax.
with any environmental pollution control reg- Such products can cause discolouring and,
ulations. when applied to the instrument panels or
Carefully select the materials used for wash- NOTE other parts, may cause reflections on the
ing, etc., to be sure that they do not contain  To clean the inside of the rear window, windscreen and obscure vision.
always use a soft cloth and wipe the window Also, if such products get on the switches of
corrosives; if in doubt, we recommend you to
glass along the demister heater element and the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-
consult a specialist for the selection of these ure of these accessories.
the glass antenna (if so equipped) so as not to
materials. cause damage.  Do not use synthetic fiber or dry cloth. They
9 can cause discolouring or damaging the sur-
CAUTION face.
 Cleaning products can be dangerous. Always CAUTION  Do not place a deodorizer on the instrument
follow the instructions of the cleaning prod-  Do not use organic substances (solvents, panel or near lamps and instruments. The
uct supplier. benzine, kerosene, alcohol, petrol, etc.) or ingredients for deodorizer can cause discol-
 To avoid damage, never use the following to alkaline or acidic solutions. ouring or cracking.
clean your vehicle. These chemicals can cause discolouring,
• Petrol staining or cracking of the surface.
• Paint Thinner If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make Upholstery
• Benzine sure their ingredients do not include the sub- E00900500207
• Kerosene stances mentioned above. 1. To maintain the value of your new vehi-
• Turpentine cle, handle the upholstery carefully and
• Naphtha keep the interior clean.
• Lacquer Thinner Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and
• Carbon Tetrachloride flocked parts
• Nail Polish Remover E00900301589
• Acetone 1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth
soaked in a mild soap and water solution.
9-2 Vehicle care

Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean
the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic
NOTE CAUTION
 Remove dirty patches or oil substances  If your vehicle is equipped with the electric
leather should be cleaned with an appro-
quickly as they can stain genuine leather. tailgate, turn the automatic operation OFF
priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be
 The genuine leather surface may harden and before you wash or wax the surrounding area
cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a of the kick motion sensor or install/remove a
shrink if it is exposed to direct rays of the
mild soap and water solution. sun for long hours. When your vehicle is car cover, etc.
2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum parked, place it in the shade as much as pos- If the hands-free access remains on, you may
cleaner and remove any stains with carpet sible. be injured due to a sudden operating of the
cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by  When the temperature of the vehicle interior electric tailgate resulting from a possible
lightly dabbing with a clean colourfast rises in summer, vinyl products left on the reaction of the kick motion sensor.
cloth and stain remover. genuine leather seat may deteriorate and Refer to “Switching automatic operation of
stick to the seat. the electric tailgate ON/OFF” on page 3-26.
Genuine leather
E00900602000 Cleaning the exterior of Washing
1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a your vehicle E00900904427
9
soft cloth soaked in a mild soap and water
solution.
E00900701310
Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust
2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out If the following is left on your vehicle, it may picked up from the road surface can damage
well. Using this cloth, wipe off the deter- cause corrosion, discolouration and stains, the paint coat and body of your vehicle if left
gent thoroughly. wash the vehicle as soon as possible. in prolonged contact.
3. Apply leather protecting agent to the gen- Frequent washing and waxing is the best way
 Seawater, road deicing products. to protect your vehicle from this damage.
uine leather surface.
 Soot and dust, iron powder from factories, This will also be effective in protecting it
chemical substance (acids, alkalis, coal- from environmental elements such as rain,
NOTE tar, etc.). snow, salt air, etc.
 If genuine leather is wet with water or is  Droppings from birds, carcasses of Using an ample amount of clean water and a
washed in water, wipe off water as quickly as insects, tree sap, etc. car washing brush or sponge, wash the vehi-
possible with a dry, soft cloth. cle from top to bottom.
If left damp, mildew may grow.
Use a mild car washing soap if necessary.
 Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene,
Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a soft
alcohol and petrol, acid or alkaline solvents
may discolour the genuine leather surface.
cloth. After washing the vehicle, carefully
Be sure to use neutral detergents. clean the joints and flanges of the doors, bon-
Vehicle care 9-3

net and other sections where dirt is likely to
remain.
CAUTION CAUTION
• When washing around the door glass, hold • If your vehicle is equipped with the Ultra-
the nozzle at a distance of more than 70 cm sonic misacceleration Mitigation System
CAUTION and at right angles to the glass surface. (UMS), turn off the system.
 When washing the under side of your vehicle  After washing the vehicle, drive the vehicle Refer to “FCM and UMS ON/OFF switch”
or wheel, be careful not to injure your hands. slowly while lightly depressing the brake on page 6-88.
 As your vehicle has rain sensor, place the pedal several times in order to dry out the
wiper switch lever in the “OFF” position to brakes.
During cold weather
deactivate the rain sensor before washing the Leaving the brakes wet could result in
vehicle. Otherwise, the wipers will operate reduced braking performance. Also, there is
in the presence of water spray on the wind- a possibility that they could freeze up or The salt and other chemicals spread on the
screen and may get damaged as a result. become inoperative due to rust, rendering the roads in some areas in winter can have a
 Refrain from excessively using a car wash as vehicle unable to move. harmful effect on the vehicle body. You
its brushes may scratch the paint surface,  Using an automatic car wash, pay attention should therefore wash the vehicle as often as
causing it to lose its gloss. to the following items, referring to the opera- possible in accordance with our care-instruc-
9 Scratches will be especially visible on darker tion manual or consulting a car wash operations. It is recommended to have a preserva-
coloured vehicles. tor. If the following procedure is not
tive applied and the underfloor protection
 Never spray or splash water on the electrical followed, it could result in damage to your
checked before and after the cold weather
components in the engine compartment. vehicle.
season.
Doing so could have an adverse effect on the • The outside rear-view mirrors are retracted.
engine startability.
After washing your vehicle, wipe off all
• As your vehicle is equipped with a roof
Exercise caution also when washing the rails, consult a car wash operator before waterdrops from the rubber parts around the
underbody; be careful not to spray water into using the car wash. doors to prevent the doors from freezing.
the engine compartment. • The wiper arms are secured in place with
 Some types of hot water washing equipment tape. Waxing
apply high pressure and heat to the vehicle. • If your vehicle is equipped with a roof E00901001945
They may cause heat distortion and damage spoiler, consult a car wash operator before
to the vehicle resin parts and may result in using the car wash. Waxing the vehicle will help prevent the
flooding of the vehicle interior. Therefore; • As your vehicle has rain sensor, place the adherence of dust and road chemicals to the
• Maintain a distance of approx. 70 cm or wiper switch lever in the “OFF” position to paintwork. Apply a wax solution after wash-
more between the vehicle body and the deactivate the rain sensor. ing the vehicle, or at least once every three
washing nozzle. months to assist displacing of water.
9-4 Vehicle care

Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. 3. Dry the vehicle thoroughly using a cham-
You should wax after the surfaces have
CAUTION ois leather or a soft cloth.
 Do not use a scrubbing brush or other hard
cooled.
tools as they may damage the plastic part
For information on how to use wax refer to
the instruction manual of the wax.
surface. CAUTION
 Do not bring the plastic parts into contact  Do not use a brush or other hard implement
with petrol, light oil, brake fluids, engine on the wheels.
CAUTION oils, greases, paint thinners, and sulphuric Doing so could scratch the wheels.
 Waxes containing high abrasive compounds acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack,  Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra-
should not be used. stain or discolour the plastic parts. sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing
If they touch the plastic parts, wipe them off so could cause the coating on the wheels to
with soft cloth, chamois or the like and an peel or become discoloured or stained.
aqueous solution of neutral detergent then  Do not directly apply hot water using a steam
Polishing immediately rinse the affected parts with cleaner or by any other means.
E00901101207 water.  Contact with seawater and road deicer can
The vehicle should only be polished if the cause corrosion. Rinse off such substances as
paintwork has become stained or lost its lus- soon as possible. 9
tre. Do not polish parts with a mat coating Chrome parts
and the plastic bumpers. Doing so could E00901401239
cause stains or damage the finish. In order to prevent spots and corrosion of Window glass
chrome parts, wash with water, dry thor- E00901601387
Cleaning plastic parts oughly, and apply a special protective coat- The window glass can normally be cleaned
E00901301951 ing. This should be done more frequently in using only a sponge and water.
winter. Glass cleaner can be used to remove oil,
Use a sponge or chamois leather.
If a car wax adheres on a grey or black rough grease, insect carcasses, etc. After washing
surface of the bumper, moulding or lamps, Aluminium wheels the glass, wipe it dry with a clean, dry, soft
the surface becomes white. In such a case, E00901501689
cloth. Never use a cloth that is used for clean-
wipe it off using lukewarm water and soft 1. Remove dirt using a sponge while sprin- ing a painted surface to clean a window. Wax
cloth or chamois leather. kling water on the vehicle. from the painted surface could get on the
2. Use neutral detergent on any dirt that can- glass and lower glass transparency and visi-
not be removed easily with water. bility.
Rinse off the neutral detergent after wash-
ing the vehicle.
Vehicle care 9-5

acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack,
NOTE stain or discolour them.
 To clean the inside of the rear window,
If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth,
always use a soft cloth and wipe the window
chamois or the like and an aqueous solution
glass along the demister heater element and
the glass antenna (if so equipped) so as not to of neutral detergent then immediately rinse
cause damage. the affected parts with plenty of water.
Wiper blades
E00901701173
Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove

grease, insect carcasses, etc., from the wiper
blades. Replace the wiper blades when they
no longer wipe properly. (Refer to page
9 10-14.)
Engine compartment
E00902100324
Clean the engine compartment at the begin-

ning and end of winter. Pay particular atten-
tion to flanges, crevices and peripheral parts
where dust containing road chemicals and
other corrosive materials might collect.
If salt and other chemicals are used on the
roads in your area, clean the engine compart-
ment at least every three months.
Never spray or splash water on the electrical
components in the engine compartment, as
this may cause damage.
Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic
parts and so on into contact with sulphuric
9-6 Vehicle care

Maintenance
Service precautions ........................................................................10-2

Catalytic converter .........................................................................10-3
Bonnet ............................................................................................10-3
Engine oil .......................................................................................10-5
Engine coolant ...............................................................................10-6
Washer fluid ...................................................................................10-7
Brake fluid .....................................................................................10-7
Power steering fluid .......................................................................10-8
Battery ............................................................................................10-8
Tyres ............................................................................................10-10
Wiper blade rubber replacement ..................................................10-14
General maintenance ...................................................................10-15 10
Fusible links .................................................................................10-16
Fuses ............................................................................................10-16
Replacement of lamp bulbs .........................................................10-20
Service precautions
Service precautions WARNING

E01000102931  After performing the maintenance work,
make sure that no tools or cloths are left
Adequate care of your vehicle at regular
behind in the engine compartment.
intervals serves to preserve the value and If they are left behind, a fire or damage to
appearance as long as possible. the vehicle may occur.
Some maintenance items can be carried out  The fan may turn on automatically even if
by the owner (do it yourself), while others the engine is not running. Turn the opera-
should be carried out by an authorised tion mode in OFF to be safe while you
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer (periodic work in the engine compartment.
inspection and maintenance). In the event a  Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open
malfunction or a problem is discovered, have flames around fuel or battery. The fumes
it corrected by an authorised MITSUBISHI are flammable.
MOTORS dealer. This section contains infor-  Be extremely cautious when working
mation on inspection maintenance procedures around the battery. It contains poisonous
that you can do yourself. Follow the instruc- and corrosive sulphuric acid.
 Do not get under your vehicle with just the
10 tions and cautions for each of the various pro-
body jack supporting it. Always use auto-
cedures.
motive jack stands.
 Improper handling of components and
WARNING materials used in the vehicle can endanger
 When checking or servicing the inside of your personal safety. Consult an author-
the engine compartment, make sure the ised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer for
engine is switched off and has had a necessary information.
chance to cool down.
 If it is necessary to do work in the engine
compartment with the engine running, be
especially careful that your clothing, hair,
etc., does not become caught by the fan,
drive belts, or other moving parts.
10-2 Maintenance
Catalytic converter
Check items of engine compartment are located as shown in the figure below.
10
1. Engine coolant reservoir The catalytic converter is installed in the
exhaust system.
NOTE
2. Brake fluid reservoir  Use fuel of the type recommended in “Fuel
3. Engine oil cap It is important to keep the engine properly
selection” on page 2-2.
4. Engine oil level gauge tuned to ensure proper catalyst operation and
5. Power steering fluid reservoir prevent possible catalyst damage.
6. Washer fluid reservoir
7. Battery WARNING Bonnet
E01000304780
 As with any vehicle, do not park or oper-
ate this vehicle in areas where combustible
Catalytic converter materials such as dry grass or leaves can To open
come in contact with a hot exhaust since a
E01000202538
fire could occur. 1. Pull the release lever towards you to
The exhaust gas scavenging devices used unlock the bonnet.
with the catalytic converter are extremely
efficient for the reduction of noxious gases.
Maintenance 10-3
Bonnet
3. Support the bonnet by inserting the sup-
port bar in its slot.
2. Raise the bonnet while pressing the safety 2. Slowly lower the bonnet to a position
lock. about 20 cm above the closed position,
then let it drop.
CAUTION 3. Make sure the bonnet is securely locked
 Note that the support bar may disengage the
by softly lifting the centre of the bonnet.
10 bonnet if the open bonnet is lifted by a strong
wind.
 After inserting the support bar into the slot,
CAUTION
make sure the bar supports the bonnet  Be careful that hands or fingers are not
securely from falling down on to your head trapped when closing the bonnet.
or body.  Before driving, make sure that the bonnet is
securely locked. An incompletely locked
bonnet can suddenly open while driving.
This can be extremely dangerous.
To close
NOTE 1. Unlatch the support bar and clip it in its
 Only open the bonnet when the wipers are in holder.
NOTE
the parked position. Failure to do so may  If this does not close the bonnet, release it
cause damage to the bonnet, wiper arms or from a slightly higher position.
front windscreen.  Do not press down the bonnet hard with a
hand as it may damage the bonnet.
10-4 Maintenance
Engine oil
3. Wait a few minutes.
Engine oil 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a
Selection of engine oil
E01000404925
clean cloth.
5. Reinsert the dipstick as far as it goes.
To check and refill engine oil 6. Remove the dipstick and read the oil
level, which should always be within the
A: Minimum level range indicated
B: Maximum level 7. If the oil level is below the specified limit,
remove the cap located on the cylinder
head cover and add enough oil to raise the
level to within the specified range. Do not
overfill to avoid engine damage. Be sure
to use the specified engine oil and do not
mix various types of oil.
 Select engine oil of the proper SAE vis-
8. After adding oil, close the cap securely.
cosity number according to the atmos-
9. Confirm the oil level by repeating step 4
pheric temperature.
to 6.
 Use engine oil conforming to the follow- 10
ing classification:
NOTE • ACEA classification:
 The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the “For service A1/B1, A3/B3, A3/B4 or
The engine oil used has a significant effect on vehicle is subjected to severe conditions, A5/B5”
the engine’s performance, service life and requiring earlier oil replacement. • API classification:
startability. Be sure to use oil of the recom- Please refer to the maintenance schedule. “For service CD” or higher
mended quality and appropriate viscosity.  For handling of used engine oils, refer to
page 2-5.
All engines consume a certain amount of oil
NOTE
during normal operation. Therefore, it is
 Use of additives is not recommended since
important to check the oil level at regular they may reduce the effectiveness of addi-
intervals or before starting a long trip. tives already included in the engine oil. It
may result in failure of the mechanical
assembly.
1. Park the car on a horizontal surface.
2. Switch off the engine.
Maintenance 10-5
Engine coolant
the system checked at an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Coolant
Engine coolant MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer as soon as has excellent protection against corrosion and
E01000503684
possible. rust formation of all metals including alumin-
If the level should drop below the “L” (LOW) ium and can avoid blockages in the radiator,
To check the coolant level level on the reserve tank, open the lid and add heater, cylinder head, engine block, etc.
coolant. Because of the necessity of this anti-corrosion
A translucent coolant reserve tank (A) is Also, if the reserve tank is completely empty, agent, the coolant must not be replaced with
located in the engine compartment. remove the radiator cap (B) and add coolant plain water even in summer. The required
The coolant level in this tank should be kept until the level reaches the filler neck. concentration of anti-freeze differs depending
between the “L” (LOW) and “F” (FULL) on the expected ambient temperature.
marks when measured while the engine is WARNING
cold.  Do not open the radiator cap (B) while the
Ambient tem-
engine is hot. The coolant system is under perature
-15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -50
pressure and any hot coolant escaping (minimum)
could cause severe burns. °C
Anti-freeze
10 concentration 50 60
Anti-freeze %
The engine coolant contains an ethylene gly-

col anti-corrosion agent. Some parts of the CAUTION
engine are cast aluminium alloy, and periodic  Do not use alcohol or methanol anti-freeze or
changing of the engine coolant is necessary to any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or
prevent corrosion of these parts. methanol anti-freeze. The use of an improper
anti-freeze can cause corrosion of the alu-
minium components.
To add coolant Use “MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE
 Do not use water to adjust the concentration
SUPER LONG LIFE COOLANT PRE-
of coolant.
MIUM” or equivalent*.
The cooling system is a closed system and  Concentrations exceeding 60 % will result in
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol
normally the loss of coolant should be very a reduction of both the anti-freeze and cool-
based non-silicate, non-amine, non- ing performance thus adversely affecting the
slight. A noticeable drop in the coolant level nitrate and non-borate coolant with long engine.
could indicate leakage. If this occurs, have life hybrid organic acid technology
10-6 Maintenance
Washer fluid
CAUTION Brake fluid

 Do not top up with water only. E01000902317
Water by itself reduces the rust-protective
and anti-freeze qualities of the coolant and
has a lower boiling point. It can also cause
To check the fluid level
damage to the cooling system if it should
freeze. Do not use tapwater, as it can cause
corrosion and rust formation.
 During cold weather
If the temperatures in your area drop below

NOTE
freezing, there is the danger that the coolant
 The washer fluid container serves the wind-
in the engine or radiator could freeze and screen, rear window and headlamps (if so
cause severe damage to the engine and/or equipped).
radiator. Add a sufficient amount of anti-
freeze to the coolant to prevent it from freez- 10
ing. The brake fluid level must be between the
During cold weather “MAX” and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.
The concentration should be checked before
the start of cold weather and anti-freeze The brake fluid level is monitored by a float.
added to the system if necessary. To ensure proper operation of the washers at When the brake fluid level falls below the
low temperatures, use a fluid containing an “MIN” mark, the brake fluid warning lamp
anti-freezing agent. lights up.
Washer fluid The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the
E01000702197 brake pads, but this does not indicate any
Open the washer fluid reservoir cap and abnormality.
check the level of washer fluid. If the brake fluid level falls markedly in a
If the level is low, replenish the container short length of time, it indicates leaks from
with washer fluid. the brake system.
If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an
Maintenance 10-7
Power steering fluid
Fluid type Power steering fluid Battery

E01001102433 E01001203688
Use brake fluid conforming to DOT3 or The condition of the battery is very important
DOT4 from a sealed container. The brake for quick starting of the engine and proper
fluid is hygroscopic. Too much moisture in functioning of the vehicle’s electrical system.
the brake fluid will adversely affect the brake Regular inspection and care are especially
system, reducing the brake performance. important in cold weather.
WARNING Battery precautions

 Take care in handling brake fluid as it is
harmful to the eyes, may irritate your skin
and will damage to painted surfaces. Wipe WARNING
up spills immediately. If brake fluid gets  Note operating instructions
on your hands or in your eyes, flush imme-
diately with clean water. Follow up with a
doctor as necessary. To check the fluid level
10
When you handle the battery, carefully
Check the fluid level in the reservoir while observe the following cautions for safety.
CAUTION the engine is idling.  No smoking, no naked flames, no sparks
 Use only the specified brake fluid. Check to make certain that the power steering
Do not mix or add different brand of brake fluid level is always between the “MAX” and
fluid to prevent chemical reaction. “MIN” level markings on the fluid reservoir
Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch, and top up the fluid, if necessary. Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
mix with, or get into the brake fluid. from the battery because the battery could
This will damage the seals. explode. Also, do not short-circuit the bat-
 Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to prevent Fluid type tery terminals. Doing so could create
the brake fluid from deteriorating except sparks.
maintenance. Use “MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE
 Clean the filler cap before removing and PSF (Power Steering Fluid)”.
close the cap securely after maintenance.
10-8 Maintenance
Battery
Check the electrolyte level at least once every
WARNING WARNING four weeks, depending on the operating con-
 Shield eyes  Keep away from children
ditions.
If the battery is not used, it will discharge by
itself with time. Check it once every four
Always wear protective eye goggles when Keep it out of reach of children. weeks and charge with low current as neces-
working near the battery. Battery electro- sary.
lyte contains sulphuric acid, so getting it
in your eyes is dangerous. Checking battery electrolyte
level During cold weather
 Battery acid
The capacity of the battery is reduced at low

temperatures. This is an inevitable result of
Battery electrolyte contains sulphuric its chemical and physical properties. This is
acid, so you must wear gloves and eye pro- why a very cold battery, particularly one that
tection when handling the battery. is not fully charged, will only deliver a frac-
If battery electrolyte gets in your eyes or tion of the starter current which is normally
on your skin, rinse it away with clean
available.
10
water and immediately see a doctor.
It is recommended that you have the battery
If you accidentally swallow battery elec-
trolyte, immediately see a doctor. checked by an authorised MITSUBISHI
If battery electrolyte splashes on your MOTORS dealer before the start of cold
clothing or on the vehicle, rinse it off with weather and, if necessary, have it charged.
lots of water. The electrolyte level must be between the This does not only ensure reliable starting,
 Explosive gas specified limit on the outside of the battery. but a battery which is kept fully charged also
Replenish with distilled water as necessary. has a longer life.
The inside of the battery is divided into sev-
The battery emits highly explosive hydro-
eral compartments; remove the cap from each Disconnection and connection
gen gas. Ventilate when charging the bat- compartment and fill to the upper mark. Do
tery in an enclosed space. not top up beyond the upper mark because
To disconnect the battery cable, stop the
spillage during driving could cause damage.
engine, first disconnect the negative (−) ter-
minal and then the positive (+) terminal.
When connecting the battery, first connect the
Maintenance 10-9
Tyres
positive (+) terminal and then the negative
(−) terminal.
WARNING NOTE
 Ventilate when charging or using the bat-  Check to see if the battery is securely
tery in an enclosed space. installed and cannot be moved during travel.
NOTE Also check each terminal for tightness.
 Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-  When the vehicle is to be left unused for a
necting or connecting the positive (+) termi- CAUTION long period of time, remove the battery and
nal of the battery.  Keep it out of reach of children. store it in a place where the battery fluid will
 Loosen the nut (B), and then disconnect the  Never disconnect the battery with the opera- not freeze. The battery should be stored only
battery cable from the positive (+) terminal. tion mode in the “ON”; doing so could dam- in a fully charged condition.
age the vehicle’s electrical components.
 Never short-circuit the battery; doing so Tyres
could cause it to overheat and be damaged.
E01001300242
 If the battery is to be quick-charged, first dis-
connect the battery cables. WARNING
 In order to prevent a short circuit, be sure to
 Driving with tyres that are worn, damaged
disconnect the negative (−) terminal first.
or improperly inflated can lead to a loss of
10  Always wear protective eye goggles when control or blow out of the tyres which can
working near the battery. result in a collision with serious or fatal
 Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic injury.
parts and so on into contact with sulphuric
WARNING acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack,
 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away stain or discolour them.
from the battery because the battery could If they are in contact, wipe off with soft
explode. cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous
 The battery electrolyte is extremely caus- solution of neutral detergent then immedi-
tic. Do not allow it to come in contact with ately rinse the affected parts with plenty of
your eyes, skin, clothing, or the painted water.
surfaces of the vehicle. Spilt electrolyte
should be flushed immediately with ample
amounts of water.
Irritation to eyes or skin from contact
NOTE
with electrolyte requires immediate medi-  Keep the terminals clean. After the battery is
cal attention. connected, apply terminal protection grease.
To clean the terminals, use lukewarm water.
10-10 Maintenance
Tyres
Tyre inflation pressures

E01001404762
Up to 5 passengers Up to max. load or trailer towing

Tyre size
Front Rear Front Rear
2.0 bar 2.2 bar 2.0 bar 2.5 bar
265/60R18 110H (200 kPa) (220 kPa) (200 kPa) (250 kPa)
{29 psi} {32 psi} {29 psi} {36 psi}
Check the tyre inflation pressure of all the hydroplaning. The tread depth of the tyres
tyres while they are cold; if insufficient or
Wheel condition must exceed 1.6 mm in order for the tyres to
E01001802007
excessive, adjust to the specified value. meet the minimum requirement for use.
After the tyre inflation pressure has been Tread wear indicators will appear on the sur-
adjusted, check the tyres for damage and air face of the tyre as the tyre wears, thereby
leaks. Be sure to put caps on the valves. indicating that the tyre no longer meets the
minimum requirement for use. When these
wear indicators appear, the tyres must be
10
NOTE
 The tyres that can be installed on your vehi-
replaced with new ones.
cle are shown on the driver’s door label. For In the case of the 4-wheel drive vehicles,
details, contact an authorised MITSUBISHI when replacement of any of the tyres is nec-
MOTORS dealer. essary, replace all of them.
1- Location of the tread wear indicator

2- Tread wear indicator
Check the tyres for cuts, cracks and other

damage. Replace the tyres if there are deep
cuts or cracks. Also check each tyre for
pieces of metal or pebbles.
The use of worn tyres can be very dangerous
because of the greater chance of skidding or
Maintenance 10-11
Tyres
CAUTION Tyre rotation Spare tyre used

 Always use tyres of the same size, same E01001902675
type, and same brand, and which have no Tyre wear varies with vehicle conditions,
wear differences. Using tyres of different
road surface conditions and individual
size, type, brands or degree of wear, will Front
driver’s driving habits. To equalize the wear
increase the differential oil temperature,
resulting in possible damage to the driving and help extend tyre life, it is recommended
system. Further, the drive train will be sub- to rotate the tyres immediately after discovery Spare tyre not used
jected to excessive loading, possibly leading of abnormal wear, or whenever the wear dif-
to oil leakage, component seizure, or other ference between the front and rear tyres is
serious faults. recognizable. Front
When rotating tyres, check for uneven wear
and damage. Abnormal wear is usually
Replacing tyres and wheels caused by incorrect tyre pressure, improper Tyres that have arrows showing rotation direc-
E01007201556 wheel alignment, out of balance wheel, or tion
severe braking. Consult your authorised
10 CAUTION MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer to determine
 Avoid using different size tyres from the one the cause of irregular tread wear. Front
listed and the combined use of different
types of tyres, as this can affect driving
safety.
Refer to “Tyres and wheels” on page 11-5.
 Even if a wheel has the same rim size and
offset as the specified type of wheel, its
shape may prevent it from being fitted cor-
rectly. Consult an authorised MITSUBISHI
MOTORS dealer before using wheels that
you have.
10-12 Maintenance
Tyres
On 4WD vehicles in which the driving power
CAUTION Snow tyres is distributed preferentially to the rear wheels,
 If the tyres have arrows (A) indicating the E01002000549
ensure that the tyre chains are fitted on the
correct direction of rotation, swap the front The use of snow tyres is recommended for rear.
and rear tyres on the left hand side of the
driving on snow and ice. To preserve driving The tyres fitted to your vehicle as original
vehicle and the front and rear tyres on the
stability, mount snow tyres of the same size equipment allow you to fit tyre chains if they
right hand side of the vehicle separately.
Keep each tyre on its original side of the and tread pattern on all four wheels. are required. When replacing your tyres,
vehicle. When fitting the tyres, make sure Snow tyres worn more than 50 % are no check with the tyre distributor or manufac-
the arrows point in the direction in which the longer suitable for use as snow tyres. turer if the fitting of tyre chains will be detri-
wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for- Snow tyres which do not meet specifications mental to the tyres being purchased.
ward. Any tyre whose arrow points in the must not be used. Always follow the chain manufacturer’s
wrong direction will not perform to its full instructions when fitting the chains.
potential.
CAUTION
 Observe permissible maximum speed for CAUTION
your snow tyres and the legal speed limit.  Choose a clear straight stretch of road where
Front you can pull off and still be seen while you
are fitting the chains. 10
NOTE  Do not fit chains before you need them. This
 The laws and regulations concerning snow will wear out your tyres and the road surface.
tyres (driving speed, required use, type, etc.)  After driving around 100-300 metres, stop
vary. Find out and follow the laws and regu- and retighten the chains.
lations in the area you intend to drive.  Care should be taken with extremes of steer-
 If flange nuts are used on your vehicle, ing lock to prevent possible contact between
change to tapered nuts when steel wheels are the chains and the vehicle body.
used.  Drive carefully and do not exceed 30 km/h.
Remember, fitting chains is not going to stop
CAUTION accidents from happening.
 Avoid the combined use of different types of Tyre chains  When tyre chains are installed, take care that
tyres. E01002103118
they do not damage the disc wheel or body.
Using different types of tyres can affect vehi-
cle performance and safety. It is recommended that snow chains are car-
ried in snow regions and fitted when required
to the rear wheels.
Maintenance 10-13
Wiper blade rubber replacement
CAUTION
 An aluminium wheel can be damaged by a
tyre chain while driving. When fitting a tyre
chain on an aluminium wheel, take care that
any part of the chain and fitting cannot be
brought into contact with the wheel.
 When installing or removing a tyre chain,
take care that hands and other parts of your
body are not injured by the sharp edges of
the vehicle body.
 Install the chains only on the rear tyres and
tighten them as tightly as possible with the
ends securely fastened. NOTE
 Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the
windscreen. This could damage the glass.
Wiper blade rubber replace- 4. Insert the wiper blade into the arm, start-
10 ment 3. Attach the retainers (C) to a new wiper ing with the opposite end of the blade
from the stopper. Make sure the hook (B)
E01008201410 blade.
Refer to the illustration to ensure that the is fitted correctly in the grooves in the
Windscreen wiper blades retainers are correctly aligned as you blade.
attach them.
1. Lift the wiper arm off the windscreen. NOTE
2. Pull the wiper blade until its stopper (A)  If retainers are not supplied with the new
disengages from the hook (B). Pull the wiper blade, use the retainers from the old
wiper blade further to remove it. blade.
5. Push the wiper blade until the hook (B)

engages securely with the stopper (A).
10-14 Maintenance
General maintenance
NOTE General maintenance

 Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the E01002701602
windows glass; it could damage the glass.
Fuel, engine coolant, oil and
4. Firmly insert the retainer (C) into the
exhaust gas leakage
groove (D) in the wiper blade.
Refer to the illustration to ensure that the
retainers are correctly aligned as you Look under the body of your vehicle to check
insert them into the groove. for fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust gas
leaks.
WARNING
Rear window wiper blades  If you see a suspicious fuel leak or if you
smell fuel, do not operate the vehicle; call
1. Lift the wiper arm off the window glass. your authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS
2. Pull the wiper blade downward to disen- dealer for assistance.
gage it from the stopper (A) at the end of 10
the wiper arm. Pull the wiper blade fur-
ther to remove it. Exterior and interior lamp
3. Slide a new wiper blade through the hook
(B) on the wiper arm.
operation
Operate the combination lamp switch to

check that all lamps are functioning properly.
If the lamps do not illuminate, the probable
NOTE cause is a blown fuse or defective lamp bulb.
 If a retainer is not supplied with the new Check the fuses first. If there is no blown
wiper blade, use the retainer from the old fuses, check the lamp bulbs.
blade. For information regarding the inspection and
replacement of the fuses and the lamp bulbs,
refer to “Fuses” on page 10-16 and “Replace-
ment of lamp bulbs” on page 10-20.
Maintenance 10-15
Fusible links
If the fuses and bulbs are all OK, take the
vehicle to an authorised MITSUBISHI
WARNING
 Fusible links must not be replaced by any
MOTORS dealer for inspection and repair.
other device. Failing to fit the correct fusi-
ble link may result in fire in the vehicle,
Meter, gauge and indica- property destruction and serious or fatal
injuries at any time.
tor/warning lamps operation
Run the engine to check the operation of all

meters, gauges, and indicator/warning lamps.
Fuses
E01003001211
If there is anything wrong, take the vehicle to
an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS 1. Open the glove box.
dealer for inspection. Fuse block location 2. Move the rod (A) on the right side of the
E01007601710
glove box to the right side of the box.
Hinges and latches lubrication To prevent damage to the electrical system
due to short-circuiting or overloading, each
10 Check all latches and hinges, and, if neces-
individual circuit is provided with a fuse.
There are fuse blocks in the passenger com-
sary, have them lubricated. partment and in the engine compartment.
Fusible links Passenger compartment

E01002901675
The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if The fuse block in the passenger compartment
a large current attempts to flow through cer- is located behind the glove box at the position
tain electrical systems. shown in the illustration.
In case of a melted fusible link, see your 3. While pressing the side of the glove box,
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer unhook the left and right hooks (B) and
for inspection and replacement. lower the glove box.
For the fusible links, please refer to “Passen-
ger compartment fuse location table” on page
10-17 and “Engine compartment fuse loca-
tion table” on page 10-18.
10-16 Maintenance
Fuses
Passenger compartment fuse loca-

tion table
E01007902404
1- Press the tab.

4. Remove the glove box fastener (C), and 2- Remove the cover.
then remove the glove box.
Fuse load capacity Sym- Capac-

No. Electrical system
E01007701809
bol ity 10
The fuse capacity and the name of the electri-
1 Tail lamp (left) 7.5 A
cal systems protected by the fuses are indi-
cated on the back of the glove box and on the Cigarette lighter/
2 15 A
inside of the fuse block cover for fuses Accessory socket
located in the engine compartment. 3 Ignition coil 10 A
4 Starter motor 7.5 A
NOTE
 Spare fuses are provided in the fuse block of 5 Sunroof 20 A
the engine compartment. Always use a fuse
Engine compartment of the same capacity for replacement. 6 Accessory socket 15 A
7 Tail lamp (right) 7.5 A
In the engine compartment, the fuse block is
located as shown in the illustration. Outside rear-view
8 7.5 A
mirrors
9 Engine control unit 7.5 A
Maintenance 10-17
Fuses
Sym- Capac-  Some fuses may not be installed on your
No. Electrical system Behind of the fuse block cover
bol ity vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
or specifications.
10 Control unit 7.5 A  The table above shows the main equip-
11 Rear fog lamp 10 A ment corresponding to each fuse.
12 Central door lock 15 A

Engine compartment fuse location
13 Room lamp 15 A table
14 Rear window wiper 15 A E01008002604
15 Gauge 10 A Engine compartment fuse location
16 Relay 7.5 A Electrical sys- Capac-

No. Symbol
tem ities
17 Heated seat 20 A
SBF1 Ignition switch 40 A*
18 Option 10 A
Electric win-
10 19 Heated door mirror 7.5 A
SBF2
dow control
30 A*
20 Windscreen wiper 20 A SBF3 Power seat 40 A*

21 Reversing lamps 7.5 A Anti-lock brak-
SBF4 30 A*
ing system
22 Demister 30 A
Electric parking
23 Heater 30 A SBF5 30 A*
brake
24 Power seat 40 A* SBF6 Electric tailgate 30 A
25 Radio 10 A Audio system
BF1 30 A
Electronic con- amp
26 20 A
trolled unit Rear air condi-
BF2 / tioning/Rear cir- 30 A
*: Fusible link culator
BF3 — — —
10-18 Maintenance
Fuses
Electrical sys- Capac- Electrical sys- Capac- Electrical sys- Capac-
No. Symbol No. Symbol No. Symbol
tem ities tem ities tem ities
DC- Headlamp high #2 — Spare fuse 30 A
BF4 30 A F15 10 A
DC(AUDIO) beam (right)
Headlamp low *: Fusible link
BF5 UREA SCR 30 A F16 15 A
beam (left)
F1 NOX sensor 10 A  Some fuses may not be installed on your
Headlamp low vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
F2 Engine 20 A F17 15 A
beam (right) or specifications.
Fuel pump/PM-  The table above shows the main equip-
F3 / 15 A F18 Steering heater 15 A
NOX sensor ment corresponding to each fuse.
Hazard warning
F4 IBS 7.5 A F19 15 A
flasher The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A,
F5 Starter 7.5 A F20 — — — 10 A or 15 A fuses. If one of these fuses
burns out, substitute with the following fuse.
Fuel line heater 20 A Radiator fan 7.5 A: Outside rear-view mirrors
F6 F21 20 A
ETV 15 A
motor 10 A: Option 10
Stop lamps 15 A: Cigarette lighter
F7 Air conditioning 20 A F22 15 A
(Brake lamps) When using a substitute fuse, replace with a
Automatic fuse of the correct capacity as soon as possi-
F8 20 A F23 T/F 20 A
transmission ble.
F24 Rear heated seat 20 A
Daytime run-
F9 10 A Headlamp Identification of fuse
ning lamps F25 20 A
washer E01008100366
F10 Alternator 7.5 A
F26 Security horn 20 A Capacity Colour
F11 Engine control 7.5 A
F27 Horn 10 A 7.5 A Brown
F12 Ignition coil 10 A
F28 — — — 10 A Red
F13 Front fog lamps 15 A 15 A Blue
F29 AC inverter 20 A
Headlamp high 20 A Yellow
F14 10 A #1 — Spare fuse 20 A
beam (left)
Maintenance 10-19
Replacement of lamp bulbs
Capacity Colour
Green (fuse type) / Pink (fusible
30 A
link type)
40 A Green (fusible link type)
Fuse replacement
E01007801998
1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off

the electrical circuit concerned and put the
operation mode in OFF. B- Fuse is OK
2. Remove the fuse puller (A) from the C- Blown fuse CAUTION
inside of the fuse block cover in the  If the newly inserted fuse blows again after a
engine compartment. short time, have the electrical system
NOTE checked by an authorised MITSUBISHI
 If any system does not function but the fuse MOTORS dealer to find the cause and rec-
10 corresponding to that system is normal, there tify it.
may be a fault in the system elsewhere. Have  Never use a fuse with a capacity larger than
your vehicle checked by an authorised that specified or any substitute, such as wire,
MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. foil, etc.; doing so will cause the circuit wir-
ing to heat up and could cause a fire.
4. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity by
using the fuse puller into the same place at
the fuse block. Replacement of lamp bulbs
E01003102134
3. Referring to the fuse load capacity table, Before replacing a bulb, ensure the lamp is
check the fuse pertaining to the problem. off. Do not touch the glass part of the new
bulb with your bare fingers; the skin oil left
on the glass will evaporate when the bulb gets
hot and the vapor will condense on the reflec-
tor and dim the surface.
10-20 Maintenance
CAUTION Bulb location and capacity NOTE

 Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after E01003201691  The following lamps uses LEDs rather than
being turned off. bulbs. For repair and replacement, contact an
When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool CAUTION authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
sufficiently before touching it. You could  When replacing a bulb, be sure to use a new • Headlamps
otherwise be burnt. bulb of the same type, wattage, and colour. • Side turn-signal lamps
 Do not install commercially available LED- If you install a different bulb, the bulb could • Position lamps
type bulbs. malfunction or fail to come on and could • Daytime running lamps
Commercially available LED-type bulbs lead to a vehicle fire.
• Active Cornering Lights (ACL)
could adversely affect the operation of the
• Front fog lamps
vehicle, such as by preventing the lamps and
other vehicle equipment from operating Outside
properly. Rear
E01003305805
Front
NOTE
 If you are unsure of how to carry out the
work as required, it is recommended that
10
these procedures be carried out by an author-
 Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body
when removing a lamp or lens.
 When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
becomes foggy. This is the same phenome- 1- Rear turn-signal lamps: 21 W
non as when window glass mists up on a (WY21W)
humid day, and does not indicate a functional 2- Tail lamps: -
problem. When the lamp is switched on, the 1- Headlamps, high/low beam: -
3- Stop lamps: -
heat will remove the fog. However, if water 2- Position lamps/Daytime running lamps
4- Reversing lamps: -
gathers inside the lamp, please go to an :-
5- Licence plate lamps: 5 W (W5W)
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer 3- Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W (PY21W)
for a check. 6- High-mounted stop lamp: -
4- Active Cornering Lights (ACL): -
5- Front fog lamps: -
6- Side turn-signal lamps: - Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.
Maintenance 10-21
NOTE NOTE
 The following lamps uses LEDs rather than  The following lamps uses LEDs rather than
bulbs. For repair and replacement, contact an bulbs. For repair and replacement, contact an
authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer. authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
• Tail lamps • LED interior illumination (Console box)
• Stop lamps
• High-mounted stop lamp
• Reversing lamps Front turn-signal lamps
E01003802681
1. To create enough work space, turn the

Inside steering wheel all the way in the direction
E01003403932 opposite to the side you wish to replace.
2. Remove the 3 bolts (A) and 1 clip (B),
and then pull back the splash shield (C).
D- Front turn-signal lamp
10 4. Turn the socket (D) anticlockwise to

remove it, and while holding down the tab
(E), pull out the bulb (F) from the socket.
1- Glove box lamp: 1.4 W

2- Vanity mirror lamps: 1.8 W
3- Front room & map lamps: 5 W *: Front of the vehicle
4- Rear personal lamps: 5 W
5- Door courtesy lamps: 3.4 W
3. Confirm the position of the bulb to be
6- Luggage compartment lamp: 8 W
replaced.
7- LED interior illumination (Console
box): -
5. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
10-22 Maintenance
NOTE
 When refitting the clip (B), first insert part
(G) of the clip into the hole and then press
part (H) into it.
3. Pull out the service lid (A) in the direction 5. Remove the socket and bulb assembly by
of the arrow and remove the insertion part turning it anticlockwise.
(C).
Rear combination lamps
1. Open the tail gate.
E01004203214
10
2. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-
driver with a cloth over its tip into the
notch (B) of the service lid (A) and pry
gently to remove the lid toward you as
shown in the illustration.
AHA118734
E- Rear turn-signal lamp

Remove the bulb by pulling it out.
4. Remove the screws (B), and then move
the lamp unit towards the rear of the vehi-
cle to unfix the notch (C) and pins (D) of 6. To install the bulb, perform the removal
the lamp unit. steps in reverse.
Maintenance 10-23
NOTE Left side Right side

 When installing the lamp unit, align the
notch (F) and pins (G) on the lamp unit with
the clip (H) and holes (I) in the body.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling out.

Licence plate lamps
7. Hook the insertion part (C) of the service E01004602468
lid (A) to the body side. 1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screw-
driver with a cloth over its tip into the
10 lamp assembly and pry gently to remove
it.
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.
NOTE
8. Push in the top of service lid (A) and  When installing the lamp, insert tab (A) first
secure it as shown. then align and insert tab (B).
2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly

together by turning it anticlockwise.
10-24 Maintenance
Left side Right side
10
Maintenance 10-25
Specifications
Vehicle labelling ............................................................................11-2

Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-3
Vehicle performance ......................................................................11-4
Engine specifications .....................................................................11-5
Electrical system ............................................................................11-5
Tyres and wheels ............................................................................11-5
Capacity .........................................................................................11-6
11
Vehicle labelling
Vehicle labelling
E01100105470
Vehicle Identification Number:

(VIN)
The vehicle identification number is stamped

as shown in the illustration.
11
Engine model/number
The engine model and number are stamped

on the engine cylinder block as shown in the
illustrations.
11-2 Specifications
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle dimensions
E01100205383
1 Front track 1,520 mm 11

2 Overall width 1,815 mm
3 Front overhang 900 mm
4 Wheel base 2,800 mm
5 Rear overhang 1,125 mm
6 Overall length 4,825 mm
7 Ground clearance (unladen) 218 mm
8 Overall height With roof rails 1,805 mm
9 (unladen) With shark fin antenna 1,835 mm
10 Rear track 1,515 mm
Specifications 11-3
Vehicle performance
Minimum turning radius
Body 6.0 m
Wheel 5.6 m
Vehicle performance
E01100304286
Maximum speed 180 km/h
11
11-4 Specifications
Engine specifications
Engine specifications
E01100604768
Engine models 4N15

No. of cylinders 4 in line
Total displacement 2,442 cc
Bore 86.0 mm
Stroke 105.1 mm
Camshaft Double overhead
Mixture preparation Electronic direct injection
Maximum output (EEC net) 133 kW/3,500 r/min
Maximum torque (EEC net) 430 N•m/2,500 r/min
Electrical system
E01100804669
Voltage 12 V
11
Battery Type (JIS) 95D31L(622CCA/159RC)
Alternator capacity 130 A
Tyres and wheels

E01100905410
Tyre 265/60R18 110H

Size 18x7 1/2J
Wheel
Offset (Inset) 38 mm
Specifications 11-5
Capacity
NOTE
 The tyres that can be installed on your vehicle are shown on the driver’s door label, refer to “Tyre inflation pressures” on page 10-11.
For details, contact an authorised MITSUBISHI MOTORS dealer.
Capacity
E01101307356
11
No. Item Quantity Lubricants

Engine coolant MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE SUPER LONG LIFE
1 7.7 litres
[Includes 0.65 litre in the reserve tank] COOLANT PREMIUM or equivalent*
2 Brake fluid As required Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Oil pan 7.0 litres
3 Engine oil Oil filter 0.3 litre Refer to page 10-5
Oil cooler 0.1 litre
11-6 Specifications
Capacity
MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE PSF
4 Power steering fluid As required
(Power Steering Fluid)
5 Washer fluid 3.5 litres —
6 A/T fluid 12.8 litres MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE ATF-MA1
CAUTION
 For the A/T fluid, use only the MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE ATF. Use of a different fluid could damage the transmission.

MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE NEW MULTI GEAR
7 Transfer oil 1.34 litres
OIL ECO API GL-4, SAE 75W-80
MITSUBISHI MOTORS GENUINE Super Hypoid Gear
2WD 2.1 litres
Oil ECOLOGY API GL-5 SAE 80
8 Differential oil Front 1.2 litres
Oil ECOLOGY API GL-5 SAE 80 11
4WD
Rear 2.1 litres
Oil ECOLOGY API GL-5 SAE 80
9 Refrigerant (Air conditioning) 770-810 g HFC-134a
*: Similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid
technology
Specifications 11-7
E09300104761
Information for station service

Capacity 68 litres
Fuel Cetane number (EN590)

Recommended fuel 51 or higher
Refer to the “General information” section for the fuel selection.
Engine oil Refer to the “Maintenance” section for the selection of engine oil.
Tyre inflation pressure Refer to the “Maintenance” section for the tyre inflation pressure.

20 Pajero Sport (Eng)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

20 Pajero Sport (Eng)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

20 Pajero Sport (Eng)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Foreword Throughout this owner’s manual the words WARNING and

E09200108175 CAUTION appear. These serve as reminders to be especially care-

MITSUBISHI MOTORS CORPORATION reserves the right to make

©2019 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation

1 Instruments and Controls (Driver’s area)

Combination headlamps and dipper switch P.5-79

Central door lock switch P.3-15

Key slot P.6-19

Electric window control

Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch P.6-61

1-1 Overview/Quick guide

Instruments and Controls 1

Off Road mode selector* P.6-34 220 V AC power outlet P.7-17

Overview/Quick guide 1-2

1-3 Overview/Quick guide

Tools P.8-6 Jack P.8-6

Luggage hooks P.7-26

Tyre repair kit P.8-7

Overview/Quick guide 1-4

Wiper and washers P.5-84, 10-14

Front-view camera* P.6-113

Headlamps, high/low beam

Position lamps Active Cornering Lights

1-5 Overview/Quick guide

High-mounted stop lamp P.10-21

Glass antenna* P.7-13 Tail lamps P.5-79, 10-21

Blind Spot Warning lamp*

Overview/Quick guide 1-6

The outside rear-view mirrors can be

Keyless operation system

When you are carrying the keyless operation

1-7 Overview/Quick guide

Refer to “keyless operation system” on

The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the

Refer to “Wiper and washer switch” on

Overview/Quick guide 1-8

1 2-Steering wheel height and reach 3-Combination headlamps 3-Turn-signal lever

OFF All lamps off 1- Turn-signals

Refer to “Combination headlamps and

1-9 Overview/Quick guide

L- Left outside mirror adjustment

Overview/Quick guide 1-10

1 7-Electric window control 8-Speed automatic transmission WARNING

This position locks the transmission to pre-

Lock switch “N” NEUTRAL

1-11 Overview/Quick guide

4-wheel drive operation*

Overview/Quick guide 1-12

Refer to “Multi information display” on

1- Off Road mode indicator display*

1-13 Overview/Quick guide

Overview/Quick guide 1-14

1-15 Overview/Quick guide

Overview/Quick guide 1-16

Overview/Quick guide 1-18

1-19 Overview/Quick guide

Overview/Quick guide 1-20

1-21 Overview/Quick guide

Overview/Quick guide 1-22